JP6744558B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a slot machine is known as one of the gaming machines (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-196069, A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a game machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solution means (shown in parentheses is the configuration of a corresponding embodiment).
The present invention (23rd Embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) provided with an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
Wherein a predetermined position of the front door, the predetermined lamp board predetermined light emitting means (LED641e~ 641 k) are mounted (e.g., the upper frame right side light circuit 611) has,
The mounting surface of the predetermined light emitting means on the predetermined lamp substrate is configured so that at least a part thereof is substantially white,
The predetermined lamp board is positioned at the predetermined position by a positioning boss (682a) provided at the predetermined position and a positioning hole (positioning hole 685a) provided in the predetermined lamp board, and Is fixed in the predetermined position by a fixing member (screw 683a) of
The positioning boss has a positioning boss protrusion (protrusion 687) that protrudes from the mounting surface of the predetermined lamp board when the predetermined lamp board is positioned at the predetermined position.
The predetermined fixing member is a fixing member that projects from the mounting surface of the predetermined lamp substrate when the predetermined lamp substrate is positioned at the predetermined position and is fixed at the predetermined position by the predetermined fixing member. Having a member protrusion (screw head 689),
The positioning boss protrusion has a convex dome shape at the tip,
The fixing member protruding portion has a curved surface shape, and is further plated with a substantially silver color ,
The height of the fixing member protruding portion is higher than the height of the predetermined light emitting means on the mounting surface of the predetermined lamp substrate .

According to the present invention, the performance as a game machine can be improved.

In the present embodiment, it is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine which is an example of a gaming machine. In the present embodiment, it is a front view illustrating a state in which medals inserted from a medal insertion slot pass through an insertion sensor. In the first embodiment (A), it is a diagram illustrating a voltage drop when a power failure occurs in a time chart. It is a figure explaining the relationship between an insertion sensor and passage of a medal in a 1st embodiment (B). In 1st Embodiment (B), it is a figure explaining ON/OFF of an injection|pouring sensor with a time chart. In the first embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram when a medal is ejected from the medal payout device. In the first embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram showing the state of ON (detection) / OFF (non-detection) of the payout sensor when the medal is sent from the medal payout device. In 1st Embodiment (C), it is a figure which shows ON/OFF of a payout sensor by a time chart. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a disassembled perspective view which shows the outline of a main control board and a board case. In 2nd Embodiment, (a) is a top view which shows the board case which accommodated the main control board. (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 1 of the trace of the gate. FIG. 6C is a sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 2 of the trace of the gate. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flow of processing when a wire break occurs between the main control board and the sub control board in the third embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is sectional drawing (schematic drawing) explaining movement of the stop button of a stop switch, (a) shows a no load state, (b) shows a detection sensor when it changes from OFF to ON. The state is shown, (c) shows the state where the stop button is pushed to the deepest part, and (d) shows the state when the push of the stop button is released and the detection sensor is turned from on to off. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the relationship of the movement of a stop button and the excitation state of a motor with a time chart, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. In the fifth embodiment, it is a diagram showing the relationship between the power on/off and the voltage level in a time chart, (a) shows the power cut after the main program is started, (b) is before the main program started. Indicates a power failure. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state before the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed axis and the movable axis, and (b) is a final ejected medal with the fixed axis and FIG. 7 is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disc has advanced from the state (a) before being brought into contact with the movable shaft. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state where the last ejected medal is in contact with a fixed axis and a movable axis, and (b) is a movable figure pushed by the last ejected medal. It is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the shaft has moved. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting portion, and (b) is a plan view after ejecting the last ejected medal, It is a plan view of the medal payout device showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disc is stopped. It is a time chart which shows the drive signal of a hopper motor in a 6th embodiment, the drive state of a hopper motor, and the relation of the discharge condition of the medal from a discharge part. It is a figure which shows operation|movement of the main control board|substrate in 6th Embodiment, the drive state of a hopper motor, the detection state of a payout sensor, and the medal discharge timing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the payout process in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the flow of the payout process in 6th Embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, it is a side sectional view of the slot machine in a state where the front door is closed, and is a view for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub control board. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment. ) Indicates Example 1, and (b) indicates Example 2. FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed in the seventh embodiment. ) Shows Example 3, and (d) shows Example 4. In the eighth embodiment, it is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the front lower portion (A in FIG. 22) of the housing of the slot machine in the state where the front door is closed, and is a view for explaining the gap between the cabinet and the front door. is there. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing types of special roles (features) and ending conditions, and (b) is a diagram showing types of gaming states and a prescribed number of each gaming state, (C) is a figure which shows the number table of an internal drawing and an advantageous section drawing in the setting 1. It is a figure which shows the production|generation determination table used for non-RT and RT (non-AT) common in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production|generation determination table used commonly in RB inside and BB inside in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a test pattern display of the management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display substrate, (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs, and (C) is a diagram showing set value display LEDs. Is. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b and the segments A to G and P. It is a figure which shows the output port in 11th Embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a relationship among an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal and a segment signal. Further, (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. It is a figure which shows the address of the data memorize|stored in RWM, a label name, a name, etc. It is a figure explaining the concept of a difference number counter value, (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a difference number counter value and an advantageous area, (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. It is a flow chart which shows program start processing (M_PRG_START) by a main control board. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 in FIG. 38. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 11th Embodiment. 41 is a flowchart showing the game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an advantageous zone transition lottery process in step S283 in FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an advantageous zone shift process in step S347 of FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an AT lottery process in step S355 of FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an AT initial game number determination process in step S363 in FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) due to winning in step S294 in FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41. It is a flowchart which shows the example 1 of the advantageous area counter management in step S416 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 2 of advantageous zone counter management in step S416 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an interruption process (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453 in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows sub difference number counter management processing in an 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sub difference number counter management process in 11th Embodiment, and is a flowchart following FIG. In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows an accessory condition device and an operation end condition, (B) shows a specified number for each RT, and (C) shows a winning number for each winning number. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view showing an outline of composition including a reel and a stop switch in a 13th embodiment. In the fourteenth embodiment (A), it is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In 14th Embodiment (A), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of push-order instruction information when a start switch is operated before the minimum game time passes. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in a 14th embodiment (B). In 14th Embodiment (B), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In 14th Embodiment (B), it is a time chart which shows the timing of a display start and a display end of push order instruction information when a start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (C). It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in 14th Embodiment (C). In 14th Embodiment (C), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In 14th Embodiment (C), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time has elapsed. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (D). In 14th Embodiment (D), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In 14th Embodiment (D), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time has elapsed. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in a 14th embodiment (E). In 14th Embodiment (E), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (E), it is a time chart showing the display start and display end timings of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time has elapsed. It is a front view which shows the outline of a structure including a reel, an operation instruction lamp, and a stop switch in a fourteenth embodiment (F). In the fourteenth embodiment (F), it is a time chart showing the display start timing and display end timing of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (F), it is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time has elapsed. In the fourteenth embodiment (G), it is a time chart showing the timing of starting and ending the display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the lapse of the minimum game time. In the fourteenth embodiment (G), it is a time chart showing the display start and display timing of the push-order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the minimum game time has elapsed. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the addition process of the medal in 15th Embodiment (A). It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the addition process of the medal in 15th Embodiment (B). It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the addition process of the medal in 15th Embodiment (C). It is the schematic diagram which looked at the medal selector, the chute passage 48, and the chute sensor 49 in 16th Embodiment from the front. It is a front view of the passage formation member in a 17th embodiment. It is a rear view of the passage formation member in a 17th embodiment. It is a left side view of the passage formation member in a 17th embodiment. FIG. 86 is a sectional view of the passage forming member according to the seventeenth embodiment taken along the line AA of FIG. 85. It is a figure which shows the main thing of the storage area of RWM demonstrated in 18th Embodiment. It is a time chart (example 1) which shows the output timing of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 in 18th Embodiment. It is a time chart (example 2) which shows the output timing of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart (example 1) which shows an external signal output process in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart (example 1) which shows an external signal output process in 18th Embodiment, and is a flowchart following FIG. It is a flowchart (example 2) which shows an external signal output process in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart (example 3) which shows an external signal output process in 18th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine in a nineteenth embodiment (A). In the 19th embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound and the lamp effect, and one game time described later. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of the pachinko game machine as viewed from the back side. It is a block diagram in a pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart explaining the flow of starting after turning on the power of the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. It is a flow chart showing a flow of one game in a pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as viewed from the front side. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board as viewed from the rear side. FIG. 6 is an external perspective view showing a state in which a main control board is accommodated in a board case. It is the front view which looked at the state where the main control board was stored in the board case from the front side. It is the front view which looked at the state where the main control board was stored in the board case from the back (back) side. It is a sectional view of the side showing the fitting state of the upper case and the lower case, (a) shows the temporary fitting state (before sliding movement), (b) shows the main fitting state (after sliding movement). .. It is the top view which looked at the side wall vicinity from the lower case side in the temporary fitting state. It is a top view showing the state where the harness was connected to the connector of the main control board. It is a front view which shows a harness and its connector terminal in detail. It is a perspective view which shows the example which hides the lead wire regarding a starting. FIG. 6 is a side cross-sectional view showing the positional relationship among the upper case of the substrate case, the cover, the setting key insertion opening, and the setting change (reset) switch. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in a 23rd embodiment. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to the twenty-third embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). In the twenty-third embodiment, it is a front view of the right base member in a state where upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover are removed. In the twenty-third embodiment, it is a perspective view of the right base member with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, as viewed from the right side. In the twenty-third embodiment, it is a rear view of the right base member in a state where the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover are removed. In 23rd Embodiment, it is a front upper enlarged view of the right base member in the state which removed the upper part of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover. In the twenty-third embodiment, it is an enlarged top perspective view of the right base member with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover removed, as viewed from the left side. In 23rd Embodiment, it is a left side upper surface enlarged view of the right base member in the state which removed the upper part of the upper frame lamp cover and the right frame lamp cover. In the twenty-third embodiment, it is an enlarged top bottom view of the right base member with the upper frame lamp cover removed. It is an AA line sectional enlarged view of FIG. 119. In the twenty-third embodiment, an upper frame lamp cover, an upper part of the right frame lamp cover, and a right frame lamp board are removed from the right base member in a front view, corresponding to FIG. In the 23rd embodiment, the upper frame lamp cover is removed, and the right frame lamp cover is attached to the rear surface of the right base member. In 23rd Embodiment, it is a cross-sectional enlarged view of the lens part of the right frame lamp cover. In the twenty-third embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 1 when the player is out of the pachinko gaming machine, and (b) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 2 when the player is out of the pachinko gaming machine. In the 23rd embodiment, it is a figure explaining substantially the same color using the chromaticity diagram by a CIE standard color system. In the 23rd embodiment, it is a figure explaining a similar color using the chromaticity diagram by a CIE standard color system. It is a figure which shows the modification of the AA cross section of FIG. 119, and is a figure corresponding to FIG. It is an external perspective view of a slot machine according to a modified example of the twenty-third embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). In a modified example of the twenty-third embodiment, (a) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 1 in a non-winning slot machine, and (b) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 2 in a non-winning slot machine. Is.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"Bet" means betting a medal (game medium) for playing a game. In order to bet medals, an actual medal is carefully inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet a credited (stored) medal.
On the other hand, “credit (also referred to as “store”)” means storing medals inside the slot machine 10 unlike “bet” described above. In this specification, the term "credit" is used to mean that "bet" is not included.
Furthermore, “inserting” means betting or crediting a medal.
Further, the "specified number" refers to the number of bets that can start (execute) a game in the game. For example, in a game in which the specified number is "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number "2" or "3" and the bet number "1" cannot be played.
For convenience of explanation, the “specified number” may be referred to as the “bet number”.
On the other hand, the term "bet number" may refer to a number other than the "specified number". For example, in the game of the prescribed number “2” or “3”, at the time when one medal is inserted (before the game starts), the bet number is “1” (the number bet at that time).

“Maintenance” means that the player inserts medals through the medal insertion opening 47 (described later).
The “care bet” means that the player bets a medal by taking care of the medal from the medal insertion slot 47.
The “care credit” means that the player credits a medal (adds credit) by taking care of the medal from the medal insertion slot 47.
“Bet medal” means a medal that has been bet.
The "stored medal" means a medal that has been credited (stored).

The “reserved bet” is a bet for playing a part or all of the credited medals within the range where the player can bet in the game by operating the bet switch 40 (described later). It means to do.
The "automatic bet" means that, when a replay is won, the number of medals previously bet in the game is automatically bet by the control processing of the slot machine 10.
Here, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that the winning combination is stopped on the activated line. The same applies hereinafter) is referred to as "small winning combination". On the other hand, in “Rules regarding authorization of game machines and type verification (hereinafter simply referred to as “rules”)”, when a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed, it is an operation of a condition device related to a replay. It is understood that it is not a "winning prize". However, in the present application (this specification and the like), the replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combination), and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is sometimes stopped and displayed as a “replay winning”.
"Payment" means paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to the player. In the present embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

“Paying out” means paying out medals to a player based on winning a winning combination, or paying out medals by the above settlement. When paying out medals to the player based on winning of the winning combination, they are stored as credits (addition of stored medals, in other words, updating electronic data stored in RWM 53 (described later)), and payout. Includes both paying out actual medals through the mouth (not shown). For the payout of medals, for example, "50" is set as a limit number of credits, and the medals for which the number of credits exceeds "50" are actually paid out to the player.
The “payout” may be referred to as “grant”. Therefore, the “payout number” may be referred to as the “granting number”.

The “gaming medium” is a medal in this embodiment, but in the case of an enclosed (ECO) gaming machine, electronic information (electronic medal, electronic data) is used as the gaming medium. The "electronic information" means, for example, when money (banknotes) is put into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played on a gaming machine. It is possible to credit the game machine as a game medium for performing the game.
The "game medium" may also be referred to as the "game value".

Further, in the case where the game medium is electronic information, “payout of medals” means to credit (add) to the game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "payout of medals" does not only mean that medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 (described later), but the game medium credit device is credited with electronic information of the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination. The process of adding) is also included.

"N-1" game item, "N" game item, "N+1" game item, ... ("N" is an integer greater than or equal to 2), when the game progresses, the current game is "N" game item. When it is an eye, the "N" game eye game is called a "current game". Further, the game of the "N-1" game is referred to as "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N+1" game is called the "next game".

In the present specification, a numerical value obtained by adding “(B)” to the end of the numeral (especially 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value with “(H)” added to the end of the numeral means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in binary and "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. In addition, a numerical value that means a decimal number is expressed as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear which is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the trailing symbols of “(B)”, “(D)”, and “(H)” may be omitted. ..

The “operation mode” of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing (the timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the activated line).
In addition, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 has a payout or a large number of payouts in a game in which a game result (a symbol combination that stops on an activated line) is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. An operation mode in which a symbol combination stops, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts to an advantageous RT (promotion) stops, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not shift (fall down) to an unfavorable RT stops. The "advantageous operation mode" is also called a correct operation mode and a correct pressing order.

The "game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" is, for example, a game (so-called "push order bell") that is won in any one of winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58 described later. Corresponding to the winning game). Although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game in which a plurality of types of replays are won (duplicate replay wins. A game in which a so-called “push order replay” is won), RT is changed depending on the type of replay won. This is also the case.

The “instruction function” means a function of instructing the player how to operate the stop switch 42. The instruction function is, in principle, a function of instructing the player about an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
It should be noted that visually indicating the contents of the “instruction” is “display”, and notifying the player of the contents of the instruction is “notification”. Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. Then, although the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 which is the most advantageous may be “the operation of the instruction function”, the notification of any operation mode including the operation mode of the stop switch 42 which is the most advantageous is “the operation of the instruction function”. It may be "actuated".
For example, when the pushing order bells shown in the winning numbers “3” to “8” in FIG. 58B described later are the six-choice pushing order, the payout at the time of pushing the pushing order bell is 10 in the example of FIG. 58 or It is assumed that the number is one, but instead of this, one, three, four, ten, or a dropout (non-winning prize) occurs depending on the pressing order.
Here, notifying the pressing order for winning the winning combination of 10 is a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to “operation of the instruction function”.
On the other hand, notifying the pressing order for winning the one-role combination, the three-role combination, or the four-role combination may be referred to as "advantageous operation mode notification (operation of the instruction function)", and "advantageous operation mode" It is not necessary to say "notification of".

The pushing order for winning the four-card combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because the pushing order is for not winning the ten-card combination. However, since the payout number is “4” with respect to the bet number “3”, and the difference number of the game is “+1”, this is an operation mode for increasing the difference number, which is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the pressing order for winning the three-card combination is the pressing order for not winning the ten-key combination, and thus is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, since the payout number is “3” with respect to the bet number “3”, and the difference number is currently maintained (the difference number is not reduced), the operation mode is not necessarily disadvantageous.

Further, similarly, since the pushing order for winning one winning combination is the pushing order for not winning ten winning combinations, this is not the most advantageous operation mode. Further, the payout number is "1" with respect to the bet number "3", which is an operation mode for reducing the difference number. However, since it can be said that it is an operation mode in which the role is not lost, it may not be said that it is an unfavorable operation mode.

In the present embodiment, in the operation of the instruction function when the push order bell is won, the operation mode (correct answer push order) in which the winning combination with the largest payout number is won is notified.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit value (“2400(D)”), but there is a margin in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (the advantageous section clear counter value described later). It is conceivable that, when the push order bell is won, for example, the push order for winning the three-or-four winning combination is awarded as described above, and control is performed so that the difference number counter value is maintained as it is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, it is assumed that the prescribed number of operating the indicating function is set to "3". In this case, in the game of the specified number “2” or “3” in AT, when the game is started with the bet number “3” and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be operated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the bet number “2”, the instruction function cannot operate even when the push order bell is won.

The "gaming section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section". Unit 5.9 had a "stand-by section" (a game section that won the advantageous section lottery but has not yet moved to the advantageous section), but at the moment, the rules for Unit 6 are "stand-by section", etc. Is not provided. However, not limited to this, a game section other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
The “normal section” is a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a push order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining the correct push order) described later on a peripheral board (for example, the sub control board 80). ) Is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted to, and that does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not execute the processing related to the instruction function). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of the winning combination, it is possible to make a decision (lottery, etc.) as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.

Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, the pressing order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function is not possible. Since the signal relating to (1) is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub control board 80.

On the other hand, the “advantageous section” is a game section having the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be operated), and specifically, when operating the instruction function, the instruction is given on the main control board 60. Only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified, it indicates a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub control board 80. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated), that is, a display in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub control board 80 cannot output an effect contrary to the content of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the signal relating to the received instruction function.

Further, the advantageous section may be a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, or the instruction function may not be activated.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction mode may be always activated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which the game result has an advantage/disadvantage. Therefore, the AT is always in the advantageous section and the AT is not executed in the non-advantageous section.

Further, the AT may always notify (at 100%) the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, but the payout rate in a predetermined period is It may be considered that the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not notified even in the game in which the operation result of the stop switch 42 brings an advantage/disadvantage to the game result, for example, in order to be within the range defined by the rule.
For example, in the case where the AT counter approaches the upper limit value during AT, but the AT game count still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is temporarily not notified from the viewpoint of extending the life of the AT. It is also possible to (do not activate the indicating function).

In addition, the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT can be variously set. For example, firstly, it is possible to set “advantageous section=AT”. In this case, winning the advantageous section is equivalent to winning the AT. Then, AT is started from the first game of the advantageous section. Further, the AT ends with the end of the advantageous section.

Secondly, it is possible to set “AT≠advantageous section”.
In this case, the start (execution) condition of the AT is not satisfied only by shifting to the advantageous section, and on the condition that the AT is in the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the AT is determined by lottery or the like, and the AT is When it is decided to execute the AT, the AT is executed until the predetermined termination condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when it is non-AT at the time of shifting to the advantageous section, for example, as the main game state, it is possible to set a normal section, a sign, CZ (chance zone (a period in which it is easy to win an AT)) or the like.

When transitioning to the precursor after the transition to the advantageous zone, the transition may always be made to the precursor, and to the AT after the predetermined number of games of the precursor have been completed. Alternatively, at the time of transition to the advantageous zone or after the transition to the advantageous zone, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether to make the present omen or the omen omen, and when the present omen is decided, the AT may be moved after the end of the present omen. .. Further, when the sign of gasse is determined, the advantageous section may be maintained after the end of the sign of gasse, or may shift to the normal section.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, when the AT ends but the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

In addition, it is possible to determine the number of games in the advantageous section when starting the advantageous section, and not perform lottery or the like regarding the advantageous section during the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section is started, the initial number of games of the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery, etc.) whether or not to add (add) the number of (remaining) games of the advantageous section. It can be mentioned.
Further, when a predetermined ending condition is set for the advantageous section and the predetermined ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, even if the game has the remaining number of games of the advantageous section (or the remaining number of games of AT), that time point Ending the advantageous section with.

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous section is that the difference number counter value described later exceeds "2400 (D)", or the advantageous section clear counter (the number of games in the advantageous section) described later is " 1500(D)” has been reached. When any of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the next game shifts to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, AT is ended at the same time as the end of the advantageous section.

In the advantageous section, an advantageous section display LED (also referred to as “section indicator”) 77 described later is turned on. The advantageous zone display LED 77 may be constantly turned on during the advantageous zone, but may be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after the transition to the advantageous zone.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" is, for example, when the instruction function is operated in a gaming state in which the advantageous section is provided and the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1". In addition, after the advantageous section display LED 77 is once turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

Further, the "section Sim (simulation) payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even when the winning combination of "PB≠1" is won, the symbol corresponding to the winning combination) It is assumed that the combination is stopped), and when there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (the higher bell that will be the maximum payout when the push order bell is won) It is the ball output rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. In the calculation of the section Sim payout rate, the payout (the number of payouts) due to the accessory operation (1BB operation or the like) is not included. In addition, when the bet number is “3” in the game won by the replay, the payout number is counted as “0”, and the bet number is calculated in the re-play based on the winning of the replay (the next game of the game won by the replay). It is calculated as “0”, the payout amount “x” (“x” is the payout amount in the game). Alternatively, the payout number of the game won in the replay and the bet number of the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1"" includes an RT and a main gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1".
Here, as the RT in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1", for example, an RT in which the replay winning probability is set to be high can be cited.
Assuming that a CZ (chance zone), an AT, a pullback section, etc. are usually provided as the main gaming state, AT is listed as the main gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1".

When ending the advantageous section, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous section, for example, during the game end check process described later or the game start set process in the next game of the last game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. To do. When the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the advantageous period display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process by executing the initialization process of the advantageous period display LED flag described later.

Examples of the “processing relating to the advantageous section” include the following processing.
1) Advantageous zone (shift) lottery 2) Updating of advantageous zone clear counter (subtraction, clear)
3) Update the difference counter (calculation, clear)
4) Update of advantageous zone type flag 5) Control of advantageous zone display LED 77 (update of advantageous zone display LED flag)

In addition, examples of the “processing related to the instruction function” include the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (a specification that terminates AT when the remaining number of games reaches "0"), the AT game number counter is updated (subtraction, addition, clear)
4) In the case of the differential number management type AT (specification in which AT is terminated when the remaining differential number becomes “0”), the AT differential number counter is updated (subtraction, addition addition, clear)

Then, according to the rules at the present time, both the process related to the advantageous section and the process related to the instruction function are determined to be executable in a prescribed number in one gaming state (RT) except for the following. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specified number “3” can execute the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function, and the specified number “2” cannot execute the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function. And
However, during the advantageous period, it is necessary to update the advantageous period clear counter and the difference counter regardless of the specified number.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning combination lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number “0” in FIG. 26 or FIG. 58 described later), in other words, in the game when the condition device is not operating, It is determined that the process related to the advantageous section (lottery for shifting to the advantageous section) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing relating to the advantageous section may be executed even if the winning combination lottery result is a non-winning result.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the winning combination lottery result is non-winning, if the non-winning probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low. For example, “1/17500” or more), the instruction function is involved. The process (AT lottery process) can be executed.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous section transition lottery (processing relating to the advantageous section), when the advantageous section transition lottery is won, it becomes the advantageous section from the next game. Therefore, the advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) cannot be executed, and the correct winning order notification (processing related to the instruction function) cannot be executed in the game in which the advantageous section is won.
However, it is possible to perform the advantageous section transition lottery (processing relating to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (processing relating to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section and the AT may be determined (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also referred to as “role ratio monitor” or “ratio display”) 74 is composed of four LEDs as shown in FIG. It is composed of an LED that indicates which of the items is a predetermined symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (an LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratio of the following 5 items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or commanded accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous character ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Role ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Percentage of consecutive role items (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role ratio (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, in the case of displaying the character ratio (total), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the character ratio (total) is displayed in the identification segment and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative" refers to the sum of the numerical values that have continued to be counted until then, and in the present embodiment, counting is performed until at least "175000" game times or more. When the cumulative total is less than "175000" game times, the ratio is displayed, for example, by blinking display, and when it is more than "175000" game times, the ratio is displayed, for example, by lighting display. The cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit value) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 even after the number of times of playing the “175000” or more.
In addition, "6000 games" is the number of times that one set is "400" game times and that 15 sets are totaled.

The “advantageous section ratio” refers to a ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all game sections (non-advantageous section+advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games in the advantageous section during that time is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
The "instruction-included accessory ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the total number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In a slot machine not equipped with accessory products, the "instructed accessory product ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The total number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated are counted by the instructed accessory counter.

Furthermore, "the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is operated" is based on the operation of the stop switch 42 in accordance with the pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function, for example, in FIG. When 10 bells of "3" to "8" are won, "10" is added to the instructed accessory counter.
On the other hand, in the game in which the instruction function is operated, since the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the displayed push order, when the one-bell in the example of FIG. "1" is added to.
Similarly, in the game in which the instruction function is operated, when the winning combination is lost because the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order (when the winning combination is not winning), the instruction-included accessory counter Is not added to. In other words, the count value of the previous game remains unchanged.

In the example of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when the common bell (winning number “3”) is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same manner as when the push order bell is won and the winning number display LED 78 is pressed. There are a case where the normal instruction information (dummy) is displayed and a case where the instruction function is not operated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts of the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total payout number is added to the counter. In this case, a case where the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order by image or voice is also included.

The "continuous accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts during the operation of the first-class special accessory (RB) to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it refers to “the number of payouts during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of payouts”.
For example, when the total payout number in the "6000" number of games is "2000", and the payout number when the "first-class special accessory (RB)" is activated is "500", a "continuous winning effect" The ratio (6000 games) is "25 (%)".

In addition, the "feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the accessory is operated to the total number of payouts. Here, the "feature" is also referred to as a second-class special accessory (CB) and MB (2BB) in addition to the first-class special accessory described above. Continuous operation.), SB (single bonus) are included.
In addition, in the above-mentioned 5 items, in a gaming machine that does not have a function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "---".
For example, when "RB (first type special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is "--". Is displayed.
As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays five types of ratios, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. To do.

In addition, the advantageous section ratio and the ratio of instructed accessory products are stipulated by rules to be 70% or less. In addition, it is stated that the character ratio should be 70% or less and the continuous character ratio should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it can be confirmed whether or not the information is within the legal range.

It should be noted that a gaming machine having a specification that the advantageous section ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7U" type, and a gaming machine having a specification that the instruction-included accessory ratio is 70% or less is referred to as a "7P" type. In a gaming machine having an advantageous section, it is either a "7U" type or a "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (total) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instructed accessory ratio (total) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of the advantageous section to all the game sections must be "70"% or less, but in the "7P" type, the total number of payouts paid out by the operation of the instruction function and the accessory operation. It may be 70% or less of the number of payouts, and for example, all or most of the game section may be an advantageous section.

For example, when shifting to a non-advantageous section, it is set to win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of 100%, and to set to win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set to win the advantageous section lottery with a high probability (for example, 70%).
The "7U" type cannot perform the processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery) by referring to the setting value itself, but the "7P" type performs the processing related to the instruction function by referring to the setting value itself. It is possible.
In a twelfth embodiment described later, most of the inside of the BB2 is in the advantageous section, and the lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the AT in this advantageous section.

The management information display LED 74 can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine as a performance display monitor.
The management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) in this case is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of the slot machine (turning type gaming machine). Then, a real-time (measurement) base value (“base value” indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls) for each “60000” out balls, and “60000”. The base values before, twice, and three times before each are sequentially displayed. For example, the real-time base value identification segment is displayed as “bL.”, the previous base value identification segment is displayed as “b1.”, and the second previous base value identification segment is “b2.”. Is displayed, and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as “b3.”.
As described above, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to the slot machine of the gaming machine but also to the pachinko gaming machine.

An embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10 which is an example of a gaming machine in the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (which does not mean to include only those shown in FIG. 1). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progression including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit for inputting signals such as operation switches, and the output port 52 is a connection unit for transmitting signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, a peripheral device for input is indicated by an arrow indicating a signal from the peripheral device toward the main control board 50, and a peripheral device for output is indicated by an arrow directed from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (similar to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game and the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC having an arithmetic function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs an arithmetic operation, and specifically, a lottery for the winning combination and the reel 31. Drive control and payout at the time of winning.

An MPU including a RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted on the main control board 50. It should be noted that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to the one installed inside the MPU.
An MPU including the RWM 83, the ROM 84, and the sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80 described below. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside the MPU, instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are sent inside the medal selector.
The movement of medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 within the medal selector will be described later with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a loading sensor 44 (a pair of loading sensors 44a and 44b) are provided in the medal selector (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals thrown in from the medal slot 47 are first detected by the passage sensor 46.

Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for allowing/disallowing the insertion of medals. When the insertion of medals is not allowed, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion opening 47 from the payout opening. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion opening 47 to the hopper 35 is formed. The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that closes an opening (an opening leading to the medal return port) formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector to form a medal passage for guiding the medals to the hopper 35 side. And an actuator or the like for driving the switching member.

Here, in the blocker 45, during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all reels 31 are stopped and the payout corresponding to the winning combination is finished at the time of winning the winning combination), the insertion of medals is not permitted. To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when the game is not being played.

An insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal selector. In the present embodiment, the insertion sensor 44 includes a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance, and the other insertion sensor 44b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by one insertion sensor 44a. Is configured to be detected by. Then, it is determined whether or not a correct medal has been inserted based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on/off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, on the main control board 50, bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and operation switches operated by the player. The settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the “operation switch (or simply, “switch”)” switches on/off of the electric signal based on the operation of the operation body by the player (operator) (receives a force from the outside). It refers to a device (including an electric circuit and/or an electric component) and does not limit the shape of the operating body operated by the player.

When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the off state). When a player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body of the operation switch), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electric signal indicating that the operation switch is turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. In contrast to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and the light from the light emitting element enters the on state when entering the light receiving element. You may.

In the present embodiment, the operation body of the start switch 41 is in the shape of a lever (rod) (henceforth, also referred to as “start lever (switch) 41”), the bet switch 40, the stop switch 42, and the adjustment switch. The operating body 43 has a push button shape (for this reason, it is also referred to as a "bet button (switch) 40", a "stop button (switch) 42", and a "payment button (switch) 43"). In the fourth embodiment described later, the operating body of the stop switch 42 (the portion pushed by the player) is referred to as the "stop button 42a".

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operation body of the operation switch and/or around or in the vicinity thereof. When the operation acceptance of the operation switch is permitted, for example, the LED or the like corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation acceptance of the operation switch is not permitted, for example, the operation switch The LED or the like emits red light to indicate to the player whether the operation switch is permitted or not permitted.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switches 42 is acceptable, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 are made to emit blue light, and the player can be operated. Shown in. When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is stop-controlled. After that, the remaining stop switch 42 can be operated because the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 which is stop-controlled is ended and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 (fourth described later). Embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. Then, when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is terminated and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is Although the red light is still emitted, the LED of the stop switch 42 that has not been operated is made to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the present game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, specified number) medals are provided.
Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two-bed bet may be provided.

The specified number is set in advance, for example, depending on whether or not the accessory is not operated. Specifically, it is set such that the accessory is not operated, the SB is operated, the 1BB is operated, 3 pieces are operated, the 2BB is operated, 2 pieces are operated, and the like. If the 1-bet switch 40a is operated twice, two medals can be inserted, and if it is operated three times, three medals can be inserted. When the prescribed number is 3, three medals can be inserted at one time by operating the 3 bet switch 40b. When the prescribed number is 2, if the 3 bet switch 40b is operated. You can insert two medals at a time. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated while the bet of less than the specified number is already bet, the bet processing is performed so that the bet number becomes three.

The start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, center, right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals betted and/or accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In addition, actually, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed therebetween.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other separate boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

On the display substrate 75, a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted.
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

Further, the winning number display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (the number of players acquired) at the time of winning a winning combination, and like the credit number display LED 76, is composed of two digits of an upper digit and a lower digit. ..
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off and only the lower digit may be displayed as "0".

The acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (notifies an advantageous push order) in a game in which the push order is notified during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the pushing order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying the pushing order instruction information may be provided.
Note that during the AT, the notification of the advantageous pressing order is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 of the symbol display device.
The symbol display device includes reels (three in the present embodiment) 31 for displaying symbols, a motor 32 for driving each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a drive unit for rotating the reel 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control unit 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape having a plurality of types of symbols (symbols forming a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination) printed thereon is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated once, or the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment of detecting the index can be detected. Further, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 is driven to stop the symbol on the effective line from the symbol counted from the symbol on the reference position. It becomes possible to identify whether or not it is possible.

A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device is a hopper 35 for accumulating medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35 from a payout opening, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. The sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cared for through the medal insertion slot 47 and that have been received (judged to be normal) are formed so as to be housed in the hopper 35.
In the present embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 is composed of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance. Then, when the medal is paid out, a predetermined moving member (movable piece 39a in FIG. 7, which will be described later) is moved by the medal. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by the movement of a predetermined moving member. Whether or not the medals have been correctly paid out is determined based on whether or not the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within a predetermined time period.

For example, when the turning-on of the pair of payout sensors 37 is not detected even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 keeps outputting the ON signal, it is detected that the medal clogging has occurred.
Details of these operations will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8.

When the player starts the game, he or she inserts a credited medal in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet) or care-inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot 47 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals of the game being betted, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When this signal is received, the main control board 50 (specifically, reel control means 65 described later) performs lottery by the winning lottery means 61, and drives and controls all the motors 32 so that all the reels 31 are removed. Control to rotate. As the reel 31 is thus rotated by the motor 32, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, the player pushes the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, a reel control means 65 described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery). (Result determined by the means), the stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the symbol combination when all reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations is stopped on the activated line (when the winning combination of the winning combination is achieved), the payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following respective means in the present embodiment are exemplifications, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of the winning numbers. Here, the "lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the rules of the wind management law (rules regarding the authorization of game machines and the verification of the model, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"), The result of the lottery means 61 is the same as the “result determined by the internal lottery” in the rule. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in an expression conforming to the rules.
When the winning number is determined by the role lottery means 61, the prize and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the prize and replay condition device becomes operable in the game. Also, the accessory condition device will be determined. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning role determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.

The role lottery means 61 is based on, for example, a random number generating means (hardware random number) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting a random number generated by this random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. And a winning number determining means for determining the winning number.

The random number generation means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a counter that counts 1 at 200 n (nano) sec and continues counting as one cycle in the range of “0” to “65535”. While the slot machine 10 is powered on, the random number is Keep counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination, based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each winning combination for all winning combinations. When any of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination drawing means 61, the winning flag of the winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). The winning of the winning combination may be a single winning combination (single winning) or a multiple winning combination (double winning).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct answer push order) based on the lottery result (push order bell or at the time of push order replay win) of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 ( Decision).
The “push order” of the push order instruction number selected here means a push order (correct answer push order) that is advantageous to the player. For example, when the push order bell is elected, it refers to the push order in which the higher bell is awarded (correct answer order). In addition, when replay duplicate wins, it refers to a push order in which the RT is promoted to an advantageous RT or a push order in which the RT is not lowered.

In the present embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.
Then, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won during AT, the main control board 50 causes the above-mentioned acquisition number display LED 78 to indicate the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically, " =*” (“*”=1, 2,...) Is displayed. In this way, the function of displaying the push order instruction information when the condition device having an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an instruction function.
When the push-order bell or the push-order replay is won during AT, the main control board 50 is a sub-control board at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). The command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number is transmitted to 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 displays the correct pressing order as an image on the image display device 23.

The pushing order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous period (AT). Therefore, even if the pushing order instruction number is selected by the pushing order instruction number selecting unit 63 in the normal section, the pushing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In the normal section, the pushing order instruction number may not be selected.

The effect group number selection means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number and is to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
Here, the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 causes the selected effect group to be selected. The number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is different from the above-mentioned push order instruction number, is selected for each game, and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

Further, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives each game and effect group number, it is possible to output effects based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or the push order replay is won, the correct control order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub control board 80 does not notify the correct control order based on the effect group number. .. On the other hand, during AT, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won, the push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can inform the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls to start the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving the rotation start command of the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in the present embodiment. ..
Furthermore, after the winning number is determined by the role lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to ON/OFF of the winning flag in this game, and refers to the stop position determination table corresponding to ON/OFF of the winning flag. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected. The drive is controlled so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

For example, in the game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 activates the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the winning flag is on) in the range of the reel 31 stop control. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that it can be stopped on the line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations other than winning combinations (winning flags are off) are not stopped on the activated line.

Here, "within the stop control range of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (number of moving symbols (frames)). Means within the range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for the predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) that is operating MB. Is set to. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. Thus, for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of symbols to be moved from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the stop control range of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated In addition, the design is controlled so as to stop at a predetermined effective line.
That is, when the reel 31 is immediately stopped at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on a predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is stopped before the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is controlled to be stopped on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

On the contrary, when the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number stops on the activated line, when the reel 31 stops, the reel 31 By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number is controlled so as not to stop on the activated line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won (for example, when the push order bell is selected), the priority order of winning combinations is predetermined according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Therefore, according to the predetermined priority order, the drawing stop control of the symbol relating to the highest priority combination is performed.

The winning determination means 66 is for determining whether or not the symbol combination of the reel 31 stopped on the activated line is a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination when the reel 31 is stopped.
Here, the winning determination unit 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line. Specifically, based on the condition device operated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination to be stopped on the effective line before the reel 31 is actually stopped is previously set. It is determined or the symbol combination stopped on the activated line after the reel 31 is stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub control board 80 information (control command) necessary for the performance output by the sub control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a push order instruction number (only when the winning number in AT and the correct answer pushing order is won). , Production group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information of a winning combination, and the like.

In FIG. 1, a sub-control board 80 controls selection and output of effects (information) during a game and a game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected to each other, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) is directed to the sub control board 80 in one direction by parallel communication. Sends information (control command) necessary for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be a connection using an optical communication unit. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used together.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, a RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Peripheral devices for production such as the following production lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via an input port 81 or an output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for performance are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing the data and the like taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores, as the effect data, a program for performing a lottery related to the effect, various data, and the like.

The effect lamp 21 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The effect lamp 21 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and is a back lamp for illuminating the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols that are vertically continuous from the display window) from behind, and the reel 31. A fluorescent lamp that illuminates the symbol on the reel 31 from the upper part, a frame lamp that is arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a winning combination, and the like are included.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effect corresponding to the condition device operated in the game, etc.). In addition, the game information (the number of games played or the number of games acquired during the advantageous period (AT), etc. during operation of the accessory) is displayed.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a state in which the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic view seen from the front. In FIG. 2, the inside of the medal selector is visible. Further, the medal M shows M1 to M4 according to the position thereof. The position of M1 indicates a state in which the medal M is placed on the medal placement portion 47b of the medal insertion slot 47 (state before being released). That is, at the position of M1, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placement portion 47b are in contact with each other when viewed from the front.
In addition, in FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4 which will be described later), it is assumed that the entire substantially square portions indicated as the closing sensors 44a and 44b are the light receiving and emitting ranges (eyes of the sensors) of the closing sensors 44a and 44b (respectively, respectively). It is not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b.).

Further, the position of M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M cannot be seen from the front. That is, at the position of M2, the uppermost point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal holder 47b overlap each other. For example, assuming that the player releases his hand from the medal M when the medal M is at the position M1, the medal M falls from the position M1. Therefore, at the position of M2, the player is released from the player's hand and dropped (moved) to the downstream side.
The "upstream side" means the medal insertion slot 47 side, and the "downstream side" means the insertion sensor 44b side (the hopper 35 side). In terms of the position of the medal M, M1→M2→M3→M4 from the upstream side toward the downstream side.

In the example of FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M when the medal M is located at M2.
Furthermore, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (on) when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. The position M4 indicates the position at the moment (OFF) when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion for inserting the medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when the player bets or credits the medal M as a game medium. The medal insertion slot 47 includes a medal guard section 47a and a medal placement section 47b. The medal holder 47b has a substantially curved surface (having a curvature slightly larger than the peripheral edge of the medal M) extending in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing so that a plurality (up to about 10) of medals M can be placed at the same time. Curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal rest portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a in contact with the medal M (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed so as to intersect substantially vertically.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, there is an opening through which one medal M can flow down at a portion where the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a intersect. The medal M does not drop from the opening when the two medals M are stacked, but the medal M flows down from the opening when the thickness of the medal M is one. Therefore, the player places, for example, a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal placing portion 47b and presses the plurality of medals M toward the medal guard portion 47a while strengthening the pushing force. By weakening it, it is possible to drop the medals M placed on the medal holder 47b one by one into the medal selector through the opening.

When the medal M is thrown in from the medal insertion slot 47 (is released downward), the medal M flows down the passage in the medal selector. A passage sensor 46, a loading sensor 44a, and a loading sensor 44b are provided from the upstream side in the medal selector. Further, the blocker 45 described above is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a (below the input sensor 44a in FIG. 2).

When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine whether there is a clogging of a medal or a goto action, and detects the medal M for a predetermined time (predetermined) from the time when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M, Furthermore, when the medal M is no longer detected after the lapse of a predetermined time, it is determined to be normal. On the other hand, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medals M even after a lapse of a predetermined time after detecting the medals, it is determined to be a medal retention error. After the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M, if the medal M is no longer detected before a predetermined time elapses, it is determined that the medal M is illegally passed.

When the medal M flows down in the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side in the medal passage. The blocker 45 forms a medal flow path so that the medal M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b when the blocker 45 is in the on state (the output port of the output port 52 related to the blocker 45 is on). In other words, it has a role of sending the medal M, which has moved from the upstream side, to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b without sending it out of the medal passage.

On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the off state (the output port of the output port 52 which is related to the blocker 45 is off), the blocker 45 must move so as to be displaced in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing in FIG. Thus, an opening (pitfall) is formed in the medal passage. As a result, when the blocker 45 is in the off state, the medal M falls from this opening immediately before reaching the medal M3 and is sent out of the medal passage (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M dropped from this opening is returned to the medal return port (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, when the specified number of games is already bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit value, it is not possible to bet and credit any more medals, so the blocker 45 is controlled to the off state. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion port 47 in that state, it drops from the opening and is returned to the medal return port.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the opening is blocked by the blocker 45, so the medal M flowing down in the medal passage passes over the blocker 45 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Can be moved to the side.

In this embodiment, the blocker 45 is arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. The passage sensor 46 can detect the medal M regardless of the on/off state of the blocker 45, and can guide the medal M to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b when the blocker 45 is on, and It is sufficient that the medal M can be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b when the blocker 45 is off. In other words, the blocker 45 may be located between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

Further, the passage sensor 46 only needs to be located on the upstream side of the blocker 45, and is arranged at a position where the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 can be detected even when the blocker 45 is in the off state. Just do it. Further, in FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so as to be able to detect the medal M when the medal M is located at M2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the medal M is located further downstream than the position of M2. It is also possible to arrange the passage sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when it is moved to.

The insertion sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medal M which has passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed at a predetermined distance. First, when the medal M reaches the position of M3, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side can detect the medal M (from off to on). When the medal M further flows down, the insertion sensor 44b next detects the medal M (turns from off to on). By determining the on/off timings of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal M is normal. When the medal M reaches the position of M4, it is no longer detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The medals M that have passed the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, the position of the medal M is M2, that is, the position at which the medal M is at the position of M4, that is, the position at which the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b from the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when the medal selector is viewed from the front. The time until reaching (the movement locus is shown by the dotted line in FIG. 2) is set to time T2. It is a value when the hand is released from the medal M (at the initial velocity “0”) and released downward when the medal M is located at M1. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is located at M2 exceeds “0”.

Further, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position of M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal passage is bent from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with the impact member, the speed of the medal M is decelerated so as to move toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The time from the moment when the medal M is located at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the insertion sensor 44a) to the moment when it is located at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set to time T3. ..

<First embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows voltage levels when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power failure occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is the supply level V0. In the state of the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which the power supply is cut off at time S11 (the event in which the power supply is cut off). In this embodiment, when the power failure occurs, the voltage drops to the power failure detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when the power failure occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when the power failure is detected (time S12; power failure detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms×20). Interrupt = 44.7 ms) or more.
On the main control board 50, a voltage monitoring device (not shown) (power cutoff detection circuit) is provided. Then, when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power cutoff detection level V1 which is a predetermined value, the power cutoff detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and the power is detected by detecting whether or not the signal is input. Detect disconnection.

When the voltage further decreases from the power-off detection level V1 and falls below the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
In the example of FIG. 3, the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55 at time S13, and then decreases to Low. Since the main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off process when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2, when the power-off occurs at time S11, the power-off process can be completed at least by time S13. Is set to.

The detection of power failure is executed in the interrupt processing executed every 2.235 ms, but when the power failure is detected for two consecutive interrupts, the power interruption processing is executed in the next interrupt processing. Therefore, in FIG. 3, time S12 is the timing at which the voltage is determined to be equal to or lower than the power cutoff detection level V1 in the interrupt processing twice in a row and the power cutoff is detected. Then, the power interruption process is executed in the next interrupt process.
In the interrupt process, the following process is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the power failure is detected. When the power failure is detected, the power off process is performed (without the normal interrupt process). In the power-off process, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The blocker 45 is turned off by the process of turning off the output port 52. Further, a stack pointer saving process, a power-off process completed flag (a flag for determining whether or not a normal power-off has been performed), a checksum execution process of the RWM 53, a write prohibition process of the RWM 53, and the like are performed. After the sequential execution, the reset waiting state (loop processing state) is entered. This reset waiting state is a state in which no processing is performed by design.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the power-off process is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off in the interrupt process following the interrupt process (time S12) in which the power-off is detected.
The power-off process is not limited to being executed in the interrupt process next to the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected, and the power-off process may be executed in the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. In this case, "T1=S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals have been inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases the medal M while the medal M is at the position M1. In this case, the medal M drops at the initial velocity "0". As a result, the medal M is released into the medal selector. In FIG. 3, the time S11 when the power is cut off and the time when the medal M reaches the position of M2 are matched.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when it is located at M4 is set to T2, but in FIG. 3 as well, the time T2 elapses from the moment when the medal M is located at M2. Later, it is assumed that the medal M is located at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed so as to satisfy the relationship of “T2>T1”.

Therefore, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power off process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the insertion sensor 44b does not detect the medal M. Therefore, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return port (lower plate) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M will be swallowed, but after the power is cut off (after time S11), the process of adding "1" to the medal M (adding "1" to the bet or the credit) is executed. Not done. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the bet or credit process is executed after the power is cut off.

For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 has elapsed (during the power off processing), when the medal M is located immediately before M4 in FIG. (After passing the position of M3), the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
In the case where the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the medal M is located upstream of the position of M3 in FIG. 2 when the time T1 has elapsed (during power off processing). At this time, the medal M is turned off without being detected by either the insertion sensor 44a or the insertion sensor 44b.

Further, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when it is located at M3 is defined as time T2′.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship of “T2′>T1”.
In the case of designing in the above relationship, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the medal M reaches M3, the blocker 45 is turned off by executing the power off process. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a and is sent to the medal return port.

Here, the difference between the conventional technique and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, when a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the power failure is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal “1” addition process (bet process or credit process) is executed after the power is cut off. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after the power is cut off. This is because after the power is cut off, all the processing related to the progress of the game should be stopped immediately.
Therefore, with the configuration of the first embodiment (A), even if the player inserts the medal M from the medal insertion slot 47 and the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2 (immediately after the insertion). Since the medal “1” addition process is not executed, the function of the slot machine 10 can be enhanced.

<First Embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the closing sensors 44a and 44b and the power-off.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing a process from when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a to when it is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the arrow direction indicates the traveling (downflow) direction of the medal M.
FIG. 4A shows a diagram at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the closing sensor 44a is at the moment when it is turned on from off, and the closing sensor 44b remains off. Note that this position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and enters the state shown in FIG. 4B, the insertion sensor 44a remains in the state of detecting the medal M, and the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M. Like Therefore, in FIG. 4B, the closing sensor 44a is on and the closing sensor 44b is at the moment when it is turned on.
In FIG. 4, even when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines, but the medal M and the insertion sensor 44a and It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged on the front side or the back side of the medal M in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.

When the medal M further progresses and enters the state of FIG. 4C, the medal M is detected by both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the closing sensor 44a in this case is on, and the closing sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 mm (so-called 25 pie (φ)) in the general specification and 30 mm (so-called 30 pie (φ)) in the special specification. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the closing sensors 44a and 44b so that the state of FIG. Here, as will be described later, whether or not the state of FIG. 4C, that is, the time during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are ON (detecting the medal M) is within a predetermined range. Determines whether to determine a medal insertion error. Therefore, the distance between the closing sensors 44a and 44b also differs depending on how to set the time when both the closing sensors 44a and 44b are on.

When the medal M further advances from the state of FIG. 4C, the insertion sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M, as shown in FIG. 4D. In this case, the closing sensor 44a is at the moment when it is turned off, and the closing sensor 44b remains on. When the medal M further advances, the insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M, as shown in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the closing sensor 44a remains off, and the closing sensor 44b is at the moment when it is turned off. The position of the medal M in FIG. 4(e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing on/off of the input sensors 44a and 44b in a time chart. In FIG. 5, time S21 is the moment when the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off (the closing sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing of FIG. 4(a).
Next, the time at the moment when the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (from OFF to ON) (FIG. 4B) is S22. Furthermore, the time when the insertion sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M (from ON to OFF) (FIG. 4D) is S23. Further, the time when the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M (from ON to OFF) (FIG. 4(e)) is S24.

Here, if the time Ta (from time S21 to S23) during which the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 1), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M is normally passed, and if the medal M is out of this range, it is determined that the medal passing error.

Further, the time Tb (between times S22 and S23) during which both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within the range of 4.47 ms (2 interrupts) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts). If so (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M is normally passed, and if it is out of this range, it is determined as a medal passage error.

Furthermore, if the time Tc during which the insertion sensor 44b is detecting the medal M (between times S22 and S24) is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M is normally passed, and if it is out of this range, a medal passing error is determined.
When all of the above conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, it is determined that the passage of the medal M is normal, and when at least one condition is not satisfied, a medal passage error is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the closing sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the closing monitoring counter is decremented by "1".
Here, the throw-in monitoring counter becomes “+1” when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M, and when the medal normally passes through the throw sensors 44a and 44b (both the throw sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). The counter is incremented by “-1” at the time of →ON→OFF, and thus at time S24. That is, under normal conditions, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 determines that the medal passage error. To do.

If the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter=“+1”) and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect passage of the medal M, the passage sensor 46 further detects the medal M. Then, when the insertion monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal jam error. For example, when the normal value of the insertion monitoring counter is set to "0" to "2" and the insertion monitoring counter becomes "3" or more, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal jam error has occurred. To be
The throw-in monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, when the insertion sensor 44b is switched from ON to OFF, the insertion monitoring counter is decremented by “1”, and it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 causes the medal insertion. Processing (bet processing or credit processing) is executed. For example, if the bet number is less than the specified number at that time point, the bet number “1” addition process is executed. Specifically, when the specified number in the game is "3" and the bet number at that time is "0", the bet number is changed from "0" by "1" addition processing of the bet number. Update to "1".

At that time, when the bet amount has already reached the specified number and the credit amount has not reached the maximum value “50”, the credit amount “1” addition process is executed. For example, when the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
When the bet number reaches the specified number and the credit amount reaches the maximum number “50”, the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in this case, even if the medal M is inserted, it will not be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In FIG. 5, in addition to turning on/off the closing sensors 44a and 44b, the timings when a power failure occurs and when a power failure is detected are displayed. FIG. 5 shows Example 1 and Example 2, both of which exemplify a case where the power is cut off at the timing (time S21) when the closing sensor 44a is turned on.
In Example 1, the power failure is detected after the time T1 has elapsed from the time S21 when the power failure occurred. Here, in Example 1, “T1>T3” is set. Therefore, when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power is cut off, the power-off process is started after the "1" addition process for the medal M has already been executed.

Here, the time T3 from time S21 to S24 can be represented by "Ta+Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time of the time T3 corresponds to 4 interrupts and is "8.94 ms".
The maximum time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is “252.555 ms”.
Then, in the example 1, it is set so that the power-off process is always executed after the lapse of the time S24. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of power shutdown (time S21) to the execution of power shutdown processing is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

With the above setting, even if the power is cut off at the moment (time S21) when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M, the power off process is executed after the "1" addition process of the medal M is executed. , The medal M is normally bet or credited. Therefore, swallowing of the medal M can be prevented.

Contrary to Example 1, Example 2 is an example in which the power-off process is executed before the “1” addition process for the medal M is executed. That is, in the second example, the relationship of “T1<T3” is set.
The time T3 from the time S21 to S24 corresponds to 4 interrupts at the minimum time as described above. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of “T1<T3”, it is necessary to execute the power-off processing within 3 interrupts after the power-off occurs. However, since it is difficult to set the power-off process to be executed within 3 interrupts after the power-off occurs, the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than 4 interrupts. For example, the minimum time of the time Tc may be set to 15 interrupts. Then, if the time T1 from the occurrence of the power interruption (time S21) to the power interruption processing is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power interruption occurs at the time S21, the power interruption processing is executed before the time S24. It becomes possible.

When the power-off process is executed, the "1" addition (bet or credit) process for the medal M is not executed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M at the time of time S21 (when the power is cut off), the "1" addition process for the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a disadvantage that the medal M is swallowed, but as described in the first embodiment (A), after the power is cut off, the “1” addition process for the medal M is not executed. The power-off process can be executed as quickly as possible.

<First embodiment (C)>
The first embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and power-off.
When the medals to be paid out are added to the credits, the hopper motor 36 is not driven, and the storage area for the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so that the number corresponds to the number of credits stored in the storage area.

When paying out medals after the number of credits reaches the upper limit value “50”, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out medals from the hopper 35 (discharging from the payout opening). In this case, each time one medal is paid out, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect ON/OFF. When the on/off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M is determined. The main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

FIG. 6 is a plan view for explaining the operation when the medals M are paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a hopper disc (substantially disc-shaped rotating disc) is attached to the bottom surface of the hopper 35, and the hopper disc is rotated by the drive of the hopper motor 36. In this hopper disc, a plurality of openings capable of holding medals M are formed along the outer circumference of the hopper disc. Then, the medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter the opening of the hopper disc. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disc is rotated and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disc are ejected one by one. A new medal M in the hopper 35 is inserted into the empty opening after the medal M is discharged.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M1 is the one immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disc. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are components that form a medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medals M are paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that reciprocates each time one medal M is paid out. In the unloaded state, the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position shown by the solid line in the figure, and is fixed by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 7 described later). It is biased to the 38a side. Immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disc, the medal M (M1) comes into contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
In addition, when the medal M is arranged at the position (M1) shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 and is in contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, the medal M is located between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. Narrower than diameter. Therefore, at this point, the medal M cannot pass through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

The pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M discharged from the opening of the hopper disc. When the pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M, the medal M can move in the F1 direction, and the pushing force pushes the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in the drawing. The fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the F2 direction in the figure while maintaining the state of being in contact with the medal M. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b to a position where the medal M can pass. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

As a result, the medal M passes through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and is discharged in the F1 direction (medal payout opening side) in the drawing. The medal M at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is discharged, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is returned to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 again by the force of the spring.

FIG. 7 is a plan view illustrating an ON (detection)/OFF (non-detection) state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medal M is paid as described above in the medal payout device. In FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d)→(a) every time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7A shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position (initial position) shown by the solid line in FIG. The movable piece 39a is attached so as to be rotatable around a central axis in the figure, and is urged clockwise by a spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in the drawing, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is biased toward the fixed shaft 38a in the drawing.
In the state where the movable piece 39a is biased clockwise in FIG. 7 by the spring 39b and no force other than the tensile force of the spring 39b acts on the movable piece 39a, the movable piece 39a has a predetermined stopper (not shown). No.), the vehicle is stopped at the position shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7A, payout sensors 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a in the figure. The movable piece 39a is formed so as to extend toward the payout sensors 37a and 37b. When the movable piece 39a is stopped at the position shown in FIG. ing.
In addition, in FIG. 7, the payout sensors 37a and 37b both show the housing of the sensor, and the illustration of the light emitting/receiving section (eyes of the sensor) is omitted. In this respect, it differs from the input sensors 44a and 44b in FIGS. 2 and 4 in which only the light emitting/receiving unit (sensor eyes) is shown.

Here, the payout sensor 37a is in an ON state (for example, FIG. 7A) when detecting the movable piece 39a, and is in an OFF state (for example, FIG. 7B) when the movable piece 39a is no longer detected. Is set to be.
Similarly, the payout sensor 37b is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is not detected, and is in an on state (for example, FIG. 7C) when the movable piece 39a is detected. Is set to.
In the state of FIG. 7A, the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is not detecting the movable piece 39a and is in the off state.

As described in FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction in FIG. 6 acts on the medal M, the movable shaft 38b starts moving in the F2 direction in FIG. 6, but the movable shaft 38b moves like this. When moved, in FIG. 7A, the movable piece 39a starts rotating counterclockwise against the biasing force of the spring 39b. Then, when the movable piece 39a moves to the position of FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out from inside the dispensing sensor 37a. As a result, the payout sensor 37a does not detect the movable piece 39a, so that it is turned off. Even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the dispensing sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7B, the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is off.

6, when the movable shaft 38b further moves in the F2 direction and reaches the position of the chain double-dashed line portion in FIG. 6 (the position where the medal M can pass through the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b), 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise and reaches the position shown in FIG. 7(c). As a result, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the dispensing sensor 37b, and the dispensing sensor 37b detects the movable piece 39a. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7C, the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position of M2, the force for urging the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in FIG. 6 disappears, so that the movable shaft 38b moves to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. Return. The returning force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. As a result, in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out of the dispensing sensor 37b, and the dispensing sensor 37b no longer detects the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7D shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7D, the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is off.

When the movable piece 39a further rotates in the clockwise direction, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a. As a result, the state (initial state) of FIG. 7A is restored. In the state of FIG. 7A, as described above, the payout sensor 37a is on and the payout sensor 37b is off. Further, when returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the position indicated by the solid line in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a time chart showing ON/OFF of the payout sensors 37a and 37b.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process is started and the hopper motor drive signal is in the ON state.
In FIG. 8, the state before time S31 is the state shown in FIG. When time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is entered and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is off). Next, when the time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is Td.

The payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state until time S33, and at the time S33, the payout sensor 37b is turned off. This state is the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is Te. Then, when time S34 is reached, the state returns to the state (initial position) of FIG. 7A, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is Tf.

In the payout process, the main control board 50 monitors the time during which the payout sensors 37a and 37b are in the on/off state, and when the time is not within the predetermined time range, determines that the medal payout error has occurred.
For example, in FIG. 8, the time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, when the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a is turned off, it is determined to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b is on by the 12th interrupt. If not, a medal payout error will occur.

Further, the time Te during which the payout sensor 37a is off and the payout sensor 37b is on is set to be 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is turned off is monitored, and when the time Te is not within the range of the predetermined time, The main control board 50 determines that there is a medal payout error.

Furthermore, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts). ) Or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, at time S32 (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Tf until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored. When it is not within the range of the predetermined time, the main control board 50 determines that it is a medal payout error.

Further, in FIG. 8, similarly to FIGS. 3 and 5, the time from the occurrence of power cutoff to the power cutoff processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that the power is cut off at the timing of time S31, that is, the timing at which the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example in which the power interruption is detected by 20 interrupts has been described. The power-off is detected after the elapse of T1), and the power-off processing is set to be executed.

Here, since the maximum time of time "Td+Tf" (normal time) is "12+27=39" interrupt, the time T1 from power-off to execution of power-off processing is, for example, 40 interrupts (89.4 ms). Set. With this setting, even if the power-off occurs at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power-off process can be started after the payout process for one medal is normally completed. That is, “(Td+Tf)<T1” can be set.

Conventionally, there have been cases where a power interruption (power failure, etc.) occurs during the medal payout process. In this case, depending on the occurrence timing of the medal payout process and the power-off, it is determined that the medal has been paid out even though the medal has not been paid out, which may cause a loss to the player.
On the other hand, in the first embodiment (C), even if the power is cut off during the medal payout process, the medals can be paid out correctly.

In particular, when the medal payout process is started, that is, even when the power is cut off at the timing of time S31 in FIG. 8, the power cutoff is detected after one medal payout process is completed, and the process proceeds to the power cutoff process. Therefore, for example, the power-off process is not executed when the payout sensor 37a is in the off state or when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the power-off process from being executed during the medal payout process and the medal payout process to be stopped before the (one piece) medal payout process ends normally.

If the time T1 is set longer than necessary, the payout process for the next medal may be executed. Therefore, the power-off process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of the one-medal payout process is time T4 and the payout sensor 37a is changed from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, "T1<T4" is set.

<Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to a gate trace formed on the substrate case of the main control substrate 50.
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, etc. of the gate traces on the substrate case were determined by the mold designer at the time of manufacturing the mold, solely for the convenience of manufacturing the mold.
However, since the trace of the gate becomes an uneven surface, even if a hole is made aiming at the trace of the gate, for example, it may not be visually recognizable (not noticeable).

Then, if the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is arranged right below the gate mark, a hole is made in the gate mark and a wire is passed through the hole, so that the main CPU 55 is accessed. There is a possibility that it will be done). In particular, when the gate trace is formed to have a thinner wall thickness than other portions, it becomes easier to make a hole than other portions.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the goto action from being performed by using the gate mark of the substrate case.

FIG. 9 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58) in an exploded manner.
The substrate case 56 includes an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded products made of transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be clearly confirmed visually from the outside of the board case 56.

On the main control board 50, electronic components such as the above-mentioned main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (four-digit LED, also referred to as “combination ratio monitor” or “ratio indicator”), set value display LED 73, and the like. It is installed. Although many electronic components such as the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 described above are mounted on the main control board 50, the illustration thereof is omitted in FIG. 9. Further, although not shown in FIG. 9, the main control board 50 is provided with bet switches 40a and 40b, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and failure check LEDs for the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Has been done. The failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is off when the start switch 41 is off, and when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects that the switch is on). ) Is an LED that is turned on (lit).

The failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LEDs of other operation switches and sensors, which will be described later, are turned off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects that the switch is on), and when it is off. It may be configured to light up.

Further, two failure confirmation LEDs for the bet switches 40a and 40b are provided, one for the bet switches 40a and 40b, which is off when the bet switch 40 is not operated, and the bet switch 40 is operated. It is an LED that lights up when an electric signal at that time is received.
Furthermore, a total of three failure confirmation LEDs of the passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are provided for each sensor, and are turned off when no medal is detected, and are turned on when a medal is detected. It is an LED.
Then, the administrator operates the start switch 41, for example, and confirms whether the LED for confirming the failure of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is turned on or off. Can be confirmed. The same applies to other switches or sensors.

The failure confirmation LED may be turned on/off by operating the start switch 41 or the like when the front door is opened during normal operation (the setting is not being changed and the setting is not being confirmed). .. Alternatively, the failure confirmation may be performed by performing a predetermined operation after opening the front door and causing a door open error. Further, the light may be turned on/off at all times (even while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed) by operating the start switch 41 or the like.

The model number of the board is displayed (printed or the like) on the main control board 50. Although not shown in FIG. 9, the model numbers and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and the ROM 54.
Furthermore, screw holes 50a for inserting screws are formed at the four corners of the main control board 50.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four corners on the inner surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw hole 50a and the boss 58c overlap each other, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case 58 by screwing the screw from the screw hole 50a to the boss 58c. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is overlapped with the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed into a shape that fits (in FIG. 9, the concrete shape of the fitting portion is not shown). Further, the upper cover 57 is provided with caulking portions 57a on both left and right sides in the drawing. Similarly, a caulking portion 58a is provided on the left and right rows of the lower cover 58 in the figure. It should be noted that in FIG. 9, the concrete shape and the detailed shape of the caulked portions 57a and 58b are not shown.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted to each other and caulking is performed using the caulking portions 57a and 58a, at least a part of the caulking portions 57a and 58a must be destroyed thereafter (without plastic deformation). The cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
As a result, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate marks 57b are provided at two locations on the outer surface of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. In the board case 56 (with the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 fitted together), the side in which the main control board 50 is housed is referred to as “inside”, and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as “outside”. ..
In FIG. 9, the gate traces 57b are provided at two places, but not limited to this, they may be provided at some places.

Here, the "gate" is a gate when pouring resin (hot water) into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is a mark left at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. is there.
When the substrate case 56 (the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, it is low cost to form the mold in the vertical direction in FIG. Further, in the case of a mold for taking a large number of pieces, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and it is preferable to provide the gate near the center of the molded product from the viewpoint of fluidity of the resin (hot water). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed not on the side surface but on the upper surface in FIG. 9.

Further, considering the cutting of the protrusion of the gate mark at the time of molding, the gate mark is preferably provided on the outside.
From the above, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided outside the upper surface.
Further, for the same reason as above, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided outside the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 9). In FIG. 9, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is provided at two places like the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57, but it may be provided at one place or at three or more places. Good.

Further, when the resin (hot water) flows from the gate into the mold, the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold is not uniform, and if a cooling time difference occurs, the molded product may be warped and deformed. Therefore, the gate position of the molded product is preferably arranged at a position where the resin (hot water) spreads uniformly in the mold. Furthermore, when the gates are provided at a plurality of locations, it is preferable that the distance from the end of the molded product to the gates and the distance between the gates be as uniform as possible.

10A is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate trace 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate trace 58b of the lower cover 58 of the substrate case 56 and the main control substrate 50. As shown in FIG. FIG. 10A shows a state where the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted to each other). Is a plan view seen from above. Further, the main control board 50 is seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of the sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. (a), and (c) is an example 2 of the sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Indicates. Note that hatching is omitted in these cross-sectional views from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10A, in a state where the main control board 50 is accommodated in the board case 56, the two gate marks 57b extend in the vertical direction (on the main control board 50 side) (directly below) the upper cover 57. The model number display, management information display LED 74, set value display LED 73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are set so as not to be located. As described above, the RWM 53, the ROM 54, and the failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, but it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above them.

The gate trace 57 is arranged as described above for the following reason.
It is necessary for the main control board 50 to visually confirm whether any unauthorized modification has been made even after the slot machine 10 has been installed in the market. In particular, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the main CPU 55 and the like (including the RWM 53 and the ROM 54. The same applies hereinafter) and whether or not the main CPU 55 has been modified by a goto act. Further, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually confirm the main control board 50 from the outside of the board case 56. is there.
Then, the board case 56 accommodating the main control board 50 therein is attached inside the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, inside the back surface. This is because the numerical values displayed by the set value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 are attached at a position where it is easy to see.

Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 visually views the board case 56 (main control board 50) from the direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. That is, it is considered that the board case 56 (main control board 50) is visually observed as shown in FIG. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are arranged in the vertical direction (immediately below) of the gate mark 57b, the visibility may be hindered by the gate mark 57. In particular, the information displayed (printed or the like) on the upper surface of the main CPU 55 or the like can be viewed without hindering the visibility.

Since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from transparent resin, the visibility is not completely hindered even just below the gate mark 57b. However, as shown in (b) and (c) in FIG. 10, since the cross section of the gate trace 57b becomes an uneven surface, the visibility directly below the gate trace 57b is deteriorated (becomes worse than the plane). Things are certain. Further, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10B, since the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface, whitening may occur due to the stress at the time of cutting the resin. Therefore, also in this case, the visibility under the gate mark 57b is hindered.

Moreover, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is a smooth surface which is transparent and has no unevenness except for the gate marks 57b, even if a hole is made by, for example, a got action, it can be easily visually recognized.
On the other hand, the gate trace 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. For this reason, if a hole is formed in the gate hole 57b and then the hole is sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to easily visually determine whether or not the hole is formed in the gate mark 57b. Therefore, there is a possibility that a goto action using the gate mark 57b is performed.

On the other hand, when a hole is formed in the gate mark 57b, if the main CPU 55 and the like are located in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, it becomes easier to carry out the goto action. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 and the like are not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 and the like, and it is possible to make the goto action difficult.

Further, the model number displayed (printed or the like) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking the presence or absence of fraud, so that the model number is displayed in order to make it easy to confirm (read). The gate mark 57b was not arranged right above the area. Further, when the gate mark 57b is present right above the model number display, a hole is made in the gate mark 57b to access the inside of the substrate case 56 and prevent the model number display from being tampered with. The gate mark 57b should not be arranged directly above the model number display.

Further, regarding the set value display LED 73, it is necessary to see the displayed numerical value when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Also, regarding the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to look at the displayed numerical value in order to confirm whether or not the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, etc. are within appropriate ranges. Therefore, the gate mark 57b is not arranged directly above these LEDs. Further, in the same manner as above, in order to make it difficult for the LED in the substrate case 56 to be accessed through the holes formed in the gate trace 57b by utilizing the gate trace 57b, and thus it is difficult to carry out the goto action, it is necessary to confirm the trueness of these LEDs. The gate trace 57b should not be placed above.

As for the failure confirmation LED described above, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates the operation switch to confirm whether or not the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch is turned on. Therefore, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located right above the failure confirmation LED. It is similar to the above that the failure confirmation LED is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) the gate mark 57b to make it difficult to carry out the goto action.

10, the cross-sectional views of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) have the same outer shape of the gate trace 57b. Then, in the example 1 of (b), the inside of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is left flat. On the other hand, in the example 2 of (c), the inside of the upper surface of the gate trace 57b is formed in a protrusion shape (thickness).
The outside of the gate trace 57b has a protrusion 57d at its center and a recess 57c formed so as to sink in a cylindrical shape on the outer periphery thereof. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected at the time of molding, and when the molded product is separated from the mold, this boundary is cut with a cutter. Therefore, the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface by the cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: a method in which the molding machine automatically cuts at the time of injection, and a method in which the gate is cut in a later step.

Here, at the time of cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, it is costly to process the cut surface to be a completely smooth surface, in other words, to make the height of the protrusion 57d substantially "0". High and difficult. Therefore, the recessed portion 57c is formed so that the protrusion 57d does not protrude above the outer surface of the upper surface of the upper cover 57 even if the protrusion 57d has some height. Thereby, for example, when an operator who assembles touches the upper cover 57, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 57d from being injured.

As shown in FIG. 10B, when the recess 57c is provided in the gate mark 57, the wall thickness of the upper cover 57 is reduced accordingly. As described above, if there is a portion where the wall thickness is thin, there is a possibility that the goto action of making a hole in the recess 57c and accessing the inside of the substrate case 56 becomes easy.
Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 10C, a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inner side) to the outer side of the upper surface where the gate trace 57b is provided to prevent the thickness of only the recess 57c from becoming thin. There is. If the protrusion 57e is not provided and the thinned portion is not provided, it is possible to make the goto action of making a hole in the recess 57c difficult.

Further, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to countermeasures against fraud by preventing a part of the wall thickness of the gate trace 57b from becoming thin, but also functions as a dimple (a pool of hot water) at the time of molding. In FIG. 10(b), when the resin (hot water) collides with the upper surface inside when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate (the position corresponding to the protrusion 57d) of the mold, the resin (hot water) There is a risk that the flow will change suddenly, making it impossible to flow stably. Therefore, by providing a dimple (reservoir pool) at a position facing the tip of the gate, the flow of the resin (hot water) is prevented from changing abruptly when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate. (Hot water) will be able to flow stably. The protrusion 57e may have various shapes such as a quadrangular cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoidal cross section (in the case of FIG. 10C), a dome cross section, and the like. Any shape may be used as long as it can prevent the above.

Regarding the visibility of the gate trace 57b in the vertical direction (directly below), the smoothness of the lower side of the gate trace 57 is superior to the uneven shape. Therefore, regarding the visibility directly under the gate mark 57b, the shape of FIG. 10B is superior to the shape of FIG. 10C. In addition, the shape of FIG. 10B does not require a portion corresponding to the protrusion 57e to be formed in the mold as compared with the shape of FIG. 10C, so that the shape of the mold is simplified ( Cost can be reduced).

Further, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outer side (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, the protrusion 57d and the recess 57c shown in FIG. 10B are formed on the outer side. This is because, as described above, it is more convenient for the molding process to provide the protrusion 57d and the recess 57c on the outer side of the molded product.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, the pin position of the main CPU 55 or the like of the main control board 50 is set so as not to be located in the vertical direction of the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. This is because a hole is formed in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 so that the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like cannot be accessed.
When the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 has the shape shown in FIG. 10C, the protrusion 57e of FIG. 10C faces the pin side of the main control board 50. It goes without saying that the pins protruding from the lower surface side of the control board 50 and the protrusions 57e are formed so as not to interfere (contact) with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted to each other, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction. It is preferable to arrange (shift) so that it does not occur. In particular, in the case of the gate traces 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10B, the wall thickness of a part (the recess 57c) of the gate traces 57b and 58b is thin, but the thin wall portion is the upper cover. By arranging 57 and the lower cover 58 at a position where they do not overlap with each other, it is possible to prevent overlapping of easily targeted portions.
Further, when the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap each other in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark of the other cover can be known only by looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 do not overlap in the vertical direction.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when the command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection of the wire). Later, when communication is restored, communication fails due to the influence of noise, and the like).
As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits commands such as the push order instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub control board 80 outputs the effect based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the effect in accordance with the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are disconnected and communication becomes impossible. Causes thereof include poor contact, radio waves, and the like. When the sub control board 80 does not receive the command from the main control board 50, the production is stopped in the current state. Further, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 determines whether or not there is a disconnection in the communication between them. For this reason, the main control board 50 progresses the game (operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42) even when a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80. Etc.), the command transmission processing is continued to the sub control board 80. On the other hand, when the sub control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, it maintains the effect state at that time.
Even when the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are disconnected, if the AT control is being performed, for example, the main control board 50 causes the acquired number display LED 78 to be pressed by the operation of the instruction function. Display instruction information. Thereby, even when the sub control board 80 is not functioning normally, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order by looking at the pressing order instruction information.
Further, since the player can compare the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 with the effect contents (correct answer push order) displayed on the image display device 23 as an image, both information are inconsistent. While doing so, it is possible to know that there is a problem in the image display by the sub control board 80.

For example, when a disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game, the sub control board 80 can receive the command transmitted from the main control board 50. At times, the effect cannot be suddenly switched to the "N+1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub control board 80 does not receive the command “N+1” when the command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (command for informing the start of the game) is not received. This is because it cannot be determined. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, there is a possibility that the player may be misunderstood depending on the content of the effect.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored after the disconnection, the player is given a sense of discomfort while avoiding misunderstanding as much as possible. Output a production that does not exist.

FIG. 11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 (described as “main operation” in FIG. 11) and the display of effects by the sub control board 80 (described as “sub display” in FIG. 11) in the third embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a relationship with the (.), and shows five examples including pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5).
Patterns 1 to 5 all show an example in which communication is lost in the middle of the "N" game (disconnection occurs) and communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game.
Further, in the main operation of FIG. 11, “bet” means that the bet switch 40 is operated and the specified number of bets are effectively bet. Further, “start” means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after the specified number of bets have been bet. Furthermore, for example, “right stop” means that the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 stops).

Further, in the sub-display, “push order effect” means, for example, an effect in which the correct answer push order is displayed as an image in a game in which a push order bell or a push order replay is won. Specifically, for example, “display in the middle of right and left” means an effect of notifying that the correct answer pressing order is “in the middle of right and left”. In addition, for example, "left middle display" means that the left stop switch 42 is operated and that the second stop switch to be operated is left and the third stop switch 42 is to be inside. It means an effect to be notified.
Furthermore, for example, "right stop effect" means an effect that the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 is operated is received. means.

In the pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated at the "N" game, the main control board 50 performs the lottery of the winning combination as described above. In the game, “right-left-middle” is an example in which the push order bell in which the correct answer order is selected is won. In this case, if the main control board 50 is in AT, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a pressing order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct answer pressing order “right left middle”. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs, to the image display device 23, a pressing order effect for displaying the correct pressing order of "right left middle".
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the correct push order “middle right, left” on the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop while seeing the correct pressing order (right stop). As a result, the right reel 31 is stopped and a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped) (right stop effect), and displays the right-left center display and the left-center display (in addition, other). Are displayed as "-middle left", "middle left x", etc.).
Pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 is stopped and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disabled (sub disconnection). That is, this is an example in which communication is disabled during the game.

The main control board 50 can progress the game even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disabled (even if the sub control board 80 is not functioning). In the example of pattern 1, in the "N" game, after the occurrence of the disconnection, the left and middle stop switches 42 are operated (the left and the middle reel 31 are stopped) (left middle stop). ).

Next, it is assumed that the bet operation for the "N+1" game is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N+1" game, as in the "N" game, "right-left-middle" shows an example in which the push-order bell (or the push-order replay) that is the correct push order is won. In addition, in the "N+1" game, as in the case of the "N" game, an example in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the right-left-middle pushing order is shown, but when a winning combination having the right-right-middle pushing order is won. Not limited to, any role lottery result may be used.

In addition, when the push order bell (or the push order replay) having the correct push order is won in the “N+1” game, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order by the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 even when the correct pressing order is not displayed as an image on the image display device 23. Become.

In the "N+1" game, the player first operates the right stop switch 42. After that, it is assumed that the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored before operating the second left stop switch 42.
Accordingly, when the player operates the left stop switch 42 which is the second stop switch 42, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub control board 80 updates the image display so as to correspond to the received command. That is, an image that the left stop is performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 updates the effect that has already been displayed, that is, the effect of the "N" game.

Therefore, actually, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N+1" game is operated, but the sub-control board 80 has the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N" game. Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct answer pressing order in the "N" game is left, it means that the correct answer pressing order is performed in this example. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (press order correct effect effect) and the final middle display effect.

Then, in the "N+1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub control board 80 outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, an intermediate stop effect.
In addition, even if the winning combination having the correct answer pressing order is won in the "N+1" game and the correct answer pressing order is other than right, left, and under the situation of pattern 1, the effect is output as described above. To be done. That is, in the "N+1" game, when the pressing order operated by the player is right and left, even if the pressing order corresponds to the incorrect pressing order, the pressing order fails like pattern 2 described later. No production is output.

Furthermore, in the "N+1" game, even if a winning combination having no correct answer pressing order is won, or even if a winning combination is not won, if the pressing order operated by the player is in the middle of right and left, the above is performed. The same effect as is output. That is, even when the “N+1” game does not have the correct pressing order, the sub control board 80 indicates that the left stop switch 42 has been operated after the communication is restored (in the example of pattern 1). When the command is received, the left stop effect (press order correct effect effect) is output, and further, the middle display is output.

Next, when a bet is placed for the "N+2" game and the "N+2" game is started by operating the start switch 41, the main control board 50 tells the sub-control board 80 " The command corresponding to the start of the "N+2" game is transmitted. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect at the start of the "N+2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands of the effect group number and the pressing order instruction number are transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving these commands, the sub-control board 80 displays the pressing order effect and the correct pressing order, as at the start of the "N" game.

As described above, in the pattern 1, the sub control board 80 is based on the command ("N+1" game) received from the main control board 50 until the third stop of the "N+1" game, and the "N" game is played. Is continuously output, and when the "N+2" game item is started, the effect is updated to the "N+2" game item.
Further, the main control board 50 may transmit a command for the number of acquired sheets to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game, and the sub-control board 80 may also display the acquired number of images in the AT as an image. In such a case, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command for the number of acquisitions at the end of the "N" game, that is, during the disconnection, so at the end of the "N" game, "N-1". The number of cards acquired at the end of the game will remain displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and the command of the number of acquired sheets is received at the end of the “N+1” game, the sub control board 80 updates the image display so that the number of acquired sheets at the end of the “N+1” game is reached. ..

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Further, the timing of disconnection is the same as that of pattern 1, but the timing of communication recovery is different from that of pattern 2. In pattern 2, in the "N+1" game, communication is restored after the second stop, that is, the left stop.
In the pattern 2, the main operation and the sub-display in the “N” game are the same as those in the pattern 1, and the description thereof will be omitted.
Next, in the "N+1" game, the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of right and left, but the communication is restored after the second stop on the left.

Immediately before the communication is restored, the sub control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect of the “N” game and the middle left display. In this state, communication is restored, and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) in the "N+1" game, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command to stop in the middle while displaying the left-middle display, it determines that it is in the incorrect-pushing order, and outputs the pressing-order failure effect. In the third embodiment, after the pressing order failure effect is output, the subsequent pressing order effects are not output.

In addition, in the "N+1" game, assuming that the stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order of the center left and right, communication is restored after the center left stop, and the right stop command is subsequently sub-controlled by the right stop. Also when transmitted to the board 80, the push order failure effect is output as in the above. The sub control board 80 is in the middle of outputting the right stop effect and the middle left display, so if the right stop command is received at this point, the same stop command is received twice in one game. .. Even in such a case, the processing is regarded as a pressing order failure and the effect is output without giving an error notification or the like.
Then, when the "N+2" game is started in the same manner as in Pattern 1, the command at the start of the "N+2" game is transmitted to the sub control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 starts producing the "N+2" game.

In pattern 3, the main operation and sub-display of the “N” game are the same as in pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop during the "N+1" game. Therefore, in the "N+1" game, after the communication is restored, the command of the left stop, which is the third stop, is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Since the sub-control board 80 outputs the "left middle display" of the "N" game, when the command to stop left is received in this state, it is determined that the correct pressing order has been reached. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (push order correct answer effect), and then outputs the middle display.

However, on the side of the main control board 50, the "N+1" game item ends the game with the third stop on the left. Next, when the command at the start of the “N+2” game is sent to the sub control board 80, the sub control board 80 receives the command, and then the “N+2” game is started. Switch to the production at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and the middle display that have been output until then are canceled. Further, even if a command at the start of the "N+2" game is received during the output of the middle display, no error notification is given and the effect at the start of the "N+2" game is output according to the received command. ..

Pattern 4 is an example of displaying the number of remaining games in AT in the sub-display. Further, in pattern 4, the main operation, the disconnection timing, and the communication recovery timing are the same as in pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command of the number of remaining games of the AT to the sub-control board 80 at the start of each game. When the sub control board 80 receives a command for the number of remaining games of the AT from the main control board 50, it updates the display of the number of remaining games of the AT. It should be noted that during AT, the display of the number of remaining games is not displayed alone but is output together with the pressing order effect of pattern 3.

In pattern 4, the main control board 50 transmits a command for the number of remaining games in AT to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated (when the game is started). Here, in the "N" game, it is assumed that the number of remaining AT games is 10 games.
At the start of the “N” game, the sub control board 80 displays the number of remaining games in AT (10 games remaining) based on the command received from the main control board 50.
Then, if the disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and the disconnection state continues even at the start of the "N+1" game, the main control board 50 causes the sub control at the start (at the start) of the "N+1" game. The sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to disconnection) although it executes processing for transmitting a command for the number of remaining games (9 games) in the AT to the control board 80. Therefore, in the "N+1" game, the "remaining 10 games" of the "N" game remains displayed.

Then, when communication is restored in the middle of the “N+1” game (after stopping in the middle left) and the process shifts to the “N+2” game, the main control board 50 switches to the sub control board 80 at the start of the “N+2” game. On the other hand, the command of the number of remaining games (8 games) in AT is transmitted. Upon receiving this command, the sub control board 80 updates the display of the remaining 10 games to the display of the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is an example when the main operation, the disconnection timing, and the communication recovery timing are the same as those in Pattern 4, but the "N" game is the remaining one game of AT.
At the start of the “N” game (when the start switch 41 is operated), the main control board 50 transmits to the sub control board 80 a command of the number of remaining games in AT (one game remaining). Upon receiving this command, the sub control board 80 updates the display of the remaining 1 game (from the display of the remaining 2 games until then).
When a disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 determines that the number of remaining games in AT is 0 at the start of the "N+1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). Although a command to the effect that it is a game is transmitted to the sub control board 80, the sub control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the “N+1” game, the display indicating that the remaining one AT game is continued.

Further, the sub control board 80 outputs an AT end effect when the AT is ended. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on the reception of the command (at the start of the game) that the number of remaining games in AT is 0 game.
However, in the example of pattern 5, since the sub control board 80 has not received the command indicating that the number of remaining games in AT is 0 game, the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even at the end of the "N+1" game, the effect indicating that there is one remaining AT game is output.

Then, when the “N+1” game ends and the “N+2” game starts, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the “N+2” game. Send. Based on the reception of this command, the sub control board 80 erases the display of "remaining one game" and outputs a normal (non-AT) effect.
At the end of AT, an image such as "Pachinko/pachislot is a game machine that you can enjoy moderately" is displayed to prevent slipping in. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub-display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N+1" game, the image display cannot be performed. Therefore, as a countermeasure for this, the game history is managed on the side of the sub-control board 80, and when the game shifts to the next game (in the example of FIG. 11, "N+2" game) over the end of AT, the game is played. The image may be displayed at the start of.

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when the disconnection occurs in the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game until the communication is restored, and "N+1". When the communication is restored in the middle of the game game, the continuation of the production output as the “N” game game is output based on the command received in the “N+1” game game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, at the "N+1" game, when a command to stop left is received after communication is restored, the correct answer is given regardless of whether the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct push order. A push order effect will be output.

On the other hand, in pattern 1, for example, in the "N+1" game, if a command of the middle stop is received after the communication is restored, the pressing order of the production output at that time, that is, the "N" game Since an incorrect answer pressing order is displayed for the middle left display, the pressing order failure effect is output regardless of whether the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct answer pressing order. However, even if the pressing order failure effect is output in the "N+1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 in the correct order of pressing the "N+1" game, a symbol that is advantageous to the player Since the combination is stopped and displayed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

As described above, when the communication is restored in the "N+1" game, the "N+1" game outputs an effect that inherits the effect before the disconnection (the "N" game) and outputs the "N+2" game. Reset the effect at the start (return to the correct effect). As a result, it is possible to minimize the output of unnatural effects in both the game in which the disconnection has occurred and the game in which the communication has been restored, and to prevent the player from misunderstanding as much as possible.

Further, in the example of FIG. 11, an example is shown in which the communication is restored to the "N+1" game after the disconnection occurs in the "N" game, but the communication is restored when two or more games have elapsed after the disconnection occurred. However, it is similar to FIG.
For example, when a disconnection occurs in the "N" game and communication is restored to the "N+a" game (a="2" or more), the "N" game disconnects until the "N+a-1" game. The production just before is continued to be output. Then, in the "N+a" game in which the communication is restored, the continuation of the effect of the "N" game in which the output is continued is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the “N+a+1” game, the effect (correct effect) at the start of the “N+a+1” game is updated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing when rotating and stopping the reel 31, all of which are in an excited state. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a state is set in which four phases are simultaneously excited for a predetermined time (time T11 described later) (hereinafter, referred to as “four-phase excitation state”).
The fourth embodiment relates to the time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. Note that hatching is omitted in FIG. 12 from the viewpoint of viewability of the drawing. Further, FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has a structure as shown in FIG. In FIG. 12, the process from pressing the stop button 42a to returning to the original state is illustrated in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d). In the figure, the upper side is the player side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the side above the front door 12 is the side visible to the player.
Furthermore, the line where the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is shown by a dotted line. It is assumed that the moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d contacts the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12A, the stop button 42a is an operating body of the stop switch 42, and is operated (pushed into the slot machine 10) when the player turns on the stop switch 42. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged so as to project from the front door 12 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When viewed from the front of the player, this portion has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the unloaded state, the stop button 42a is biased in the F3 direction (outward direction, player direction) in the figure (a) by the spring force of the (compression) coil spring 42c. An end of the player 42 a on the player side projects from the front door 12. In this state, the lower surface portion (hereinafter, referred to as “flange-shaped portion”) of the stop button 42a in the drawing is in contact with the front door 12.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the housing), contacts the stop button 42a when the stop button 42a is pressed, and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. Is.

On the lower surface side of the stop button 42a in the figure, a movable piece 42d that is movable integrally with the stop button 42a is provided. Further, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged immediately below the moving piece 42d. In the unloaded state shown in (a) of the drawing, when the stop button 42a is biased toward the front door 12 by the biasing force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (lower end in the figure) of the moving piece 42d is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state of (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e is not detecting the moving piece 42d and is in the off state.

Next, as shown in (b) in the figure, when stopping the rotation of the reel 31, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure against the biasing force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the figure, the moving piece 42d that is integral with the stop button 42a also moves downward in the figure. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters the detection sensor 42e. When the tip of the moving piece 42d comes into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. FIG. 12B shows the position of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is further pushed in from the state of FIG. 12B, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a contacts the stopper 42c, as shown in FIG. 12C. This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pushed. Further, in the state of FIG. 12C, the state in which the tip of the moving piece 42d is detected by the detection sensor 42e is maintained, so the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state.

When the player releases the stop button 42a from the state shown in FIG. 12C (excluding the force in the F4 direction in FIG. 12C), the stop button 42a is pushed by the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c. The force to return to the initial position acts. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d that is integral with the stop button 42a move upward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d does not come into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12(d)).

FIG. 12D shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e changes from the ON state to the OFF state. In the state of FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state of FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a comes into contact with the flange-shaped front door 12 of the stop button 42a, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12A, in which the stop button 42a is in the unloaded state.
The state of FIG. 12(b) showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state and the state of FIG. 12(d) showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state are generally Although the same, there is no particular problem even if a slight deviation occurs.

FIG. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excitation state of the motor 32 in the fourth embodiment. (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. Show.
In FIG. 13A, the stop button 42a is at the initial position in the unloaded state (FIG. 12A), and the time when the pressing of the stop button 42a is started is S41. The time when the stop button 42a is pushed and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12B is set is S42. Further, the time when the stop button 42a is pushed in from that position and the stop button 42a reaches the deepest portion (when the state shown in FIG. 12C is reached) is S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the player's pushing speed, and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed in slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes longer, and if the stop button 42a is pushed earlier, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes shorter.

Next, at time S44, the stop button 42a is released from being pushed. In addition, at the time of time S44, the stop button 42a shall be located in the deepest part.
When the stop button 42a is released from being pushed, as described above, the spring force of the coil spring 42c acts to return the stop button 42a to the initial position. The operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment the stop button 42a is released.
Then, the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned from ON to OFF, that is, when the state of FIG. Here, the time from the time S44 to S45 is T11.

The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (moving distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed such that the time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is turned on (specifically, the detection sensor 42e is turned on) (in the state of FIG. 12B), the reel control means 65 causes the reel control unit 65 to correspond to the stop switch 42. The stop control of 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at the position corresponding to the winning combination lottery result by the winning combination lottery means (the result determined by the internal drawing means). The time from the start of the stop control of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 (after detecting the ON of the detection sensor 42e) is as described above (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). Within 190 ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21 symbols, the number of moving frames is 5 or less, when it is 20 symbols, the number of moving frames is 4 or less). Therefore, the time from the start of deceleration of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 is not constant because it depends on the result of the lottery and the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated.

Furthermore, after the reel control means 65 has moved the reel 31 to a predetermined position, the motor 32 is simultaneously excited (braked) for four phases for a predetermined time (the above-mentioned four-phase excitation state). ).
Here, the motor 32 in the present embodiment is a four-phase stepping motor, and performs, for example, 1 and 2 phase excitation while the motor 32 (reel 31) is rotating (note that it is not limited to 1 and 2 phase excitation. Absent). Therefore, even when the motor 32 is rotating, one excitation state is maintained. Then, when the rotational driving of the motor 32 is stopped, the four-phase excitation state is set.
When the bouncing stop is performed after the reel 31 is moved to the predetermined position (when the reel 31 appears to vibrate at the stop position), the three-phase excitation state is set instead of the four-phase excitation state. Is also possible.

At the moment when the rotation driving of the motor 32 is stopped, there is a possibility that the motor 32 or the reel 31 may be over the desired position due to inertia during rotation, so the motor 32 is stopped at the moment when the reel 31 is stopped at a predetermined position. The four-phase excitation state is set, and static torque is generated so that it does not move due to inertia from the stop position. When the motor 32 is in the 4-phase excitation state, the next operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. During the first or second stop, the next operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is permitted because the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state (returning to the state of FIG. 12D). ), and when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32, which has stopped the rotation drive, ends.

The reason for controlling in this way is as follows.
In order to maintain the stopped position of the reel 31, the motor 32 is controlled to be in a four-phase excitation state. However, when such control is performed, a larger load is applied than in the normal state, and thus the load of the entire slot machine 10 is reduced. It gets bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, it is possible to accept the operation of the next stop button 42a after ending the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32.

In Example 1 of FIG. 13(a), when the hand lottery result by the hand lottery means (the result determined by the internal lottery means) is a predetermined result (for example, when the push order bell is won), the four-phase excitation state is set. The excitation time T12 from the start to the end is set to 90 interrupts (2.235×90=201.15 ms). Here, when the role lottery result is a predetermined result, the excitation time T12 in the 4-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupt" because the excitation time T12 is always constant regardless of which role lottery result. Does not mean that.

Therefore, in Example 1 of the fourth embodiment, "T11<T12" is set.
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from the point of time S42, the reel 31 is stopped within 190 ms. As described above, when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is “21”, the number of moving frames during stop control is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is “20”. Since the number of moving frames during stop control is within four frames (minimum one frame), the reel 31 stops within about “40” to “190” ms from the time point of time S42.
On the other hand, the time from the time when the detection sensor 42e is changed from the off state to the on state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest portion and the pushing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to S44) , “40” to “180” ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the stop button 42a is released from pressing are close (almost the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, it is assumed that the four-phase excitation state is started at the timing (time S44) when the stop button 42a is released, and the detection sensor 42e is changed from the on state to the off state (time S45). It was designed so that the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is completed, the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the end of the four-phase excitation state, it is possible to allow the next stop button 42a to be operated at the end of the four-phase excitation state. .. This enables the game to proceed at high speed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 13B, from the moment when the stop button 42a reaching the deepest portion is released (time S44) to when the detection sensor 42e is turned on (at time S45). In this example, the time T11 (until the arrival) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is three times longer than in Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start of the four-phase excitation state to the end thereof is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
Then, in Example 2, as in Example 1, it is assumed that the 4-phase excitation state is started from the moment when the stop button 42a reaching the deepest portion is released (time S44), and the 4-phase excitation of the motor 32 is started. The design is such that the detection sensor 42e is turned off after the excitation state ends. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing the four-phase excitation state to end when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the operation acceptance of the next stop button 42a is permitted when the detection sensor 42e is turned off. can do. This enables the game to proceed at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have advantages in control.
In addition, in the example 1 and the example 2 of FIG. 13, the example in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the four-phase excitation state is different is shown. However, if the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, for example, if "T11<T12", then the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the four-phase excitation state is completed. Therefore, when the four-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game of Example 1 can be played at a higher speed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between on/off of a power source and activation of a program.
FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an outline of the control in the fifth embodiment.
In FIG. 14, (a) is a diagram showing a state when the power is cut off after the main program (the program of the main control board 50) is started. The power supply is turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), the supply of power to both the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is started, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level of the sub control plate 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). In FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, the power failure detection level V1, and the drive voltage limit V2 are the same as those in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

The time when the voltage level of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 reaches the supply level V0 after the power is turned on at time S51 is S52. Then, the sub program by the sub control board 80 is started from time S53 when time T22 has elapsed from time S52. Then, the main program by the main control board 50 is started from time S54 when time T23 (T23>T22) has elapsed from time S52. In this way, the sub-program is activated first and then the main program is activated when the first command after power-on is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. This is for keeping the command receivable on the sub-control board 80 side.

Next, at the time of time S55, when the power is cut off (the power switch 11 is turned off, a power failure, etc.), the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level is lowered, if the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 can execute the power-off process.
Further, when the power failure occurs at time S55, the voltage becomes the power failure detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interrupts) as in FIG. 3, and the power failure is detected (time S56). Further, after the power-off is detected, the power-off processing is executed, for example, after one interruption, as in FIG. It is assumed that the power-off process ends at time S57.
After that, when the time reaches S58, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2, and the program (process) cannot be executed. For this reason, the power-off process is controlled to be completed before the time S58 is reached.

When the main program is started at time S54, the setting of the main CPU 55, the check of the RWM 53, the confirmation of whether the previous power-off was normal, the confirmation of the state of the setting key switch, etc. are executed, and then the interrupt processing is activated. .. When the setting key switch is off, power interruption recovery processing (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, etc.) is executed after the interruption processing is activated. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to the setting change process after the interrupt process is activated.
Then, as shown in FIG. 14A, in the case where the power is cut off after starting the main program, if the setting key switch is off, the power cut-off process is executed after the power cut-off recovery process is completed. To do. As a result, the program can be terminated normally.
On the other hand, when the power is cut off after the main program is activated, if the setting key switch is on, the power cutoff process is executed without starting the setting change process. This is because if the setting change process is executed after the power is cut off, a problem may occur.

Further, in order to execute the main program normally, the setting of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 are always executed even when the power-off is detected at the same time when the main program is started.
Furthermore, after the main program is started, even if the power is cut off thereafter, it is always executed until the interrupt is started. This is to detect power failure in interrupt processing. As in the case of the first embodiment (A), for example, at the “N” interrupt, a voltage drop (power cut detection level V1) that is determined to be a power cut is detected, and the next “N+1” game is executed. However, when the voltage drop is detected, the power failure is detected at the "N+1" interrupt (judging power failure). Then, the power-off process is executed from the "N+2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14A, the main program is activated at time S54, and the power is cut off at time S55 thereafter. However, even if the power is cut off at the same time as the time S54 (starting of the main program), the power cut processing can be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 14A, during the time T21 from power-on (time S51) until the voltage reaches the supply level V0 (time S52), the voltage goes to the low level from the occurrence of power interruption (time S55). The time is set to be shorter than T24.
Further, the time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 until the main program is started) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14B is an example when the power is cut off before the main program is started by the main control board 50. In the example of FIG. 14B, the power is turned on at time S51 and the power is turned off at time S59. Here, the time S59 is before the time S54 in FIG. That is, after the power (supply level V0) required for starting the main program is supplied, the power is cut off before the predetermined time (time T23) elapses (before the time S54 is reached), and the voltage drops. Here is an example. In such a case, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power supply becomes the Low level.
In the example of FIG. 14(b), when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Although not shown in FIG. 14, it is possible that the power is cut off immediately after the subprogram is activated (after time S53) and before the time S54 (before the main program is activated). To be
When the power is cut off at the above timing, the subprogram executes the power cut processing of the subprogram. Then, it is possible to complete the power-off process of the sub-program before the voltage supplied to the sub-control board 80 reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, since the power-off at the above timing is the power-off before the start of the main program, the main program does not start as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 further improves the accuracy of the medal insertion determination and is also effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 may not be provided, and only the pair of input sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medal M moving in a substantially horizontal direction, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is falling substantially vertically downward, the medal M may be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but it is not limited to this. Any device having a function of sending the medal M to the outside of the medal passage before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a may be used.
Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are illustrated so as to detect an area slightly above the center position of the medal M when viewed from the front, but the actual product has such a configuration. Does not mean. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any manner as long as they are arranged so as to reliably detect the passing medal M.

(4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when it is located at M4, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is at the position M1 in FIG. 2 and the time from the moment the hand is released to the time M4 is reached, T2 may be set, and "T2>T1" may be set. Alternatively, the time taken for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be set to T2, and “T2>T1” may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when the power cutoff occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cutoff process is executed before the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power off process may be executed before the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, due to the power-off process, the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44a.
Alternatively, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power off process may be executed before the medal M reaches the insertion sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a, but is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b and the power-off process is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the time T1 until the power cut is detected and the power cut processing (blocker off) is executed. Can be set to be shorter than the time required for the medal M to reach the position where the blocker 45 is installed from the position of M2 (this time is referred to as “T2′”). With this setting, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position of M2, the blocker 45 is already turned off. Therefore, the medal can be prevented from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
In the above, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment when the hand is released at the position of M1 or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power-off process (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt process next to the interrupt process in which the power-off is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set such that the power-off process (blocker off) is executed after, for example, the “2” to “5” interrupt process, counting from the interrupt process that detected the power-off. Alternatively, the power-off process (blocker off) may be executed by the interrupt process that detects the power-off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, the time T0 required for the voltage to reach the sustain level V1 from the supply level V0 is set to 20 interrupts when the power is cut off, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is possible to make various settings without depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when the medal M is paid out by the medal payout device, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout medals M themselves may be detected by the payout sensors 37a and 37b. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged like the insertion sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect passage of the (payout) medal M.

Further, when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in such a manner, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Dispensing sensor 37a is on, dispensing sensor 37b is off (time S31')
Dispensing sensor 37a on, dispensing sensor 37b on (time S32')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b on (time S33')
Dispensing sensor 37a off, dispensing sensor 37b off (time S34')
Follow the course of.
Then, the time from time S31' to S34' is set to be shorter than time T1 (the time from the occurrence of the power interruption to the execution of the power interruption processing).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate trace 57b is formed so that the projection 57d and the recess 57c are on the outer side. Conversely, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the projection 57d and the recess 57c are on the inner side. It is also possible. The same applies to the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate trace 57b has the shape shown in FIG. 10B, the outer surface of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 becomes a smooth surface. On the other hand, in the case of the shape shown in FIG. 10C, the protrusion 57e is formed outside the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58.

(11) In the second embodiment, an example in which the main control board 50 is housed is given as an example of the board case 56. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which fraud is desired to be prevented, for example, the board case of the sub control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub control board 80 also includes the RWM 83, the ROM 54, the sub CPU 85, and the like, but on the upper surface of the upper cover of the board case of the sub control board 80, at least the sub board in a direction perpendicular to the gate mark (directly below). The CPU 85 may not be arranged, and the RWM 83 and the ROM 54 may not be arranged. Similarly, it is possible to prevent the model number display areas of the sub-control board 80 from overlapping in the vertical direction (immediately below) of the gate trace.

(12) In the third embodiment, the pressing order effect during AT and the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31) and the number of remaining games during AT have been described as an example. The third embodiment can be applied even when the number of games (BB games, etc.) acquired and the number of remaining available games are displayed.
For example, the number of acquisitions at the start of the "N" game is "200", the number of acquisitions at the start of the "N+1" game is "209", and the number of acquisitions at the start of the "N+2" game is " Suppose it was 218". Further, the main control board 50 is assumed to transmit a command regarding the acquired number to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game.
Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs in the middle of the “N” game and communication is restored in the middle of the “N+1” game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the number to be acquired in the "N" game. Further, at the start of the "N+1" game, since the command regarding the acquired number is not received (due to the disconnection), the "N+1" game also maintains the display of the acquired number "200". Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command regarding the acquired number at the start of the “N+2” game, it updates the display of the acquired number “218” based on the command.

(13) In FIG. 11 of the third embodiment, an example is shown in which the image display is normally restored at the start of the “N+2” game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display may be returned to the normal state after the total stop of the “N+1” game or when a bet operation is performed thereafter. Alternatively, it is also possible to restore the image display to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during or after the complete stop.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of an open "N+1" game, there is a case where the player wins the addition (addition) lottery in the number of available games and the number of games in AT. In this case, since the “N+1” game is disconnected, the sub control board 80 cannot receive a command based on winning the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the “N+2” game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the addition (addition) lottery, and at the start of the “N+2” game, the sub control board 80. It is possible to display the game information (the number of games that can be acquired and the number of games) after being added.

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, when the communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the “N+1” game is operated, the wire is disconnected after the right first stop of the “N” game Is possible. Then, in the "N+1" game, it is assumed that the player has made a right first stop. In this case, when the sub control board 80 receives the right first stop command at the "N+1" game, it means that the stop command of the stop switch 42 that has already been operated is received, and therefore the push order failure effect is produced. Output. Then, at the time of a bet operation after the entire stop of the "N+1" game or at the start of the "N+2" game, the image display may be returned to a normal one.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the acquired number is displayed as an image during AT, the following method may be used as the update processing of the image display of the acquired number before and after the disconnection.
When the payout process is performed, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating the acquired number to the sub control board 80. Here, when a disconnection occurs in the middle of the “N” game, the sub control board 80 cannot receive the number of acquired “N” games. Immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 is supposed to display "100" as the acquired number in AT. In addition, both the "N" game item and the "N+1" game item in AT are supposed to acquire 10 cards.
In this case, the number of coins in the AT at the end of the "N" game should originally be "110", but remains "100" (because of disconnection). Then, it is assumed that the communication is restored in the middle of the "N+1" game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can return the number of coins in AT to a normal value based on the command of the number of coins received during the payout process of the "N+1" game. Here, it may be returned to a normal value at the time of payout processing of the "N+1" game, or may be returned to a normal value at the start of the "N+2" game, as in the example of FIG. Further, it may be updated to "110" at the time of payout processing of the "N+1" game and updated to "120" at the start of the "N+2" game.

(17) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. In pachinko gaming machines, starting mouth (starting the symbol fluctuation by the symbol fluctuation display device and winning the random number for the big hit lottery), Den Chu winning mouth (when the game ball wins, the next winning For the sake of ease, a prize hole is provided with a character that opens for a certain period of time and then closes. The electric chew is not limited to a tulip shape.) It is provided. Then, the first embodiment (B) can be applied to these winning openings.

Specifically, for example, a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a gaming ball that has won the starting opening) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects a gaming ball after being detected by the winning sensor) are provided at the starting opening. It is provided. Further, the attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has won the attacker) and an ejection sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V winning sensor). ..
For example, in the case of the starting opening, when the power supply cutoff occurs at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the discharge sensor is set to detect the game ball before the power supply cutoff process is executed. Thereby, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the prize ball can be correctly counted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from not being paid out even though the game balls have won in the winning opening. The same applies to the V winning sensor and the discharge sensor of the attacker.

(18) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of one of the gaming machines. However, the slot machine 10 is a “revolving-type gaming machine” installed in the fourth branch office to which the wind management law is applied. The present invention is not limited to (so-called “pachi-slot gaming machine”), but can be applied to, for example, a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) that does not use medals used for gaming as a gaming medium.

Here, the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37) in FIG. 1, for example. Further, the medal slot 47 and the medal selector can be eliminated. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) given by winning the winning combination are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the credit number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (allows a maximum of “99,999” electronic medals to be stored).
Even in such a casino machine or an enclosed game machine (medalless game machine), the present invention can be applied to all of the above-described embodiments and the following embodiments except the first embodiment.

<Sixth Embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
Further, FIG. 15A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state before the last ejected medal contacts the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 15B shows the last ejected medal. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the hopper disc 101 has been rotated further than the state (a) before being brought into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

Furthermore, FIG. 16(a) is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state where the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16(b) shows the last ejected medal. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state where the movable shaft 38b is pushed and moved.
Further, FIG. 17A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting portion, and FIG. 17B is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 after ejecting the last ejected medal. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state where the rotation of the disc is stopped.

In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 that stores medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 that rotates the hopper disk 101. Further, the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, as in the first embodiment. Then, the main control board 50 controls driving of the hopper motor 36.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disc 101 is formed in a disc shape, and the hopper disc 101 has a holding portion which is an opening portion capable of holding the medals stored in the hopper. Eight 102 are provided along the outer circumference of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in a circular hole shape that penetrates from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101. The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed so as to enter the holding portions 102 through the upper openings of the holding portions 102 and be held by the holding portions 102, respectively.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disc 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held by the respective holders 102 move in a clockwise arc along with the hopper disk 101, and are sequentially discharged from the discharge section 103.
When a medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103, the holding unit 102 that holds the medal becomes empty. Then, the medals stored in the hopper 35 newly enter the empty holding unit 102.

Further, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. Further, in the sixth embodiment, a space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is a discharging unit 103 for discharging medals.
As shown in FIG. 16B, when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b to move the movable shaft 38b and the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes larger than the diameter of the medal, the medal moves to the fixed shaft 38a. And the movable shaft 38b. At this time, the medals will be ejected from the ejecting unit 103.
Further, at the moment when the medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103. It is a moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medal has been ejected from the ejection unit 103.

In one payout process, the medal ejected last from the ejecting unit 103 is referred to as a “last eject medal”, and the medal ejected first from the ejecting unit 103 in the next payout process is referred to as “first ejecting medal”. It is referred to as a “discharge medal”.
15 to 17, the medals are indicated by a chain double-dashed line. The medal with the letter "A" is the last ejected medal in the one payout process, and the medal with the letter "B" is the first ejected medal in the next payout process.

Further, the position of the holding unit 102 that held the last ejected medal at the moment when the last ejected medal was ejected from the ejecting unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as a “first position”, and one payout is performed. The position of the holding unit 102 that holds the first discharged medal in the next payout process at the moment when the last discharged medal in the process is discharged from the discharging unit 103 is referred to as a “second position”.
FIG. 17A shows the state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 (the hopper disc 101, the holding units 102, the respective medals with the letters "A" to "D", the fixed shaft 38a). , And the positional relationship between the movable shaft 38b). Then, in FIG. 17A, the position of the holding unit 102 where the medal with the letter “A” was held is the first position, and the medal with the letter “B” is held. The position of the holding portion 102 is the second position.

Then, in the sixth embodiment, when the one payout process is completed, the main control board 50 causes the holding unit 102, which holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process, to have the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the state where it is located between and.
FIG. 17B shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disc 101 is stopped after the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103. In FIG. 17B, the first position and the second position are indicated by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 17B, the medal with the character “B” is the first ejected medal in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17( b ), the hopper disc 101 is held with the holding unit 102 holding the medals with the letter “B” positioned between the first position and the second position. Rotation has stopped.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as the hopper motor 36.
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, the main control board 50 causes the hopper motor 36 to flow a current in a direction opposite to the direction in which the medals are discharged, so that the driving of the hopper motor 36 is suddenly stopped and the hopper disk 101 is released. The rotation of can be stopped suddenly.

Further, as described above, when the medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that fact.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejecting unit 103, an electric current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting the medal is applied to the hopper motor 36 to rotate the hopper disc 101. By making an abrupt stop, the holding unit 102, which holds the first discharged medal in the next payout process, can be stopped at the second position.

Further, by supplying an electric current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting medals to the hopper motor 36, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction and the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the reverse direction (counterclockwise rotation). ..
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, even if the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process has passed the second position, a current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting the medal is applied to the hopper. The hopper disk 101 can be reversely rotated and returned to the second position by causing the motor 36 to flow.
Then, by returning the holding unit 102 holding the first discharged medal to the second position, the first discharged medal can start moving from the same second position every time. Accordingly, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, and thus the first ejected medal can be stably ejected.

Here, when a constant current is supplied, the DC motor as the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates from the state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the ejection status of medals from the ejection portion 103 in the sixth embodiment.
18, the upper line shows the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the middle line shows the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the lower line shows the ejection status of medals from the ejection unit 103.

Further, the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal output from a predetermined output port provided in the main control board 50, and when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is changed from OFF to ON, a constant current is supplied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 flows from ON to OFF, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0".
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, “stop” of the driving state of the hopper motor 36 indicates a state where the rotation of the driving shaft is stopped, and “constant speed” of the driving state of the hopper motor 36 indicates that the rotation of the driving shaft is constant speed. Shows the state of reaching (constant speed).

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 changes from OFF to ON, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stop" to "constant speed".
In addition, a portion in which the line indicating the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is obliquely rising to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated.

As described above, in the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates when the drive signal changes from OFF to ON.
Therefore, if the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal stops at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates by the time the holding unit 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal ejection interval at a constant speed.
That is, when the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving the hopper motor 36 until the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejector 103 is the same. It becomes longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft of 36 rotates at a constant speed.
This may give the player a feeling that the ejection of the first (first) medal has been delayed.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the end of one payout process, the main control board 50 has a holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the state where it is located.
When the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal stops between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position becomes shorter than that when the holding unit 102 stops at the second position. .. As a result, the time required to reach the first position is shorter than when the vehicle stops at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually accelerated, the first (first) medal It is possible not to give the player the feeling that the discharge of is delayed.

Further, when the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, as shown in FIG. 17B, two adjacent holding units 102 in the hopper disc 101. The part corresponding to the space between the two is located in front of the discharge part 103.
As a result, an illegal act such as wire is inserted from the medal payout opening provided at the lower front portion of the front door 12, and the illegal act of trying to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101 is carried out. Even if it is broken, the portion of the hopper disk 101 corresponding to the space between the two adjacent holding portions 102 serves as a barrier, and it is possible to prevent access to the holding portion 102 by an unauthorized device.

Further, when the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is “constant speed”, the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held in the respective holding units 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharging unit 103 at equal intervals.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is changed from ON to OFF, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from “constant speed”, and then reaches “stop”.
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is diagonally downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated.

As described above, in the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor, the rotation of the drive shaft is gradually decelerated when the drive signal changes from on to off.
Then, the last ejected medal passes through between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (ejection unit 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, whereby the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejector 103. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from ON to OFF.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually reduced, and the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disc 101 is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the main control board 50 turns the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from OFF to ON, thereafter, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80. The payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 starts the process related to the output of the payout sound. After that, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the main control board 50 turns the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from ON to OFF, thereafter, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80. This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has finished the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub control board 80 receives the payout end command, the sub control board 80 ends the process related to the output of the payout sound. This ends the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22.

Here, the “payout sound” means a sound output from the sub control board 80 side in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as “plururu” can be output from the speaker 22.
In addition, the “process relating to the output of the payout sound” includes a series of processes such as a process of selecting a sound to be output, a process of selecting a channel to output the selected sound, and a process of outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. It is meant. By executing this series of processing, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub control board 80 performs a process related to the output of the payout sound. By starting, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started before the first ejected medal is ejected from the ejecting unit 103.

Further, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80, and when the sub control board 80 receives the payout end command, the sub control board 80 performs processing related to output of payout sound. When the discharging of the medals from the discharging unit 103 is stopped by ending the above, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be ended.
As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the payout of medals and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection states of the payout sensors 37 a and 37 b, and the timing of ejecting medals from the ejecting unit 103.
When a winning combination with a payout is won, the main control board 50 sets payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
For example, when a winning combination of 10 coins is paid out and 10 medals are paid out, "10" is set as payout amount data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
That is, when paying out “N” medals (N≧1), “N” is set as payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Further, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 is “started” (starts driving) from the “stopped” state, goes through “acceleration”, and reaches “constant speed”.
At the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position. At the start of, the hopper motor 36 reaches the "constant speed" by the time the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches the “constant speed” by the time the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal reaches the first position. doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 reaches “constant speed” from “stop” through “acceleration”, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal reaches the first position, so that the first ejected The medals are surely ejected from the ejecting unit 103.
Furthermore, at the timing of (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are off.
The timing (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment (C), the payout sensor 37a is set to low active. That is, the payout sensor 37a is set so that the state in which the movable piece 39a is detected is turned off and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned on.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to high active, as in the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37b is set to be turned off when the movable piece 39a is not detected and turned on when the movable piece 39a is detected.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the timing of (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned off.
Note that in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active and the payout sensor 37b is set to high active. Therefore, the payout sensor 37a signal is different from that of FIG. 8 in the first embodiment (C). The waveform of turns on and off.

Further, at the timing of (b) in FIG. 19, the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b to move the movable shaft 38b, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on and the payout sensor 37b is turned off.
The state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19, the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes larger than the diameter of the medal, and the payout sensor 37a is in the on state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state. Become. At this time, medals are ejected from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (the ejection portion 103).
The state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, at the timing of (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is being urged by the spring 39b to return to the original position, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state. Becomes
The state (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Further, at the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is biased by the spring 39b to return to the original position, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been ejected, and updates the payout number data.
The state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When paying out "N" medals, (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N"th medal has been ejected.
When determining that the “N”th medal has been discharged, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 goes through "deceleration" and then "stops".
As a result, the payout process of “N” medals is completed.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of payout processing in the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, in step S101, payout amount data is set. This process is a process of storing payout amount data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when paying out “N” medals (N≧1), “N” is stored as payout amount data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 is started. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the movable shaft 38b is pushed by the medal and moved) is turned on. Is set to be.

If “Yes” in the step S103, the process proceeds to the next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, if “Yes” in the step S104, the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, if "No" in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, if the payout sensor 37a is already on when the payout sensor 37a is turned on, the determination result in step S104 is "No". In this case, it is conceivable that the ejection unit 103 is clogged with medals (medal clogging error). Further, when a medal jam error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medal is removed (the cause of the error is eliminated) and the reset switch is operated. Then, if the clogged medal is removed and the reset switch is operated, the error is released.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if “No” continues for a predetermined time in step S103 (the predetermined time has passed as “No”), an error occurs. In this case, it is conceivable that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty (hopper empty error). When the hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (the cause of the error is removed) and the reset switch is operated. When the hopper 35 is replenished with medals and the reset switch is operated, the error is released.
In step S105, the main control board 50 determines again whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. If “Yes” in the step S105, the process proceeds to the next step S106. On the other hand, if "No" in step S105, an error occurs, as in the case of "No" in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is turned on. Then, if “Yes” in the step S106, the process proceeds to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 determines again whether or not the payout sensor 37a is turned on. Here, if “Yes” in the step S107, the process proceeds to the next step S108. On the other hand, if “No” in step S107, an error occurs, as in the case of “No” in step S104 or S105.

When the process proceeds to step S108, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Then, if “Yes” in the step S108, the process proceeds to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. If “Yes” in the step S109, the process proceeds to a step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off.
If “Yes” in the step S110, the process proceeds to the next step S111. On the other hand, if “No” in step S110, an error occurs, as in the case of “No” in step S104, S105, or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout amount data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the payout amount data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and storing the subtracted data as new payout amount data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout amount data is "0". Here, if “Yes” in the step S112, the process proceeds to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart is completed. On the other hand, if "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal is paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout amount data becomes "0".

Here, the medals ejected from the ejection unit 103 are normally guided to a medal tray through a passage called a medal chute.
However, rarely, the medals ejected from the ejection unit 103 may hit the inner wall of the medal chute and bounce back to return to the ejection unit 103. At this time, the bounced medal may hit the medal that is about to be ejected from the ejecting unit 103 next, and may push back the medal that is about to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in steps S103 to S110 in the flowchart of the payout process in FIG. 20, the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is repeatedly determined in the order of “payout sensor 37a”→“payout sensor 37b”. To do.
This makes it possible to detect an error in which the medal being ejected from the ejecting unit 103 is pushed back.

For example, it is assumed that one medal is about to be ejected, the movable shaft 38b moves by pushing the movable shaft 38b, and the payout sensor 37a is in the on state and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state. (Timing (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that the medal paid out before this medal bounces and hits the medal, the medal is pushed back, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, “No” is obtained in step S105 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.
Further, for example, it is assumed that the medal is pushed back at the timing of (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, “No” is obtained in step S107 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.

<Modification of Sixth Embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, eight holding portions 102 are provided on the hopper disc 101, but the number of holding portions is not limited to eight, and the size of the hopper disc 101 may be, for example, five, six, ten, or the like. It can be set appropriately according to the size.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disc 101 is formed in a disc shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hopper disc 101 may be formed in a sprocket shape, for example. That is, the holding unit 102 is not limited to the circular hole shape as long as it can hold medals.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disc 101 during the payout process of medals is clockwise. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hopper disc 101 rotates counterclockwise and the holding unit 102 is rotated. The medals held in the above may be sequentially discharged from the discharging unit 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, the DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36, for example.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, and may be the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, for example. Even with such a payout processing flow, medal discharge can be detected. However, in such a payout processing flow, it is not possible to detect an error in which the medal that is about to be ejected next is pushed back by the medal that has rebounded on the inner wall of the medal chute.
20 and 21, the same step number is assigned to the process having the same content.
(6) The various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments and the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being carried out alone, but may be carried out in an appropriate combination.

<Seventh Embodiment>
The present invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 mounted inside the cabinet 13 and the sub-control board 80 mounted on the back surface of the front door 12.
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 having an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.
Further, the cabinet 13 is formed into a box shape having an opening on the front side by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a right side plate, a left side plate, a top plate, and the like.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is arranged below the inside of the cabinet 13 (on the bottom plate 13a). The medal payout device 15 is for paying out medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. I have it.

Further, inside the cabinet 13, above the medal payout device 15, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided. A display device 14 is arranged.
Further, the symbol display device 14 includes a square frame-shaped reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged in parallel inside the reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, a motor 32 is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by a reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel board case 121 is arranged on the reel frame 14a, and the reel control board 120 is accommodated in the reel board case 121. The reel control board 120 controls driving of the three motors 32.

A transparent main board case 56 is arranged above the symbol display device 14 inside the cabinet 13. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed to the front side of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 (the inner side of the housing) at a position above the symbol display device 14. The main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 56.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, a RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55 and the like. Further, on the main control board 50, via the input port 51 or the output port 52, the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the symbol display device 14, the medal payout device 15, the reel control board 120, the sub control board. 80 and the like are electrically connected.

Further, the front door 12 is attached so as to open and close the opening of the cabinet 13 so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13. More specifically, the left side portion of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. Then, by rotating the front door 12 about this hinge, the front side opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.

A transparent display window is provided at the center of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Then, the player can visually recognize each of the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
On the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, etc. are arranged. ..

Furthermore, in the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, a medal payout opening through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 pass, and a medal paid out from the medal payout opening are received. A medal tray is arranged.
Furthermore, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, and the like are arranged above the front side (player side) of the front door 12.

A transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged above the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed to the rear surface side of the front door 12 (the inner surface side of the housing), above the symbol display device 14, and at the position corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub control board 80 is housed in the sub board case 87.
The sub-control board 80 controls the effect, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, a RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. Further, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, and the like are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Then, the sub-control board 80 determines what kind of effect should be output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50, and according to the decision, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the like. The output of the image display device 23 is controlled.

As described above, the main board case 56 is arranged in the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14, and the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 56.
Further, on the back surface of the front door 12, a sub-board case 87 is arranged above the symbol display device 14, and a sub-control board 80 is housed in the sub-board case 87.
Then, as shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are arranged to face each other.
Further, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 when the front door 12 is closed is set to be wider than the width of the reel control board 120 in the depth direction.

Here, on the sub-control board 80, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for storing electricity is arranged. The electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 bursts due to a problem, the filled electrolytic solution may be scattered. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a problem, the scattered electrolytic solution is It may adhere to the main CPU 55 and cause the main CPU 55 to malfunction. Further, the main CPU 55 may be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged on the sub-control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution scatters, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and thus the main CPU 55 does not malfunction. be able to. Further, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
Further, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, the main CPU 55 may malfunction due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. By disposing the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. You can

FIG. 23A shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 1.
In FIG. 23A, the circle shown by the broken line is a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 on the main control board 50.

In the example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, the number of the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 is one, and the electrolytic capacitors 86 are arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction. It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50.
In this way, by disposing the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 at different positions in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, The position of the electrolytic capacitor 86 can be a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

<Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, but may be two, for example, as shown in FIG.
FIG. 23B shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows the example 2.

Also in FIG. 23B, similarly to FIG. 23A, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 projected on the main control board 50 is indicated by a broken line.
In FIG. 23B, the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both arranged at different positions in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
As a result, also in the example 2 of FIG. 23B, the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are arranged at positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be four, for example, as shown in FIG.
FIG. 24C shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows the example 3.
The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is projected on the main control board 50 and is shown by a broken line circle, as in FIGS. 23(a) and 23(b).

In FIG. 24C, the sub control board 80 includes four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. It is arranged. The remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged in the same position in the vertical direction as the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, although the horizontal direction is different.
Even with such an arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are located at positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged, for example, at a position away from the main control board 50.
FIG. 24D shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows the example 4.
The projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80, which is shown by a dashed circle, is the same as in FIGS. 23A, 23B, and 24C.

In FIG. 24D, the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one as in FIG. 23A, but unlike FIG. 23A, the electrolytic capacitors on the sub-control board 80 are different. 86 is arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50.
As described above, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Will be there.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 23(a), (b), 24(c) and (d), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is placed at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. When the electrolytic capacitor 86 is ruptured due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and the main CPU 55 malfunctions. You can prevent it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also referred to as “role ratio monitor”) is arranged on the main control board 50. The management information display LED 74 displays management information such as an advantageous section ratio, a continuous character ratio, and a character ratio.
Further, the "advantageous section ratio" means the ratio of the advantageous section to all the game sections (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section), and the "continuous character ratio" is the first to the total number of medals acquired. It means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the special special accessory (RB) is activated, and the "character ratio" means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the accessory is operated to the total number of medals acquired.

Then, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74. Good.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 ruptures due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74 can be managed. You can ensure that the information is not invisible.
Further, it is possible to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
(5) The various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments and the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to be performed alone, but may be appropriately combined and implemented.

<Eighth Embodiment>
The eighth embodiment relates to a gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion (A portion in FIG. 22) of the housing of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, and a gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 will be described. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 25, a lower portion of the cabinet 13 is provided with a first closing portion 13c that projects toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closing portion 13c is a plate-like protruding portion that protrudes forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and the protruding direction of the first closing portion 13c when the front door 12 is closed. Is in the direction of the front door 12.
The first closing portion 13c is formed in a horizontally long shape from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is formed of sheet metal, and is fixed to the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 by screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at the lower portion of the front door 12 below the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a protruding toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-like protruding portion that protrudes rearward from the lower rear surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the protruding direction of the second closing portion 12a is It is the direction toward the cabinet 13.

Further, the second closing portion 12a is arranged at a position below the first closing portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed in a horizontally long shape from the right end to the left end of the lower portion of the back surface of the front door 12.
Further, the second closing portion 12a is also formed of sheet metal like the first closing portion 13c, and is fixed to the lower rear surface of the front door 12 by screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position above the first closing portion 13c in the lower portion of the front door 12, the third closing portion 12b protruding toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, like the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is a plate-like protruding portion that protrudes rearward from the lower rear surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, The protruding direction of the 3-blocking portion 12b is the cabinet 13 direction.

Further, the third closing portion 12b is formed in a laterally long shape from the right end to the left end of the lower rear surface of the front door 12, similarly to the second closing portion 12a.
Furthermore, unlike the second closing portion 12a, the third closing portion 12b is arranged above the first closing portion 13c.
Further, the third closing portion 12b is also formed of sheet metal like the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, and is fixed to the lower rear surface of the front door 12 by screws.

Then, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is formed between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
For this reason, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing is bent as shown in FIG. It becomes the shape. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an illegal act (got action) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by inserting a wire into the housing through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12.

A door sensor that detects the opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front surface side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. The door sensor is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting/receiving unit, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Furthermore, on the front surface side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, there is provided a detection piece movable in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12. The detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed, and is pushed forward by being biased by a spring when the front door 12 is opened.

Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in the state of detecting the detection piece and is in the off state. That is, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece is urged by the spring and jumps out forward to come out from the inside of the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state of not detecting the detection piece and is in an on state.

Then, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in the closed state when the door sensor is in the off state, and determines that the front door 12 is in the open state when the door sensor is in the on state.
In this way, the opening/closing of the front door 12 detects the opening/closing of the front door 12 by moving the detection piece in the front-rear direction and turning on/off the door sensor.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the pushed state, goes out from the inside state of the door sensor, and goes from the off state to the on state of the door sensor.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 is referred to as a "detection start position".
Further, the time when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 means the moment when the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion is provided between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. 13c is formed so as to be arranged.
That is, even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor is turned from the off state to the on state, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. Is formed.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the door sensor is first changed from the off state to the on state, and then the first closing part 13c is removed from between the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b. It will be.
Then, when the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in the open state, and transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 causes the door opening command to be opened. When it receives, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 and the like inform that the front door 12 is open. As a result, the clerk in the hall can be informed that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, before the notification that the front door 12 is open is started, the first closed portion 13c does not come out between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b, and the front door 12 is opened. Even at the position where the notification of the effect is started, since the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 has a bent shape, the wire is inserted into the housing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act (goto act) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing it.

In the sixth embodiment, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, so that the two holding units 102 adjacent to each other in the hopper disk 101 are placed between the two holding units 102. A corresponding portion can be located in front of the ejection portion 103, whereby it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of inserting a wire or the like from the medal payout opening to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disc 101. As described above, by providing both the configurations of the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent illegal acts of inserting a wire or the like and accessing the medal payout device 15.

Here, the distance between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a is "h1", the distance between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b is "h2", and the distance between the second closing portion 12a and the second closing portion 12a. The distance from the third blocking portion 12b is "h3", and the protruding width (depth) of the second blocking portion 12a is "w".
The diameter of the medal is “d” and the thickness of the medal is “t”.
In addition, as for the size of a general medal, the diameter is 24.5 to 25.5 mm and the thickness is 1.5 to 2.0 mm.
In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the medal thickness “t” is set so as to satisfy “h2>t”. ing.

Here, when the clerk in the hall opens the front door 12 and replenishes the hopper 35 with medals, the medals may be dropped on the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
In particular, since the hopper 35 is replenished with medals from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, the medals may be dropped near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closed portion 13c.

At this time, if the setting is made so as to satisfy “h2>t”, even if the front door 12 is closed while the medals have fallen near the first closing portion 13c, the medals that have fallen near the first closing portion 13c will remain. , Between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Further, there is no possibility that the front door 12 cannot be closed because a medal is sandwiched between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b.

In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protruding width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d” is set to satisfy “w<(d/2)”. Has been done.
By setting so as to satisfy “w<(d/2)”, it is possible to prevent the medal from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed while the medals are placed on the second closing portion 12a, and thus the medals placed on the second closing portion 12a prevent the front door 12 from being closed. It is possible to prevent damage to the cabinet 12 and the cabinet 13.

<Modification of Eighth Embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured by using an optical sensor having a light emitting/receiving unit, but is not limited to this, and may be configured by using a proximity sensor, for example.
Even when the proximity sensor is used to configure the door sensor, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not only closed when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is at the detection start position. The first closing portion 13c is arranged between the two.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, on the front surface side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, a detection piece movable in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 is provided. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed rearward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece is urged by a spring to jump forward. So that it goes out from inside the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor that detects opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided at a position corresponding to the door sensor on the front door 12. Then, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters into the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 goes out from inside the door sensor. You can

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side, but not limited to this, it may be provided on the front door 12 side, for example.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is turned off when the detection piece is being detected and is on when the detection piece is not being detected. That is, the door sensor was set to low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be turned on when the detection piece is being detected and may be off when the detection piece is not being detected. That is, the door sensor may be set to high active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is open when the door sensor is off. To configure.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c is formed in a horizontally long shape from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. Further, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed in a horizontally long shape from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first closed portion 13c may be composed of two members, a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a, or divided into three parts. You may comprise from the three members mentioned above.
Similarly to the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be formed of two members or may be formed of three members.
As described above, the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a, and the third closing portion 12b are not limited to being formed of one member, and may be formed of a plurality of members.

Further, the first closing part 13c does not extend from the right end to the left end of the bottom plate 13a front end of the cabinet 13, and the first closing part 13c is provided near the right end or the left end of the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, for example. You may have a part which does not have.
Similarly, the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 may have a part where the second closing part 12a and the third closing part 12b are not provided.
In this way, even if it has a portion where the first closing portion 13c, the second closing portion 12a, and the third closing portion 12b are not provided, inside the housing from the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like through a wire.
The first closed portion 13c may be a part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 or may be a member different from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12 a and the third closing portion 12 b may be part of the front door 12 or may be separate members from the front door 12.

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c is formed between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a, or the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b, or the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
Further, the entire first closing portion 13c may be arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b, or a part of the first closing portion 13c may be arranged. Good.

Furthermore, in a state where the front door 12 is closed, the first closing portion 13c may be in contact with a position on the back surface of the front door 12 corresponding to a position between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. ..
Further, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, the first closing portion 13c protruding from the lower rear surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13 is provided, and the first closing portion 13c at the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 is directed toward the front door 12 from a position below the first closing portion 13c. The protruding second closing portion 12a may be provided, and the third closing portion 12b protruding toward the front door 12 from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 may be provided.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance “h2” between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b and the medal thickness “t” is set to satisfy “h2>t”. ..
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy, for example, “h2<t”.
If "h2>t" is set to be satisfied, when the front door 12 is closed with the medals falling near the first closing portion 13c, the medals falling near the first closing portion 13c will be changed to the third closing portion. It hits the rear end of 12b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Further, there is no possibility that the front door 12 cannot be closed because a medal is sandwiched between the first closing portion 13c and the third closing portion 12b.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protrusion width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the medal diameter “d” is set to satisfy “w<(d/2)”. did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to satisfy, for example, “(d/2)<w<d”.
By satisfying “(d/2)<w”, it becomes possible to place a medal on the second closed portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “w<d”, even if the front door 12 is closed while a medal is placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front closing door 12a is closed before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medals hit the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 cannot be closed.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second blocking portion 12a, and thus the medals placed on the second blocking portion 12a to the hall clerk. The front door 12 can be closed by removing it.

(9) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal “d”, and the distance “h1” between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set so as to satisfy “(d/2)<w” and “h1<t”.
As described above, by satisfying “(d/2)<w”, it becomes possible to place a medal on the second closed portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “h1<t”, even if the front door 12 is closed while a medal is placed on the second closing portion 12a, the front closing door 12a is closed before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medals hit the front end of the first closing portion 13c, the front door 12 does not close.
This allows the hall clerk to know that the medals are placed on the second blocking portion 12a, and thus the medals placed on the second blocking portion 12a to the hall clerk. The front door 12 can be closed by removing it.

(10) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal "d", and the distance "h1" between the first closing portion 13c and the second closing portion 12a and the medal The relationship with the thickness “t” may be set so as to satisfy “d<w” and “h1>t”.
By satisfying “d<w”, the entire medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closed portion 12a without a part of the medal sticking out of the second closed portion 12a. Further, by satisfying “h1>t”, it becomes possible to insert a medal between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal placed on the second closing part 12a, the front door 12 is closed with the medal being housed between the first closing part 13c and the second closing part 12a. It will be. Thereby, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 or the cabinet 13. Further, the medal placed on the second closing portion 12a does not hit the first closing portion 13c or the front end portion of the cabinet 13 to prevent the front door 12 from closing.
(11) The various modifications described in the first to eighth embodiments and the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to be performed alone, but may be appropriately combined and performed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side and control of output of effects on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26(a) is a diagram showing types of special roles (features) and ending conditions, and FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing types of gaming states and a prescribed number of each gaming state. (C) is a figure which shows the number table of an internal drawing and an advantageous section drawing in the setting 1.

As shown in FIG. 26( a ), in the ninth embodiment, as special roles (features), BB (first-class role product continuous operation device; first-class big bonus) and RB (first-class special role product). It has three features: a regular bonus) and an MB (second class accessory continuous operation device; second class big bonus).
Here, the BB is a device that can continuously operate the RB. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is continuously executed. Also, during the RB game, the winning probability of the small winning combination becomes high. Furthermore, when the payout number of medals during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Further, when the payout number of medals during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is finished.

Further, the MB is a device capable of continuously operating CB (second class special accessory). That is, during the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the result of the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, all the small wins are won, and the stop switch 42 is operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Further, the CB game ends with one game, and when the payout number of medals during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, in the ninth embodiment, seven gaming states are provided: non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, RB game, BB game, and MB game. There is. Then, the main control board 50 controls the transition of these gaming states.
Here, the "specified number" means the number of inserted medals for which the start switch 41 can be operated (a game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the prescribed number in MB is set to "1", and the prescribed number in the game state other than in MB is set to "3".

Further, “RT” means that the type (number) of the condition device (accessory, replay, small role) to be subject to the lottery and its winning probability are in a particular lottery state.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but means that the type of the condition device to be selected by lottery and its winning probability are different from RT.
In any one of the game states, if the RT start condition is satisfied, the next game shifts to RT, and if the RT end condition is satisfied at RT, the next game shifts to non-RT.

When the special combination is won, the winning information of the special combination is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the selected special combination stops on the activated line.
And, the game which is not won the special role is called "non-inside", and the special role was won. Games that carry over information are called "inside."

In addition, from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (maximum number of moving frames), the probability that a desired symbol to be stopped and displayed on the active line can be stopped on the active line is Rate (PB)”.
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line (effective). The fact that the line cannot be pulled in) is called “PB≠1”.
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), it is possible to always stop (pull in) the target symbol on the effective line. It is called “PB=1”.

Also, if the BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped on the activated line (BB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the BB game is started from the next game. During the BB game, the RB game is continuously executed, so that the winning probability of the small winning combination becomes high. When the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game is ended, and the game state before the shift to the BB game is returned from the next game.
Furthermore, if the BB is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to BB does not stop on the effective line, the winning information of BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the effective line. A game state in which the winning information of the BB is carried over is referred to as "inside the BB".
The timing of transition to the inside of the BB can be set appropriately. For example, in the game in which the BB is won, after all reels 31 are stopped, the game may be moved into the inside of the BB. In the game in which the BB is won, the game is not moved into the inside of the BB, and the inside of the BB is played in the next game. You may move in.

Also, when the RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the RB is stopped on the activated line (RB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the RB game is started from the next game. During the RB game, the chance of winning a small winning combination increases. When the payout number of medals during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game is ended, and the game state before the shift to the RB game is returned from the next game.
Furthermore, if the RB is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on the activated line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on the activated line. The game state in which the winning information of the RB is carried over is called "inside the RB".
The transition timing to the inside of the RB can be set appropriately as in the transition timing to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game that has won the RB, after all reels 31 have stopped, the RB may be moved to the inside of the RB. Also, in the game that has been won the RB, the game may not be moved to the inside of the RB, and the inside of the RB may be used in the next game. You may move in.

If MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to MB is stopped on the activated line (MB wins), no medals are paid out in the current game, but the MB game is started from the next game. During the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. Then, when the payout number of medals during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game is ended, and the game state before the shift to the MB game is returned from the next game.

Furthermore, if the MB is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop on the activated line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the activated line. A game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is referred to as "MB inside".
In the ninth embodiment, since the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to “PB=1”, if the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB in the game this time always stops on the activated line. , Never inside the MB.

The condition device (role) of the ninth embodiment is roughly classified into a special role (role), a replay (replay role), and a small role.
Furthermore, as special roles, there are three types of BB, RB, and MB, as replays, there are two types of replay 1 and replay 2, and as minor roles, common bell, left correct answer bell, and middle correct answer bell. , Right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2 are included.
The left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell are collectively referred to as "push order bell".
Further, the “condition device” operates in correspondence with the winning number determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or a plurality of condition devices corresponding to the winning number are activated, and the winning flag corresponding to the activated condition device is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26C, in the ninth embodiment, any one of the winning numbers from “0” to “16” is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 and corresponds to the determined winning number. Any condition device from non-winning to MB is activated.
Each of the two types of replays wins independently and never wins multiple wins with other condition devices (roles).
There are four types of bells: a common bell, a left correct answer bell, a middle correct answer bell, and a right correct answer bell, but all of them are won independently and are not won twice with other roles.

Furthermore, the watermelon has a single win and a double win with the BB.
Further, the cherry 1 has a single win and a double win with the BB, and the cherry 2 has a single win, a double win with the RB, and a double win with the BB. ..
In addition, the BB has a single win and a double win with the watermelon, the cherry 1 or the cherry 2, but the RB does not win the single and only wins the cherry 2 with the double. Only wins a single prize and does not win multiple wins with other roles.

The "payout" means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each condition device is stopped (the winning combination is won).
In the ninth embodiment, regarding the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell, the payouts differ between the prescribed number 3 (game state other than in MB) and the prescribed number 1 (in MB), but other than that, The dividend is the same for the prescribed number 3 and the prescribed number 1.

In addition, the left correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the left first stop is the correct answer push order and the other than the left first stop is the incorrect answer push order. , One medal is paid out in the wrong pressing order, and with the prescribed number 1, 14 medals are paid out in the correct pressing order, and 15 medals are paid out in the wrong pressing order.
Similarly, the middle correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the first correct stop is the correct push order, and the middle correct stop is the wrong answer push order, and the right correct bell is the right first stop is the correct push order. , Pushing bells that are the wrong pushing order except the first stop on the right.
The common bell is a bell that pays out eight medals regardless of the pressing order.

In addition, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). The winning combination lottery means 61 is for performing lottery for winning numbers. Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.
Further, the lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as “internal lottery”.
As shown in FIG. 26C, in the ninth embodiment, any one of the winning numbers “0” to “15” is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. The winning numbers “0” to “15” correspond to the condition devices of “non-winning” to “MB”, respectively. When the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined, the condition device of "replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" operates. When the winning number “8” is determined, the condition device of “watermelon+BB” corresponding to the winning number “8” operates.
As described in the first embodiment, the role lottery means 61 is based on the random number generating means, the random number extracting means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. The winning number determining means for determining the winning number is provided, and when the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.
Then, for example, in the non-internal state and the inside state, the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means are the same, the condition devices that operate may be the same, and the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means may be the same. The condition device to be used may be different.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the winning flag control means 62. The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination, based on the lottery result of the winning numbers by the winning combination lottery means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each winning combination for all winning combinations. When the winning number is determined by lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag). ..

For example, in the non-RT, when the winning number “1” is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of “Replay 1” included in the condition device of “Replay 1” corresponding to the winning number “1” is set. It is turned on and the other winning flags are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-RT, when the winning number “10” is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, “cherry 1” and “BB” included in the condition device of “cherry 1+BB” corresponding to the winning number “10”. The two winning flags “” are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

Also, since the winning information of the winning combinations other than the special winning combinations (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if the winning flag of the winning combination is turned on, the winning combination of the winning combination will not be carried over. The winning flag is turned off at the end of the game this time, regardless of whether or not the player wins.
On the other hand, since the winning information of the special roles (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, if the winning combination of the special role is won in the game this time The winning flag is kept on until a prize is won, and when the special part is won, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in the non-RT, when the winning number “10” is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, “cherry 1” and “BB” included in the condition device of “cherry 1+BB” corresponding to the winning number “10”. Two winning flags are turned on, but if "BB" is not won in this game, regardless of whether "cherry 1" is won in this game, at the end of this game, "cherry" The winning flag of "1" is turned off, and the winning flag of "BB" is kept on. In this case, from the next game, the inside of the BB is transferred.

Further, for example, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number “9” is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, in addition to the winning flag of the “BB” that has been carried over, “cherry” corresponding to the winning number “9” is added. The winning flag of "cherry 1" included in the condition device of "1" is turned on. That is, the two winning flags of "cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
Therefore, in the non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery means 61 in the lottery (double winning of "Cherry 1+BB"), and when the winning number "9" is selected by the role lottery means 61 inside the BB. The state of the winning flag is the same as when the winning flag is determined (individually winning "cherry 1").

Further, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 sets the winning flags of all the small wins (common bell, left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2). turn on. For this reason, although it is not won by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the state is the same as when all the small wins are won.
For example, in the MB game, when the winning number "0" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, none of the winning hands is included in the "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0". The winning flags of the small wins (7 above small wins) are turned on.
Further, for example, during the MB game, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the "replay 1" included in the condition device of "replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" In addition to the winning flags, the winning flags of all small wins (the above seven small wins) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the reel control means 65, and the reel control means 65 includes a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to ON/OFF of the winning flag. Equipped with. Each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.
When the winning number is determined by lottery by the winning lottery means 61 and the winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number, the reel control means 62. 65 selects the stop position determination table corresponding to ON/OFF of the winning flag.

Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The reel 31 is determined and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.
Further, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of Replay 1 is on and the winning flags other than Replay 1 are off are such that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 1 stops on the activated line, and The stop position of each reel 31 is set so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination other than Replay 1 does not stop on the activated line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on and the winning flag other than the left correct answer bell is off is when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first left stop. , The symbol combination for paying out eight medals is stopped on the activated line, and when the stop switch 42 is operated except for the first left stop, the symbol combination for paying out one medal is stopped on the activated line. Thus, the stop position of each reel 31 is determined.

In addition, the column of “internal lottery storage number” in FIG. 26C shows the number of each winning number in each gaming state. Dividing the internal lottery storage number by “65536” gives the winning probability.
For example, since the number of the winning number "4" in the non-RT is "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 in the non-RT, and the "left" corresponding to the winning number "4". The probability that the conditional device of “correct answer bell” will operate is “3000/65536”.

In addition, in the column of "number of internal lottery units" of FIG. 26(c), "*" mark indicates that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Here, the “advantageous section” means a game section having the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated).
The "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
Furthermore, the "operation of the indicating function" includes displaying the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won.

Further, the “advantageous zone drawing” means a lottery for deciding whether or not to shift to the advantageous zone.
Then, if the player wins the advantageous section and shifts to the advantageous section, it becomes possible to activate the instruction function, and it becomes possible to notify the correct pressing order when the pressing order bell is won.
For example, the number "8000" of the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with "*", but this is the role lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) in non-RT. When the winning number “3” (“common bell”) is determined in the lottery by, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26C, in non-RT, when the winning number “0” (non-winning) is determined, and the winning numbers “4” to “6” (“left correct answer bell”, “ When it is determined to be "medium correct answer bell" or "right correct answer bell"), the advantageous section drawing is not executed, but in other cases, the advantageous section drawing can be executed.
Furthermore, when the winning numbers “4” to “6” (“left correct answer bell”, “medium correct answer bell”, or “right correct answer bell”) are determined in RT, RB inside, and BB inside, Except for this, when the winning number with the same number as the non-RT is determined, the advantageous section drawing can be executed.

In addition, since the winning information of the BB is carried over inside the BB, when the winning number "9" (independent winning of "Cherry 1") is decided inside the BB, and when the non-RT (non-internal) When the winning number is determined to be "10" (overlapping winning of "Cherry 1+BB"), the on/off state of the winning flag is the same.
In addition, the number of winning numbers "10" (double winning of "Cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers "9" (single winning of "Cherry 1") inside BB And are set to the same “200”.
Therefore, when the winning number “9” (independent winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined inside the BB, the advantageous section drawing can be executed.

Further, when the winning number "9" (independent winning of "Cherry 1") is determined inside the RB, the winning flag of "Cherry 1" and the winning flag of "RB" carried over are turned on. ..
Furthermore, “BB” and “RB” both match in that they are special roles (features), and the winning number “10” (non-internal middle) win number “10” (duplicate win of “cherry 1+BB”) The register number and the register number of the winning number “9” (independent winning of “Cherry 1”) in the RB are set to the same “200”.
Therefore, even when the winning number “9” (independent winning of “Cherry 1”) is determined in the RB, the advantageous section drawing can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number is “12” (double winning of “Cherry 2+RB”) or the winning number “13” (double winning of “Cherry 2+BB”) in non-RT, and when the winning is inside the RB or inside the BB. When the number "11" (single winning of "cherry 2") is determined, the winning flag of "cherry 2" and the winning flag of the special character (role) are turned on.
Furthermore, the total number of winning numbers "12" (double winning of "Cherry 2+RB") and winning number "13" (double winning of "Cherry 2+BB") in non-RT is "300", which is in the RB and BB. This matches the number "300" of the number of the winning number "11" (independent winning of "Cherry 2") in the inside.
Therefore, even when the winning number “11” (independent winning of “Cherry 2”) is determined inside the RB and inside the BB, the advantageous section drawing can be executed.

In addition, the column of the “advantageous section drawing number” in FIG. 26C shows the number of each winning number. If the number of advantageous section lottery units is divided by “16384”, the winning probability is obtained.
For example, in the non-RT, inside the RB or inside the BB, when the winning number “1” (single win of “Replay 1”) is determined by the lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is It becomes "20/16384".
In addition, for example, in non-RT or RT, when the winning number “8” (double winning of “watermelon+BB”) is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous zone lottery is “10000/16384”. It will be.

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB=1".
Further, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in non-RT and RT, MB lottery is performed, but if MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to MB in the game this time always stops on the activated line, so MB From the next game to the MB game without going into the inside.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), during the MB game, a lottery for Replay 1 or Replay 2 is performed, and regardless of the lottery result by the role lottery means 61, all the small wins are duly won. Become.

Therefore, when the winning number "1" (independent winning of "Replay 1") is decided during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and all the small roles (common bell, left correct answer bell, middle) The correct answer bell, right correct bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2) and the winning flags are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (independent winning of "Replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 2" and the winning flags of all small wins are turned on.

When the winning number "1" (independent winning of "Replay 1") is decided during the MB game, that is, when the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all small wins are turned on. For, the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on is selected. However, during the MB game, the stipulated number is 1 (one piece is inserted), and the payout is different from the non-RT and the like, and 14 or 15 pieces are paid out.
As a result, in the case where the winning number "1" (independent winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first stop on the left (at the time of a correct pushing order), 14 The symbol combination that is the payout of 15 medals is stopped on the activated line, and when the stop switch 42 is operated other than the left first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the symbol combination that is the payout of 15 medals is Stop at the active line.

Similarly, when the winning number "2" (independent winning of "Replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the right answer bell is on is selected, and the right At the first stop (when the push order is correct), 14 cards are paid out, and at the time other than the right first stop (when the push order is incorrect), 15 cards are paid out.
Then, in the first game during the MB game, the push order for paying out 14 cards is notified, and in the second game during the MB game, the push order for paying out 15 cards is notified.
As described above, the MB game ending condition is set so that the number of medals to be paid out exceeds 14, so by issuing such a notification, 29 medals are paid out during the MB game. You can Further, since the prescribed number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can obtain 27 medals obtained by subtracting the inserted number "2" from the payout number "29".

Further, during the MB game, in order to inform the player of the pushing order that is advantageous, it is necessary to shift to the advantageous section.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26(c), in the non-RT or RT, the winning of the advantageous section lottery when the winning number “15” (independent winning of “MB”) is determined by the lottery by the role lottery means 61 The probability is set to “16384/16384”, that is, “100%”.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the effect group number selection means 64. The effect group number selection means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number and is to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 26C, the effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Specifically, the production group numbers “0” to “3” are determined corresponding to the winning numbers “0” to “3”, and the production group numbers “4” are corresponding to the winning numbers “4” to “6”. ,” and the effect group numbers “5” to “13” are determined corresponding to the winning numbers “7” to “15”.
Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the pushing order instruction number selecting unit 63. The pushing order instruction number selecting means 63 is determined when the winning number corresponding to the pushing order bell (left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell) is decided in the lottery by the role drawing means 61. This is for selecting a pressing order instruction number corresponding to (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order).

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the control command transmitting unit 71. The control command transmitting unit 71 transmits to the sub control board 80, information (control command) necessary for the performance output from the sub control board 80.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 uses the control command as information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a push order instruction number (during AT and correct answer). In addition to the winning number corresponding to the condition device having the order, the production group number, the information when the stop switch 42 is operated, the information of the winning combination, and the like, the gaming state (non-RT, RT) , Inside the RB, inside the BB, inside the RB, inside the BB, inside the MB), the production group number, etc. are transmitted to the sub control board 80.

Thereby, on the side of the sub control board 80, the game state on the side of the main control board 50 and the condition device (excluding the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell) that is operating in the hand lottery means 61 are determined. be able to.
On the side of the sub-control board 80, it is possible to judge that the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell is won depending on the effect group number, but the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell. It is not possible to determine which of the above was won (the order in which the correct answer was pushed).
Also, during AT, the correct pressing order can be notified by the pressing order instruction number.

In addition, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects during the game and during the game standby.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected to each other, and the main control board 50 (control command transmitting means 71) is unidirectional to the sub control board 80, and information necessary for output of the effect ( Control command).
Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, a RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Further, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via an input port 81 or an output port 82.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control unit 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect determination table and the like.
Further, the effect determination table defines the effect to be output and is provided in plural, and the effect output control means 91 determines the effect to be output using one of the effect determination tables, and the determined effect. Control to output.
That is, the effect output control unit 91 determines what kind of effect is output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and any effect determination table, and the determination is made. Accordingly, the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 is controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an effect determination table commonly used for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and FIG. 28 is an effect determination table commonly used in RB internal and BB internal. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, 18 types of effect patterns from "no effect" to "continuous effect" are provided. In addition, each production pattern from "character production (lively)" to "continuous production" defines a different production.
For example, the "confirmed effect" is an effect in which the player knows that the special role has been won, and the "notification effect after the first stop" is the effect after the first stop (after the first operation of the stop switch 42). It is an effect that is output at timing, "left first stop effect" is an effect that instructs to operate the left stop switch 42 first, and "continuous effect" is continuous over a plurality of games. It is a production that is output.

In addition, the column of "number of assigned production patterns" in FIG. 27 shows the number of assigned placements of each production pattern when each production group number is received. Dividing the number of effect pattern allocation units by “256” gives the selection probability of each effect pattern. In FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding condition device is described below each effect group number.
For example, in the non-RT, when the winning number “1” (single winning of “Replay 1”) is determined by lottery by the role lottery means 61 and the production group number “1” is transmitted, the selection probability of “No production” is It is "128/256", the selection probability of "Character production (lively)" is "20/256", the selection probability of "Conversation production (lively)" is also "20/256", and "Cut-in production" The selection probability of “(strong effect)” is “0/256”.

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 indicates to the sub control board 80 information indicating the gaming state (non-RT, RT, inside RB, inside BB, inside RB, inside BB, inside MB), and Send the production group number.
Then, the effect output control means 91 of the sub control board 80 selects the effect determination table according to the game state based on the information indicating the game state received from the main control board 50, and the selected effect determination table and the main Based on the effect group number received from the control board 50, it is determined which effect pattern the effect is to be output, and the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 is controlled according to the determination.

Here, in the non-RT (non-inside), when the winning number “14” (single winning of “BB”) is determined by the lottery means 61 and the production group number “12” is transmitted, the production output The control means 91 selects the production determination table commonly used for non-RT and RT (non-AT) shown in FIG. 27, and places the production group number “12” (single winning of “BB”) in this production determination table. The number is used to determine which one of the effect patterns to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "BB" alone is won in non-RT, for example, "continuous effect" is selected with a probability of "40/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number “0” (“non-win”) is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 and the production group number “0” is transmitted, the production output control means 91, By selecting an effect determination table commonly used in the inside of the RB and the inside of the BB shown in FIG. 28, any effect is selected using the number in the column of the effect group number “0” (“non-win”) in this effect determination table. Decide whether to output the effect of the pattern. As shown in FIG. 28, at the time of "non-winning" inside the BB, for example, "fixed effect" is selected with a probability of "80/256".
In this way, the production output control means 91 becomes a "non-winning" game in which the role lottery means 61 independently wins the "BB" in the non-RT (non-internal) and the role lottery means 61 inside the BB. An effect to be output is determined by using a different effect determination table depending on the game. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In the non-RT, when the winning number “14” (independent winning of “BB”) is decided by the lottery by the winning lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 causes the winning number “14” on the main control board 50 side. The winning flags of “BB” included in the condition device of “BB” corresponding to “” are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of “BB” is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "BB independent stop position determination table".

The "BB independent stop position determination table" is such that each reel 31 is stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on the activated line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination other than BB does not stop on the activated line. The position is set.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the stop switch 42 based on the "BB independent stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

Further, when the winning number “0” (“non-win”) is obtained in the lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning flag control means 62 on the main control board 50 side is carried over to “BB”. The winning flags of are kept on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. That is, in the non-RT, the same "BB single stop position determination table" as when the "BB" is independently won by the combination lottery means 61 is selected.
Therefore, when the winning combination lottery means 61 is "non-winning" inside the BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 as when the winning combination lottery means 61 is independently winning "BB" is performed in the non-RT. Further, "the stop control of the same reel 31 is performed" means that when each stop switch 42 is operated in the same manner (pushing order and operation timing), each reel 31 stops at the same position and the same. This means that a stop result is displayed.

As described above, in the non-RT, when the winning combination “Bl” is independently won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and when the winning combination lottery means 61 is “unwinned” inside the BB, the main control board 50 side is the same. The stop position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel 31, but on the sub-control board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the output effect. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
As a result, even if the stop control of the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
Even if the same control for stopping the reels 31 is performed on the main control board 50 side and the same stop result is displayed, a different effect is output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the special role is won. It is possible to make it possible for the player to guess that it is inside (inside).

Furthermore, by selecting different production determination tables on the side of the sub control board 80 for the non-RT "BB" single win and the "non-win" inside the BB, the "BB" single non-RT is selected. At the time of winning, an effect determination table having a low probability of selecting a finalized effect (an effect that allows the player to know that the BB has been won) is selected, and at the time of “non-winning” inside the BB, a high probability of selecting a finalized effect is selected. A decision table can be selected.
As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the "BB" has been won in the game in which the "BB" has been won, and the fact that the "BB" has been won in the BB. By making it easier for the player to understand, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming for the winning of "BB", preventing the inside of the BB from continuing forever, and not being disadvantageous to the player.

In the non-RT, when the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon+BB”) is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 and the production group number “6” is transmitted, the production output control means 91, Select the effect determination table commonly used in the non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal) shown in FIG. 27, and the effect group number “6” (“watermelon+BB” duplicate winning) in this effect determination table. ) Is used to determine which effect pattern the effect is to be output. As shown in FIG. 27, when the “Watermelon+BB” is won in non-RT, for example, the probability of “50/256” is “character effect (lively)”, “conversation effect (lively)”, or “cut-in effect ( "Strong performance"), and "continuous performance" is selected with a probability of "30/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number “7” (independent winning of “watermelon”) is decided by the lottery means 61 and the production group number “5” is transmitted, the production output control means 91. Selects an effect determination table commonly used in the inside of the RB and the inside of the BB shown in FIG. 28, and uses the number in the column of the effect group number “5” (single win of “watermelon”) in this effect determination table. , Which of the effect patterns is to be output is determined. As shown in FIG. 28, when the “watermelon” alone in the BB is elected, for example, with a probability of “73/256”, “character production (lively)” or “conversation production (lively)” is selected, and “20” is selected. Continuous production is selected with a probability of "/256".
In this way, the production output control means 91, in the non-RT (non-inside), the game in which the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon + BB" multiple times, and the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon" independently in the BB. The effect to be output is determined by using a different effect determination table depending on the played game. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, during non-internal, in order to keep the player's expectation for "BB" winning long by showing the player continuous effects over multiple games, selection of continuous effects at the time of "Watermelon + BB" double winning The probability is set high.
On the other hand, inside the BB, if you show the player continuous production over multiple games, the "BB" prize will be delayed and the medal of the player will decrease accordingly, so you can win the "watermelon" independently. The selection probability of the continuous effect is set to be low, and the selection probability of the fixed effect at the time of “non-win” is set to be high in order to prompt the player to win the “BB” prize at an early stage.
In the BB, the winning probability of each winning combination and the number of coins to be paid out at the time of winning may be set to prevent the number of medals of the player from decreasing, and then the probability of selecting continuous production may be set high.

Further, in the non-RT (non-inside), when the winning number “8” (duplicate winning of “watermelon+BB”) is determined by the lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 is set on the main control board 50 side. , The two winning flags of “watermelon” and “BB” included in the condition device of “watermelon+BB” corresponding to the winning number “8” are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of “watermelon” and “BB” are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a “watermelon+BB overlapping stop position determination table”.

"Watermelon + BB overlapping stop position determination table", each symbol combination corresponding to watermelon or BB can be stopped in the activated line, and the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than watermelon and BB is not stopped in the activated line, The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the stop switch based on the “watermelon+BB overlapping stop position determination table” and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

Further, when the winning number “7” (single win of “watermelon”) is determined by the lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning flag control means 62 is carried over on the main control board 50 side. While keeping the winning flag of "BB" on, in addition to that, the winning flag of "watermelon" included in the condition device of "watermelon" corresponding to the winning number "7" is turned on, and "watermelon" and "BB" The winning flags other than "are turned off. As a result, two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags of “watermelon” and “BB” are on and the other winning flags are off. That is, in the non-RT, the same “watermelon+BB overlapping stop position determination table” as when the winning combination of the “watermelon+BB” is won by the combination lottery means 61 is selected.

For this reason, when the winning combination lottery means 61 alone wins the "watermelon" inside the BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 as when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon + BB" multiple times in the non-RT is performed. ..
As described above, in the non-RT, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the “watermelon+BB” multiple times and when the winning combination lottery means 61 independently wins the “watermelon” in the inside of the BB, the main control board 50 side Although the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table, the sub-control board 80 side determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, when you win multiple wins for "Cherry 1 + BB" in non-RT, and when you win single win for "Cherry 1" while inside BB, when you win multiple wins for "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT, and when inside BB As in the case of independently winning the "watermelon", the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control board 80 side sets a different effect determination table. Determine the output to be used. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Furthermore, even if you double win "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" in non-RT, and if you alone win "Cherry 2" in BB or RB, you will get "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT. As in the case of multiple wins and the single win of "watermelon" in the BB, the main control board 50 determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control On the board 80 side, a different effect determination table is used to determine the effect to be output. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
Thereby, even if the stop control of the reels 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the effects can be diversified.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the number of sorting patterns of each effect pattern is the same when the “watermelon” is independently won in the non-RT and when the “watermelon” is individually won in the BB. Therefore, the selection probabilities of the effect patterns are the same.
However, when the "Watermelon" is independently won in the non-RT, the winning flag of "Watermelon" is on, and when the other winning flags are off, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected. When the "watermelon" is independently won inside the BB, when the two winning flags of "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected. To do. For this reason, the stop control of the reel 31 is different between when the "watermelon" is independently won in the non-RT and when the "watermelon" is individually won in the BB.
In this way, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same on the side of the sub-control board 80 when the “watermelon” is independently won in the non-RT and when the “watermelon” is independently won inside the BB. The stop control of the reel 31 is different on the main control board 50 side.

As described above, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same. Therefore, when the same condition device operates, the stop control of the reel 31 (stop position determination table to be selected) for each game state is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) ) May be different.

Further, in a plurality of game states, the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means of the role lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determination means of the role lottery means 61 are the same, and the same condition is satisfied. When the device is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 (selected stop position determination table) for each game state is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may be different. ..

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the same condition device is used. When is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 (stop position determination table to be selected) for each game state is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may be different.

<Modification of the ninth embodiment>
The ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) Type of hand, type of condition device, type of game state, specified number in each game state, payout at the time of winning each role, allocation of internal lottery number, advantageous section lottery shown in the ninth embodiment. The allocation of numbers, the types of effect patterns, and the allocation of the allocation numbers for each effect pattern are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to the game content.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the table of the numbers of the internal lottery and the advantageous zone lottery in the setting 1 is shown. It is possible to provide a table of numbers of lottery and advantage zone lottery.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the game state and the effect group number to the sub control board 80. As a result, the sub control board 80 side determines the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects the effect pattern with a probability according to the game state and the condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting unit 71 may transmit the winning number determined by the internal drawing to the sub-control board 80, or the information indicating the condition device corresponding to the winning number determined by the internal drawing. Good. Then, on the side of the sub control board 80, the condition device on the side of the main control board 50 may be judged based on the received information indicating the winning number and the condition device.

In addition, for example, the control command transmitting unit 71 transmits, to the sub control board 80, information indicating the condition device determined by the internal drawing and information on the winning combination. Then, on the side of the sub control board 80, the game state on the side of the main control board 50 may be determined based on the information indicating the condition device and the information on the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, the sub control board 80 receives information indicating that "BB" is won, but if the information indicating that "BB" is won is not received, the game state on the main control board 50 side is It can be determined that the inside of the BB is in progress.
Then, on the side of the sub control board 80, based on the game state on the side of the main control board 50 judged on the side of the sub control board 80 and the information indicating the effect group number, the winning number, and the condition device received from the main control board 50. An effect pattern may be selected.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80, information indicating ON/OFF of a winning flag corresponding to each winning combination, and information of a winning combination. Then, on the side of the sub control board 80, the game state and the condition device on the side of the main control board 50 may be determined based on the information indicating the ON/OFF state of the winning flag and the information on the winning combination.
For example, if the information indicating that the winning flag of "BB" is turned on is received, but the information indicating that "BB" is won is not received, the game state on the main control board 50 side is inside BB. Can be determined.

Further, since the "BB" lottery is not performed inside the BB, when the information indicating that only the "BB" winning flag is turned on is received inside the BB, the internal lottery on the main control board 50 side is performed. It can be determined that the winning number "0"("non-winning") has been decided.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side judged on the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side also judged on the sub control board 80 side, the effect pattern on the sub control board 80 side May be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, the "single win" is used to mean that a winning combination other than the special winning combination is won, and the special winning combination is not won at the same time. , It is used in the sense that the special role and other roles other than the special role are simultaneously elected.
For example, the winning of "Watermelon + Control role 1" in the BB is a double win in the sense that you are winning multiple types of roles at the same time, but you can win only the non-special roles, and the special role is Since they are not won at the same time, they are individually won in the sense of the ninth embodiment.

On the main control board 50 side, when the "watermelon + control role 1 + BB" in the non-internal win (double win) and the "watermelon + control role 1" in the BB (independent win) Since the ON/OFF states of the winning flags are the same, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table. However, since the winning number and the effect group number are different, on the sub control board 80 side, An effect to be output is determined using a different effect determination table.
The "control role" is a role for changing the stop position determination table to be selected by changing the ON/OFF state of the winning flag, thereby making the stop control of the reel 31 different, and winning the prize. It's not a role for me.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number “11” (independent winning of “Cherry 2”) is determined inside the RB and the inside of the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed. The advantageous section lottery may not be executed at the time of winning the special winning combination with the special winning combination.
(7) The various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments and the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to be performed alone, but may be appropriately combined and implemented.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to control of display of the management information display LED 74.
The main CPU 55 has a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change), setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on (for example, at power-on, first interrupt processing start, program start, etc.). (Setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress), in the RWM abnormal error state, control is performed so that all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
As described in the second embodiment, since the management information display LED 74 is composed of 4-digit LEDs, "8888" is displayed when all the LEDs are turned on. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether the LED of the management information display LED 74 is defective.

If the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on, the state changes to the setting change state where the set value can be changed. Further, when the setting change state is entered, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
Then, 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to a time longer than the time required from the power-on to the setting change state when the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on. There is.

Here, for example, it is assumed that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on power-on is set to a time shorter than the time required from the power-on to the setting change state. In this case, first, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on, then the management information is once displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on again. Therefore, there is a possibility that the manager (clerk of the hall) may suspect that the gaming machine has some trouble.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing when the power is turned on is set to 5 seconds.
It should be noted that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from the predetermined timing based on the power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, and any time longer than the time required from the power-on to the setting change state can be used. It may be set to.

Hereinafter, the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be described.
In the tenth embodiment, the 4-digit LED included in the management information display LED 74 is referred to as "digit 6", "digit 7", "digit 8", and "digit 9" in order from the left side.
Further, of the four-digit LED included in the management information display LED 74, the two left LEDs (digits 6 and 7) are referred to as “identification segments”, and the two right LEDs (digits 8 and 9) are referred to as “ratio”. Seg”.

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Identification segment high-order digit Digit 7: Identification segment low-order digit Digit 8: Ratio segment high-order digit Digit 9: Ratio segment low-order digit
Further, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED including segments A to G and a segment DP.

The display of the test pattern of the management information display LED 74 is performed to confirm whether all the segments (segments A to G and DP) are turned on and off properly. Therefore, during the period (time) during which the test pattern is displayed, all segments are set to have a lighting state and a non-lighting state.
When the test pattern is displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at any of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from the predetermined timing when the power is turned on (2) Within 5 seconds from the setting change start process (3) During setting change (mode) (4) During setting confirmation (mode) (5) During RWM error

As a test pattern, firstly, a predetermined display is switched every 1 second and displayed for 5 seconds. Note that the time for maintaining one display is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of the test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (other than 5 seconds is sufficient).
Then, the test pattern is set such that all the segments of all the LEDs have a turned-on state and a turned-off state during the test pattern display time of 5 seconds.
Secondly, as a test pattern, blinking all segments of all LEDs can be mentioned. Even with this setting, all the segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off with one blink (lighting and extinguishing).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a first example of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In the test pattern display of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, which will be described later, illuminated segments are indicated by solid lines, and extinguished segments are indicated by dotted lines. Further, in the segment DP, a lighting state is indicated by a black circle, and an extinction response is indicated by a white circle.
Further, in the following description, “.” indicates that the segment DP is in a lighting state, and “.” indicates that the segment DP is in a non-lighting state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display of each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern displayed as "0.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which the segments A to F and DP are turned on and the segment G is turned off.
The other is a pattern displaying "-.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which the segment G is turned on and the segments A to F and DP are turned off.
Therefore, "0." and "-." have the opposite relationship in the segments that are turned on and off, respectively.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 29A, the identification segment high-order digit and the ratio segment high-order digit are displayed as "0.", and the identification segment low-order digit and the ratio segment low-order digit are displayed as "-.".
Further, in the example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29(a) is maintained for 1 second. Note that the count for one second may be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of FIG. 29A is started, "447(D)" is set in the counter, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and when "0" is reached, the counter of FIG. An example is to end the display of a). As a result, the display of FIG. 29A can be maintained for “2.235×447=999.045 ms”.

When the display for about 1 second in FIG. 29(a) is completed, the display then shifts to that in FIG. 29(b).
Further, the display of FIG. 29(b) is obtained by replacing the display of FIG. 29(a) with the LED displaying “0.” and the LED displaying “−.”. That is, in contrast to the display in FIG. 29( a ), the display in FIG. 29( b) is displayed as “−.” in the identification segment high-order digit and the ratio segment high-order digit, and the identification segment low-order digit and the ratio segment low-order digit are displayed. Is displayed as “0.”.
Further, as in the case of FIG. 29A, the display state shown in FIG. 29B is continued for 1 second (447 interrupts).

The display contents of FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B described above are switched and displayed every second, and this is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display content as (a), and (d) has the same display content as (b).
Then, when the display of the test pattern (for 5 seconds) is completed, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “7.U.5.0.”. Further, instead of the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio may be displayed.

As described above, by displaying "0." and "-." on the LED, it is possible to create a lighting state and a non-lighting state for all the segments (A to G and DP), so that a segment defect (lights up). Can not be determined or can not be turned off) can be easily visually determined.
Further, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as "0.-." or "-.0.". Therefore, there is no risk of confusing the test pattern with the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a second example of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In Example 1 of FIG. 29, the display content is changed every 1 second and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from the setting change start processing.
On the other hand, the example 2 of the test pattern display shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying the test pattern until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error. ..
It goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used when displaying until the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Similarly, it goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may be used in the case where the test pattern display is displayed within a predetermined period after the start condition of the test pattern display is satisfied.

In Example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." is a state in which all the segments of all the LEDs are turned on, and "*." is a state in which all the segments of all the LEDs are turned off. “.*.*.*.” (“*” indicates that segments A to G are off). In other words, it is a pattern of blinking display of "8.8.8.8.".
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, the lighting state of all the segments shown in FIG. 30A is maintained for 0.3 seconds, and then the extinguished state of all the segments shown in FIG. 30B is maintained for 0.3 seconds. Then, the lighting state shown in FIG. 30(a) and the extinguished state shown in FIG. 30(b) are repeated to make a blinking state.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, "134(D)" is set as the initial value of the timer, the timer value is decremented by "1" for each 2.235 ms interrupt process, and when the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or It is determined that the turn-off time has elapsed. Thus, by counting the number of interruptions “134”, it is possible to count “299.49” ms.

Also in the example 2 of the test pattern display of FIG. 30, it is possible to create a lighting state and a non-lighting state for all the segments by "8." and "*.". Therefore, a segment defect (cannot be turned on or turned off) can be easily visually determined.
When displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the display blinks regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." is displayed and the segment DP is not lit. On the other hand, the display of "8.8." does not confuse both because the segment DP is also lit.

Each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all reels 31 are stopped and the payout process is completed). Then, in the subsequent interrupt processing, the updated ratio is displayed. When a power failure occurs immediately before updating the ratio and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is restored, the ratio update (calculation) processing is performed during the 5 seconds during which the test pattern is displayed. To execute. Then, when the display of the test pattern is ended and the ratio display is started, the updated ratio is displayed after the recovery from the power failure.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
FIG. 31A is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31B is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 13C is a diagram showing the set value display LED 73 in the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31(A), the credit display LED 76 includes a digit 1a (upper digit) and a digit 2a (lower digit). The acquired number display LED 78 includes a digit 3a (upper digit) and a digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, the "digit" means a display unit (display), and in particular, in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment).
Each of these digits 1a to 4a is a 7-segment display including dot segments (segment P). In particular, the segment P of the digit 4a (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is composed of 6 dot LEDs, and these 6 dot LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79. In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are shown, but the state display LED 79 is not shown. However, actually, as shown in FIG. 31A, the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 are mounted on the display substrate 75.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs that display the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only the one-bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are turned on. When three medals are bet, all of the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, and the 3 bet display LED 79c are configured to light up.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 is in an operable state. Therefore, the medal is not turned on when the bet is not bet (or the replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, the game is over, and lights up before a medal for shifting to the next game is thrown in, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Even when the replay is activated, it lights up when the bet can be made according to the number of credits. Then, when the bet number is the maximum (when more bets cannot be made), the insertion display LED 79e is turned off.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that is turned on when the replay is won. When the automatic bet based on the replay win is made, the replay display LED 79f is turned on to inform the player that the automatic bet state is set.
Note that, as the status display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31(A), for example, a settlement display LED (LED that lights up during settlement processing) can be cited, but the illustration is omitted in FIG. 31(A).

Further, in FIG. 31(B), the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29 and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b to 4b are 7-segment displays including dot segments (segments P), like the digits 1a to 4a described above. The digits 1b to 4b display the information type upper level, the information type lower level, the numerical upper level, and the numerical lower level, respectively.
The segment P of the digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit group display LED. The digit group display LED is used to clarify the division between the information type and the numerical value.

Further, the segment P of the digits 1b to 4b can be turned on when the test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31C, the set value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. 10, and is an LED that displays the current set value during the setting change and the setting confirmation. ) Digit 5b.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b and the segments A to G and P in the present embodiment.
The 7-segment digit is a 7-segment segment composed of seven rod-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment P. It should be noted that the LED including the segments A to G having no segment P may be referred to as "7 segment", and the LED including the eight segments including the segment P may be referred to as "8 segment". In the book, the LED including 8 segments is referred to as "7 segment".

As shown in FIG. 32, for example, in the digit 1a, the segments A to G compose the 7th segment of the higher digit of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment P is unused. Similarly, each of the segments A to G of the digits 2a and 3a constitutes 7-segments of the lower digit of the credit number display LED and the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.
Further, the segments A to G of the digit 4a constitute 7-segments of the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is an LED that constitutes the status display LED 79. As shown in FIG. 32, the segment A of the digit 5a corresponds to the 1-bet display LED 79a, the segment B corresponds to the 2-bet display LED 79b,..., The segment F corresponds to the replay display LED 79f. Further, the segments G and P of the digit 5a are not provided.

The digits 1b to 4b form a management information display LED 74, and the segments 1b and 2b display the information type of the management information. Further, the segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in the segments 1b and 2b of the management information. The segments P of the digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally turned off, but are turned on when the test pattern is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30. Further, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit grouping display LED for clarifying the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value and facilitating the confirmation. The digit separation display LED may be repeatedly turned on and off like the other digit segments P while the test pattern is being displayed, or may be kept on all the time.

Further, among the digits 5b, the segments A to G compose 7-segments of the set value display LED 73, and the segment P is an LED that lights up during the setting change. That is, among the set value display LEDs 73, when the segment P is off, the setting is being confirmed, and when the segment P is on, the setting is being changed. The segment P of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment P of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during the setting change.

Further, FIG. 32 illustrates the structure of segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, the D0 bit corresponds to the segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to the segment B,..., And the D7 bit corresponds to the segment P.
For example, when displaying "0" in the digit 1a, the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and P are turned off, so that the segment data is "00111111(B)".

Further, when "1" is displayed on the digit 4a and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on, the segments B, C, and P are turned on, so that the segment data becomes "10000110(B)".
Furthermore, before the game is started, three medals are betted, and when the game can be started, the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, and the game start display LED 79d are turned on. The segment data of 5a is “00001111(B)”.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the output port 52 in the eleventh embodiment. The types of output ports are not limited to those shown in FIG.
As the output port 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port for transmitting a digit signal (output port 2) and two output ports for transmitting a segment signal (output ports 3 and 4) are provided. ..
The output port 3 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 (digits 1a to 5a).
The output port 4 is an output port for transmitting the segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73.

In the output port 2, the digits 1 to 5 signals are assigned to the bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of "1" is output from the D0 bit of the output port 2, it is output to both the digit 1a (credit number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and the digit 1b (management information display LED 74 (upper information type)). A drive signal is supplied.

In the output port 2, the D5 to D7 bits are unused.
The output port 3 is an output port for the segments A to P signals of the digits 1a to 5a, and the segments A to P signals are allocated to bits D0 to D7.
Similarly, the output port 4 is an output port for the segments A to P signals of the digits 1b to 5b, and the segments A to P signals are allocated to bits D0 to D7.
Furthermore, the output port 5 outputs external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal.

Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external centralized terminal board 100. Specifically, for example, an advantageous section, an AT, a specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is operating, and an external signal 4 indicating that an error occurred in the slot machine 10 or a power failure has occurred. An external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

The data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving the data strobe signal, the sub control board 80 controls to acquire the sub control data signal from the buffer provided in the sub control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
In addition, from output ports (not shown) other than the output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. 33, for example, a signal of the motor 32, a signal of the blocker 45, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36, a condition device signal (so-called winning number). , Sub-control data signal, test signal, etc. are output.

FIG. 34(A) is a diagram showing a relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal and a segment signal in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag.
In the present embodiment, as a process of the main control board 50, a main process (M_MAIN) performed for each game (FIG. 41 described later) and, in parallel with this main process, once every 2.235 ms, an interrupt process ( I_INTR) (FIG. 53 described later) is executed.

The LED display counter is 1-byte data and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which of the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is to be turned on. As for each bit of the LED display counter, D0 bit is assigned to digit 1 signal, D1 bit is assigned to digit 2 signal,..., D4 bit is assigned to digit 5 signal. Then, in the one interruption process, the dynamic lighting of the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so as to light the digit corresponding to the bit which is "1" in the LED display counter.

The LED display counter of the present embodiment has a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter value so that it shifts to the right by one digit as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" →... (for each interrupt). Further, in FIG. 34, in the interrupt next to the interrupt "5", the LED display counter is shifted to the right by one digit to be "00000000(B)". At the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter is initialized. The LED display counter is set to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the values of “5”→“4”→...→“1”→“5”→“4”→... For each interrupt process. That is, one cycle consists of 5 interrupts.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt line: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt line: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt line: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt line: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt line: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt line)
"N+6" interrupt line: 00001000 (B)
:
Becomes

In the eleventh embodiment, five interrupts form one cycle, and the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b are turned on. Specifically, in FIG. 34(A), for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000(B)", the digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, the digits 5a and 5b can be turned on. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the next interruption "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", the digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED D78 and the numerical lower digit of the management information display LED 74 can be turned on. ..

Further, FIG. 34B is a diagram showing the data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted. As shown in FIG. 34B, the LED display request flag is 8-bit data corresponding to the digit 1 signal at the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal at the D1 bit,..., And the digit 5 signal at the D4 bit. is there. Each bit of the LED display request flag is matched with the bit of the output port 2.
As shown in FIG. 34B, the digits 1 to 5 can be turned on during normal operation, the digits 3 to 5 can be turned on during setting change, and the digits 1 to 5 can be turned on during setting confirmation. is there. Incidentally. “In normal operation” refers to a game waiting state and a game in progress.

Then, in the interrupt process, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are AND-operated, and the digit corresponding to the bit that has become "1" is the digit that is turned on in the interrupt process this time.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal)", an AND operation of the both results in "00010000 (B)", and the digit 5 Only the signal becomes "1". However, during normal operation (during game standby and during game), the segment signal is output from the output port 3 and the status display LED 79 can be turned on, but the segment signal is not output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 is output. The control is performed so that the (digit 5b) is not turned on.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), the segment signal is output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is output. It can be turned on.
Also, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed) is set. The upper digit) and the digit 4 signal (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) are output to display "88" (content indicating that the setting is being changed) on the acquired number display LED 78.

Furthermore, when the segment signal of the output port 3 is generated at the interrupt timing of the LED display counter "00001000 (B)" (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34), the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. By doing. When the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, the value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and “10000000(B)” is output from the output port 3 as a segment signal. As a result, the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be turned on.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, the number of bytes, names and contents of data stored in the RWM 53.
Note that the data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in the description of the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The address “F000(H)” is a storage area for setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the set value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the set value data. In this embodiment, the set values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)" is stored as the set value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays “N” obtained by adding “1” to the set value data as the set value.

The address “F010(H)” is a storage area for credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit amount data is data to be displayed on the credit amount display LED 76. In the present embodiment, any value of “0” to “50 (D)” is stored as the credit amount data.
Here, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by converting the credit number into a decimal number is stored as the credit number data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in the address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address “F010(H)” are data for displaying the lower digit (“9” in this example) of the credit number, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are , Data for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits (“2” in this example). In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of credits is “50 (D)”, and thus the stored data value is in the range of “0” to “50”.
Further, in the present embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit amount data itself is not provided, but the credit amount data is provided as the display data of the credit amount display LED 76.

The address “F011(H)” is a storage area for the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquired number data is data to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In the acquired number data, like the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digit, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying the upper digit. The data.
In the present embodiment, at the time of winning the small winning combination, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, so that the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored as the acquired number data. Specifically, when a small winning combination is won and medals are paid out, the acquired number data is added with the payout of the medals, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when “1 (H)” is stored as the acquired number data, “01” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout amount data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F040(H)” which will be described later, for example, “8(H)” is stored when eight winning combinations are won, and the payout amount data is the payout amount data ( (Including addition to credit), "1" is decremented by "1" according to the number of payouts, such as "8" → "7" → ... → "0".
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored at the address “F011(H)” is, for example, when the winning combination of eight cards is “0”→“1”→“2”→...→“8”. As described above, each time one medal is paid out, "1" is added. Therefore, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up as “0”→“1”→“2”→...→“8”.

Further, in the present embodiment, “88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during the setting change, the setting change display data for displaying "88" is stored as the acquired number data. By displaying "88" on the acquired number display LED 78, the fact that the setting is being changed can be identified from the front side of the gaming machine. Furthermore, by lighting all the segments with "88", it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (that there is no segment that cannot be lighted). Since the upper limit of the number of payouts of medals is 15, it can be understood that the display of the number of payouts does not indicate the number of payouts when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Furthermore, in a twelfth embodiment described later, when the condition for instructing a prescribed number (the number of medals to be bet in the game this time) is satisfied, before the game starts (before the bet becomes possible or the start switch 41 is operated. (Before being displayed), the acquisition number display LED 78 is instructed (displayed and notified) of the specified number. In this embodiment, in order to instruct the prescribed number "2", "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, when the specified number is specified, the specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the specified prescribed number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B(H)".

Further, when the push order bell or the like in AT is won, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Pushing order instruction information corresponding to winning numbers “3” to “8” shown in FIG. 58 described later are “=1” to “=6”, respectively. Therefore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data. Although details will be described later, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the push order instruction information “=1” to “=6” are “A1(H)” to “A6(H)”, respectively. For example, in the game in which the winning number "3" is won, when the pushing order instruction information is displayed, the pushing order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the acquired number data. As a result, the push order instruction information “=1” corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1(H)” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

When a predetermined error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as the acquired number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

The address “F030(H)” is a storage area for the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not the replay and the accessory have been operated. For example, when operating 1BB, the D2 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1".
This operation state flag is updated in the game start set processing described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, when the D0 bit of the later-described symbol combination display flag is read and it is determined that the D0 bit is “1”, it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, and the operating state The D0 bit of the flag is set to "1".
The replay operation state flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 of FIG. 50 (game end check process) described later.
Further, the operating state flag of the accessory is also cleared in the game end check processing (not shown in FIG. 50).

The address "F031(H)" is a storage area for the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed, and in the present embodiment, D0 bit is assigned to replay and D2 bit is assigned to 1BB. Therefore, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are respectively assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned by the operation state flag.
During the main processing in FIG. 41, in step S291, the winning determination unit 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared in step S279 (start switch acceptance process) at the start of the next game, specifically during the main process of FIG.

The address “F040(H)” is a storage area for the payout amount data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout amount data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout amount when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout amount is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a small winning combination is won, the payout amount data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored, and the medal payout process is executed. Here, the payout amount data is decremented by "1" for each payout of one medal (addition of "1" to the number of credits or one payout of the actual medal (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout amount data becomes "0".

The address “F041(H)” is a storage area of the payout amount data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout amount data, the payout amount data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout amount when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout amount is determined. Here, unlike the payout amount data, the payout amount data buffer is not subtracted for each one medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. The value is maintained until the next game medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when a small winning combination of paying out eight coins is won in the game, "8(H)" is stored as the payout amount data buffer, and when the winning combination is not won in the next game, the payout amount data buffer is used. "0" is overwritten.

The address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet amount data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet at the time of replay winning, and “2” or “3” is stored in this embodiment.
The automatic bet amount data is set in step S325 during the game start setting process of FIG.
The address “F043(H)” is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet amount data indicates the bet amount in the current game, and in the present embodiment, any of “0” to “3” is stored. The bet number data is performed in the medal management process (the inserted medal is detected, the bet process and the credit addition process are performed) in step S276 during the main process of FIG.

The address “F051(H)” is a storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is the one shown in FIG. 34(A), and is updated every time the interrupt processing is performed, as described above.
The address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is the one shown in FIG. 34(B), and takes a value according to the normal state, the setting change, or the setting confirmation.

The address "F061(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous zone type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores “00000000(B)” when the section is a normal section, and the D0 bit is “1” when the section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address “F062(H)” is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED ). The advantageous zone display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on. When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is on, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "1".
The advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after shifting to the advantageous zone (for example, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as shifting to the advantageous zone).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be turned on.
Specifically, firstly, the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but may be turned on thereafter (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone end condition is satisfied before the condition for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 is satisfied, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is never displayed. The advantageous section may be ended without being turned on.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct answer pressing order is notified) in the gaming state in which it is the advantageous section and the section Sim payout rate exceeds “1”, the advantageous section is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on.
Further, after the advantageous section display LED 77 is once turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
In addition, during the game end check processing in the final game of the advantageous section, processing for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the initialization process of the advantageous period display LED flag storage area (the process of clearing the advantageous period display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing in the case of lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 in the game in which the instruction function is operated is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after starting the rotation of the reel 31, the reel 31 is turned on). Until the rotation reaches the constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended), before the start of the next game, before the settlement switch 43 can be operated.

However, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game in which the instruction function is operated, it is necessary to determine the winning combination in the game. ..
When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game in which the instruction function is operated, since the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery for the winning combination is executed, the reel 31 is rotated after the reel 31 is started to rotate. The shortest timing is to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 before the constant speed state is reached.

The address "F063(H)" is a storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous zone clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games in the advantageous zone. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and when shifting to the advantageous section, "1500 (D)" is set as an initial value. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set so that "1" is subtracted per game not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section. However, the minimum value is "0". Therefore, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", the counter after subtraction is "0" even if "1" is subtracted is used. Therefore, during the normal section, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so that the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)" in the next game.
The advantageous section clear counter stores the maximum initial value "1500 (D)" and is therefore composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter, it is an advantageous interval.

The address "F065(H)" is a storage area of the difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference number counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets in the advantageous section, and is also referred to as “MY counter”.
The difference number counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores a “value corresponding to” the accumulated value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to minus, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, “cumulative value of difference number ≠ difference number counter value”.
The difference number counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference numbers in the advantageous section exceeds “2400(D)”. Therefore, the difference counter is composed of a storage area of 2 bytes.

It suffices for the difference counter to count at least the cumulative value of the number of difference sheets in the advantageous section, and may not count in the non-advantageous section (normal section).
Here, when the difference number counter value is updated on the condition that it is an advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process for determining whether each game is an advantageous section or not. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference number counter value is updated including in the non-advantageous section (normal section). By doing so, the difference number counter value can be updated without determining whether each game is in the advantageous section or not, so that the processing can be simplified.

Further, the difference number counter value is updated even when the difference number becomes negative in the game this time and the value corresponding to the accumulated value of the difference number becomes the carry-down data. However, as a result of the calculation, when the difference number counter is the carry-down data, the difference number counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example (the difference number counter value at the start of the first game is set to "0 (H)"),
First game: When the bet number is "3" and the payout number is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD(H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0(H)"
Second game: bet number "3", payout number "9", difference counter after calculation "0006(H)" (no correction)
3rd game: bet number “3”, payout number “0”, difference counter “0003 (H)” after calculation (without correction)
4th game: bet number “3”, payout number “1”, difference number counter “0001 (H)” after calculation (without correction)
Fifth game: bet number “3”, payout number “0”, difference number counter “FFFE(H)” after calculation, difference number counter “0(H)” after correction
Is updated as.
In addition, even if the difference number counter of the previous game is “0 (H)” and the difference number counter of the current game is “0 (H)”, the difference number counter value reflecting the difference number of the game is newly updated. Since it is the result of calculation, this case also corresponds to “update” of the difference counter.

As described above, when the difference number counter value after the calculation has a carry-down value, the difference number counter value is corrected to "0" (initial value "0" is set). The method of determining whether a carry-down has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference number counter value as described above, for example, when the payout number is large relative to the bet number, that is, when the difference number is being increased, the difference number counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal section, the difference number counter value is increased by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on the winning of a small win, but thereafter, the number of payouts. If is less than the bet number, it will eventually become "0".

FIG. 36 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference number counter value, where (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the difference number.
In Example 1, first, the difference number advances in the negative direction as the game progresses, but the difference number starts to increase from the middle, for example, when AT is started. Then, the difference number counter is counted as "0" when the difference number becomes the minimum value in the course of the game, so that the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference number counter as the increase amount of the difference number. To be done. As described above, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section is ended when the difference counter value exceeds “2400(D)” (the next game is controlled to be the game of the normal section).

Since the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied when the difference counter exceeds "2400(D)", for example, when the difference counter is just "2400(D)" at the end of the current game, the current game Does not satisfy the condition for ending the advantageous section.
Assuming that the maximum difference number for the gaming machine is obtained in the next game, this is the case where the bet number is "1" and the payout number is "15", so the difference number in the next game is "+14", The difference number counter value at the end of the next game is “2414 (D)”. When the difference counter is "2414 (D)", it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is “2414(D)”.

The determination as to whether or not the difference counter exceeds “2400(D)” is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 and making a determination, and is temporarily stored in a register for updating or the like. It also includes determining the difference number counter value (hereinafter the same).
Further, when it is determined whether or not "2400 (D)" is exceeded based on the difference number counter value temporarily stored in the register, when it is determined that "2400 (D)" is not exceeded, The difference number counter value of the register is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference number counter value exceeds “2400(D)”, the difference number counter value is not stored in the RWM 53, and the difference number counter value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared. It is also possible.

In addition, the example 2 shows an example in which the difference number advances in the negative direction as the game progresses, as in the case of the example 1, but the difference number starts to increase from the middle, for example, when AT is started. .. In Example 2, even when the difference counter exceeds “2400(D)”, the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section is ended. That is, regardless of the cumulative value of the difference number with the progress of the game up to that point, if the difference number counter value exceeds “2400(D)”, counting from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value, the advantageous section Ends (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

If the difference counter is updated during the normal section, the difference counter may exceed “2400(D)” even during the normal section. For example, such a situation may occur when the special role is won many times and the special game is repeated. In such cases,
1) A method of directly updating the difference number counter value until the advantageous section is started,
2) When the value exceeds “2400(D)”, there is a method of temporarily resetting the difference number counter value to “0” at that time.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds “2400(D)” during the advantageous period, when the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous period, whether the process is in the advantageous period or not. If the process is executed regardless of whether the difference counter exceeds "2400(D)" during the normal section, it is cleared.

On the other hand, if the process for clearing the difference counter is a process unique to the advantageous section, the difference counter is not cleared even if the difference counter exceeds “2400(D)” during the normal section.
When the advantageous zone is started (first game of the advantageous zone), the difference counter is cleared (initial value “0” is set. Step S354 in FIG. 45 described later). Therefore, there is no problem with any number of difference counters before the start of the advantageous section.
And
1) When the difference counter exceeds “2400(D)” during the advantageous zone,
2) When the number of games in the advantageous zone reaches 1500 games,
Satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section.
When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section so that the data (value) regarding the advantageous section is not carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is shifted to. The difference counter is cleared in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference number counter value and the advantageous section, where (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the difference number decreases as the game progresses, and the difference number further decreases from the time when the advantageous section starts (“A” in the figure) to “B” in the figure. An example is shown. It should be noted that AT is not started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and at the beginning of the advantageous section, CZ, precursor, AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state In the case of specifications that start from the middle of waiting for the replay to win), the number of differences may decrease even after starting the advantageous section. In addition, even when the AT is started, the difference number may be reduced if the push order bell is not won very often.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at the time of "A" in the figure. Further, as described above, the difference number counter value maintains “0” under the situation where the difference number is decreasing. Therefore, in the figure, the difference counter value remains "0" from the point "A" to the point "B".
Further, an example is shown in which the difference number starts to increase from the point "B". As a result, the difference number counter value also increases. Then, when it is determined that the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” (when the point reaches “C” in the figure), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the advantageous section is ended. (Move to normal section).

As described above, since the difference counter does not count the difference from the start of the advantageous section, but the difference counter starts the positive counting at the time when the difference reaches its minimum value (“B”) after the start of the advantageous section, the most output is obtained. It is no longer possible to give medals to the player beyond the range in which the number of balls increases (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 37(a)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's aspirations from being aroused.

The above points will be described more specifically taking numerical values as an example.
For example, if the specification is such that the AT is started by lottery after starting the advantageous section, if the advantageous section and the non-AT, the difference may decrease as the game progresses.
For example, it is assumed that the player X wins the advantageous section and the advantageous section is started, but the AT is not started and the game is stopped when the difference number becomes “−200 pieces”.

Next, it is assumed that when the player Y starts playing a game with the gaming machine and the difference number becomes "-50", the player wins the AT and the AT starts. Then, after starting the advantageous section, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued until the difference number exceeds “+2400 coins”, the player Y can win the medal of “2400+250=2650 coins”. ..
Therefore, as described above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting the end condition "from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value to the point where it exceeds "+2400"", for example, the fit of other players We are trying to prevent it from getting enthusiastic and prevent it from being acquired.

In Example 2 shown in (b) of FIG. 37, the difference number decreases in the normal section, the positive point starts from the point “D” on the way, and the advantageous section starts from the point “E”. In such a case, as described above, when the difference number counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference number counter value is positive at the time of “E” in the figure. However, the difference number counter value is initialized (cleared, that is, updated to “0”) at the start of the advantageous section (“E” in the figure).
Therefore, the increment before the advantageous section (the increment from “D” to “E”) is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be incremented from the point "E", and the advantageous section is ended when "2400(D)" is exceeded.

The description returns to FIG.
The address “F067(H)” is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT and to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46 described later. Further, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the game in the final game of the AT, and is executed, for example, in the game end check process (step S415 of FIG. 50) described later. The AT flag is included in the data that is cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section.

The address "F068 (H)" is a storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the subsequent counting (subtraction) is stopped.
The AT game number counter is updated (subtracted) during AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41 described later).

Further, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the AT game number may exceed “255 (D)”, the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the maximum number of AT games is "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be composed of a 1-byte counter.
When the AT is started (or when the AT preparation is made), an initial value is set in the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a fixed value or may be determined by lottery or the like when the AT is won. Further, after the initial value is determined, the AT game number may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT, the AT game number may be added, and when the additional lottery is won, the AT game number may be increased. In this case, the increment is added to the AT game number counter.
This AT game number counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, since the game number management type AT is exemplified, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided in place of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of the AT, the initial value of the obtainable difference number of sheets is set. In addition, when the player wins the addition, the difference number of the addition is added. Then, each time the payout is made, the difference number of the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is ended.

Next, each process during the game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, the program starts from the program start process of FIG.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, in the next step S202, the main control board 50 initializes the register. Specific processing is, for example, setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting of the type of interrupt (for example, setting to maskable interrupt, etc.), and parity bit added to the control command to be transmitted. (For example, setting to even parity). In other words, the initial values required to operate the slot machine 10 normally are set in various registers.

Next, proceeding to step S203, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, the power-off processing completed flag is stored when the power is turned off (step S484 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). The power-off processing completed flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. Then, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the power-off process completed flag is not the normal value, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. Specifically, the checksum calculation is performed in the same range as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed during the power-off process (for example, the work area used by the program, the unused area, and the stack area).
In step S205, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum is completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 53 for which the checksum is calculated at the present time, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for which the checksum is calculated. When it is determined that the checksum calculation is not completed, the process returns to step S204 and continues. On the other hand, when it is determined that the RWM 53 range for calculating the checksum is completed, the process proceeds to step S206.

Further, also in the subsequent processing, when data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is initialized, the same processing is executed in the designated range of the RWM 53 in the present embodiment.
When it is determined in step S203 that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value, the abnormal value is set as the power-off recovery data without executing the checksum calculation of the RWM 53.

In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, B register). If it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 is normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value (when “No” in step S203), or when it is determined that there is an abnormality during the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 in step S204, the power-off is performed. An abnormal value is stored as return data.

In the next step S207, the level data of the predetermined input port 51 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). Next, in step S208, it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on, based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51. Here, in the present embodiment, the “designated switch” means a signal of a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (housing) is opened) among the predetermined input ports 51, a set door switch. (The door provided on the setting key switch. The setting door does not have to be provided.) Signal of the setting key switch (switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in the specified direction) There are three.

Then, the signal of the door switch is ON (the front door 12 is opened), the signal of the setting door switch is ON (the setting door is opened), and the signal of the setting key switch is ON. Only when there is permission to change the setting. When all the three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process of step S212, but when at least one designated switch is not on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change process of step S212. ..
That is, even when the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed) or when the setting door switch signal is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch signal is Is never turned on, and there is a high possibility of fraud, so the transition to the setting change process is not permitted.

Therefore, if it is determined in step S208 that all the designation switches are on, the process proceeds to step S209, and if it is determined that they are not on, the process proceeds to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether the power failure recovery data is abnormal. The power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

When it is determined that the power failure recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined that the data is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether the setting unchangeable flag is on. Here, the setting change impossible flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled during a start switch acceptance process (step S279) to a game end check process (step S301) of FIG. 41 described later. It is a flag that is set. Then, if the setting change impossible flag is on, the process proceeds to step S211, and if not, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of step S212.
Although the setting change impossible flag is provided in the present embodiment, the setting change prohibition flag may not be provided if the setting change is possible at all times. In that case, the process corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

In step S211, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S209. Then, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213, and power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON) is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S214 to perform unrecoverable error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in the register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the "in-use area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data relating to the progress of the game. The range shown in FIG. 35 is entirely within the use area. On the other hand, “outside the used area” described later refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data that is not related to the progress of the game. Specifically, a storage area in which data regarding the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is stored can be cited.

The "predetermined range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed, and includes set value data (address "F000(H)"), a gaming state (for example, RT state), and winning. The initialization range in which the flag of the special character holding the character is not initialized is defined as a “predetermined range”.
Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, when the power is turned off and the inside of BB2 is in progress (when the winning flag of BB2 is on), the setting change process is executed if the power is turned off normally. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data regarding the advantageous section or the AT. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the addresses “F061(H)” to “F068(H)” are targets of initialization here.

Next, in step S222, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is the normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S222 that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S223, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power is not cut off normally, and is the entire range within the use area including the set value data (address "F000(H)").

Then, the process proceeds to step S224, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S224 is completed. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S226.

In step S226, the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved. Although it is originally desired to save the F (flag) register in order to save the AF register, the AF register is saved because of the instruction. Then, the process proceeds to step S227, and a predetermined range outside the used area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM 53. The “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is the normal value, the process proceeds to step S230, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S228 that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power supply is not normally cut off, and is the entire range including a ring buffer storing the number of games and the number of payouts for displaying the ratio.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S230 is completed. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, activation setting of interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing designated in step S202 are set. Since the timer interrupt process is used as the interrupt process in the present embodiment, a process of setting the cycle of the timer interrupt (“2.235 ms” in the present embodiment) is included. Then, the interrupt process is executed after the process of step S233. In other words, the interrupt processing is not executed before the "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request set at the start of setting change is set. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the register in order to notify the sub control board 80 side that the setting change processing is started.

The “output request setting” means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80. Further, the control command here does not mean only a command to be actually transmitted, but also a command which is a source of the command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S235, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

Next, proceeding to step S236, the main control board 50 executes a 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) for starting the setting change. In the present embodiment, the process waits until the number of interrupts “224” is counted (“1” is subtracted for each number of interrupts, and the set number of interrupts becomes “0”). This waiting is also called delay processing or waiting processing because the main processing does not proceed. Note that during this waiting time (during the 2-byte time waiting process), the main process is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt process is executed.

In this way, the 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 because the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, while the sub control board 80 side is executed. Since it takes time to initialize the RWM 83, the main control board 50 side executes a 2-byte time waiting process. In particular, the main control board 50 side cannot know whether or not the initialization processing is completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the sub control board 80 side is still in the initialization process, the main control board 50 side has already completed the initialization process, and the process is further advanced. It is possible to prevent the progress of the control processing of 80 from becoming out of synchronization.
In addition, after the output request set and the control command set 1 at the time of starting the setting change are executed, the sub-control board 80 starts the initialization of the RWM 83, and a sufficient time is set as the wait time for completing the initialization of the RWM 83 To do. As a result, after the initialization processing of the RWM 83 is completed on the sub control board 80 side, the main control board 50 side proceeds to the processing of step S238 and thereafter.

The control command at the start of setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process of step S236. However, while the 2-byte time waiting process is being executed in step S236, the process after step S237 does not proceed (the main process does not proceed).

After the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236 ends, the process advances to step S237 to store the setting change display data as the acquired number data. Next, proceeding to step S238, the value "00011100(B)" corresponding to the setting being changed is stored in the LED display request flag.

By the processes of steps S237 and S238, when the interrupt process is executed after these processes, the digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (the acquired number display LED 78 and the set value display LED 73) can be turned on.
Specifically, in the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S238, "8" can be displayed on each of the digits 3a and 4a ("88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78), and the digit b5 (set value display). The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Since the acquired number data and the LED display request flag have been initialized by the initialization processing in the usage area of the RWM 53 in step S224, the value before step S237 is “0”.

Next, proceeding to step S239, interrupt waiting processing is executed. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. Then, after the lapse of one interruption time, the process proceeds to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether the operation of the setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) is detected. Here, it is determined whether the setting change switch is turned on by determining the rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch is detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that the operation is not detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the set value data (address “F000(H)”) of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When the interrupt process is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 is detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is fixed.
If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and if it is determined that it has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (waiting for an interrupt) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the process of step S239 is not provided and the rising data of the setting change switch is determined to be on in step S240, the setting value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned on in step S242. If not, the process proceeds to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the rising data of the setting change switch is ON.

If it is determined in step S240 that the switch is on, the rising data of the setting change switch is turned off if the interrupt process is executed even once. However, until the interrupt process is executed, it is continuously determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is ON. As a result, even if the setting change switch is operated once, the set value data continues to rise by "2" or more. Therefore, in step S239, interrupt waiting processing is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether the setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, and the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). This is because the display of "88" indicating that the setting is being changed is erased. Next, proceeding to step S245, the value "00011111(B)" corresponding to normal is stored in the LED display request flag.

By the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S244, the display of the digits 3a and 4a (acquired number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00".
Further, by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S245, "0" is displayed on each of the digits 1a and 2a ("00" is displayed on the credit number display LED 76). Since the bit corresponding to the digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", the digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be turned on. On the other hand, the digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) does not light because the setting is not being changed or the setting is not being confirmed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S246, and similarly to step S234, the output request set at the end of the setting change is set. In this process, the setting change process is terminated, and the data corresponding to the determined setting value (specifically, the setting value data stored in the address “F000(H)”) is sent to the sub-control board 80 side. This is a process of setting a control command to be notified to. Next, proceeding to step S247, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S235. Then, the process proceeds to step S248, and shifts to the main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing) at the time of power failure when power failure occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the set value data is read and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether within the range of set value 1 to set value 6), in other words, "F000 (H)" It is determined whether or not the set value data is within the range of “0 (H)” to “5 (H)”. When it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253, and when it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs, the process proceeds to step S264, and the non-recoverable error process is performed. ..

In step S253, an unused area in the used area of RWM 53 is set in the register as an initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, the RWM 53 in the range set in step S253 is initialized. Here, it is conceivable that a value will be stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. If a value is stored in the unused area, it may lead to fraudulent goto actions, so the unused area should be initialized when the power is turned on (normally once a day). There is.
In the next step S255, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area in the used area) is completed. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S256.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to the process of step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, the RWM 53 in the range set in step S257 is initialized.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether or not the initialization (unused area outside the used area) of the RWM 53 is completed, and if it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is similar to the process of step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, a predetermined input port 51 is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before power-off to the latest data.
Next, in step S262, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process of setting the cycle of the timer interrupt, and is similar to the above-described step S233.
Next, proceeding to step S263, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power restoration processing,
1) In the program start process of FIG. 38, if it is determined to be "No" in step S203 (when the power-off process completed flag is an abnormal value), or if there is an error in the checksum calculation in step S204, In step S206, an abnormal value is stored as return data after power failure. In this case, since “Yes” is determined in step S209, the process proceeds to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 39, since “No” is determined in step S222 and step S228, initialization of all ranges inside and outside the use area of the RWM 53, that is, “F000(H)” and thereafter. All data in is initialized.

2) In the program start process, when the power-off process completed flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is normally performed, when the setting change process is performed, step S222 and step S222 in FIG. Since it is determined to be “Yes” in S228, the process proceeds to steps S224 and S230, respectively, and the designated range (inside the used area and outside the used area) of the RWM 53 is initialized.

3) In the program start process, when the power-off process completed flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is also normally performed, but the setting change process is not performed, the power recovery process of step S213 ( 40). In this case, in step S252 in FIG. 40, if the set value is normal, initialization of the RWM 53 (inside the use area and outside the use area) at normal power-on is executed. This initialization is processing for initializing the unused area of the RWM 53, as described above.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in this embodiment. The main process is the process of one game. While the game is in progress, each game and main processing are repeated.
First, in step S271, the stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 53 that saves data (for example, register value, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing) at the time of power failure when power failure occurs, The setting of the stack pointer is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S272, game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42, which will be described later, and is a process of generating, updating, storing, and the like of the operating state flag.
In the next step S273, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, the presence or absence of bet medals is determined based on the bet number read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S276, and if it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then the process proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is ON, and when it is ON, a process such as shifting to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S276, management processing of inserted medals is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not a medal has been cared for, determining whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

In the next step S277, soft random number update processing is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" each) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the hand lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of “0” to “65535(D)”. As an updating method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (count value (variable) incremented at the time of interrupt) to the value before updating may be executed.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and if it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the bet number has not reached the specified number of the game, it is determined as “No” in step S278.

In step S279, the process when the start switch is received is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting unchangeable flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and setting an output count for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like. ..
In the next step S280, the acquired number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the specified prescribed number display data and the payout amount data are stored as the acquired number data before that, it is cleared.
Here, although the details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, the specified number may be instructed (displayed) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the game starts. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the specified prescribed number display data may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared and a process of displaying “00” on the acquired number display LED 78 (or turning off the light) is executed.
At the time of step S280, when the payout amount data of the previous game is stored as the acquisition amount data, the payout amount data is cleared in this step S280.

Next, proceeding to step S281, the main control board 50 executes an AT game number update process. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43, which will be described later, and is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when the predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, whether or not to increase the number of AT games during AT is performed based on the winning combination lottery result of the winning combination lottery process in step S282. For example, when winning a rare role, it is possible to determine the number of AT addition games. Therefore, when the AT game number is added and the added amount is added to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
After the start switch is received (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the role lottery process in step S282 or after all reels 31 are stopped (step S290 and thereafter). You may update the AT game number counter.
In the specification of the difference number management type AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is provided after all reels 31 are stopped and after the medal payout process due to winning is finished (after step S300). To update.

In step S282, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes a winning combination lottery (corresponding to the above-mentioned “internal drawing”) at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the starting switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value at the time of the lottery is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, it is determined whether or not the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any winning combination by using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section transition lottery process. This process is a process of FIG. 44 described later. In the present embodiment, the AT lottery is also executed when performing the advantageous section transition lottery. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, when in an advantageous section but not in AT (for example, when the main gaming state is CZ), in step S348 in FIG. 44, AT lottery processing is executed.
Next, proceeding to step S284, a push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) is performed. This processing is the processing shown in FIG. 48, and when the instruction function is operated in the game during AT (when the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78), the push order instruction number is generated, This is a process of displaying the push order instruction information.

In the next step S285, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed. This process executes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is “1834 (D) (2.235 ms×1834≈4099 ms)”. Is. When it is determined in step S279 that the minimum game time is "0", the initial value "1834(D)" is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, the minimum game time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process. When proceeding to step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum gaming time is "0", and when it is determined to be "0", processing proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 and starts the rotation of the reel 31. Then, when the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, the operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31. The stop position is determined and the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. ..

In step S290, the acquired number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, when the instruction function is activated during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "=1") may be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S290.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, "00010011(B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, a symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. When it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and when it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, normally, the reel 31 does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the display determination of the symbol, when the symbol (kicking symbol) which should not be originally displayed is displayed on the activated line, it is determined to be abnormal (“E5” error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Performs non-recoverable error handling.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred and the process proceeds to step S293, the payout amount updating process is executed. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the number-of-payouts data and the number-of-payouts data buffer described above.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination (M_WIN_PAY). This process is a process shown in FIG. 49 described later. Next, proceeding to step S295, interrupt waiting processing is performed. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. By the processing of these steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is prohibited immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to step S256 in FIG. Next, proceeding to step S298, a ratio setting process is executed. The "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values and calculating a ratio in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and the interrupt is permitted (restarted) in the next step S300. In this way, when the ratio setting process is executed, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited before execution.

Note that interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the ratio setting process because the ratio setting process is a process that uses a program stored outside the used area, and when a program outside the used area is being executed in the main process. This is because if interrupt processing is entered in, the programs in the used area and the programs outside the used area are mixed, and the processing becomes complicated.

Next, proceeding to step S301, game end check processing (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and performs a condition device (winning combination) flag clearing process. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, the output request set at the end of the game, and the control command set 1 at the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub control board 80 that one game is over.
When the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start set processing (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG.
First, in step S311, a game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time of this embodiment is set to the interrupt of "26846" (≈60,000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, the value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process from this point.

When the game standby display time becomes "0", the acquired number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out to the game last time is "8" and the player has settled by operating the settlement switch 43 and finished the game, "00" is displayed after about 1 minute. To be done. As a result, the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize the vacant table, so that the vacant table can be reduced.
The acquired number display LED 78 is not limited to displaying "00", and the acquired number display LED 78 (upper digit and lower digit) may be turned off, or the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78 may be turned off and the lower digit. May be displayed as "0". In any case, the display may be executed so that the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize it as an empty table.

Next, the process proceeds to step S312, and initialization processing of the push order instruction number is executed. This process is a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, the data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. In the next step S314, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB in the data of the symbol combination display flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB operation pattern is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the number of coins that can be acquired during 1BB operation (1BB game) is stored. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of coins that can be acquired in the 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operating state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operation state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
In the next step S317, the operating state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operating state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operation state flag (stored in the A register at this time, for example) at the address “F030(H)” of the RWM 53. As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that point is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S317.
For example, when the symbol combination of 1BB is displayed (at the time of winning 1BB), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is changed from "0" to "1".

In the next step S319, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In this embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the 2 game (or at the time of winning twice), but when the ending condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied ( When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1"), it is set to "1" in this game start set processing. When it is determined in step S319 that the RB operation is started, the process proceeds to step S320, and when it is determined that the RB operation is not started, the process proceeds to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games and the number of winnings during RB operation are stored. This process stores (stores) “2(H)” in the game number counter (not shown in FIG. 35) at the time of RB operation provided in the RWM 53, and at the time of RB operation provided at the RWM 53. This is a process of storing (storing) "2 (H)" in the winning number counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process proceeds to step S321.

Both the game number counter during RB operation and the prize number counter during RB operation are set to "2 (H)" as an initial value, and each time the game number or prize number increases by "1". Is a counter that is decremented by "1". However, not limited to this, the initial value of these counter values is set to “0”, incremented by “1” each time the number of games or winnings is increased by “1”, and these counter values are set to “2( H)” may be determined.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, there is no case where the specified number is designated. However, in a twelfth embodiment which will be described later, since a prescribed number may be instructed at the time of starting the game, this process is included in this flowchart. If it is determined that the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and if it is determined that the condition for instructing the specified number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the specified prescribed number display data is stored as the acquired number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the prescribed number "2" is instructed, and when the prescribed number "2" is instructed, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Then, the specified prescribed number display data for displaying "0A" is defined as "0B(H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, "0B(H)" is obtained as the acquired number data. Memorize
Further, when displaying the specified number “2”, “0A” is displayed instead of displaying “02” in order to avoid confusion with the number of payouts, the error number, and the push order instruction information.
The display of the number of payouts is any of "01" to "15", and "A" is not displayed in the lower digit. Also, regarding the error number, "A" is not displayed in the lower digit.

Here, the error numbers in the present embodiment (the numbers displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when an error occurs) are as follows.
HP: Medal clogging error HE: Medal empty error (no hopper 35 medals)
H0: Abnormality of payout sensor 37 CE: Error of medal retention CP: Error of illegal passage of medal CH: Abnormality of passage sensor 46 C0: Abnormality of insertion sensor 44 C1: Abnormal insertion error of medal FE: Sub tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Opening the front door E1: Abnormal power failure recovery E5: Display judgment error E6: Setting error E7: Random number error

The type of error is not limited to the above. An error in which the upper digit of the error number is “E” means a non-recoverable error.
As described above, since "A" is not displayed in the lower digit of the error number, the error number and the prescribed number of instructions are not confused.
Further, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is “=1” to “=6”. Therefore, the pushing order instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions are not confused.

Further, in step S322, the payout amount data in the previous game may be stored as the acquired number data before storing the instruction prescribed number display data as the acquired number data (in the case where a small winning combination is won in the previous game). ). The payout amount data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process by winning (FIG. 49 described later). Therefore, when the specified prescribed number display data is stored, it may be overwritten on the payout amount data up to that point. However, not limited to this, a process of clearing the acquired number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, it is determined based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313 whether or not the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed. When it is determined that the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the replay symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads a bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals previously bet in the game (bet number data). Next, in step S325, the automatic bet amount data is set. This process is a process of storing the bet number read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, in step S326, an output request for the operating state is set. In the next step S327, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that the replay has been activated, that the 1BB has been activated, etc. is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

It should be noted that the former (meaning before the application of the present application and does not mean “publicly known”; the same applies hereinafter) is performed in the step S276 during the bet number addition processing, specifically, during the main processing of FIG. In the medal management process, the clearing process of the acquired number data was executed. As a result, even if the small winning combination was won in the previous game, and the payout amount data at the time of winning the small winning role was stored as the winning number data, the winning number data was cleared during the bet number addition processing.
However, in the present embodiment, before the medal management process is executed, if the condition for instructing the prescribed number is satisfied, the indicated prescribed number display data is stored as the obtained number data.
When the specified number is specified, it is necessary to prevent the specified specified number display data from being cleared during the bet processing. This is because in the present embodiment, when the prescribed number is instructed, the state in which the prescribed number is instructed is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the acquisition number data is not cleared in the medal management process, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquisition number data is cleared in the process of step S280 in FIG.

However, not limited to this, when the specified number is instructed, the instructed specified number display data is cleared after the start switch 41 is operated, but when the specified number is not instructed, the bet number addition processing is performed as before. The acquired number data may be cleared (in the medal management process). In this case, for example, in the process of adding the bet number, it is determined whether or not the specified number is instructed in the game this time before the clearing process of the acquired number data is performed, and it is determined that the specified number is instructed. Is to not clear the acquired number data, and to clear the acquired number data when it is determined that the specified number is not instructed.

43 is a flowchart showing the AT game number counter updating process in step S281 in FIG.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether the AT flag is on ("1"). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends. That is, if it is not AT, the AT game number counter is not updated.

In step S332, it is determined whether or not the bet number is "3". In this processing, the bet number data of the RWM 53 or the automatic bet number data is read and it is determined whether or not the bet number of the game is "3". When the bet number is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and when the bet number is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. In the present embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated (the process relating to the instruction function is executed) only when the game is played with the bet number (specified number) “3” in the AT. In other words, even during AT, when the game is started with the bet number (specified number) “2”, the AT game number counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter are updated regardless of the bet number.

When proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the value of the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not subtracted (updated) when the bet number is not “3” even during AT.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition lottery processing in step S283 in FIG.
In the present embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone transition lottery process and the AT lottery process are independently executed. May be. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be limited to the advantageous section transition lottery process, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the bet number (specified number) of the current game is "3". When it is determined that the bet number is "3", the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the bet number is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended.
Therefore, when the bet number (prescribed number) is “3”, it is possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery in step S345 and the advantageous section transition process (processing relating to the advantageous section) in step S347, which will be described later, and step S348. The AT lottery process (the process related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the bet number (specified number) is not “3”, these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone type flag is "0". If it is determined that the advantageous zone type flag is "0" (non-advantageous zone), the process proceeds to step S343, and if it is determined that the advantageous zone type flag is "1" (is an advantageous zone), step S348. Proceed to. When the advantage zone type flag is "1" (when the advantage zone is already in progress), the advantage zone transition lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the winning combination lottery result in the current game is the target winning lottery result, that is, whether the winning combination of the winning combination in the advantageous section has been won. Although detailed description is omitted here, for example, when the special combination is won independently, when the special combination and the small combination are repeatedly won, and when the small combination (rare small combination) is won, the target lottery result is obtained. to decide. The target lottery result does not include non-win. This is because the non-winning game of the winning combination (the game in which the condition device is inoperative) does not execute the process related to the advantageous section.
When it is determined in step S343 that the target lottery result is obtained, the process proceeds to step S344, and when it is determined that the target lottery result is not obtained, the process according to the present flowchart is ended (that is, the advantageous section lottery is not performed or the advantageous section is not selected). To win).

In step S344, it is determined whether the target lottery result is the specific lottery result. Although detailed description is omitted here, for example, among the lottery winning combinations, the middle-tier cherry (single win or multiple wins with a special win) is set as the final winning hand (the winning hand must be won) in the advantageous section transition lottery. Every other time, when the middle-tier cherry is won, it can be considered that the result is a specific lottery result.
If it is determined in step S344 that the result is the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and if it is determined that the result is not the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, when it is not the specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and when it is the specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition process (step S347) is executed without performing the advantageous section transition lottery (be sure to shift to the advantageous section). To). In addition, even if the result of the specific lottery is selected, it is possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery and set to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a probability of 100%.

In step S345, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. As the advantageous section transition lottery, for example, a lottery may be performed in the same manner as the role lottery by using a lottery table in which the number of characters corresponding to the result of the lottery is predetermined. For example, if the winning number is "A", there is a 35% chance of winning the advantageous section, and if the winning number is "B", there is a 60% chance of winning the advantageous section, and so on. Is mentioned.
If the winning combination lottery result is not included in the advantageous section lottery, “No” is obtained in step S343. Therefore, in the case of “Yes” in step S343, that is, the winning combination lottery result is the target portion lottery result. At this time, the lottery is performed by the lottery table having at least "1" or more in the advantageous section transition lottery. However, the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to "1/17500" or more.

Next, in step S346, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in the lottery in step S345. If it is determined that the advantageous zone has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and if it is determined that the advantageous zone has not been won, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S347, an advantageous section transition process is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 45, and is the process of setting flags and counters based on the winning of the advantageous section.
In the next step S348, AT lottery is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
Not limited to the example of the present embodiment, AT may be always started (without performing AT lottery) when shifting to the advantageous section. Alternatively, a non-AT may always be set when shifting to the advantageous section, and after shifting to the advantageous section (for example, after a predetermined number of games have been exhausted), whether or not to execute AT may be selected by lottery.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition processing in step S347 of FIG.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on the advantageous zone type flag (“1”). Next, proceeding to step S352, the main control board 50 sets the advantageous interval clear counter to the advantageous interval initial game count value "1500 (D)".

In the next step S353, "0" is set in the difference number counter. The difference counter continues to be updated even during the normal section (non-advantageous section), and when it is not the advantageous section, if "0" is always set at the end of the game, the process of step S353 is unnecessary. However, the initial value “0” may be set for noise prevention and the like.
Since the initialization processing including the difference counter is executed at the end of the advantageous section, the difference counter is "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, in the case of the specification in which the difference counter is updated only during the advantageous period, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous period is "0", and therefore the process of step S353 can be omitted. ..
On the other hand, in the case where the difference number counter is continuously updated during the non-advantageous section as in the present embodiment, the difference number counter may be positive even immediately before the transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, in step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG.
First, in step S361, AT lottery is executed based on the winning combination lottery result. In this lottery, similar to step S345, AT lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning number is determined for each winning lottery result.
Note that the AT lottery does not necessarily have to be executed, and, for example, a winning combination lottery result that is not determined by the AT and a winning combination lottery result that is always determined by the AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not an AT is won in the AT lottery in step S361. If it is determined that the AT is won, the process proceeds to step S363, and if it is determined that the AT is not won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes AT initial game number determination processing. This process is a process shown in FIG. 47 described later. Next, proceeding to step S364, the main control board 50 sets the main gaming state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
Here, as the main game state of the present embodiment, normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous section and non-AT), AT, 1BB operation is provided. Although it is possible to set a sign as the main game state after winning the AT and before starting the AT, in the present embodiment, for simplification of explanation, when the AT is won, the AT is started immediately. And Further, the information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S362 that the AT has not been won and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main gaming state to CZ. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial game number determination processing in step S363 in FIG.
In FIG. 47, in a step S371, it is determined whether or not the winning combination lottery result in the current game is the winning of the confirmed winning combination. As described above, a rare combination such as a middle-tier cherry is set as the definite combination. When it is determined that the winning combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the winning combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 47, although the specification is such that the initial number of AT games is distributed according to whether or not the winning combination is won, the number of games is not limited to this, and the number of games is determined by using a lottery table based on the winning combination lottery result. A lottery may be executed. In other words, even with one winning combination lottery result, any number of games may be selected from among a plurality of games.
Also, during AT, the AT game number determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an additional lottery for the AT game number. When the player wins the AT game number addition lottery, the determined addition number is added to the AT game number counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the pushing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not the instruction condition (condition for operating the instruction function) is satisfied. When the game is AT and a winning combination having an advantageous pressing order such as a pressing order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
In addition, when the advantageous section is won in the game this time (“Yes” in step S346 in FIG. 44) and the AT is won (when “Yes” in step S362 in FIG. 46), the advantageous section starts from the next game. This time, the game is not an advantageous section. Therefore, since the instruction function cannot be operated in the game this time, “No” is obtained in step S381.
When it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3". In this processing, it is determined whether or not the bet number is “3” by reading the bet number data of the RWM 53 or the automatic bet number data.
When it is determined that the bet number is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the bet number is not "3", the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for operating the instruction function (performing the processing related to the instruction function) is set to be the bet number “3” (one specified number). For this reason, for example, even when a game is started with a bet number "2" during AT and a winning combination having a favorable pressing order (for example, a pressing order bell) is won, the instruction function does not operate (the correct pressing order is Not notified).

In the next step S383, the winning number (condition device number) is set. The winning number (condition device number) determined in the winning combination lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S384, a push order instruction number table (not shown) is set. Here, the start address of the push order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S385.

In step S385, designated address data is set. In this process, a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (conditional device number) is used as the offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the start address of the push order instruction number table is acquired. As a result, the push-order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (pushing order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of RWM 53 (area for storing the pushing order instruction number, not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (pushing order instruction number) is stored as the acquired number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, the winning combination is assumed to be the same as in FIG. 58 (twelfth embodiment) described later. When the winning numbers “3” to “8” are won during AT, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the acquired number data is as follows.
Winning number "3": Push order instruction number "A1 (H)"
Winning number "4": Push order instruction number "A2 (H)"
Winning number "5": Push order instruction number "A3 (H)"
Winning number "6": Push order instruction number "A4 (H)"
Winning number "7": Push order instruction number "A5 (H)"
Winning number "8": Push order instruction number "A6 (H)"

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during AT, the pushing order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the acquired number data by the pushing order instruction number setting process of FIG. As a result, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, displays the pressing order instruction information “=1” corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A1(H)” on the acquired number display LED 78.

After step S387, the process proceeds to step S388, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone display LED flag is on (lighted). If it is determined that the advantageous zone display LED flag is on, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous zone display LED flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of this time (RT or main gaming state) is a gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1". It should be noted that whether or not the gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" is set in advance, and here it is determined whether or not the gaming state is set in advance. Specifically, the current RT and data of the main game state are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and by reading this data, the game state of the current game exceeds the section Sim payout rate “1”. Or not. When it is determined that the gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1", the process proceeds to step S390. When it is determined that the gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1" is not performed, the processing according to this flowchart ends. To do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the interrupt processing executed after step S390. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

As described above, in the game in which the instruction function is operated, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not yet lit, and when the section Sim payout rate is in a game state exceeding “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is displayed. Since the condition that must be turned on is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, when winning in the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the start of the game of the next game. Alternatively, after the transition to the advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or even in the gaming state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1", at any timing (when the arbitrarily set lighting condition is satisfied, ), the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires payout amount data. This process is a process of storing the value of the payout amount data in the A register.
Next, in step S392, it is determined whether or not medals are paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the payout amount data (A register value) is “0”. Then, when it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, when it is determined that the medal is not paid out, the process according to the present flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not “0”, that is, when the medal is paid out, the process proceeds to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the credit amount data is acquired.
Next, in step S394, it is determined whether or not the number of credits is the limit value. Specifically, when the credit amount data acquired in step S393 is “50 (D)”, it is determined that the credit amount is the limit value, the process proceeds to step S398, and the acquired credit amount data is “50”. If it is less than (D)”, it is determined that the number of credits does not reach the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S395.

In step S395, a waiting time for credit addition is set. In the present embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the waiting time, the number of interrupt processing times “46” (46×2.235 ms=about 100 ms) is set. Specifically, "00000000(B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110(B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, proceeding to step S396, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt process and waiting until it becomes “0”.

When the 2-byte time waiting process in step S396 ends, the process advances to step S397 to add "1" to the value of the credit amount data. As a result, the display of the credit amount display LED 76 becomes "+1" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S397. For example, the display of the credit number display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process of step S397, the process proceeds to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, a single medal payout process (a process of paying an actual medal to the player from the hopper 35) is executed. This process drives the hopper motor 36, and as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, when the on/off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing, one medal has been correctly paid out. to decide.
By the above processing, the credit number is added until the credit number reaches the limit value, and when the credit number is the limit value, a process of paying out an actual medal from the hopper 35 is executed.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquired number data. As a result, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "+1". For example, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03".
In the next step S400, "1" is subtracted from the payout amount data. In this step S400, only the payout amount data is updated, and the value of the payout amount data buffer is not updated.

Next, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the medal payout is completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the updated payout amount data is “0”. When it is determined that the payout amount data is “0”, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the payout amount data is not “0”, the process returns to step S393 to continue the process.

In the above payout process, when performing the payout process of adding “1” to the number of credits, a waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. This allows the player to appear as if the display of the credit number display LED 76 counts up. For example, when the display of the credit number display LED 76 before the credit addition is “08” and eight medals are added to this, “display “08”→standby processing for 100 ms→display “09”→100 ms Standby process→...→Standby process for 100 ms→Display “16”. On the other hand, if a waiting time is not provided when adding "1" to the number of credits, it will appear that the display "08" is instantaneously changed to the display "16".
Then, as in the present embodiment, when the number of credits is added, by executing the 2-byte time waiting process for each addition of “1”, the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side (“puru-ru... It is also possible to synchronize ")" with the increase in the number of credits.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number of “50 (D)” and the medals are actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when the medal is actually paid out, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub control board 80 side without providing the 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG.
First, in step S411, a process of clearing a flag of the condition device (also referred to as winning information; stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) is performed. This process is a process of clearing the condition devices other than the special role. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special role has stopped on the activated line, the condition device of the special role is also cleared. In the next step S412, the replay display LED 79f is extinguished. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to “0”. Next, in step S413, the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operation state flag to "0".

In the next step S414, it is determined whether or not the AT game number counter has become "0". Here, the AT game number counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main processing of FIG. 41, as described above. Thus, in the present embodiment, the AT game number counter is updated after the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 41), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. 41, step S301 (game end) It may be executed before the check process) or within the process of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Further, in the present embodiment, an example of the game number management type AT for updating the AT game number counter is shown, but in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is set to “0” in step S414. Determine whether or not The AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process by winning (step S294 in FIG. 41).
When it is determined that the AT game number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S415, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, proceeding to step S416, the advantageous section counter management is executed. This process is a process for updating the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter, and is the process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52 described later. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing the advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 51 shows Example 1 and FIG. 52 shows Example 2.
In the advantageous zone counter management, the following processing is executed.
1) Update of advantageous zone clear counter 2) Update of difference number counter 3) Judgment whether end condition of advantageous zone is satisfied 4) Initialization (clear) of data regarding advantageous zone when end condition of advantageous zone is satisfied )
Further, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the bet number (specified number).
In this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether it is the advantageous section or the non-advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section counter management is executed only in the advantageous section.

51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous period clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063(H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is as follows, for example.
"0010 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F (H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
"0000 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if “1” is subtracted from “0000 (H)”, no carry is generated, and “0000 (H)” is maintained. In this way, regardless of the value before the subtraction, since it is one instruction (1 step) that only subtracts "1", it is determined whether the count value before the update is "0". Is unnecessary, and the process of adding the value of the carry flag after subtraction is also unnecessary. Therefore, the time required to update the count value can be significantly reduced. Further, by configuring in this way, it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section from the value of the advantageous section clear counter, and whether or not the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, the game of the advantageous section is 1500). It is also unnecessary to judge whether or not the game is executed, whether or not an arbitrary ending condition is satisfied, and the like.

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is "0". This process is determined by whether or not the carry flag is "1" in the subtraction process of step S422.
When the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the process proceeds to step S436. When the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before subtraction is not "0") It proceeds to step S424. In addition, when the carry flag becomes “1” (when the value before subtraction is “0”), the current game is not in the advantageous section (the current game is a non-advantageous section (normal section). It means that.

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the subtraction result (after subtraction) in step S422 is "0". This processing is determined by whether or not the zero flag is "1" in the subtraction processing in step S422. That is, it is determined whether the value before the subtraction is "1".
When the zero flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S425. In addition, when the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the game of the advantageous section is ended in the current game (the next game is a non-advantageous section (normal section)). ) Means that.

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S426, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a re-game operation symbol has been displayed in the current game (whether or not a replay has won). This process determines whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1", and when it is "1" it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is displayed. When it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S434, and when it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S427.

In step S427, a payout amount data buffer is acquired. This process is a process of reading the payout amount data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference number counter is executed. In this process, the A register value (payout amount data buffer value) is added to the HL register value (difference number counter), and the added value is stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S429, the value of bet number data is acquired. This process is a process of reading the bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value is less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether or not the subtraction result in step S430 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag becomes "1" by the subtraction in step S430, and if the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the subtraction result is less than "0", and the process proceeds to step S432. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process proceeds to step S433.

In step S432, processing for clearing the HL register value (setting it to "0") is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference number counter value is stored. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference counter. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S433 via step S432, the difference number counter becomes "0".
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value. The upper limit value of the difference number counter is set to “2400(D)”. In the processing here, a comparison operation between the HL register value and “2401(D)” is performed. In this comparison operation, the carry flag is "0" when the HL register value is larger, and the carry flag is "1" when the HL register value is smaller. Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit value has not been exceeded, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded (when the carry flag is “0”), the process proceeds to step S435. When the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
In step S435, the RWM 53 initializes the storage area related to the advantageous section (clears data related to the advantageous section). Examples of the data regarding the advantageous section include an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section type flag, a difference counter, an advantageous section display LED flag, an AT flag, an AT game number counter, and the like. Further, information on the main gaming state is given. The information about the advantageous section does not include the RT state number, the LED display counter, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, “F000(H)” to “F052(H)” are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Here, it is assumed that the LED display counter is cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes “0” when the advantageous section ends. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized when it is "00000010 (B)", the LED display counter is normally updated to "00000001 (B)" in the next interrupt process, Although the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be turned on, the LED display counter becomes "00010000 (B)". Therefore, the LED display counter delays the display of the LED corresponding to “00000001(B)”, which may cause the LED to appear to turn off for a moment.

Further, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (total game number counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value of minimum game time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Information of input port 51 6) Data of control command buffer 7) Data of stack area 8) Information of external signal Note that the above is an example of typical data, and the data that is not cleared is limited to the above data. It does not mean that you can be done.

Next, proceeding to step S436, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0” (normal section). When the advantageous zone type flag is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", particularly when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section) in this embodiment, the process proceeds to step S437. At this point, the advantageous section type flag is "1" because this time the game has won the advantageous section transition lottery, and the advantageous section type flag is set to "1" in step S351 in FIG. This is the case when the determination in step S423 is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S436. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, the advantageous section type flag is cleared in step S435, and thus it is not determined to be “No” in step S436.

In step S437, an initial value is set in the advantageous zone clear counter. This process is a process of setting "1500 (D)" to the advantageous section clear counter. Here, "1500 (D)" is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that "F063(H)" is set in the HL register in step S421. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the above advantageous section counter management, when the difference counter is updated, the payout number is first added (step S428), and then the bet number is subtracted (step S430). The reason for processing in this way is as follows.
For example, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", it is assumed that the bet number is "3 (D)" and the payout number is "9 (D)".
Here, when the bet number is first subtracted from the difference counter, it becomes "-1 (D) (actually, "FFFF (H)")", and the carry flag becomes "1". When the number of payouts is added, "-1 (D)" is added to "9 (D)", so that "8 (D)" is obtained and the carry flag is "1" (carry is carried. It means that it will occur).

Since the difference number of the game this time is "+6", only by adding the difference number "+6" to the difference number counter "2(D)" before the update, the carry flag becomes "1", which is irregular. The situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined depending on whether the carry flag is "1". If it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes" in step S431 even though the carry has not occurred, and the difference counter is initialized in step S432. The value will be set. The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" in either case where a carry or a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", if the payout number "9 (D)" is added first, the difference counter becomes "11 (D)" at that point, and then the bet is placed. Subtracting the number yields "8(D)". In this case, since carry does not occur, the carry flag is "0".
For the above reason, when the difference counter is updated, if the payout number is first added and then the bet number is subtracted, the determination process of step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

Further, in the advantageous zone counter management of the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the advantageous zone counter (step S422) is first executed, and when the value before subtraction is “0” (when “Yes” in step S423, that is, In the non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the difference number counter updating process (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether the section is the advantageous section or the non-advantageous section. By not executing, the processing efficiency is improved. Therefore, the processing sequence is such that the subtraction processing of the advantageous interval clear counter is first executed, and then the update processing of the difference number counter is executed. Of course, if the specification is such that it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous zone, and if it is in the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone clear counter is subtracted and the difference number counter is updated, the advantageous zone clear counter is subtracted. It is also possible to execute the difference counter update processing prior to the processing.

In addition, the process of step S434 is executed even when the result of determination in step S426 is “Yes” (during replay winning). By doing so, even if an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference sheet counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, it becomes "Yes" in step S434. The advantageous section can be ended. On the other hand, if such confirmation is unnecessary, the process of this flowchart may be ended when the result in step S426 is “Yes”.

In the example of FIG. 51, it is determined in step S426 whether or not the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the difference number counter is updated (step S427 to step S427). By skipping S430), the processing is speeded up.
In particular, in the game in which the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, it is conceivable that the payout number of the game is regarded as "0" (deemed payout number) and the bet number of the next game is regarded as "0" and the difference counter is updated. .. However, for example, an SB (single bonus) is provided as a winning role during the advantageous section, and when the SB is won, one SB game that sets the bet number to "1" is executed in the next game. In the case of winning the replay, the re-game operation symbol may be stopped and displayed. In this case, since the next game is not the SB game, the bet number is "3" (other than the SB game, the bet number "1" cannot be played). However, in this case, since the number of payouts in the SB game and the number of bets in the next game do not match, there is a problem in how to count the difference counter.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference number counter.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of the advantageous zone counter management in step S416 of FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, the payout number is first added to the difference number counter, and then the bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the bet number is first subtracted from the difference number counter, and then the payout number is added to the difference number counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the payout number is added after the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter, the carry flag may be “1” even if no carry-down occurs in the end, and the calculation result is It has been explained that whether or not it is "0" cannot be determined by whether or not the carry flag is "1".
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter (step S430), and then the payout amount is added (step S428). In step S441, the carry flag value is not referred to. It is determined whether the calculation result is less than "0".
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, depending on whether or not the D7 bit (the most significant bit) of the H register (register storing the upper digit) value is “1” among the HL register values, it is determined in step S441. It is determined whether or not the calculation result of is less than “0”.

For example,
Difference number counter value (HL register value)=0000 (H) (before calculation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout amount data = 0 (H)
Suppose that
In this case, the difference counter value after calculation is
0000(H)-3(H)=FFFD(H)
Becomes
Therefore,
H register value=FF(H) (1111/1111(B))
L register value=FD(H) (1111/1101(B))
Becomes
It should be noted that “/” indicates a delimiter every 4 bits in binary notation.

In the above example, the HL register value before the calculation is "0000 (H)", but the HL register value before the calculation is not "0000 (H)" and "the difference in the current game>HL register"Value", for example,
This game difference number = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before calculation)
, The HL register value after calculation is
HL register value=FFFE(H)
Becomes
Therefore,
H register value=FF(H) (1111/1111(B))
L register value = FE(H) (1111/1110(B))
Becomes

Furthermore, when the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "the difference in the current game <HL register value", for example, firstly,
This game difference number = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before calculation)
, The HL register value after calculation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
Becomes
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value=FD(H) (1111/1101(B))
Becomes

Secondly,
This game difference number = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before calculation)
, The HL register value after calculation is
HL register value = 00FC (H)
Becomes
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value=FC(H) (1111/1100(B))
Becomes

Furthermore, thirdly,
This game difference number = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before calculation)
, The HL register value after calculation is
HL register value=095D(H) (after calculation)
Becomes
Therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value=5D(H) (0101/1101(B))
Becomes

On the other hand, the upper limit value of the difference number counter is “2400(D)”. Here, when "2400(D)" is represented by a binary number,
"0000/1001/0110/0000(B)"
Becomes
Since the upper limit value of the difference number counter is “2400(D)”, when the value exceeding “2400(D)” is stored in the difference number counter, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
At the end of the current game, the difference number counter value becomes "2400(D)", but since it does not exceed "2400(D)", it is determined that the advantageous zone end condition is not satisfied, and the next game is started. Suppose that it has moved. Then, in the next game, the difference number is most increased when the bet number is "1" and the payout number is "15 (D)", so the difference number in the game is "14 (D)". Becomes
Therefore, the difference number counter value in this case is “2414 (D)”.
Here, when "2414(D)" is represented by a binary number,
"0000/1001/0110/1110(B)"
Becomes

Further, when the difference number counter value becomes "2414 (D)", since it exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference number counter is cleared in the game and becomes "0 (D)".
From the above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take during the game is "2414 (D)", that is, "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414(D)",
H register value=0000/10001(B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
Therefore, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes “0”.
Therefore, when the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0(D)" to "2414(D)", the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0".

As described above, the D7 bit (the most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1" except when a carry occurs.
In addition, in order for the D7 bit of the H register value to become "1", the difference number counter value needs to be "32768 (D)", and the difference number reaches such a value except for carry carry. The advantageous section will not continue until.

On the other hand, as mentioned above,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout amount data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
, The HL register value after the calculation is “FFFD(H)”.
Here, "FFFD(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1101(B)"
Is.

Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101(B)
Therefore, the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Similarly, before the operation
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Payout amount data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter)=0002 (H)
When the difference counter is updated, the HL register value becomes “FFFF(H)”.

Here, "FFFF(H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1111(B)"
Is.
Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
Therefore, the D7 bit of the H register value becomes "1".
Thus, when a carry-down occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of updating the difference counter, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when no carry occurs, and the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when the carry occurs. 1”.
Therefore, in step S441 of FIG. 52, when it is determined whether the operation result is less than "0", it is determined whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". When the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the calculation result is less than "0".
By doing so, it is possible to determine whether the operation result is "0" without determining whether the carry flag is "1" as a result of the operation.
Then, since it is determined whether or not the calculation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the payout number is added after the bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter value.

Further, as is clear from the above, even if the maximum value that the difference counter can take is “2414 (D)”, it is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but D6 bit, D5 bit, and The D4 bit is also "0".
On the other hand, when the carry-down of the difference number counter value occurs, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, but also the D6 bit, the D5 bit, and the D4 bit become "1".

Therefore, in FIG. 52, in step S441, instead of determining whether the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether the D6 bit is "1". , D5 bit may be determined to be “1”, and D4 bit may be determined to be “1”. In any case, when the bit is "1", the operation result is less than "0", and when it is not "1", the operation result is not less than "0".
Incidentally, as is clear from the above, also in the example 1 (step S431) of FIG. 51, the operation result is less than “0” by referring to the D7 bit (or D6, D5, or D4 bit) of the H register value. It is also possible to judge whether or not there is.

Further, as is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the advantageous section clear counter is updated (step S422), the difference counter is updated (steps S428 and S430), and whether the advantageous section clear counter is “0” or not. The determination (step S424), the determination as to whether or not the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value (step S434), and the initialization of the information regarding the advantageous zone (step S435) are performed regardless of the bet number (specified number) in the current game. Is executed. Therefore, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value as a result of the game being played with the bet number (specified number) "2", the advantageous section ends. To do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 at a period of 2.235 ms (however, it is not limited to this time period) in parallel with the main process.
When the processing shifts to the interrupt processing of step S451, in step S452, register value saving and duplicate interrupt prohibition processing are performed as initial processing. Here, since the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main process is used in the interrupt process, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Further, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is done because, for example, an interrupt processing execution request may be issued during execution of the power-off processing.

In the next step S453, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and is a process of detecting whether or not the signal of the power failure detection signal is input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. The interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed is given.

Next, proceeding to step S456, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process of turning on the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10.
It should be noted that the errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include a non-recoverable error and a recoverable error. For the non-recoverable error, an error display is output by the main processing (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but it is recoverable. The error display is performed by this LED display control at each interrupt processing.

Next, proceeding to step S457, reading processing of the input port 51 is performed. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, and the like are operated, the switch signal, the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data (level data, rising data, (Falling data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.

In the next step S458, it is determined whether or not the set value is within the normal range. Here, the setting value data stored in the address “F000(H)” is read, and the range of the setting value data is within the normal range (whether the setting value data is within the range of “0” to “5”). ) Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the set value data is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and when it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470 and the non-recoverable error process is performed. The error in this case is referred to as “E6” error in the present embodiment, and the fact that it is “E6” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In step S459, built-in random number check processing is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag is provided that turns on when an error occurs in the built-in random number, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random numbers for the winning combination is detected (when the random number is updated slowly), the error flag is turned on.
Then, in step S460, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether or not the error flag is on). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461, and the error If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process advances to step S470 to proceed to non-recoverable error processing. The error display content at this time is "E7".

In step S461, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed for each reel 31 (left, middle, right), and includes stop, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S462, and port output processing is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the (reel) motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, an input error check process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality in each sensor.
In the next step S464, control command transmission processing is performed. This processing is processing for transmitting the set control command (untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53) to the sub control board 80.
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in step S464 in the interrupt process after that time (in principle, if the command buffer is empty, the interrupt process that comes next after that time). The control command is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by.

In the next step S465, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in the register. Then, in the next step S466, an external signal is output from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33) (a signal is transmitted to the external centralized terminal board 100).
Next, proceeding to step S467, a ratio display preparation process is performed. This process is a process of updating the timer relating to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74 and outputting segment data.

In the next step S468, a random number updating process is performed. Next, proceeding to step S469, the register value saved in step S452 is restored and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt process is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt process can be started. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

As shown in the above processing, the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, the status display LEDs 79 (79a to 79f), the set value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74 are turned on/off by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms. Controlled.
Furthermore, when an untransmitted control command is stored in the command buffer in the sub control board 80 for each interrupt processing, the transmission processing is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during non-recoverable error processing (interrupt processing is interrupted until normal recovery).
The non-recoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing such as abnormal data processing (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from the input port and transmission of control commands to the sub control board 80) is executed. In order to prevent it, the interrupt itself is prohibited.
If an untransmitted command is stored in the control command buffer when the non-recoverable error occurs, the command is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal has been turned on in the previous interrupt processing. Here, when the voltage becomes a predetermined value or less (V1 or less in the example of FIG. 3) by a voltage monitoring device (power cutoff detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50, a predetermined input is performed. Since the power failure detection signal is input to the predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal is input. Further, when the power failure detection signal is turned on, it is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If it is determined in the previous interruption process that the power-off detection signal is on, the process proceeds to step S482, and if it is determined that the power-off detection signal is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off detection signal is ON in the interrupt processing this time. When it is determined that it is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switch is on, then the flow proceeds to step S483.
When it is determined to be "Yes" in both steps S481 and S482 (when the power interruption detection signal is input for two consecutive interrupts), it is determined that the power interruption has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. By this processing, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (the reel 31 is rotating) or the hopper motor 36 is being driven (medals are being paid out), the driving is stopped.
Next, proceeding to step S484, the power-off processing completed flag is stored in the RWM 53. This process is a process of storing in the RWM 53 data indicating that the normal power-off process has been executed.

In the next step S485, the checksum data of the RWM 53 is calculated. This processing is to calculate a checksum including a work area (RWM53) used in the program, and the target program use area includes a program work area, an unused area, a stack area, and the like.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. When it is determined that the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has not been completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue the calculation of the checksum. On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculation is completed, the process advances to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also referred to as complement data) which becomes “0” when all the data in the program use area and the value stored in the above-mentioned predetermined address are added at the checksum of the RWM 53. ).
Then, when the checksum of the RWM 53 is executed at the start of the program, all the data in the program use area of the RWM 53 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data calculated by this is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S488 and the reset waiting state is set. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power cutoff detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50, and therefore, in step S488, a state is waited for the output of the reset signal.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG.
First, in step S491, the output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process of outputting "00000000(B)" from the output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, the output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting "00000000(B)" from the output port 4 similarly to the above process.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. This processing updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter by shifting it to the right by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is "0". When it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S495, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S496. ..
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, the process of setting the LED display counter "00000000(B)" to "00010000(B)" is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, proceeding to step S497, error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data are acquired. Here, in the storage area of the RWM 53, a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs, and LED display data indicating ON/OFF of the game start display LED 79d to the replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79 are stored. A storage area and a storage area for storing (1-3) bet display data indicating ON/OFF of the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: "1" when the game can be started, "0" when the game cannot be started
D4: "1" when the medal can be inserted, "0" when the medal can not be inserted
D5: "1" when winning the replay, "0" when not winning the replay
D6: Not used D7: Not used Note that the D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data and the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG. 32 correspond to each other.

In addition, the bet display data is configured as follows.
With 0 bets: 00000000
With one bet: 00000001
With two bets: 00000011
With 3 bets: 00000111
The D0 to D2 bits of the bet display data correspond to the segments A to C of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Further, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are OR-operated (combined), and the operation result is set as the segment data for the output port 3. When the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed, it becomes data indicating whether the status display LED 79 is on or off. When there is a request to display the digit 5 (“Yes” in step S516), this segment data is output from the output port 3.
Next, proceeding to step S499, the register for setting the segment data for the output port 4 is cleared.

In the next step S500, the value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0" is determined. To judge. If it is determined to be "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S516. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of the present embodiment is an LED segment table 1 that defines the segment data when displaying an error number, and other than the error number (credit number, payout number, setting value, setting change display, push order). The LED segment table 2 that defines the segment data for displaying the instruction information and the prescribed number of instructions is provided and stored in the use area of the ROM 54. Then, in step S501, the head address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501, offset and segment data are set as follows.
Offset "0": Segment data displaying "0" Offset "1": Segment data displaying "1" Offset "2": Segment data displaying "2" Offset "3": Displaying "3" Segment data Offset “4”: Segment data displaying “4” Offset “5”: Segment data displaying “5” Offset “6”: Segment data displaying “6” Offset “7”: “7” Segment data to be displayed Offset “8”: Segment data to be displayed “8” Offset “9”: Segment data to be displayed “9” Offset “A”: Segment data to be displayed “=” Offset “B”: “A Data to display

For example, first, when the payout amount data “10 (H)” is stored in the acquired amount data, the offset of the upper digit of the payout amount data is “1” and the offset of the lower digit is “0”. Becomes Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "1" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "0" is acquired.
Further, for example, secondly, when the setting change display data “88(H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset of the setting change display data is “8”, and the lower digit is The offset is “8”. Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "8" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "8" is acquired.

Furthermore, thirdly, for example, when the pushing number instruction number “A1(H)” is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset of the pushing order instruction number is “A”, and the lower digit The offset is “1”. Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "=" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "1" is acquired.
Further, for example, fourthly, when the specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the upper digit offset is "0" and the lower digit offset is "B". Becomes Thus, when the digit 3a is turned on, segment data indicating "0" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is turned on, segment data indicating "A" is acquired.

Next, proceeding to step S502, first, set value data is acquired. Here, the setting value data stored in the address “F000(H)” is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate set value display data, which is stored in the A register. The set value display data serves as an offset value when the set value is displayed.
As will be described later, the segment data stored at the address (of the LED segment table 1 or 2) of the value obtained by adding the offset value to the head address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is acquired.
Next, in step S503, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the set value. Here, when the D register value is "00010000 (B)" and the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, it is determined that there is a display request for the set value. Then, if it is determined that there is a display request for the set value, the process proceeds to step S514, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, the credit amount data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, the upper digit offset is acquired. In this process, the credit amount data (A register value) obtained in step S504 is divided by "10(D)", the quotient value is stored in the A register, and the remainder value is stored in the E register. Processing.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the upper digit of the credit number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and when it is "1", "Yes" is determined. If it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digits of the credit amount, the process proceeds to step S514, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the lower digit of the credit number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 2a) of the D register value is "1". When it is "1", it is determined "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S513. .. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digit of the credit amount, the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, the acquired number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, in the acquisition number data, the payout number data is stored at the timing when the medals are paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination. Further, at the timing of the setting change, the setting change display data “88 (H)” is stored. Furthermore, at the timing of instructing the specified number, the specified specified number display data "0B(H)" is stored. Further, at the timing when the instruction function is operated (the pressing order is notified), the pressing order instruction number “=x (x=1 to 6)” is stored. Then, any one of these data is acquired and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not this is the case when an error is displayed. In this processing, the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497) is read and it is determined whether or not it is "0". If it is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed and step S510 When it is “0”, it is determined that the error is not being displayed, and the process proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for displaying an error is set. The description of the specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 is omitted. In step S510, a process of storing the start address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register is executed. Therefore, in this case, the head address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) instead of the head address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, the offset for the upper digit is acquired. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), the B register value is divided by "10(D)" and the quotient is stored in the A register. Are stored in the E register. On the other hand, when the error is not displayed (when the B register value is “0”), the A register value (payout amount data, setting change display data, designated prescribed number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to “10 ( D)" is performed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78. In this processing, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S514, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, the offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit value and the lower digit value are interchanged in the A register and the E register. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is acquired. In this process, the data stored in the HL register (the head address of the LED segment table 1 or 2) and the data stored in the A register (offset value) are added, and the added address is corresponded to (the LED segment table). This is a process of storing the segment data (of Table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, segment data for output port 4 is set. The data set here is segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since the digits 1b to 4b perform the lighting process in the ratio display process (step S522) described later, the segment data of the digits 1b to 4b are not set here.
Therefore, in step S515, "Yes" (setting value display request is issued) in step S503, and when the segment data for setting value display is acquired and stored in the C register in step S514, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

Next, in step S516, it is determined whether there is a digit 5 display request. Here, the display request of the digit 5 is made when the D register value is "00010000 (B)". If it is determined that the digit 5 display request is made, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that the digit 5 display request is not made, the process proceeds to step S517.

In step S517, the segment data for output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as the segment data for the output port 3. If "Yes" in step S516 (when there is a display request for digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes segment data for the output port 3.

In the next step S518, the data of the advantageous zone display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous zone display LED flag is acquired and it is determined whether or not the value is “0”. When the value of the advantageous zone display LED flag is not "0", it is determined whether or not the digit turned on in this interrupt processing is the digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that it is the lighting timing of the digit 4a. In this case, the data obtained by ORing the segment data set in step S517 and "10000000" is set as the segment data for the output port 3. As a result, the data for setting the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a to light is set.

Next, proceeding to step S519, the segment data for output port 4 set at step S515 is cleared. This is because the digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) is not turned on when there is no request to display the digit 5 (“No” in step S516).
Then, in step S520, the digit signal is output from the output port 2 and the segment signal is output from the output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as the digit data of the output port 2 and output from the output port 2.
The data of the segment signal output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when the digit 5 is lit) or the data set in step S517 (when the digits 1 to 4 are lit).

Next, in step S521, the segment signal is output from the output port 4. The data of the segment signal output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a setting value display request) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no setting value display request). In other words, when the segment data for the output port 4 is cleared in step S519, "00000000(B)" is output from the output port 4.
Next, proceeding to step S522, the process proceeds to the ratio display process (process for turning on the management information display LED 74). In the present embodiment, the description of the ratio display process will be omitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous zone display LED 77 and the power cut (when the power cut occurs while the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit) will be described.
In the interrupt process, when a power failure is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to step S483 and subsequent steps, but in this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power failure.
Then, after the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, if the setting key switch is off, it is determined as “No” in step S208, so if the power off recovery is normal, the step The process proceeds to the power off recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) in S213.

In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set in step S253, and this range is the unused area of the RWM 53 as described above. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag of the address “F062(H)” is not subject to initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter at the address "F051(H)".

In the power-off recovery process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM 53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, the interrupt process of FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms after step S262. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. Further, the case of "No" in step S512 is when there is a display request for the digit 4a. In this case, when the error is not displayed (“No” in step S509) and the advantageous segment display LED flag is “1”, in step S518, the D7 bit of the segment data is set to “1” and the segment Data is output (step S520). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
As described above, when the power is cut off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit again when the interrupt process is executed in the power-off recovery process.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on after the power is turned off, the following occurs.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is on, “Yes” is obtained in the step S208, and the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of the step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is designated in step S221, and this initialization range also includes the advantageous zone display LED flag of the address “F062(H)”. When it is determined that the power failure recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM 53 (including the address "F062(H)") is initialized.

Therefore, even if "1" indicating turning on is stored by the initialization of the advantageous zone display LED flag, it becomes "0" indicating turning off.
Then, in step S233 of FIG. 39, an interrupt is activated. When the interruption is activated, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 at the lighting timing of the set value display LED 73 in the LED display control (FIG. 55). Then, in step S240 in FIG. 39, the setting value can be changed (the setting value is changed by turning on the setting change switch).

Further, in FIG. 39, when the interrupt processing is started in step S233 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, and even when the digit 4a lighting timing comes, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is already " Since it is “0”, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on and the process proceeds to the setting changing process, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Further, even if the setting change process is ended and the process shifts to the main process, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

Further, in the main processing of FIG. 41, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on and the power is cut off during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, during the rotation of the reel 31, the following is performed. ..
When a power failure is detected in the interrupt process, all output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. 54, so the drive signal of the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops due to the power cut.

Next, when power is supplied, the state before the power is cut off is restored through the power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the same drive signal for the motor 32 as before the power-off is output from the output port 52. Here, the drive signal of the motor 32 before power-off is a signal for maintaining a constant speed state. In this embodiment, in the constant speed state of the motor 32 (reel 31), one step drive is performed with one interrupt (2.235 ms). However, even if the drive signal in the constant speed state is output from the beginning to the motor 32 after the driving is stopped, the rotational torque is weak, so that the motor 32 cannot be driven.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (the index is not cut). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating and the motor 32 is re-accelerated (restarted). The acceleration of the motor 32 is, for example, 20 interrupts (20×2.235=44.7 ms) first for 1 step driving, next 16 interrupts for 1 step driving, and then 12 interrupts for 1 step driving,... It is a method of driving one step gradually in less time. The accelerated state requires about 100 steps, for example. As a result, the rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and the interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, the digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter, but the first LED display counter after the interrupt activation is the digit. When it is a value for lighting 3a (“00000100(B)” in FIG. 34), the LED display counter becomes “00001000(B)” four interrupts after that point, and the digit 4a (advantageous zone display LED 77) is lit. Timing comes.

On the other hand, the power supply is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in the remaining "1" to several steps), and the power is turned on. Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and the re-acceleration is performed, at least several tens of interrupts are required until the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches the constant speed state as described above. It costs.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 enters the constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up. That is, when the operation of the stop switch 42 is ready to be accepted, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

Further, when the reel 31 stops at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are generated after the interrupt is started until the reel sensor 33 determines that the index of the reel 31 is not detected. Requires. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up before the motor 32 is re-accelerated.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to turn on after the power supply is restored and before the reel 31 re-rotates and returns to the constant speed state.

Further, in the main processing of FIG. 41, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, and in the medal payout processing by the winning in step S294, when the power is cut off while the hopper motor 36 is driven, the following occurs. .. As described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process by winning shown in FIG. 49, in step S398, when the hopper motor 36 is driven, and as shown in FIG. 7, each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detects the movable piece 39a (in FIG. 8). , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been normally paid out. The hopper motor 36 continues to be driven until it is determined that medals corresponding to the number of payouts have been paid out.
If the power interruption is detected in the interrupt process before all the medals are paid out during the payout of medals, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. 54. The drive signal is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when power is supplied, the process returns to the step S294 (medal payout process by winning) of the main process (FIG. 41) through the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was turned off. Note that, as shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process by winning in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored, as described above, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous section display LED 77) comes within 4 interrupts.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required for paying out one medal cannot be generally stated, but it takes about 100 ms. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up until the medal payout process by winning is returned from the power-off and before the remaining medals are paid out. In other words, when the medal payout process for winning a prize is completed after the power is turned off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at that point.

Further, as a method of preventing the advantageous section display LED 77 from being momentarily turned off when the power is interrupted, the following method can be mentioned.
As shown in FIG. 54, when a power failure is detected, the outputs of all the ports 52 are turned off in step S483. Therefore, after this process, the digit signal from the output port 2 and the segment signal from the output port 3 are output. Is not output. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is the segment P of the digit 4a, is turned off.

Therefore, the process proceeds to step S488 of FIG. 54, and after the reset wait, when the advantageous zone display LED flag is “1”, the ON signal of the D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2, and One example is to output an ON signal of D7 bit (segment P) from the output port 3. Note that, in step S488 in FIG. 54, the interrupt processing does not occur in the loop processing after waiting for the reset, so that the advantageous section display LED 77 in this case is constantly turned on (static lighting). As a result, even if a momentary interruption occurs, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section display LED 77 from turning off visually.
Alternatively, in the process of step S483 in FIG. 54, the process of turning off the output ports 2 and 3 but not the other output ports may be executed. Even with such control, the advantageous section display LED 77 can be prevented from turning off due to a momentary interruption.

In this embodiment, the segment P of the digit 4a is set to the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LED 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. Then, the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically turned on, and even when the power failure is detected, unless the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED 77 is prevented from being turned off at the time of a momentary interruption. can do.

Next, the difference number display on the sub control board 80 side will be described. The sub-control board 80 displays the difference number of images on the image display device 23 during AT. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 is provided with the following storage areas.
Comprises:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number counter 3) Pullback flag 4) Pullback game number counter

In the main control board 50, a command corresponding to each game and ON/OFF of the AT flag is transmitted to the sub control board 80. The command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side is changed from off to on and when it is changed from on to off.
The sub control board 80 receives ON/OFF information of the AT flag from the main control board 50, and turns on/off the AT flag provided on the sub control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores that the AT flag on the side of the sub-control board 80 has been turned from OFF to ON (rising data of the AT flag) and turned from ON to OFF (falling data of the AT flag). ..

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates each game and the AT game number counter during AT, and ends the AT when the AT game number counter becomes “0”. Further, when the difference counter becomes "2400(D)" or the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", the AT (and the advantageous section) is ended.
The main control board 50 executes the initialization processing of the difference number counter when ending the AT and the advantageous section, so that the difference number counter becomes "0" when shifting from the next game to the normal section.

On the other hand, the sub control board 80 includes a sub difference number counter that counts the difference number in AT. The sub difference number counter is "0" at the start of the AT (except when the AT is won and the AT is started during the withdrawal period to be described later), and thereafter, each game and the difference number are updated. When a carry-down has occurred, unlike the difference counter of the main control board 50, it is not corrected to "0" and the carry-down is still performed.

For example, if you start AT,
1st game: Non-winning role (different number "-3")
2nd game: Non-winning of winning combination (the difference is "-3")
3rd game: Push order bell win (difference number "+5")
4th game: Non-winning role (different number "-3")
5th game: Push order bell win (difference number "+5")
Suppose that
In this case, the sub difference number counter (2-byte counter)
1st game: 0 (H)-3 (H) = FFFD (H)
Second game: FFFD(H)-3(H)=FFFA(H)
3rd game: FFFA(H)+5(H)=FFFF(H)
4th game: FFFF(H)-3(H)=FFFC(H)
5th game: FFFC(H)+5(H)=0001(H)
And will be updated.

Note that when the replay is won, the sub difference number counter is not updated like the difference number counter. The number of payouts may be set to "0" in the game at the time of winning the replay, and the bet number of the next game (at the time of the replay) may be set to "0" to calculate the sub difference number.
Further, as described above, the difference number counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when the advantageous period ends, but the sub difference number counter of the sub control unit 80 sets AT (advantageous period). There is a case where the initialization processing is not immediately executed and the counting is not stopped even when the processing ends. The sub control board 80 turns on the pullback flag (“1”) when the AT is finished and the count of the sub difference number counter is continued.

The sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value at the end of the AT, and when the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, “2000(D)”), the sub difference number counter. Continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds the predetermined value (or is equal to or more than the predetermined value), the sub difference number counter is cleared. When the AT is pulled back when the sub difference sheet counter approaches the upper limit value and the AT is pulled back, the sub difference sheet counter value may reach the upper limit value immediately. Make sure that the next AT won't inherit the difference.

The withdrawal flag is a flag for determining whether or not the AT has been withdrawn (re-winned or not) within a predetermined number of games (“50” game in this embodiment) after the AT ends.
At the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and "50(D)" is set in the pullback game number counter. The withdrawal game number counter is for counting the number of games (during the withdrawal period) after the end of AT. At the end of the AT, the pullback game number counter is set to "50(D)", and thereafter, unless the AT is won, each game is continuously decremented by "1". When the pullback game number counter becomes "0", the AT pullback fails, the pullback flag is turned off, and the sub difference number counter is cleared (initialized).
After the AT is completed, the sub control board 80 updates the sub difference number counter when the pullback flag is on.

Also, during the withdrawal period (when the withdrawal flag is on), when a special role such as BB is won and a special game such as BB game is executed, the withdrawal game number counter is decremented (updated) during the special game. )do not do.
On the other hand, when the player wins the AT before the pullback game number counter reaches "0", the AT is successfully withdrawn, and the subsequent AT displays the number of images succeeding the difference from the previous AT.
For example,
Difference number in the first AT: +1000 sheets Difference number after winning the first AT, until winning the second AT: -100 sheets, the difference number at the start of the second AT is "+900 sheets" Image is displayed.

Further, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub difference number counter is set. In this embodiment, the settings are as follows.
1) Upper limit value in AT: 2414 (D)
2) The symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped during AT, and the maximum value when the number of coins (probability difference) that can be acquired in the special game related to the special combination is "250 (D)": "2414 (D) )-250(D)=2164(D)"
3) Upper limit during withdrawal period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2414(D)" during AT, counting of the sub difference number is stopped and the sub difference number counter is cleared.
In the present embodiment, the sub difference number counter value and the difference number displayed as an image on the image display device 23 are linked (matched). For example, when the sub difference counter is "1000 (D)" during AT, the image is displayed on the image display device 23 as "acquired number in AT: 1000".

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400(D)", the AT (and the advantageous section) is ended. Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is “2414 (D)” as described above.
Therefore, also for the sub difference counter on the side of the sub control board 80, the maximum value that can be counted is set to “2414 (D)” in accordance with the difference counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub difference number counter is "2414(D)", the maximum difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is "2414". As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessively large number of images from being displayed, and it is possible to prevent an image display that is extremely exciting.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (the ninth embodiment), when the number of coins that can be acquired in the BB game is 250, the BB is won during the AT, and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB. When is stopped and displayed, the sub difference number counter value at that time is determined. Then, when the sub difference number counter value exceeds "2164 (D)" described above, since it exceeds "2414 (D)" at the end of the BB game, the sub difference when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed. Clear the number counter (2 above).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays “Congratulations”, “Congratulations”, etc. as an image display corresponding to the difference number. In this way, instead of displaying "Congratulations" etc. already at the start of the BB game, the sub difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub difference number is exceeded until "2414 (D)" is exceeded. The counter may continue to count, and when the number exceeds "2414 (D)", the sub difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, the difference in number of sheets may increase during the withdrawal period. For example, there may be a case where the special number is won during the withdrawal period, and as a result of digesting the special game, the difference number counter value increases.
In particular, if the specification is to win the AT when a specific BB is won, the game is transferred to the AT after the end of the BB game. On the other hand, when the sub difference number counter is close to the upper limit value at the end of the BB game, even if the difference number is taken over by the AT after the end of the BB game, the upper limit value is reached immediately. Therefore, when the sub difference sheet counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the pullback period, the sub difference sheet counter is cleared. For example, in the case of winning the BB with AT and digesting the BB game during the AT pullback period, when the sub difference counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final game of the BB game, Clear the sub difference counter. As a result, in the AT after the BB ends, the display of the difference number starts from "0".

As described above, even if the special game is transitioned to during the pullback period, the pullback game number counter is not decremented during the special game. When the special combination is won during the withdrawal period, the update of the sub difference number counter may be continued or interrupted during the special game. As an example of interrupting the update, for example, when the BB with AT is won when the sub difference sheet counter value during the withdrawal period is "1000 (D)", the sub difference sheet counter value is "1000 (D)". Stop at. Then, even if "250" is acquired in the subsequent BB game, this "250" is not added to the sub difference number counter. Therefore, when the game is transferred to the AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number is started from "1000".

On the other hand, as an example of continuing the update of the sub difference number counter, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1000 (D)", the BB with AT is won, and in the subsequent BB game, " When "250" is acquired, the sub difference counter at the end of the BB game is "1250 (D)". When the game is transferred to the AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number is started from "1250".
Further, in the case of continuing to update the sub difference number counter, for example, when the sub difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1800 (D)", the BB with AT is won, and the subsequent BB game is "250". When the number of sheets is acquired, the sub difference counter at the end of the BB game becomes "2050 (D)", which exceeds "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number is started from "0" in the AT after the BB end.

Further, the sub difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the bet number, but in the present embodiment, the difference of the game is limited only when the game is started with a predetermined prescribed number. Update the number of sheets.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the bet number of the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition for updating the sub difference number counter is set to be the bet number (specified number) “3”, and the game is started with the bet number (specified number) “2”. Does not update the difference in the game.

Next, the sub difference number counter management processing will be described using a flowchart.
56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the sub difference number counter management processing in the eleventh embodiment. 57 is a flowchart following FIG. 56.
In step S531 of FIG. 56, the sub control substrate 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is ON (whether or not AT is currently in progress). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

In step S532, the sub control substrate 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends. That is, when not in AT and when the pullback flag is off, the sub difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the bet number of the game is confirmed, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command capable of determining the bet number of the game to the sub control board 80. If it is determined that this bet command is received, the flow proceeds to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined based on the received bet command whether the bet number (specified number) is "3". When it is determined that the bet number is “3”, the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the bet number is not “3”, the process according to this flowchart is ended. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub difference number counter is updated only when the bet number is “3”. Therefore, even during AT or during the withdrawal period, when the bet number is other than "3", the sub difference number counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the difference counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the bet number (specified number) in the game.

When the process proceeds from step S534 to step S535, the sub control board 80 subtracts the bet number (“3”) from the sub difference number counter. Next, proceeding to step S536, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, after the display determination is made in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command capable of determining the number of payouts to the sub control board 80.
When it is determined in step S536 that the payout command is received, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub control board 80 adds the payout number to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG.

In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is turned on in the game this time (whether or not the rise of the AT flag is on). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned on in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned on in the game (the rise of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process proceeds from step S539 to step S543 at the time of AT from before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub control substrate 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S541, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process of this flowchart ends. For example, if the AT flag is turned on in the game this time (“Yes” in step S539) and the pullback flag is off (“No” in step S540, that is, when the pullback period is not in progress), the sub difference number at this point Since the counter is "0", there is no need to update the sub difference counter, so the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds from step S540 to step S541, the sub control board 80 turns off the pullback flag. In the next step S542, the sub control board 80 clears the pull-back game number counter. Here, “Yes” in step S539 and “Yes” in step S540 correspond to the case where the AT is won during the withdrawal period. Therefore, in this case, the pullback flag is turned off, and the pullback game number counter is cleared.
Next, proceeding to step S543, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit "2414(D)". If it is determined that the sub difference sheet counter exceeds "2414(D)", the flow proceeds to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub difference number counter is cleared. This happens when the difference sheet count increases during the withdrawal period after the AT ends and the sub difference sheet counter exceeds "2414 (D)".

On the other hand, in step S543, when it is determined that the sub difference number counter does not exceed "2414(D)", the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub control board 80 stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to BB in the current game. Determine whether or not. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50.
“Yes” in this step S544 is when the BB with AT is won during the withdrawal period. In this flowchart, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed in the game winning BB.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is not stopped and displayed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S545, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164(D)". When it is determined that the sub difference sheet counter exceeds "2164(D)", the process proceeds to step S546, the sub difference sheet counter is cleared as described above, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S545 that the sub difference sheet counter does not exceed "2164(D)" (the sub difference sheet counter value is maintained), the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

As described above, when the BB game of the present embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 as shown in FIG. 26 (the ninth embodiment), the sub difference number counter is "2164(D)" at the start of the BB game. If it exceeds, it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit value) by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, when the BB game is started (before the start), it is determined whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game. When it is determined that the sub difference counter exceeds the upper limit value, the BB game is determined. The sub difference counter is cleared before the start. Since the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub difference number counter, in the BB game after the sub difference number counter is cleared, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference number is displayed. Instead of displaying the number display, for example, "Congratulations" or "Celebration" is displayed.

When it is determined that the AT flag is not on in step S538 and the process proceeds to step S547 of FIG. 57, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is turned off in the game this time (whether or not the fall of the AT flag is on. That is, it is determined whether or not the AT is finished in the game this time). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned off in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S548, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned off (the fall of the AT flag is off) in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S551. ..

In step S548, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub difference sheet counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not less than “2000(D)”, the process proceeds to step S557.

In step S549, the sub control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, proceeding to step S550, the sub control board 80 sets an initial value "50 (D)" to the pullback game number counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
By the processing of the above steps S548 to S550, when the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on, and the initial value "50 (D)" of the number of pullback games is set. Set. The reason for setting "50(D)" as the initial value of the number of withdrawal games is to set the AT withdrawal within 50 games as a continuous chan of the AT (a condition for inheriting the sub difference number to the next AT). Therefore, the number of withdrawal games is not limited to "50 (D)", but can be set variously such as "30 (D)" or "100 (D)" according to the specifications.
Further, when the sub difference sheet counter is “2000 (D)” or more at the end of AT, even if the AT is pulled back after that, the sub difference sheet counter may exceed the upper limit value during the AT after pulling back. Therefore, in such a case, the pullback flag is not set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S548 that the sub difference sheet counter is not less than "2000(D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference sheet counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. In other words, when the sub difference sheet counter is equal to or larger than "2000(D)" at the end of AT, the sub difference sheet counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the operation shifts to AT thereafter.

Further, when the process proceeds from step S547 to step S551, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the BB operation (BB game). The information on the operation state flag shown in FIG. 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not operating, the process proceeds to step S552, and the sub control substrate 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process of this flowchart ends.

In step S553, the pullback game number counter is decremented by "1". In other words, during the pullback period, when the BB is in operation (BB game is in progress), the pullback game number counter is not updated (subtracted). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the pullback game number counter may be subtracted even during the BB game during the pullback period.
In the next step S554, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback game number counter has become "0". When it is determined that the pull-back game number counter is not "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pull-back game number counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S555.

In step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pull-back game number counter is cleared. Note that, if "Yes" in the step S554, the pull-back game number counter is "0", so the clear process of the pull-back game number counter in the step S556 may be omitted. However, when “No” is obtained in step S560 described later, the pullback game number counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, proceeding to step S557, the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. In this way, when the pullback flag is off and the pullback game number counter is "0" (clear), the sub difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and then "0" until the AT starts. maintain.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is in operation and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the current game is the final game in the BB operation (BB game). Whether or not it is the final game of the BB game may be determined by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game on the side of the sub control board 80, or transmitted from the main control board 50. The judgment may be made based on the incoming command.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process proceeds to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S559, the sub control substrate 80 determines whether the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process of this flowchart ends.
In step S560, the sub control board 80 determines whether the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S561 and the pullback game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. As a result, the BB game is executed when the withdrawal flag is ON, and when the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game, the withdrawal period (50 games is repeated from the next game. ) Will be newly set. That is, when the number of pullback games is set to the initial value "50" after the end of AT, the BB game is executed during the pullback period, and when the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game. , The number of pullback games is reset to "50".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S560 that the sub difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S555. After step S555, the pullback flag is turned off, the pullback game number counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. This ends the withdrawal period. Thus, in the final game of the BB game, when the pullback period is in progress, the sub difference number at that time is determined, and when the sub difference number is “2000 (D)” or more, the pullback period is ended. ..

In the above sub difference number counter management, the sub difference number counter is updated at the timing when the bet command is received. That is, the sub difference number is updated before all the reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, the difference number counter is executed by the advantageous section counter management of the game end check process, so that the bet number is also subtracted after all reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, similarly to the difference number counter, the sub difference number counter may also execute the subtraction of the bet number and the addition of the payout number after stopping all the reels 31.

In addition, the sub difference number counter stores the value (the digit-reduced value) even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if the digit is reduced). However, not limited to this, like the difference number counter, when the sub difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a carry-down has occurred), it may be corrected to “0”.
Furthermore, even if the sub difference number counter may have a negative value, the image display device 23 displays the difference number "0".

In this case, the following processing may be mentioned.
As described above, the sub difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, and its upper limit value is "2414 (D)", that is, "096E (H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is “0 (H)”. Therefore, by determining whether or not the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)", it is possible to determine whether or not a carry-down has occurred. When it is determined that a carry-down has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not "0(H)"), the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 may be set to "0".

Further, although BB is given as an example in the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be applied to a sub bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)). The sub-bonus sets the number of games, the number of payouts, or the number of differences as the ending condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether or not the sub bonus symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in step S551, it is determined whether or not the sub bonus game is being performed. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the sub bonus game.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a prescribed number (bet number) is instructed before the game starts.
The display of the pushing order instruction information is an operation of the instruction function (processing relating to the instruction function), but the “instruction function” is a device that facilitates winning. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not the operation of the instruction function (the process related to the instruction function). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prescribed number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the accessory condition device, the specified number for each RT, and the winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), BB1 and BB2 are provided as the accessory condition device (special role). When BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped, the game shifts to the BB1 game. The BB1 game ends with a payout of more than 100 cards. After the BB1 game is over, the game moves to non-RT.
In addition, when BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped, the process shifts to the BB2 game. The BB2 game ends with a payout of more than 30 cards. After the BB2 game is over, the game moves to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the RT includes non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, during operation BB1, and during operation BB2.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 wins. If the player wins BB1 in the non-RT, the player moves to the inside of BB1, and if the player wins BB2, the player moves to the inside of BB2.
The inside of BB1 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped in the inside of BB1, the operation shifts to BB1 operation, that is, BB1 game. Similarly, the inside of BB2 continues until the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped in the inside of BB2, the process shifts to the BB2 operation, that is, the BB2 game.
The number of special roles that can carry over the winning is limited to one. Therefore, BB2 is not won when it is in the inside of BB1. Similarly, when inside BB2, BB1 is not won.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the specified number is limited to “3” during the operation of BB1 and the operation of BB2 (when the accessory is operated). The game cannot be started with the bet number “1” or “2”.
On the other hand, the prescribed number in non-RT, inside BB1, and inside BB2 when the accessory is not activated is "2" or "3". As a result, the game can be started if the specified number is either "2" or "3".
In FIG. 58(C), the internal lottery placement number indicates the number when the denominator is “65536”. For example, the winning probability of the winning number “1” (normal replay) in non-RT is “9000/65536”. The advantageous section lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the number of advantageous section lottery is “16384”, it means that the advantageous section is won with a probability of “16384/16384”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58C, in the non-RT, BB2 is drawn by lot with the specified number “2”, but BB1 is not drawn. On the contrary, when the specified number is “3”, BB1 is drawn, but BB2 is not drawn.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58(C), when the non-RT specified number is “3” or the specified number in the BB2 is “3”, the advantageous section can be drawn. In the lottery for the advantageous section, the winning is always set in the advantageous section except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section a substantially advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment is the above-mentioned “7P” type specification.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game progresses within the BB2 and with the specified number "3". Then, the AT is selected within the BB2, and when the AT is won, the AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that BB2 who has carried over the winning will not win the prize.
For example, if it is currently non-RT, it is necessary to shift from non-RT to inside BB2 (win BB2 in non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play the game with the specified number "2".
Therefore, in the case of non-RT at the present time, the game is played with the specified number “2”, the BB2 is won, and the game is moved to the inside of the BB2 from the next game. Further, the lottery of the advantageous section is received in the inside of BB2 when the specified number is "3". Therefore, the game is advanced in the specified number of "3" inside the BB2.

Also, for the BB2 won by the specified number "2", the symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed unless the specified number "2". Similarly, BB1 won by the specified number “3” cannot stop and display the symbol combination on the activated line unless the specified number “3” is selected.
Therefore, in the non-RT, when BB2 is won by the specified number “2”, the game is transferred to the inside of BB2, and the game is progressed by the specified number “3”, even when the winning combination is not won, BB2 The symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed on the activated line.
As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special combination is stopped to shift to the special game and the special game is not designed to increase the medals, but the special role is to carry over the winning. In other words, it is for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58(C), in non-RT, BB2 can be won with a probability of about “1/5”, so that it is possible to move from non-RT to the inside of BB2 early.
Further, inside BB2, when a small win or a replay is won, there is a 100% probability of winning the advantageous section. Therefore, within the BB2, most of the game period is an advantageous section. It is of course possible to set the winning probability of the advantageous section to less than 100%.

Further, the instruction function can be operated (the processing relating to the instruction function can be executed) only when the game is played with one prescribed number, particularly with the prescribed number “3” in the present embodiment. Therefore, when the AT is won during the advantageous section in the inside of BB2 and the AT is executed, when the game is started with the specified number "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated. The push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (bet number) “2” during AT, the instruction function is not activated even when the push order bell is won.

Further, similar to the eleventh embodiment, even when the game is played with the specified number “2” during AT, the difference counter is updated based on the bet number and payout number in the game, and The advantageous section clear counter is updated. However, the AT game number counter (AT difference number counter in the case of the difference number management type AT) is not updated. On the other hand, when the game is played with the specified number "3" in the AT, the difference number counter, the advantageous section clear counter, and the AT game number counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) Update everything.
In addition, regardless of any specified number, for RT, when the transition condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination satisfying the transition condition is stopped and displayed), the transition is always performed. On the other hand, for the main game state (normally, CZ, AT, etc.), any specified number may be set to be transferable, or the game is played with one specified number (for example, "3"). It may be set to be transferable only when

Inside BB2, when the player starts the game with the specified number "2" due to an operation error by the player and the winning combination is not won, the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 carrying over the winning can be stopped and displayed. Becomes On the other hand, when a player starts a game with a specified number of "2" due to an operation error and a winning combination of any of the winning combinations is made, the winning of the winning combination of the winning combination is prioritized. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning BB2 is not stopped and displayed. However, when a replay is won in the game, the next game will be played with the bet number "2", so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning BB2 is also stopped and displayed in the next game as well. there is a possibility.

If the inside of BB2 and the AT start the game with the specified number "2", and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game is finished, it shifts to non-RT (AT). Then, in this non-RT, the information corresponding to the specified number “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 to notify the player that the game should be performed with the specified number “2” (instruction of the specified number). .. This is because the game is played with the specified number “2”, the BB2 is won, and the game is transferred to the inside of the BB2. Therefore, in the case of AT and non-RT, the prescribed number "2" is instructed until winning BB2.

As described above, when the information corresponding to the specified number “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, “0A” is displayed. It should be noted that the instruction of the prescribed number "2" is not limited to "0A", and if it is not confused with any of the number of payouts, the setting change display "88", the error number, and the push order instruction information, the other display. May be For example, since the maximum number of medals displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", "22" may be displayed as the information corresponding to the specified number "2".

Further, in the present embodiment, the prescribed number is designated only during AT, and the prescribed number is not designated during non-AT. For example, after the BB2 game is over, in the case of shifting to non-RT, if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not designated. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary for the player to play a specified number of games "2" by himself, and shift the game to the inside of the BB2.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of a non-RT and non-advantageous section, if a small win or replay is won when a game is played with a prescribed number "3", the advantageous section is also won. Then, when it is a non-RT and an advantageous section, a prescribed number “2” may be instructed (even if it is a non-AT).
Further, the present invention is not limited to the above, and when the shift is made to the non-RT, the specified number “2” may be instructed regardless of AT/non-AT and advantageous section/non-advantageous section.

Further, in the non-RT, when the player sets the bet number to “2”, the specified number may not be designated, and when the player sets the bet number to “3”, the specified number may be designated. In the main process of FIG. 41, the bet number is determined in the medal management process of step S276, but if it is determined that the current bet number is "2", the prescribed number "2" is not instructed. (The clearing process of the acquired number data is executed), and when the current bet number is “3”, the specified number “2” is instructed (the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data). Can be mentioned.

In addition, when ending the BB2 game and shifting to the non-RT, a wait process may be executed at the end of the final game of the BB2 game. During the wait process, the game cannot proceed (main process shown in FIG. 41). For this reason, after the wait process is completed, the process proceeds to the game start set process of the next game (non-RT), and the specified number is instructed there.

In the non-RT during AT, the instruction of the specified number "2" continues until the player wins BB2. Therefore, the game may be finished in one game, or may be played in a plurality of games.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58C, when a game is played with a prescribed number “2” in a non-RT, a replay (normal replay, suika replay, cherry replay) may be won. As a result of playing the game with the specified number "2", when the replay is won, it is optional whether or not to instruct the specified number "2" in the next game. In the non-RT and AT, the specified number “2” may be instructed before the game starts, regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped until the player wins BB2. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, in the next game (replay), the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (bet number), so do not instruct the specified number in the game. You may

This is the same when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed as a result of playing the game with the specified number "3" in the non-RT and AT, for example. In the next game (replay), the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (the number of bets), so that the specified number may not be specified in this case as well. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, a specified number “2” may be designated for the purpose of calling attention.
In the non-RT and AT, the game is played with the specified number "2", and if the player wins BB2 and moves from the next game to the inside of BB2, then the specified number of instructions is given unless it moves to the non-RT again. Does not.

Further, the timing for instructing the prescribed number is after all the reels 31 have been stopped, and after the payout processing has been completed if there is a payout based on the winning of a small winning combination, and the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. Before (for example, before betting of medals is possible (before bet acceptance)). Therefore, after the payout based on the winning of the small winning combination in the final game of the BB2 game, the specified number “2” is instructed before the next game (non-RT) game is started. As shown in FIG. 42 (the eleventh embodiment), in step S321 of the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets a prescribed number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. Judge that it satisfies.

If it is determined in step S321 of FIG. 42 that the specified number of instruction conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and the acquired number data is displayed as "0B" as the specified instruction number display data corresponding to the specified instruction number "2". (H)” is stored.
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing at which the digit 3a (the higher digit of the acquired number display LED 78) is turned on, the higher digit of the designated prescribed number display data “0B(H)” is determined in step S511. The offset "0(H)" is acquired, and in step S514, segment data indicating "0" is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "0" is displayed in the digit 3a (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Further, at the timing of turning on the digit 4a (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the lower digit offset "B(H)" of the designated prescribed number display data "0B(H)" is acquired in step S513. In step S514, segment data indicating "A" is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. By outputting this segment data from the output port 3 in step S520, "A" is displayed on the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start set process of step S272 is a process before betting is possible and before the start switch 41 is operated, so before betting is possible and start is performed. The specified number of instructions is displayed before the switch 41 is operated.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42, after the specified prescribed number display data is stored as the acquired number data in step S322, the automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when instructing the prescribed number in the next game at the time of replay winning, the prescribed number is instructed before automatic betting. This allows the player to promptly specify the prescribed number.
Also, in FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquired number data (instructed prescribed number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, in the interrupt processing after step S280, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, the information “0A” corresponding to the specified number of instructions “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the specified number of “2”, the instruction function is provided even during AT. Does not work. That is, even when the push order bell is won in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This is because in the present embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function is limited to the case where the specified number is “3”. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the information “0A” corresponding to the specified number “2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the acquired number display LED 78 is at least until all reels 31 are stopped. Is displayed as "00".

On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information "0A" corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but the game is played with the specified number "3" and the push order bell is won. If so, the pushing order instruction information (for example, “=1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, in this case, the acquired number display LED 78 displays the information "0A" corresponding to the instruction prescribed number "2" before the game starts, and when the start switch 41 is operated (at the prescribed number "3"), " After displaying "00", when the push order bell is won, the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed.

Further, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. Since the acquired number data is cleared in step S280 after the start switch 41 is operated, the process of step S290 may be skipped in the game in which the pressing order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Then, when the small winning combination is won and the medal payout process according to the winning is executed in step S294, the acquired number data is incremented by "1". It

Then, when proceeding to the game start set processing in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for instructing the prescribed number is satisfied, the information corresponding to the instructed prescribed number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. When displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions, the specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data, but at this point, the payout number data of the previous game may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, the acquisition number data may be cleared before the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is stored. For example, in FIG. 42, the acquisition number data clearing process may be executed before step S311.

In AT and non-RT, even though the specified number “2” is specified, it is ignored and the game is executed with the specified number “3”, BB1 is won, and the game is transferred to the inside of BB1. Furthermore, it is possible to execute the BB1 game.
In order to suppress such an action, for example, the process related to the instruction function is not executed inside the BB1. In addition, in the BB1 game, the payout rate is set to be less than "1" so that the BB1 game cannot increase the number of medals.
It is to be noted that since the player is free to specify the specified number of games, even if the specified number "3" is played in the game in which the specified number "2" is designated in AT and non-RT, the game is played. There is no penalty on the person.

In the above example, when the specified number is designated, the specified number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side), but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the specified prescribed number may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the side of the sub control board 80).
Here, the display start timing when the specified number of instructions is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is set to be almost the same as the display start timing when the specified number of instructions is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (before the start of the game). To be
Furthermore, the display end timing after displaying the specified prescribed number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or different from the display end timing after displaying the specified prescribed number on the acquired number display LED 78.
As the display end timing after displaying the specified number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like,
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all the reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in the specified number of "2" games (4) All reels in the specified number of "2" games 31 When stopped (5) After winning BB2 in a specified number of games of "2" (6) When all reels 31 are stopped in a specified number of games of "2" and a game of winning BB2.
In addition, when the specified prescribed number is displayed on the dedicated display device, it is possible to continue displaying the prescribed specified number of images on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are each three.
On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are each four.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing the outline of the configuration including the reel 31 (31A to 31D) and the stop switch 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are illustrated so as to be seen without being blocked by the front surface of the front door 12. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 located behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown so as to be visible. Further, in the right side view, the illustration of the medal insertion slot 47 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front surface of the front door 12, and the operation buttons 24 and the medal slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation button 24 is electrically connected to the sub control board 80, and bidirectional communication with the sub control board 80 is possible. For example, at least a part of the operation button 24 is formed to be lightable, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled by the control of the sub control board 80. When the operation button 24 is operated, the signal is input to the sub control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged below the control panel 12c of the front door 12.

In the front view of FIG. 59, a line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoints of the four reels 31A to 31D is defined as line L1 (center line). The line L1 is at an intermediate position between the reels 31B and 31C. Then, between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D, all are W1 (uniform). Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged symmetrically with respect to the line L1.
Also, regarding the four stop switches 42A to 42D, W2 (uniform) is all between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D. The line L1 passes through the intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

The gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2=W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2>W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2<W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, a vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is defined as a line L2, and a vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is defined as a line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is arranged on the right side (closer to the center) of the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is arranged on the left side (closer to the center) of the line L3.

Further, in the front view, if the spacing (center-to-center distance) between the reels 31 is W3, all between the reels 31A and 31B, between the reels 31B and 31C, and between the reels 31C and 31D are W3 (constant). Is.
If the interval (center-to-center distance) between the stop switches 42 is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D is W4 (constant). ).

Further, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged so as to intersect the line L2. However, not limited to this, the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged on the left side (outside) of the line L2 without intersecting with the line L2, or the line L2 without intersecting with the line L2. It may be arranged on the right side (closer to the center).
Further, in the front view, the medal insertion slot 47 is arranged so that the medal insertion slot 47 and the line L4 intersect with each other. However, not limited to this, for example, the medal slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outside) of the line L4 so as not to intersect with the line L4. Alternatively, the medal insertion slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) of the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed in a horizontally long shape, and a line in contact with the left end of the operation button 24 is a line L4, and a line in contact with the right end of the operation button 24 is a line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that part of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a part of the rightmost stop switch 42D intersects the line L5.

Further, as shown in the plan view, an index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by stamping, printing, etc., and in the example of FIG. 59, it has the shape of an arrow pointing to the stop switch 42 side. Further, the index 12d on the left side is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (even if it deviates from the center line to some extent). The index 12d on the right side is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it may be slightly deviated from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A with the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated with the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A with the left index 12d as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated with the index 12d on the right side as a guide.

When the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three, as shown in FIG. 58 (the twelfth embodiment), it is possible to provide a pressing order of “3!=6” at maximum. On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are four, it is possible to provide a pressing order of “4!=24” at maximum.
The larger the number of pressing of the stop switch 42 is, the more the base is in non-AT (indicates the number of outs per 100 ins when the accessory is inactive and not in AT. For example, for 100 ins) In the case of 50 out sheets, it becomes the base 50.).

When the number of reels 31 and stop switches 42 is four, the push order bells that are randomly selected are 1234 bells (stop switches 42A→42B→42C→42D indicate the correct push order), 1243 bells,...・There are 24 types, 4312 bells, 4321 bells. Then, as shown in FIG. 58, if the number of wins of each push order bell is the same, the number of wins of each push order bell is set to “1500”. In this way, since the number of wins for each push order bell can be set to "1/4", the probability that the push order operated by the player when the push order bell is won matches the correct answer push order is low. can do.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three, it is possible to display an image such as "123" or "left center right" during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the correct pressing order.
On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are four, the following method can be mentioned as to how to notify the correct pressing order during AT.

For example, as a first method, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated is notified. To be For example, when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is the order of the stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, and 42B, the notification is “3412” (at least one of image display, audio display, and lamp color notification). ) Can be mentioned. Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D may be set to "A", "B", "C", and "D", respectively, and in the above example, "CDAB" may be notified.

As a second method, a color for identifying the base of the reel 31 and/or the stop switch 42 may be added.
For example, the base of the reel 31A and/or the stop switch 42A is white, the base of the reel 31B and/or the stop switch 42B is blue, the base of the reel 31C and/or the stop switch 42C is yellow, The base of the reel 31D and/or the color of the stop switch 42D is red (different colors). In the above example, instead of the notification “3412”, notification “yellow red white blue” (at least one of image display, audio display, and lamp color notification) can be given.

Furthermore, as a third method, among the first to fourth stop switches 42 to be operated, the image corresponding to the fourth (last) stop switch 42 to be operated is darkly displayed (or hidden). Is mentioned. In this case, “the brightness of the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 to be operated>the brightness of the image corresponding to the second stop switch 42 to be operated≧the third brightness corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated” Image brightness≧image brightness corresponding to the fourth stop switch 42 to be operated”.
Then, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the fourth operation is operated. The brightness of the image to be displayed may be set to be approximately the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, when the pressing order of "3412" is notified by the image as in the above example, the image is displayed as "312" first. Note that “●” is an image corresponding to the “4”-th press order, and may be dark (concealed) so that the character “4” cannot be seen at all, or “4” The letters may be dimly recognizable.

When the image display of "312" is performed, the image display is the same as that at the time of 6 selections, so that the player can intuitively understand the pushing order. Then, when the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following 1) to 3) is executed.
1) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to the display of "●", and the previous "●" is changed to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34●2".
2) The "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C is changed to a display such as "-" or "○", and the "●" until then is changed to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34○2".
3) Change "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image), and change "●" up to then to "4". Specifically, "34*2"("*" means blank) is displayed as an image.

Further, after the second stop, similar to the above, it is possible to display images as "34●●", "34-", "34○○", and "34**".
Furthermore, after the third stop, image display such as "●4●●", "-4--", "○4○○", and "*4**" can be mentioned.
Alternatively, after the third stop, the image itself in the pressing order may be erased.
Even when all the pressing orders are displayed as "4312" as in the first method described above, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is displayed. Is preferably erased as described in 1) to 3) above because the operated stop switch 42 can be easily understood. Specifically, after displaying "4312" as an image, "43●2" (after operating the stop switch 42C) → "43●●" (after operating the stop switch 42D) → "4●●●" (stop switch 42B) After the operation), an image is displayed (“●” may be “◯”, “−”, “*” as described above).

Furthermore, as a fourth method, there is a method of notifying the pushing order using a four-character idiom. For example, when "Spring, Summer, Autumn, Winter" is used as one of the four-letter idioms to notify the pushing order, the correct pushing order is "Spring→Summer→Autumn→Winter".
Then, when the pressing order is "3412" as described above, notification (image display, voice display) of "autumn/winter/spring/summer" may be performed as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the case of the third method, it is possible to display an image of "autumn-spring-summer" before the first stop and display an image of "autumn-winter-summer" after the first stop.
Note that in any of the first to fourth methods, when a pressing order error occurs in the middle, the image of the pressing order may be continuously displayed, or at the time when the pressing order error occurs. The image may be erased.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, when 24 push order bells are provided as described above, 24 types of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the pressing order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", "FF", 24 types can be provided.

Although the 11th to 13th embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section is drawn only when the winning combination lottery result is the target drawing result. As described above, the reason why the setting is made in this way is that when the winning combination lottery result is a non-winning result (when the condition device does not operate as a result of the internal lottery), the advantageous section transition lottery, which is a process related to the advantageous section, is performed. This is because it is preferable not to do it. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set in this way, and the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process is executed after the advantageous section transition lottery. Here, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined as an advantageous section is provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is reached, the advantageous section transition process (FIG. 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section transition lottery. You may. Similarly, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined as the AT is provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the AT lottery is not executed and the AT setting process is performed (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46). May be executed.
In addition, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is determined to be an advantageous section and an AT is always provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition process or the AT lottery process is not executed, AT set processing may be executed.
Further, in the case where a winning combination lottery result (winning number) which is not won in the advantageous section shifting lottery is provided, the advantageous section shifting lottery may be executed even when the winning combination lottery result is obtained. In this case, the winning number of the advantageous section may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of games of the AT is determined, the number of games is stored in the AT game number counter, and when the AT game number counter becomes "0", the AT is finished. However, the AT is not limited to such a game number management type AT, and may be a difference number management type AT. In the case of the difference number management type AT, the initial value of the obtainable difference number is determined when the AT is won, and is stored in the AT difference number counter (different from the difference number counter). Then, each time the payout is made, the difference sheet number is subtracted from the AT difference sheet number counter, and when the AT difference sheet number counter becomes "0", the AT is ended.
Even in the case of such a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is decremented when it is one prescribed number (for example, "3"), but when it is another prescribed number (for example, "2") Do not subtract the difference counter.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 39, the setting can be changed after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the power is turned off, when the setting change processing is performed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off before the setting can be changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section is displayed before ending the state where the setting can be changed (after “Yes” in step S242 in FIG. 39) and proceeding to the main processing (before step S248). The LED flag clear (initialization) process may be executed. In this way, it is possible to control the advantageous section display LED 77 to be turned off after the set value is confirmed.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one difference number counter are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide two advantageous section clear counters and two difference number counters (important counters) to check the consistency.
For example, a first advantageous zone clear counter and a second advantageous zone clear counter are provided as the advantageous zone clear counter. During the advantageous period, both the first advantageous period clear counter and the second advantageous period clear counter are updated every time the game is exhausted. Further, for example, in the determination in step S424 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first advantageous zone clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous zone clear counter is "0", whether or not the value of the second advantageous zone clear counter is "0", or the first advantageous zone clear counter and the second advantageous zone clear It is determined whether the counter has the same value. If it is determined to be "0" or the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
A first difference number counter and a second difference number counter are provided as the difference number counter. Then, each time the game is exhausted, both the first difference number counter and the second difference number counter are updated. Further, for example, in the determination in step S434 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first difference number counter is determined. When it is determined that the first difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value, it is determined whether the second difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value, or whether the first difference number counter and the second difference number counter have the same value. To judge. When it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded or the same value is exceeded, the process proceeds to step S435.

By determining the advantageous section clear counter value and/or the difference number counter value as described above, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (incorrect value) due to the influence of noise or the like, the advantageous section clear counter value Can be determined more accurately whether or not is "0" and/or whether or not the difference number counter value exceeds the upper limit value.
If the first advantageous zone clear counter and the second advantageous zone clear counter do not match, or if the first difference number counter and the second difference number counter do not match, for example, an error is displayed and the game progresses. One example is to stop (main processing).

(6) In the sub difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined in step S544 that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, and the process proceeds to step S545, in which it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164(D)". When the sub difference number counter is cleared, the BB game may output a special effect different from the normal BB game. It is possible to indicate to the player that the sub difference number counter has been cleared by the special effect during the BB game.

Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub difference number counter is not determined, and in the BB game, each game, the sub difference number counter is, for example, "2000 (D)" (an example of a threshold value, and this value It is not limited to the above). Then, when it is determined that the sub difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)", the sub difference number counter is cleared, and a special effect (effect indicating that the sub difference number counter has been cleared) is given from the next game. You may output.

Furthermore, in the above case, when the power is cut off in a game in which the sub difference number counter during BB game exceeds "2000 (D)" (the special effect has not been output yet), the power is restored from the power cut. The special effect may be output from the played game. In this case, at the time of returning from the power failure, the sub difference number counter value and the fact that the BB game is being played may be read to determine whether to output the special effect.

Furthermore, when a power failure occurs during the rotation of the reel 31 of the game in which the sub difference number counter during the BB game exceeds "2000 (D)", even if the special effect is output from the game that is restored from the power failure. Good. Therefore, in this case, when the power is not shut off, the special effect is output from the next game, but when the power is shut off while the reel 31 is rotating, the special effect is output from the game. Become.

(7) A game is played with the specified number "2" during AT (the instruction function does not operate when the specified number is "2"), the push order bell is won, and the stop switch 42 is accidentally operated in the correct answer order. , When the small counter pays out and the difference counter exceeds "2400(D)", at the end of the game, an effect such as an image display such as "END" indicating the end of AT can be output. preferable. This is to prevent AT from ending in a game in which the correct pressing order is not notified and giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

(8) On the other hand, as described above, in order to prevent AT from ending in a game in which the correct push order is not notified, for example, when a game is played with a prescribed number “2”, the push order bell is won. , Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order, the payout number of the game is set to "2" or less (the difference number of the game is "0" or less) so that the AT does not end in the game. May be.

(9) As shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, the sub difference number counter continues counting even during the BB game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the BB is won during AT and the game shifts to the BB game, the sub difference number counter may not be updated (the update of the sub difference number counter is interrupted during the BB game). ..
In this case, for example, in FIG. 56, before step S531, it is determined whether or not the BB is in operation (determined by the operation state flag). Then, when the BB operation is in progress, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
Further, when the sub difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processes of step S551 and steps S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 are unnecessary. Then, if “No” in the step S547, the process proceeds to a step S552.

B. Twelfth Embodiment (1) Similar to the eleventh embodiment, in FIG. 58, when the winning combination is not won, the transition lottery of the advantageous section (the processing relating to the advantageous section) is not executed. As mentioned above, the rules are taken into consideration. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into consideration, the transition lottery of the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the transition lottery of the advantageous section (the processing relating to the advantageous section) is only one prescribed number (a prescribed number “3” in the example of FIG. 58) in one gaming state (RT). I decided to do it. This is done in consideration of the fact that, in accordance with the rule, the transition lottery of the advantageous section (the processing relating to the advantageous section) is defined as only one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, if this point is not taken into consideration, in one gaming state (RT), the transition lottery of the advantageous section may be executed with a plurality of specified numbers.

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number "2" is designated for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to specify the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that a game is played inside the BB2, and it is irregular that the BB2 wins and shifts to the BB2 game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specification may be such that after the AT is executed inside the BB2, when the AT end condition is satisfied, the BB2 is won and the BB2 game is executed. In this case, when the AT ending condition is satisfied inside the BB2, after the game satisfying the AT ending condition is completed (all reels 31 are stopped, and a payout process is executed at the time of winning the small winning combination), Before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before the bet becomes possible), the specified number “2” is instructed to prompt the player to win BB2. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, since the BB2 is won by the stipulated number “2”, the stipulated number for winning the BB2 is “2”. However, for example, when the BB that is won by the stipulated number “1” is provided. In order to win that BB, the specified number "1" is instructed.
In addition, the BB game with such specifications may be a BB game in which medals increase or a BB game in which medals decrease.

(4) When instructing the prescribed number, it is executed in the game start set process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, not limited to this, it may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in the BB2 game, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the prescribed number of the next game is instructed at the game end check process. However, when a small winning combination is won in the final game of the BB2 game and there is a payout, and when the payout number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the specified number is indicated after the payout number is displayed. If the LED for instructing the specified number is a dedicated LED, the specified number for the next game can be instructed to the dedicated LED while the payout amount is being displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, in the case of executing the freeze in the final game of the BB2 game, when instructing the prescribed number of the next game at the end of the game, whichever timing is before executing the freeze, during executing the freeze, or after the end of the freeze. May be

(5) As in the twelfth embodiment, the function of the 3(MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed when the game can be executed with any one of the plurality of specified numbers. For example, in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number "3" in the game in the advantageous section (for example, in the case of inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is exclusively used for the 3 bet. You may set it to a button. That is, when the number of credits is “3”, in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number “3” in the advantageous section, it is set to bet “3” when the 3 bet switch 40b is operated. To do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2", it is not possible to bet "2" even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated in an advantageous section and in a situation where it is advantageous to play the game with the specified number "3". To set.

Alternatively, even if the player can play the game with the specified number “3”, if the credit amount is “2”, the player can bet “2” by operating the 3 bet switch 40b. Good. In particular, in the case of non-RT and AT in FIG. 58, it is preferable to set the bet “2” when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when the credit amount is “2”.

(6) As in the twelfth embodiment, when most of the game section is set as the advantageous section, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from the difference number counter) capable of counting the minus of the difference number is provided, and the payout rate in a predetermined period is calculated. When the payout rate for a predetermined period of time reaches a predetermined lower limit value (the predetermined lower limit value is set higher than the lower limit value in the rule, for example), the instruction function is activated to increase the payout rate. Good. When the payout rate has increased and has recovered to the reference value, the operation of the instruction function is terminated.
Such activation of the indicating function when the predetermined lower limit value is reached may or may not be included in “AT”. However, there is no change in operating the instruction function, and therefore, it corresponds to the processing relating to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the LED for displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is the acquired number display LED 78. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other existing LEDs may be set, or a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions may be separately provided.
When a dedicated LED for displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is separately provided, even if the start switch 41 is operated after the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is displayed in the game start set process, the specified number of instructions is operated. It is not necessary to erase the information corresponding to. Further, even if all reels 31 are stopped, a small winning combination is won, and medals are paid out, it is not necessary to delete the information corresponding to the prescribed number of instructions.
Also, when a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is provided, the specified number of instructions will not be confused with the number of payouts, error numbers, etc., so the specified number should be indicated in any display mode. You can For example, if the prescribed number of instructions is "2", it is possible to display "2".

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example in which the specified number “2” is instructed has been given, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, a specified number “1” may be specified or a specified number “3” may be specified. Conceivable. If the specification has the possibility of instructing any of the specified numbers "1" to "3", the display of the acquired number display LED 78 when instructing the specified number "1" is set to "A1", and the specified number is set. For example, the display for instructing "2" may be "A2" and the display for instructing the prescribed number "3" may be "A3".

C. Thirteenth Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, the line L1 is set so as to pass through the centers of the four reels 31 and pass through the centers of the four stop switches 42. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire four stop switches 42 may be arranged to the right of the position of FIG. 58, for example, a part of the stop switch 42B may be arranged so as to intersect the line L1. On the contrary, the four stop switches 42 as a whole may be arranged to the left of the position of FIG. 58, and for example, a part of the stop switch 42C may be arranged so as to intersect the line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but the Roman numeral portion may be used as a lamp. In this case, for example, when the stop switch to be operated next is 42C, the lamp of Roman numeral "3" is turned on.
Further, different colors may be assigned to the ranges in which the Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written, and the stop switches 42A to 42D may also be colored corresponding to the Roman numerals "1" to "4". Can be mentioned. In the above-mentioned example, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of Roman numeral "1" is white, the range of Roman numeral "2" is blue, the range of Roman numeral "3" is yellow, and the range of Roman numeral "4" is red. To be

(3) Further, a portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may be configured by the image display device 23. Then, as described above, a different color is given to each stop switch 42. In this case, for example, when designating the stop switch 42B (blue) at the time of notifying the pushing order, the periphery of the reel 31B is made to emit blue light.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the interval W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the interval W4 between the stop switches 42.
However, without being limited to this, the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 pressing orders can be provided as the pressing order bell. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a first stop pushing order bell. Here, in the prior art, the first stop pushing order bell has three options. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to set four options. When the correct answer pressing order is displayed as an image when the first stop pressing order bell is won, for example, if the correct stop switch 42 is the stop switch 42C, “XX1×” may be displayed as an image.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a first stop and a second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which the correct push order is set for the first stop and the second stop). For example, the first stop is set to the stop switch 42C, the second stop is set to the stop switch 42A, and the third stop and the fourth stop are set arbitrarily (any of the stop switches 42B and 42D is possible). In this case, the correct answer pushing order can be set to 12 options. Further, when the correct pressing order is displayed as an image, in the above example, the image display may be “2×1×”. Then, after the operation of the stop switch 42C, it is possible to display an image such as "2×-×".

D. Others All of the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification are not limited to be performed alone, but may be appropriately combined and performed.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to the timing of the display start and the display end of the push order instruction information.
Hereinafter, 14th Embodiment (A)-(G) from which the timing of the display start or the display end of pushing order instruction information differs is demonstrated.

<Fourteenth Embodiment (A)>
60 and 61 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (A).
FIG. 60 shows the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, and FIG. 61 shows the start switch before the minimum game time has elapsed. The timing of the display start and the display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.

Here, the hardware configuration in the fourteenth embodiment (A) is similar to the hardware configuration shown in FIGS. 31 to 35 of the eleventh embodiment.
In addition, the main processing (M_MAIN), the pushing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), the medal payout by winning (M_WIN_PAY), the interrupt processing (I_INTR), and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the fourteenth embodiment (A) are the eleventh. The main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41 of the embodiment, the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) of FIG. 48, the medal payout by winning in FIG. 49, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 53, and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55. ) Is the same.
Then, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), similar to the eleventh embodiment, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when the push order bell is won during AT.

If the input port reading process is executed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then “Yes” in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41. Becomes
Further, as shown in FIG. 41, when "Yes" is determined in the step S278, after that, the winning combination lottery process (step S282), the advantageous zone transition lottery process (step S283), and the pushing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284). ) Is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, in the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), when the condition for operating the instruction function is satisfied, that is, when a winning combination having an advantageous push order such as a push order bell in AT is won. , Generates a push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number, and stores it as the acquired number data. Then, by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process, the pushing order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed every 2.235 ms, as in the eleventh embodiment. Furthermore, the dynamic lighting of the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is performed so that one cycle is generated by 5 interrupts.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 has elapsed after the minimum game time has elapsed. Regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) or before the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the rotation of the reel 31 is started, more specifically, the pushing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data. Within 5 interrupts (2.235×5=11.175 ms), the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.

In addition, after the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 at the first interrupt, or the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 at the fifth interrupt. Information may be displayed.
Although not shown in FIG. 41, the control command set 1 is executed between the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 and the reel rotation start preparation in step S285. In the control command set 1 between the pressing order instruction number set and the reel rotation start preparation, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the control command is composed of a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are 1-byte data. The first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable). Then, one control command is configured by the 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, one parallel communication line transmits the first control command to the sub-control board 80, and the other parallel communication line transmits the first control command. 2 Sends a control command to the sub control board 80. As a result, a control command composed of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 with a single interrupt process.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), a 64-byte storage area is secured in the RWM 53 as a control command buffer. As described above, one control command is configured by the 2-byte data of the first control command and the second control command, so that 32 control commands can be stored in the control command buffer. Then, by transmitting the control command during the interrupt process, the untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the stored order.
If the control command is stored when the control command buffer is empty, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by transmitting the control command during the interrupt processing that comes next at that time.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 has elapsed after the minimum game time has elapsed. Regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) or before the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the rotation of the reel 31 is started, more specifically, the pressing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer. Therefore, the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 in about 1 interruption (2.235 ms).

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the sub control board 80 includes a first sub control board (sub main control board) and a second sub control board (sub sub control board). The first sub-control board and the second sub-control board are control boards that belong to the lower level of the main control board 50, and control the selection and output of effects during a game and a game standby. The second sub control board is a control board that belongs to a lower level of the first sub control board. Then, the main control board 50 sends a control command to the first sub control board in one direction, and the first sub control board and the second sub control board perform bidirectional communication.

In addition, the first sub control board determines, at what timing and at what effect, based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, the first sub control board transmits a control command relating to the determined effect to the second sub control board.
Furthermore, production peripheral devices such as the production lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are electrically connected to the second sub-control board. Then, the second sub-control board selects an effect based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, and controls the peripheral devices for effect to output various effects.

Specifically, when the first sub control board receives the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Further, the first sub-control board executes the sub-main processing every 16 ms, and when the control command is analyzed in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result, it is determined that the control command is related to the image, Stores the image command according to the analysis result in the command buffer.
Further, the first sub-control board transmits the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in the command transmission process (executed before the loop process) during the next sub-main process.

For this reason, 32 ms (=sub-main processing cycle) from the time when the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number as the control command to the first sub control board until the second sub control board receives the image command. It takes about 16 ms×2).
Then, the second sub-control board executes the drawing process based on the received image command and displays the image on the image display device 23.
In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub control substrate executes the drawing process at 30 fps (frames per second). Therefore, it takes about 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23.

As described above, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number as the control command to the first sub control board, the second sub control board displays the image instructing the pressing order (pushing order instruction image) on the image display device. It takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms) to be displayed on 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 60, the reel 31 can be stopped after the rotation of the reel 31 is started. Before that, that is, before the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 becomes acceptable, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 1 second before the minimum game time elapses, it takes about 1 second from the start (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, before the rotation of the reel 31, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, or the start switch 41 is activated after the minimum game time elapses. Regardless of whether it is turned on (operated), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

Although not shown in FIG. 41, the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288. In the control command set 1 between the reel stop acceptance check and the all reel stop check, the control command regarding the operation of the stop switch 42 and the control command regarding the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board analyzes the received control command and, as a result, determines that it is a control command related to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that first stops). In this case, the image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub control board.
Similarly, when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops second), the image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is displayed. When the control command is transmitted to the 2nd sub-control board and is a control command related to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that is stopped last), the third stop switch 42 is operated. The image command is transmitted to the second sub control board.

When the second sub-control board receives the image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42, the image corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (for example, the operation of the second stop switch 42 is prompted). The pressing order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Similarly, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received, an image corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, a pressing order instruction image prompting the operation of the third stop switch 42) is displayed. The image is displayed on the image display device 23.

When the image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is received, for example, the display of the pressing order instruction image is terminated, and the image corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (for example, all reels 31 stop The image according to the state) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, after the third stop switch 42 is turned on, the display of the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 41, when all reels 31 are stopped (“Yes” in step S289), the acquired number data is cleared (step S290). For example, it is assumed that the push-order instruction information (for example, “=1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 at the time of winning the push-order bell during AT. In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S290.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when all reels 31 are stopped, the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 ends.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is completed first, and then the pressing order instruction on the acquired number display LED 78 is performed. The information display ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in step S294, a medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, "1" is added to the acquired number data in step S399 during payout of a medal (M_WIN_PAY) by winning. Thereby, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is "+1" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S399. For example, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 changes from "00" to "01".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), as shown in FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, when the medals are paid out, the acquired number display LED 78 displays the number of medals acquired.

In the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the push order bell is won during AT and the push order instruction information (for example, “=1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, all reels 31 are stopped. Then, the acquired number data is cleared and the acquired number display LED 78 displays "00". After that, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 remains "00" until the medals are paid out. Then, for example, when there are 10 payouts, when the medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is as "00"→"01"→"02"→... →"09"→"10". Count up.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), when the combination lottery process (step S282) and the advantageous zone transition lottery process (step S283) are executed, the push order instruction number set (step S284) is then executed. To do.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is on (operation) regardless of whether the start switch 41 is on (operation) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. After that, and before the reel 31 starts to rotate, it is possible to start displaying the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78. That is, after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be started immediately.

<Fourteenth Embodiment (B)>
In the fourteenth embodiment (B), the display start timing of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is different from that of the fourteenth embodiment (A), and the pushing order instruction information is displayed at the start of rotation of the reel 31. Is what starts.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (B), which is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 62, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined in step numbers, and steps identical to those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. ..

In FIG. 41, the processing is executed in the order of pressing order instruction number set, reel rotation start preparation, and reel rotation start. In the fourteenth embodiment (B), however, as shown in FIG. 62, reel rotation start preparation and pressing order instruction. The processing is executed in the order of number set and reel rotation start.
That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the order of step S284 and step S285 is exchanged with that of FIG. 41, and after the reel rotation start preparation is executed, the pushing order instruction number set is executed.

If the input port reading process is performed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then “Yes” in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. Becomes
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, if “Yes” in the step S278, then the winning combination lottery process (step S282), the advantageous zone transition lottery process (step S283), the control command set 1 (step S601), the reel rotation start Preparation (step S285) and push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

In step S601, the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, after step S601, the process proceeds to step S285.
Further, in step S285, the reel rotation start preparation is executed. In this reel rotation start preparation, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the minimum game time (the minimum time from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the start of the rotation of the reel 31 in the next game) is "0".

The RWM 53 has an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time. The initial value of the timer value is “1834(D) (2.235 ms×1834≈4099 ms)”. Furthermore, the timer value is decremented by "1" every interrupt processing (2.235 ms). When it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined again whether the timer value is "0", and when it is determined that the timer value is "0", the initial value of the timer value is set. Set and proceed to step S284.
Thus, in the reel rotation start preparation in step S285, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S284.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the reel stop acceptance check of step S287 is executed, the routine proceeds to step S602.
In step S602, the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, the control command related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and the control command related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, after step S602, the process proceeds to step S288.
The execution of the control command set 1 between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288 is as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A).
Other than the above, it is the same as the flowchart of FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.

63 and 64 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (B).
63 shows the timing of starting and ending the display of the pushing order instruction information when the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed, and FIG. 64 shows that the start switch 41 has been operated before the minimum game time has elapsed. The timing of the display start and the display end of the pressing order instruction information when the button is pressed is shown.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the advantageous section transition lottery process of step S283 is executed, the process proceeds to step S601 and the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, the effect group number or the pressing order instruction number stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum game time elapses, or the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum game time elapses. Regardless of whether or not the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating, more specifically, one interruption (2. In about 235 ms), the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board).

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the control command set 1 in step S601 is executed, the reel rotation start preparation is then executed in step S285, and then the pushing order instruction number set in step S284 is executed.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time has elapsed, or the start switch 41 has elapsed after the minimum game time has elapsed. Regardless of whether or not is turned on (operated), the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started when the reel 31 starts to rotate.

Further, as described in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the first sub control board, and then the second sub control board instructs the image display device 23 to perform the pressing order. It takes about 65.33 ms to display an image. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 63, after the reel 31 starts rotating, the reel 31 stops. Before it becomes possible, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 1 second before the minimum game time elapses, it takes about 1 second from the start (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 63, the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then the image is displayed. The display of the pressing order instruction image on the display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, as shown in FIG. 64, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started first, and then, Then, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.
That is, depending on whether the operation time of the start switch 41 is before or after the elapse of the minimum game time, the display of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 and the pressing order instruction to the image display device 23 are started. The order of the display start of the image is changed.

Here, in the fourteenth embodiment (A), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time elapses. After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the pressing number instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. That is, immediately after the start switch 41 was turned on (operated), the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 was started.

However, if the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is too early, the start switch 41 is turned on because the winning combination having an advantageous push order such as the push order bell is selected in the combination lottery (internal drawing). The player immediately understands after (operation).
Although this does not have an advantageous pushing order, there is a possibility that the player who is waiting for the winning of the rare role, which is a condition for determining the addition of the number of AT games, may be discouraged.

Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the pushing order instruction number is stored as the winning number data, so that when the reel 31 starts rotating, the pushing number indicating LED 78 is pushed. Start displaying the sequential instruction information.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. The player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare role can be prevented from being discouraged immediately after the start switch 41 is operated.

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, and the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, and then 5 interrupts (2.235). The display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started within (×5=11.175 ms).
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (B), the pressing order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer and stored in the sub control board 80 (first sub control board) before the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data. About 65.33 ms from the time the main control board 50 sends the pressing order instruction number to the first sub control board until the second sub control board displays the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23. Takes time.

In this way, the time required to store the pressing order instruction number as the acquisition number data and display the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is set to "X", and the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction number. When the time required for the second sub-control board to display the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 after the transmission to the first sub-control board is “Y”, “X<Y” is satisfied. Is set to.
When the interrupt processing cycle is “T” and the number of digits to be dynamically lighted by the interrupt processing is “N”, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, and then the acquired number display LED 78 is pressed. It takes a maximum of “T×N” time to display the forward instruction information. Therefore, the setting is made so as to satisfy “T×N<Y”.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then the push order on the image display device 23. The display of the instruction image is started.

<Fourteenth Embodiment (C)>
The fourteenth embodiment (C) is different from the fourteenth embodiment (A) and (B) in the timing of ending the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, and the pushing order instruction information at the time of paying out medals. The display of is ended.
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (C), which is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 65, steps different from FIG. 41 are underlined in step numbers, and steps identical to FIG. 41 are given identical step numbers. ..

In FIG. 41, when it is determined in step S289 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290 and the acquired number data is cleared, but in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIG. 65, as shown in FIG. When it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and display determination of symbols is performed without clearing the acquired number data.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning a prize (step S603) is different from that of the eleventh embodiment shown in FIGS.

If the input port reading process is performed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then “Yes” in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 65. Becomes
Further, as shown in FIG. 65, when “Yes” is obtained in step S278, after that, the winning combination lottery process (step S282), the advantageous zone transition lottery process (step S283), and the pushing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) , Control command set 1 (step S601), and reel rotation start preparation (step S285) are executed.
Note that step S601 is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B).

Also, in FIG. 65, the control command set 1 (step S602) is executed after the reel stop acceptance check (step S287), and then the all reel stop check (step S288) is executed in the fourteenth embodiment. It is similar to FIG. 62 of FIG.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65, when it is determined in step S289 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291 to make a symbol display determination. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared after all reels 31 are stopped.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in the fourteenth embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 66, steps different from FIG. 49 are underlined in step numbers, and steps identical to FIG. 49 are given identical step numbers. ..

As shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the payout amount data is acquired in step S391, the process proceeds to step S611, the payout amount data is stored as the acquired number data, and then the process proceeds to step S392. That is, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the payout amount data is stored as the acquisition amount data between step S391 and step S392.
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the one-medal payout process is executed in step S398, the process proceeds to step S400, and "1" is subtracted from the payout amount data. Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), unlike FIG. 49 of the eleventh embodiment, "1" is not added to the acquired number data between step S398 and step S400.

67 and 68 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (C).
67 shows the display start and display timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, and FIG. 68 shows the start switch before the minimum game time has elapsed. The timing of the display start and the display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared even after all the reels 31 are stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 have been stopped, the push order instruction information (for example, “=1”) is continuously displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the payout amount data is stored as the acquisition amount data in step S611 of FIG. 66, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process is performed. Thus, the number of medals acquired (for example, “10” when paying out 10 medals) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), as shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, the pushing order instruction information (for example, “=1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medal is paid out. Subsequently, when the medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from the pushing order instruction information to the acquisition number (for example, "=1" to "10").
Regarding the timing of starting display of the number of medals acquired, the timing of transmitting the pressing order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and displaying the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23, the fourteenth embodiment ( Similar to A).

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (C), the number-of-wins data is maintained without being cleared even after all reels 31 are stopped, and the number-of-payouts is obtained as the number-of-wins data in step S611 of the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in FIG. Store data.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the push order instruction information can be continuously displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Further, until the payout of medals, the pressing order instruction information is continuously displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, and when the medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from the pressing order instruction information to the number of acquisitions. Although the LED 78 is used as a display for both the pressing order instruction information and the acquired number, the display of the acquired number can be prevented.

<Fourteenth Embodiment (D)>
In the fourteenth embodiment (D), the display start timing of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is different from that of the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (D), and the reel 31 can be stopped. Occasionally, the display of the push order instruction information is started.
69 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (D), which corresponds to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.
In the flowchart of the fourteenth embodiment (D) shown in FIG. 69, steps different from FIG. 41 are underlined in step numbers, and steps identical to FIG. 41 are given identical step numbers. ..

As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286, the process proceeds to step S604, and it is determined whether or not the reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 has become acceptable. When it is determined that the reel 31 can be stopped, the process proceeds to step S284, and the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) is executed.
The contents of the processing in the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) in step S284 are the same as in the eleventh embodiment and the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C).
The contents of the processing in the control command set 1 in steps S601 and S602 are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (C).

70 and 71 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (D).
70 shows the display start and display timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, and FIG. 71 shows the start switch before the minimum game time has elapsed. The timing of the display start and the display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the reel 31 can be stopped, the pushing order instruction number set is executed, so as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, start before the minimum game time elapses. Regardless of whether the switch 41 is turned on (operated) or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, when the reel 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Is started.

Also in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (C), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, it is shown in FIG. 70. As described above, after the rotation of the reel 31 is started and before the reel 31 can be stopped, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and the start switch 41 is turned on before the minimum game time elapses (operation. 71), the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started, as shown in FIG.
Therefore, also in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (C), the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. Regardless of, the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the reel 31 can be stopped.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), when the reel 31 can be stopped regardless of whether the start switch 41 is on (operated) before or after the lapse of the minimum game time. The display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. The display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started first, and then the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the reel 31 can be stopped. Therefore, similar to the fourteenth embodiment (B). It is possible to prevent the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare role from being discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.
Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment (D), although the display start timing of the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is delayed, when the reel 31 can be stopped, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, the player can be informed of the push order instruction information before the player operates the stop switch 42.

<Fourteenth Embodiment (E)>
Similar to the fourteenth embodiment (B), the fourteenth embodiment (E) starts displaying the pushing order instruction information at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (C), payout of medals. The display of the push order instruction information is sometimes ended.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the fourteenth embodiment (E), which is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B) and FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C). ..
In FIG. 72, steps S271 to S286 are the same as FIG. 62 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), and steps S287 to S303 are the same as FIG. 65 of the fourteenth embodiment (C).

73 and 74 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (E).
FIG. 73 shows the timing of starting and ending the display of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, and FIG. 74 shows the start switch before the minimum game time has elapsed. The timing of the display start and the display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), as in FIGS. 63 and 64 of the fourteenth embodiment (B), at the start of rotation of the reel 31, the pushing order in the acquired number display LED 78. The display of the instruction information is started, and similarly to FIGS. 67 and 68 of the fourteenth embodiment (C), when the medals are paid out, the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is ended.

Regarding the timing of starting display of the number of medals acquired, the timing of transmitting the pushing order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of starting and displaying the pushing order instruction image on the image display device 23, the fourteenth embodiment (B) will be described. ) Is the same.
Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the pushing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, so that the reel 31 At the start of rotation, the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. The player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare role can be prevented from being discouraged immediately after the start switch 41 is operated.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (E), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (C), the obtained number data is maintained without being cleared even after all the reels 31 are stopped, and the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) according to the prize shown in FIG. In step S611, the payout amount data is stored as the acquisition amount data.
Therefore, even after all reels 31 are stopped, the pushing order instruction information can be continuously displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medal is paid out, and further, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed when the medal is paid out. Since the pressing order instruction information is switched to the acquired number, the acquired number display LED 78 serves as a display for both the pressing order instruction information and the acquired number, but the display of the acquired number can be prevented.

<Fourteenth Embodiment (F)>
FIG. 75 is a front view showing the outline of the configuration including the reel 31, the stop switch 42, and the operation instruction lamp 25 in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
As shown in FIG. 75, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), a stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below each reel 31. The stop instruction lamp 25 indicates the reel 31 to be stopped and is composed of an LED lamp.

The stop instruction lamp 25, which is provided below the left reel 31 and lights up when instructing to stop the left reel 31, is the left stop instruction lamp 25.
Similarly, the stop instruction lamp 25, which is provided below the middle reel 31 and lights up when instructing to stop the middle reel 31, is the middle stop instruction lamp 25.
The stop instruction lamp 25, which is provided below the right reel 31 and lights up when the stop instruction of the right reel 31 is issued, is the right stop instruction lamp 25.
Then, the sub control board 80 controls turning on/off of each stop instruction lamp 25.

Here, the sub control board 80 includes a first sub control board and a second sub control board, and the stop instruction lamp 25 is electrically connected to the second sub control board.
Then, the second sub control board controls turning on/off of each stop instruction lamp 25 and displays an image on the image display device 23 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control board.

Specifically, when the condition for operating the instruction function is satisfied, that is, when a winning combination having an advantageous pressing order such as a pressing order bell is selected in the AT, the main control board 50 controls the main processing (M_MAIN). In the command set 1, the push order instruction number as a control command is stored in the control command buffer.
Then, the main control board 50 transmits the control command stored in the control command buffer to the first sub order by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process. Send to control board.

When the first sub control board receives the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Furthermore, the first sub-control board executes the sub-main processing every 16 ms, analyzes the control command in the loop processing during this sub-main processing, and as a result determines that it is the push order instruction number. The lamp control command and the image command corresponding to the analysis result are stored in the command buffer.

Further, the first sub control board transmits the lamp control command and the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub control board in the command transmission process during the next sub main process.
Therefore, as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number as the control command to the first sub control board, and then the second sub control board displays the lamp control command and the image. It takes about 32 ms (=sub-main processing cycle 16 ms×2) until the command is received.

Then, the second sub-control board executes the control of turning on/off the (left, middle, right) stop instruction lamp 25 based on the received lamp control command, and performs the drawing process based on the received image command. Then, the image is displayed on the image display device 23.
For example, when the lamp control command indicating the first left stop and the image command are received, the second sub control board turns on the left stop instruction lamp 25 and turns off the middle stop instruction lamp 25 and the right stop instruction lamp 25. At the same time, an image prompting the operation of the left stop switch 42 is displayed on the image display device 23.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the second sub-control board executes an interrupt process every 1 ms, and in this interrupt process, controls the turning on/off of each stop instruction lamp 25.
Therefore, the second sub control board takes about 1 ms from receiving the lamp control command transmitted from the first sub control board to lighting the stop instruction lamp 25 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped. It costs.

Furthermore, as described above, it takes about 32 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub control board until the second sub control board receives the lamp control command.
Therefore, it takes about 33 ms (=32 ms+1 ms) from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub control board until the second sub control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25.

Also in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes the drawing process at 30 fps (frames per second), so that one image is displayed. It takes about 33.33 ms to display on the device 23.
Therefore, also in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as in the fourteenth embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub control board, the second sub control board displays the image. It takes about 65.33 ms (=32 ms+33.33 ms) to display the push order instruction image on the display device 23.
As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), the stop instruction lamp 25 is turned on first, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

76 and 77 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (F).
FIG. 76 shows the display start and display timings of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, and FIG. 77 shows the start switch before the minimum game time has elapsed. The timing of the display start and the display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.

Although not shown, also in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B), after the reel rotation start preparation is executed, the pushing order instruction number set is executed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, also in the fourteenth embodiment (F), whether the start switch 41 is operated before the minimum game time has elapsed, as in the fourteenth embodiment (B). Alternatively, whether or not the elapsed time has elapsed, when the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.

Although not shown, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), when the third stop switch 42 is detected to be turned on, the acquired number data is cleared. Then, by the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 ends.
The timing for starting the display of the number of medals acquired and the timing for transmitting the pressing order instruction number as the control command are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (A) to (E).

Further, as described above, it takes about 33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub control board until the second sub control board turns on the stop instruction lamp 25. It takes about 65.33 ms from when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub control board until the second sub control board displays the pressing sequence instruction image on the image display device 23.

Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has passed, as shown in FIG. 76, first, after the reel 31 starts to rotate and before the reel 31 can be stopped, it is first stopped. The instruction lamp 25 is turned on, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 1 second before the minimum game time elapses, it takes about 1 second from the start (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, before the reel 31 starts to rotate, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, first, as shown in FIG. 76, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and then the stop instruction lamp 25. Lights up, and finally, the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, as shown in FIG. 77, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first turned on, and then the image display device 23 is pressed. The order instruction image is displayed, and finally, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (F), similarly to the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (E), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the pushing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data. Thus, at the start of rotation of the reel 31, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. The player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare role can be prevented from being discouraged immediately after the start switch 41 is operated.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the stop instruction lamp 25 is turned on first regardless of whether the start switch 41 is on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. After that, the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Both the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board, but since the drawing process needs to be executed in order to display an image on the image display device 23, the stop instruction lamp is correspondingly increased. 25 lights up faster.

<Fourteenth embodiment (G)>
The fourteenth embodiment (G) is provided with a dedicated 7-segment display (7-segment) for displaying the push order instruction information, and the display end timing of the push order instruction information is the fourteenth embodiment (F). Other than that, the other points are the same as those in the fourteenth embodiment (F).
The dedicated 7-segment display for displaying the push order instruction information is referred to as a push order instruction LED.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), the RWM 53 has a storage area for pressing order instruction data. The push order instruction data is data for displaying the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED.

78 and 79 are time charts for explaining the fourteenth embodiment (G).
78 shows the display start and display timing of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, and FIG. 79 shows the start switch before the minimum game time has elapsed. The timing of the display start and the display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated) is shown.

Also in the fourteenth embodiment (G), similarly to the fourteenth embodiments (B) and (F), after the reel rotation start preparation is executed, the pushing order instruction number set is executed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, also in the fourteenth embodiment (G), as in the fourteenth embodiment (B) and (F), when the start switch 41 is on (operated), the minimum game is played. Whether or not the time has elapsed or after the time has elapsed, when the reel 31 starts to rotate, the display of the push order instruction information is started.
In the fourteenth embodiment (G), the push order instruction number is set in the storage area of the push order instruction data of the RWM 53. As a result, in the interrupt process executed after this process, the push order instruction information is displayed on the push order instruction LED.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (F), since the pushing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the acquired number data is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by clearing the acquired number data before the medal is paid out. It was possible to display the number of medals acquired.
On the other hand, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), since the pushing order instruction data is maintained without being cleared even when paying out medals, as shown in FIG. 78 and FIG. The push order instruction information (for example, "=1") continues to be displayed on the order instruction LED.

Further, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), when the payout of medals is completed, the pushing order instruction data is cleared. Then, due to the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display of the push order instruction LED becomes "00".
Therefore, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, after the payout of medals, the display of the pushing order instruction information on the pushing order instruction LED ends.

As described above, in the fourteenth embodiment (G), the pushing order instruction information is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 but is displayed on the dedicated pushing order instruction LED. Therefore, the pushing order instruction information is displayed when the medals are paid out. Even if it continues, it is possible to prevent the display of the number of medals to be obtained from being obstructed.
It should be noted that the display start timing of the number of medals acquired, the transmission timing of the push order instruction number as a control command, the display start and display end timing of the operation instruction lamp 25, and the start display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. The timing for ending display is the same as in the fourteenth embodiment (F).

<Summary of 14th Embodiment>
From the time the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) until the time when the reel 31 can be stopped (the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted), the push order instruction information is displayed. In the case of the table, it is possible to inform the player of the correct pressing order before the player turns on (operates) the stop switch 42.
Therefore, the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information is
1) When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 2) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the rotation of the reel 31 3) When the rotation of the reel 31 is started 4) After the rotation of the reel 31 And before the reel 31 can be stopped 5) When the reel 31 can be stopped.

When displaying the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, if the display of the push order instruction information is completed from the time the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) until the payout of medals, the medals are displayed. It is possible not to disturb the display of the number of coins acquired.
Therefore, the timing for ending the display of the push order instruction information is
1) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) 2) When the third stop switch 42 is turned off after being turned on (when the player releases the third stop switch 42)
3) When all reels 31 are stopped. 4) When paying out medals.
When the push order instruction information is displayed on the dedicated push order display LED, the display of the push order instruction information may be continued when the medals are paid out, and the display of the push order instruction information may be ended after the medals are paid out. ..

Further, by the time the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board) displays the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23, the control commands are generated in the main control board 50, and the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Since a control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, a control command is received and analyzed by the sub-control board 80, and a drawing process and display are performed on the sub-control board 80 (second sub-control board), a certain time is required.
Therefore, even if the main control board 50 simultaneously displays the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 and transmits the control command to the sub control board 80, the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23. Will be delayed.

Further, depending on whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, the reel 31 starts to rotate and the push order instruction image starts to be displayed on the image display device 23. The order of may change.
Therefore, as the timing of starting the display of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23,
1) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the rotation of the reel 31 is started. 2) After the rotation of the reel 31 and before the reel 31 can be stopped.

In addition, even after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the sub control board 80, the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) finishes displaying the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23. , Takes a certain amount of time.
Therefore, the display end of the pressing order instruction image on the image display device 23 comes after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated).
Then, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, the display end timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, the display start timing of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, and the push order. The display end timing of the instruction image on the image display device 23 is not limited to the combination shown in the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G), but may be set in an appropriate combination.

In the game in which the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if a push order error occurs in the middle of the game, the push order instruction information is displayed until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). May be continued to be displayed as it is, or the display of the push-order instruction information may be ended at the time when the push-order error occurs.
Similarly, in the game in which the pressing order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23, even if a pressing order error occurs in the middle, a pressing order instruction is given until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). The image may be displayed as it is, or the display of the push-order instruction image may be terminated at the time when the push-order error occurs.

In addition, when a replay is awarded when three coins are inserted, three medals are automatically bet and the game can be started. The LED 79f lights up.
At this time, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, first, the 1 bet display LED 79a lights up, and the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display. The LED 79d and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.

After that, the 2 bet display LED 79b and the 3 bet display LED 79c are sequentially turned on, and finally the 1 bet display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned on.
Then, in the replay prize when three coins are inserted, when the 1 bet display LED 79a is turned on and the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are turned off, the pressing order The display of the instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 may be terminated.

In addition, at the time of winning the small winning combination, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on, when the third stop switch is turned off, when all reels 31 are stopped, or when the medals are paid out, the display of the pushing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is finished. When the replay is won, the 1 bet display LED 79a is turned on, and the 2 bet display LED 79b, the 3 bet display LED 79c, the game start display LED 79d, and the replay display LED 79f are extinguished. The display of the instruction information may be ended.
That is, the display end timing of the push order instruction information may be different between when the small winning combination is won and when the replay winning is made.
Of course, the display end timing of the push order instruction information may be the same for the small winning combination and the replay winning.

Although the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and the following modifications are possible.
(1) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, one parallel communication line transmits the first control command to the sub-control board 80, and the other parallel communication line transmits the first control command. By transmitting the two control commands to the sub control board 80, the control command composed of 2 bytes of data can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 by one interrupt process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, only one set of 8-bit parallel communication lines may be used to transmit a control command composed of 2-byte data to the sub-control board 80.
In this case, the first control command and the second control command may be sequentially transmitted by transmitting the control command during one interrupt process. As a result, a control command composed of 2-byte data can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 by one interrupt process.

Further, the first control command may be transmitted by transmitting the control command during one interrupt processing, and the second control command may be transmitted by transmitting the control command during the next interrupt processing. As a result, a control command composed of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub control board 80 by two interrupt processes.
Furthermore, the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 by serial communication, not limited to parallel communication.
Further, the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 by electrical connection, or the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 by connection using an optical communication means. Good.

(2) In the fourteenth embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits a pressing order instruction number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control). The board) executes the drawing process based on the received press order instruction number and displays the press order instruction image on the image display device 23.
However, not limited to this, for example, the main control board 50 transmits the condition device number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) The drawing process may be executed based on the received condition device number to display the push order instruction number on the image display device 23.

Further, for example, the main control board 50 transmits the effect group number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) receives the received effect group number. It is also possible to execute the drawing process based on the above and display the pressing order instruction number on the image display device 23.
(3) The first to fourteenth embodiments and the various modified examples shown in the first to fourteenth embodiments are not limited to being performed alone, but can be appropriately combined and implemented.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment relates to the timing of addition processing of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47.
The fifteenth embodiments (A) to (C) in which the timing of the medal addition processing is different will be described below.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (A)>
The structure of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (A) is the same as the structure of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.
That is, when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal flows down the medal passage in the medal selector. On the medal passage in the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, an insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided from the upstream side. A blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 first pass through the passage sensor 46 and then reach the position of the blocker 45. When the blocker 45 is on, the medals flowing down the medal passage pass through the blocker 45 and then reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The input sensors 44a and 44b are installed at a predetermined distance.
Before the medal reaches the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
When the medal flows down the medal passage, first, the insertion sensor 44a is turned on and the insertion sensor 44b remains off.

When the medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a remains on and the insertion sensor 44b turns on.
After that, when a medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a is turned off and the insertion sensor 44b remains on.
Thereafter, when a medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a remains off and the insertion sensor 44b changes from on to off.
The medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b reach the hopper 35.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
At timing (a) in FIG. 80, the closing sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
At the timing of (b) in FIG. 80, the closing sensor 44a is on and the closing sensor 44b is off.
The state (b) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Further, when the state of (b) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error, and sends an error command to the sub control board 80. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the error command, the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At timing (c) in FIG. 80, the closing sensors 44a and 44b are both on.
The state (c) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (b) or (c) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
If the state of (c) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred and the sub-control board 80 outputs an error, as in the case of (b) in FIG. Send a command. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the error command, the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 80, the closing sensor 44a is off and the closing sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Further, if the state of (d) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 determines that it is a medal passing error and sub-controls, as in the cases of (b) and (c) in FIG. The error command is transmitted to the board 80. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the error command, the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At timing (e) in FIG. 80, the closing sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
The state (e) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (e) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Further, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and executes a medal “1” addition process (bet process or credit process).
Here, when the bet number is less than the specified number at the time of the state of (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50 executes the bet number “1” addition process. For example, when the specified number in the game is “3” and the bet number at that time is “1”, the bet number is changed from “1” to “2” by the bet number “1” addition process. To update.

Further, when the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, when the bet amount has already reached the prescribed number, and the credit amount has not reached the maximum number of “50”, the main control is performed. The board 50 executes a process of adding “1” to the number of credits. For example, when the credit amount at that time is "20", the credit amount is updated to "21".
Further, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50 transmits a closing command to the sub control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the closing command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the closing sound from the speaker 22.
When a medal passing error occurs before the state of (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal “1” addition process and does not transmit the throwing command.

Further, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 80 are repeated.
Then, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, when the bet number reaches the specified number by executing the bet number “1” addition process, the main control board 50 operates the start switch 41. In a state in which the game can be accepted (a game can be started), the game start display LED 79d is turned on.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (B)>
The fifteenth embodiment (B) is different from the fifteenth embodiment (A) in the execution timing of the medal “1” addition process.
The structure of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (B) is also similar to the structure of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (B).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 81 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIG. 80, description thereof will be omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. Since it is different from (d) and (e) in FIG. 80, it will be described below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 81, the closing sensor 44a is off and the closing sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 81 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and adds “1” to the medal (bet process or credit process ) Is executed. At this time, when the bet number is less than the prescribed number, the bet number “1” is added, and when the bet number has already reached the prescribed number, the credit number becomes the maximum number “50”. When the number of credits has not been reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed as in the 15th embodiment (A).

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), in the state of (d) in FIG. 81, the main control board 50 sends a close command to the sub control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the closing command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the closing sound from the speaker 22.
However, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), if the state (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error and sends an error command to the sub control board 80. .. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the error command, the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

For this reason, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), after the addition process of the medal “1” is executed and the insertion sound is output, it is determined that the medal passing error is generated and the error sound is output.
As described above, when the state of FIG. 81 (d) is reached, the medal “1” addition process is executed and the insertion sound is output, and thereafter, the state of (d) of FIG. 81 is kept for a predetermined time or more. When the error sound is continuously output, the insertion sound is output and then the error sound is output. Therefore, even if an error occurs, the player can be notified by the insertion sound that the medal has been inserted. ..
When the medal passing error occurs in the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 81, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal “1” addition process and does not transmit the throwing command.

At timing (e) in FIG. 81, the closing sensors 44a and 44b are both off.
Further, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 81 are repeated.
When the bet number reaches the specified number by executing the bet number “1” addition process, the main control board 50 operates the start switch 41 in the state of (e) in FIG. 81. The game start display LED 79d is turned on in a state in which the game can be accepted.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the medal "1" addition process is executed, the timing of outputting the insertion sound and the operation of the start switch 41 are made acceptable, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on. The timing is different.

Here, as described in the fifteenth embodiment (A), the medal “1” addition process is performed at the timing (e) in FIG. 80 (when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). It is common to do this.
However, when the medal flows down the medal passage to the position of (d) in FIG. 81, the medal has already passed through the blocker 45 and therefore enters the hopper 35.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), at the timing of (d) in FIG. 81 (when the insertion sensor 44b remains on and the insertion sensor 44a changes from on to off), the medal “1” is obtained. Executes addition processing. As a result, it is possible to prevent so-called swallowing of medals, which is caused when the medals enter the hopper 35 even though the medal addition process is not executed.

In addition, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), as described above, when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred and causes the sub-control board 80 to display. The error command is transmitted, and the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22. In this case, when the error sound is output, the medal addition process has already been executed and the insertion sound has been output. Therefore, the error can be canceled and the medals stuck in the medal selector can be inserted into the hopper 35. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Further, when medals are continuously inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, when the maximum number of credits reaches “50”, the 51st medal deviates from the medal passage at the position of the blocker 45, It is returned from the medal payout opening 16.
At this time, when the 50th medal is in the state of (d) in FIG. 81 (the insertion sensor 44a is off and the insertion sensor 44b is on), the credit amount "1" addition processing is executed, and the blocker Turn off 45. As a result, the 51st medal can be reliably returned from the medal payout opening 16 without being swallowed.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the bet number reaches the specified number by executing the bet number “1” addition process in the state of (d) in FIG. 81, the start switch 41 is operated. Is ready to be accepted. At this time, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 sends a start command to the sub control board 80. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the start command, the sub control board 80 outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22.

Here, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing of (e) in FIG. 80, when the operation of the start switch 41 is made acceptable and the closing command is transmitted to the sub control board 80, There is a possibility that the closing sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 overlap.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), a closing command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the timing (d) in FIG. 81, and the start switch 41 is operated at the timing (e) in FIG. 81. Ready to accept. As a result, the closing sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be prevented from overlapping.

<Fifteenth Embodiment (C)>
The fifteenth embodiment (C) is the same as the fifteenth embodiment (B) in the execution timing of the medal “1” addition process, but the output timing of the insertion sound is the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment (B). It is different.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (C) is similar to that of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing execution timing of medal addition processing in the fifteenth embodiment (C).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 82 are similar to (a) to (c) in FIGS. 80 and 81, description thereof will be omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. 82 will be omitted. Is different from (d) and (e) in FIGS. 80 and 81, and will be described below.

At the timing of (d) in FIG. 82, the closing sensor 44a is off and the closing sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 82 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), when the state of (d) in FIG. 82 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and performs a “1” medal addition process (a bet process or a credit process). ) Is executed. At this time, when the bet number is less than the prescribed number, the bet number “1” is added, and when the bet number has already reached the prescribed number, the credit number becomes the maximum number “50”. When the number of credits is not reached, the process of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

However, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), unlike the fifteenth embodiment (B), at the timing of (d) in FIG. 82, the main control board 50 does not send the closing command to the sub control board 80.
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), the main control board 50 transmits a close command to the sub control board 80 at the timing of (e) in FIG. 82. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the closing command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the closing sound from the speaker 22.

Here, it is assumed that the state of (d) in FIG. 82 continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal passing error and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. Then, it is assumed that the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.
In this case, the medal "1" addition process is executed, but the insertion sound is not output, but the error sound is output. Thereby, the error notification can be prioritized.

Then, when the error is released, the main control board 50 transmits a closing command to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 outputs a closing sound from the speaker 22 based on the received closing command. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that a medal has been inserted, which can reassure the player.
Further, in the state of (e) in FIG. 82, when the bet number reaches the prescribed number by executing the bet number “1” addition processing, the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted. Turning on the game start display LED 79d is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (A) and (B).

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
The sixteenth embodiment relates to a chute passage 48 for guiding the medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and a chute sensor 49 provided in the middle of the chute passage 48.
FIG. 83 is a view showing the medal selector, the chute passage 48, and the chute sensor 49. The medal M inserted from the medal insertion port 47 passes through the insertion sensor 44a, the insertion sensor 44b, and the chute sensor 49, and the hopper. It is a schematic diagram which shows a mode to 35.

The chute passage 48 is a passage for guiding the medal M passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and is connected to the downstream side of the medal passage of the medal selector. Then, the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 reaches the hopper 35 through the medal passage of the medal selector and the chute passage 35.

The shoot sensor 49 is a sensor provided for determining whether or not there is a jammed medal or a goto action, and is configured using an optical sensor having a light emitting/receiving unit, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the middle of the chute passage 48. And is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Since the chute passage 48 is a passage for guiding the medal M, which has passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, to the hopper 35, the chute sensor 49 is arranged downstream of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the insertion monitoring counter adds “1” when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off→on→off). The counter is decremented by "+1" when the shoot sensor 49 detects passage of the medal M. Therefore, the closing monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0" in the normal state.
The addition monitoring counter "1" is added at a timing at which the addition sensor 44b is turned on (OFF timing in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82).
Further, the timing of adding "1" to the closing monitoring counter is not limited to the timing at which the closing sensor 44b is turned on, but for example, the timing at which the closing sensor 44a is turned on (see FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). (Timing of (b)), or timing of turning on of the closing sensor 44a (timing of (c) of FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82), timing of turning on of the closing sensor 44b. (The timing of FIG. 4 and FIGS. 80 to 82 (d)) may be used. This is because it is considered that the medal M will enter the hopper 35 when the medal M reaches these timings.
Further, when the medal M passes through the shoot sensor 49, the shoot sensor 49 is turned off→on→off, but the timing of subtracting “1” from the throw-in monitoring counter is the timing at which the shoot sensor 49 is turned off. is there.

When the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (insertion monitoring counter=“+1”) and the shoot sensor 49 does not detect the passage of the medal M, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M. When it is further detected that the coin has passed, the insertion monitoring counter becomes “+2”, and the main control board 50 determines that the medal has passed.
Furthermore, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, and only the shoot sensor 49 detects the passage of the medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 sets the medal. Judge as a passage error.

The main control board 50 determines that the medal passing error is not limited to when the insertion monitoring counter is “+2” or “−1”. For example, the main control board 50 may determine a medal passing error when the insertion monitoring counter has a predetermined value of “+2” or more and a predetermined value of “−1” or less.
Further, when the shoot sensor 49 detects the medal M and continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time elapses, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error. When the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error, the main control board 50 stops the progress of the game until the error is released.

As shown in FIG. 83, the medals M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 reach the hopper 35 through the medal passage and the chute passage 48. At this time, it passes through the closing sensor 44a, the closing sensor 44b, and the chute sensor 49.
Here, it is assumed that the medal M is blocked at the tip of the chute passage 48. In FIG. 83, the position of M1 indicates the position of the medal M placed in the medal insertion slot 47, the position of M2 indicates the position of the medal M blocked at the tip of the chute passage 48, and the position of M3 indicates the shoot. The position of the second medal M from the tip of the passage 48 is shown, and the position of M4 is the position of the third medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the sixteenth embodiment, when the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48, the chute is placed at a position where the third medal M (M4) can be detected from the tip of the chute passage 48. The sensor 49 is arranged.
Therefore, when the medal M is clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48, the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 is detected by the chute sensor 49, and when this state continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that it is a medal retention error, and stops the progress of the game until the error is released.

For example, it is assumed that three medals M are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 when the defined number is “3” and the bet number and the credit number are both “0”. In this case, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the third medal M, the main control board 50 puts the operation of the start switch 41 into an acceptable state (starting the game), and the game start display LED 79d. Light up. At this time, when the first medal M (M2) is blocked at the tip of the chute passage 48, the third medal M (M4) is detected by the chute sensor 49. Then, if this state continues for a predetermined time or more, the main control board 50 determines that there is a medal retention error and stops the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game when the shoot passage 48 is filled with the medals M.

The position of the chute sensor 49 is not limited to the position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 can be detected when the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. When the prescribed number is “N”, the chute sensor 49 may be arranged at a position where the Nth medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48 can be detected when the medal M is jammed at the tip of the chute passage 48. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game when the shoot passage 48 is filled with the medals M.

<17th Embodiment>
The seventeenth embodiment relates to a payout medal passage 134 that guides the medals ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16.
84 is a front view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 85 is a rear view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 86 is a left side view of the passage forming member 130, and FIG. It is an AA arrow sectional view.

The slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 whose front surface is open, and a front door 12 which closes the opening of the cabinet 13.
A medal payout device 15 is arranged below the inside of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, a medal insertion slot 47, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, etc. are arranged in the center of the front surface of the front door 12, and a medal selector is provided on the rear surface of the front door 12 corresponding to the medal insertion slot 47. Are arranged.
Further, a medal payout opening 16 is provided in the lower part of the front door 12, and a medal tray for receiving the medals paid out from the medal payout opening 16 is provided in the lower front part of the front door 12, and the back surface of the front door 12 is provided. A passage forming member 130 is attached to the lower portion.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the passage forming member 130 is formed in a bent shape, and by being attached to a predetermined position on the lower back surface of the front door 12, the return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage 132. It is a member forming 134.
Furthermore, the return medal passage 132 is a passage for guiding the medals which are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45 of the medal selector to the medal payout opening 16.
Further, the payout medal passage 134 is a passage for guiding the medals ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16.
The return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage 134 join together on the way to form one passage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, an upper medal receiving opening 131 is provided above the passage forming member 130. The upper medal receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving medals which are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45, and is an opening at the upstream end of the return medal passage 132, and closes the front door 12. It is formed so as to be located below the blocker 45 of the medal selector in the open state.
Then, the medals which are not allowed to be inserted by the blocker 45 are guided through the return medal passage 132 after passing through the upper medal receiving opening 131, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, a lower medal receiving port 133 is provided at a position below the center of the passage forming member 130 and to the left when viewed from the front (to the right when viewed from the back). ing. The lower medal receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving the medals ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15, and is an opening at the upstream end of the payout medal passage 134. It is formed so as to be positioned in front of the discharge portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 with the coin 12 closed.
Then, the medals ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 are guided by the payout medal passage 134 after passing through the lower medal receiving port 133, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the lower medal receiving opening 133 is formed on the back side of the passage forming member 130, and the front side of the passage forming member 130 constitutes the back surface of the front door 12. Plates are arranged. In this way, there is a distance corresponding to the depth of the passage forming member 130 from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12.
Here, the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 passes through the lower medal receiving port 133, passes through the payout medal passage 134, and is located at a position facing the lower medal receiving port 133 on the back surface of the front door 12. It hits and bounces off. At this time, when the distance from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is short, the medal M hit against the back surface of the front door 12 and rebounded, and the medal M is ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to the medal M. There is a possibility of collision with the medal M.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the distance from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is "L1" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L1" ≧2D” is set.
That is, the distance “L1” from the lower medal receiving opening 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be twice or more the diameter “D” of the medal M.
As a result, the medal M hit against the back surface of the front door 12 and bounced off, and the medal M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to the medal M are less likely to collide with each other.

That is, the medal M ejected from the ejecting unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 is directed toward the back surface of the front door 12 (rightward in FIG. 87) while falling downward due to gravity. Therefore, the medal M ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position. Further, the medal M hit against the back surface of the front door 12 and rebounded toward the lower medal receiving port 133 (leftward in FIG. 87) while falling downward due to gravity.
If the distance “L1” from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be twice the diameter “D” of the medal M or more, the ejecting section 103 of the medal payout device 15 ejects the medal M. And a medal M heading toward the back surface of the front door 12 and a medal M hitting the back surface of the front door 12 and bouncing back toward the lower medal receiving opening 133 can be sufficiently secured, and both medals M collide with each other. It can be difficult.

Further, when the medals M are ejected one after another from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 at short intervals, even if the distance “L1” from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is equal to the diameter “D” of the medal M, Even if the number is set to double or more, there is a possibility that the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 and the medal M bounced by hitting the back surface of the front door 12 collide with each other.

Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, after the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off, the next medal M is ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15. It is set.
That is, the interval at which the medal M is ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15, the ejection speed of the medal M from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15, and the distance from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the back surface of the front door 12. And are set so as to satisfy the above relationship.

In this way, the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position, bounces off, and drops to a lower position, and then the next medal M is ejected. If ejected from the ejection unit 103 of 15, it is possible to secure a sufficient distance and height difference between both medals, and it is possible to prevent both medals M from colliding with each other.
Here, when the medal M hit against the back surface of the front door 12 and rebounded, collides with the medal M ejected from the ejecting section 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to the medal M, the vicinity of the lower medal receiving port 133 and the payout medal. There is a possibility that the medal M will be blocked in the passage 134.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the medals M are set so that they do not easily collide with each other, so that the medals M are not blocked near the lower medal receiving port 133 or in the payout medal passage 134. ..
In the present embodiment, the medal M hit by the back surface of the front door 12 and rebounded is set so as not to easily collide with the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to the medal M. However, this does not mean that the front and rear medals M do not all collide when a large number of medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection unit 103, and that at least the first medal M and the second medal M are It is enough if there is no collision. Since two coins are most often paid out when winning a small winning combination, if the first medal M and the second medal M are set so as not to collide with each other, the vicinity of the lower medal receiving port 133 This is because the medal M can be prevented from being blocked in the payout medal passage 134.

Further, here, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper disc 101 is provided with a plurality of holding portions 102 capable of holding the medals M stored in the hopper along the outer periphery of the hopper disc 101. There is.
Then, when the following conditions (a) and (b) are satisfied or conditions (a) and (c) are satisfied, two or more medals M are continuously output from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15. It will be ejected.
(A) The medals M are held by two adjacent holding portions 102 of the hopper disc 101.
(B) “(M−N)≧2” is satisfied when the number of remaining tokens until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is “N” and the number of paid-out medals M is “M”.
(C) The settlement switch 43 is operated when the number of credits is “2” or more.

For example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medals M are held by the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “B” and the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “C”, respectively. When it is present, the condition (a) above is satisfied even if the medal M is not held in the holding portion 102 at the position of the character “D”.
Further, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, although the medal M is not held in the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “B”, the holding unit at the position of the character “C” is held. When the medals M are held in 102 and the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “D”, the condition (a) above is satisfied.

Furthermore, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “B”, the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “C”, and the position of the character “D”. When the medals M are respectively held in the holding units 102 in the above, the above condition (a) is satisfied.
Of course, when the medals M are held in all the holding portions 102 of the hopper disc 101, the above condition (a) is satisfied.

Further, for example, when the upper limit of the number of credits is "50" and the number of credits is "47", the remaining number of sheets until reaching the upper limit of the number of credits is "3". When a small winning combination of "5" or more is won, the condition (b) above is satisfied.
Furthermore, for example, when the credit number has already reached the upper limit value of “50”, the remaining number of sheets until reaching the upper limit value of the credit number is “0”, and at this time, the payout number is “2”. When the above-mentioned small winning combination is won, the above condition (b) is satisfied.

From the above, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, at least the holding unit 102 at the position of the character "B" and the holding unit 102 at the position of the character "C" are each medals. If the above condition (b) or (c) is satisfied while M is held, two or more medals M will be continuously ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15.
Further, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held in the holding portion 102 at the position of the character "B", but at least the position of the character "C" is held. Even when the above condition (b) or (c) is satisfied under the condition that the medals M are held in the holding unit 102 and the holding unit 102 at the position of the character “D”, the medal payout is performed. Two or more medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the device 15.

Further, there is a case where the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces back to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving opening 133. When the returned medal M passes through the lower medal receiving port 133, it falls inside the cabinet 13 and cannot be paid out to the player.
Therefore, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the peripheral edge of the lower medal receiving port 133 is “L2” and the thickness of the medal M is “T”, “L2≧T”. Is set to satisfy.

That is, the height “L2” of the peripheral portion of the lower medal receiving port 133 is set to be equal to or more than the thickness “T” of the medal M.
As a result, even if the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces back and returns to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving port 133, the returned medal M is the lower medal receiving port. It is possible to hit the peripheral edge of the 133 and prevent the lower medal receiving opening 133 from passing through.

Further, since the hopper disk 101 of the medal payout device 15 is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, the medal M is ejected from the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 in a state of being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving port 133 and the payout medal passage 134 are also inclined in accordance with the inclination of the ejected medal M.

Here, the vertical direction with respect to the front surface and the back surface of the medal M ejected in an inclined state is the height direction. Then, in the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the payout medal passage 134 is “L2” and the diameter of the medal M is “D”, “L2<D” is satisfied. It is set. That is, the height “L2” of the payout medal passage 134 is set to be less than the diameter “D” of the medal M.

Accordingly, even if the medal M hit against the back surface of the front door 12 and revolved in the payout medal passage 134, the front surface and the back surface of the medal M can be prevented from being parallel to the vertical plane in the payout medal passage 134. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal M from blocking the payout medal passage 134.
It should be noted that all of the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification are not limited to be implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
The eighteenth embodiment relates to an external signal transmission process.
In the eighteenth embodiment, a signal indicating ON/OFF can be output as the external signal 4 and the external signal 5.
In the eighteenth embodiment, the external signal 4 is an ON signal of the setting key switch (setting key switch signal), a signal indicating that an error has been detected, a signal indicating that an error is being displayed, or the power switch 11 is ON. This is a signal indicating that it has been performed (detection of power-on).
The external signal 5 is a signal (door switch ON signal) indicating that the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 has been opened.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing main storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the eighteenth embodiment.
The input port 0 level data at the address “F00A(H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating ON/OFF of the input port 0. Each bit of input port 0 is configured as follows.
D0: Setting switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D1: Reset switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D2: Setting key switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D3: Door switch signal (“1” when on, “0” when off)
D4: Not used D5: Not used D6: Power failure detection signal D7: Full detection signal

Here, the D6-bit "power-off detection signal" is input when power-off occurs (for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S482 in FIG. 54 (the eleventh embodiment)). It is a signal.
Although not shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 is provided with a sub tank for storing the medals overflowing from the hopper 35. Further, a full sensor that is turned on when the medal contacts when the sub tank is full is provided. Then, when the full sensor is turned on, the full detection signal is input to the D7 bit of the input port 0.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the storage area for the input port 0 level data, each bit of the input port 0 is turned off (at the time of the previous interrupt processing) to on (at the time of the current interrupt processing). The storage area of the input port rising data for storing the data indicating that, and the data indicating that each bit of the input port 0 is turned on (at the time of the previous interrupt processing) to off (at the time of the current interrupt processing) It is also possible to provide a storage area for the input port falling data for storage.

Further, the input port 51 shown in FIG. 1 is not limited to the input port 0, and for example,
(1) Input port 1 to which operation switch signals such as the bet switch 40 (40a and 40b), the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, and the adjustment switch 43 are input,
(2) Input port 2 to which signals from the passage sensor 46, the input sensor 44, the payout sensor 37, the reel sensor 33, etc. are input
And so on.
A storage area for input port level data corresponding to each input port is provided. Further, as described above, it is possible to provide a storage area for the input port rising data and the input port falling data for each input port.
Furthermore, when only the storage area for the input port level data is provided (when the storage area for the input port rising data and the input port falling data is not provided), the storage area for the input port level data in this interrupt processing Not only that, a storage area for the input port level data in the previous interrupt processing may be provided.

The power-off recovery time external signal 4 output time of the address “F013(H)” is a storage area of a timer value for counting the time for outputting the external signal 4 upon power-off recovery. In the present embodiment, in FIG. 1, when the power switch 11 is turned on and the main control board 50 detects the recovery from the power failure, the address “F013(H)” is set to “136(D)” as an initial value. And is decremented by "1" for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is to be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes “0”.
In addition, in the eighteenth embodiment, the interrupt cycle is “2.235 ms” as in the other embodiments. Therefore, the "136" interrupt corresponds to "303.96 ms". As a result, at the time of recovery from power-off, the external signal 4 is turned on for about “300” ms (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 4 management time of the address “F014(H)” is a storage area of a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 4. In this embodiment, the initial value “24 (D)” is set when the output of the external signal 4 is started (except when the power is restored from the above-described power failure), and “1” is subtracted from each interrupt. .. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is to be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes “0”.
The "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64 ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least “50” ms or more (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 5 management time of the address “F015(H)” is a storage area of a timer value for managing the output time of the external signal 5. In the present embodiment, the initial value "24(D)" is set when the output of the external signal 5 is started, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5) until this value becomes “0”.
Similarly to the above, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64 ms". As a result, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least “50” ms or more (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 5).

Further, the external signal 4 output time at power-off recovery, the external signal 4 management time, and the external signal 5 management time of this embodiment are all 1-byte timers because they measure "255 (D)" or less. Then, these timer values are subtracted by the timer measurement in step S455 during the interrupt processing of FIG.
Here, in the eighteenth embodiment, the above three timers are arranged at the addresses “F013(H)” to “F015(H)”. Therefore, in the timer measurement, "F013(H)" is set as the measurement start timer address in the first step. Also, "3" is set as the number of 1-byte timers. As a result, all the timers including the addresses “F013(H)” to “F015(H)” are decremented by “1” by the timer measurement process.
In addition, when the subtraction process is executed when the timer value is “0”, in other words, when “0” is subtracted from “00 (H)”, “00 (H)” is set. ..

The error number of the address “F051(H)” is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the detected error when the error is detected. As shown in FIG. 88, when no error is detected, the value of the address “F051(H)” is “0(D)”. Then, for example, when an “E5” error is detected, the value “105(D)” corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address “F051(H)”.
In FIG. 88, “E0” to “E7” are illustrated as the error numbers.
Here, in the eleventh embodiment described above, "E1", "E5", "E6", and "E7" errors have been illustrated as non-recoverable errors. On the other hand, the “E0” to “E7” errors of the eighteenth embodiment (FIG. 88) all correspond to recoverable errors.

When these recoverable errors occur, in principle, the progress of the game is stopped. Further, even when at least one reel 31 is rotating, error detection is executed for at least some errors (“E7”, “E6”, “E5” errors in the example of the eighteenth embodiment). When an error is detected during rotation of at least one reel 31, the progress of the game is continued until all reels 31 are stopped, and when all reels 31 are stopped, an error state (before the payout process is executed ( Error display) and stop the progress of the game. Then, when the error is removed by the hall clerk, the progress of the game is resumed. Of course, during the rotation of the reel 31, if any of the errors "E7", "E6", and "E5" occurs, the progress of the game is stopped (stop control by the operation of the stop switch 42 is not performed. ) Is also possible.

In FIG. 88, the "E0" error is an error when the insertion sensor 44 determines that the medals have accumulated.
The "E1" error is an error when it is determined that the medals have not passed in the order of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The "E2" error is an error when it is determined that the sub tank is full.
The “E3” error is an error when it is determined that the medal in the hopper 35 is empty.
The "E4" error is an error when it is determined by the payout sensor 37 that the medals are retained (clogged) under the situation where the medal payout signal is being output.
The “E5” error is an error when the payout sensor 37 is turned on under the situation that the medal payout signal is not output.
The "E6" error is an error when the insertion sensor 44b detects a medal in a situation where the blocker 45 does not form a medal flow path.
The "E7" error is an error when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the selector passage.

When any of the above errors is detected, the number corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051(H)". When the error number is stored in the address “F051(H)”, it becomes possible to display an error corresponding to the stored error number. For example, the segment data corresponding to the number stored in the address “F051(H)” is output to the acquired number display LED 78 to display the error number. Specifically, when the error field number "101(D)" is stored in the address "F051(H)", the digit is displayed in the LED display control in the interrupt processing (for example, FIG. 55 of the eleventh embodiment). At the lighting timing of 3, the lighting data of the digit 3 and the segment data for lighting and displaying "E" are output. Also, at the lighting timing of the digit 4, the lighting data of the digit 4 and the segment data for lighting and displaying "1" are output.

When any error number is stored in the address “F051(H)” (when it is not “0”), the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is turned on can be output). ).
After removing the error that occurred, the hall clerk turns on the reset switch. When it is detected that the reset switch is turned on, it is determined whether the error that has occurred is removed. When it is determined that the error that has occurred is not removed, the current status (error display) is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error that has occurred is removed (no error has occurred), the error number stored in the address “F051(H)” is cleared. When the error number of the address "F051(H)" is cleared, the error display (display of the error number by the digits 3 and 4) ends.
Although the above is an example in which the error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 based on the other embodiment described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76, or an error display may be displayed. A dedicated LED may be provided and the LED may display.

The error detection flag of the address “F294(H)” is a storage area for storing the fact that an error has been detected in consideration of the case where the error cannot be immediately entered when an error is detected. Is. In the example of FIG. 88, the D0 to D2 bits in the storage area of the address “F294(H)” are used as the detection flags of “E7”, “E6”, and “E5” errors, respectively. The “E7”, “E6”, and “E5” errors are all errors that may be detected even when at least one reel 31 is rotating.

Here, for example, even when the reel 31 is rotating, it is determined whether or not an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error has occurred due to the interrupt processing. When the occurrence of these errors is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the bit corresponding to the error in the error detection flag is set to "1". When the error detection flag is "1", the external signal 4 is output.
However, even when these errors are detected under the condition that the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) is not immediately entered at that time, and it is after all the reels 31 are stopped. Shift to the error state before the payout process is executed.

When any of the bits of the error detection flag is "1" when all reels 31 are stopped, the corresponding error number is stored in the address "F051(H)". When the error number is stored in the address “F051(H)”, the stored error number is displayed. When the error number is stored in the address "F051(H)" after storing the error detection flag in the address "F294(H)", when should the error detection flag of the address "F291(H)" be cleared? Is optional. For example, firstly, the error detection flag is not cleared until the error is removed. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored and after all reels 31 are stopped, the external signal 4 is turned on based on either the error detection flag or the error number (external signal 4 indicates ON). Signal can be output). When it is determined that the error has been removed, both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared. When the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4). However, even when both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off. Is not output).

Secondly, when the error number is stored in the address "F051(H)" after storing the error detection flag in the address "F294(H)", the error detection flag in the address "F291(H)" is cleared. There are things to do. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error detection flag until the error number is stored (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output. ). Further, when the error number is stored and the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error number (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4). After that, when it is determined that the error is removed, the error number is cleared. As a result, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4). However, even when both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off. Is not output).

When an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) cannot be immediately entered (the error state cannot be entered unless all reels 31 are stopped), but immediately when an error is detected. Since it is necessary to turn on the external signal 4 (it is possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), an error detection flag is provided.
Therefore, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs in a situation in which the error state can be immediately entered, such as when the reel 31 is stopped, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. Whether or not to do is optional. For simplification of processing, even if an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs under a condition where the error state can be entered, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. Good. Alternatively, when an “E5”, “E6”, or “E7” error occurs, and the error detection flag is set to “1” when the error state cannot be immediately entered (for example, at least one reel 31 is rotating). Is stored, and when it is in a situation where it is possible to immediately shift to the error state (for example, while waiting for a game), the error number may be stored, but “1” may not be stored in the error detection flag.

In the storage area of the RWM 53 described above, the storage areas of the addresses “F00A(H)”, “F013(H)” to “F015(H)”, and “F051(H)” are storage areas within the use area. .. On the other hand, the storage area of the address “F294(H)” is a storage area outside the used area. A program for detecting an error is stored in a control area outside the usage area of the ROM 54.

89 and 90 are time charts showing the output timings of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5, FIG. 89 shows Example 1, and FIG. 90 shows Example 2.
In Example 1 of FIG. 89, (a) shows the relationship between ON/OFF of the setting key switch and the output of the external signal 4. When the ON of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is immediately turned ON (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when the setting key switch is detected to be turned on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is turned on can be output) is “0” ms. Therefore, when it is detected that the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is turned on immediately (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4).
Further, whether or not the setting key switch is ON is detected in the interrupt processing. For example, when the level data of the input port 0 is read and the level data of the setting key switch is “1” in the input port read process of step S457 during the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 (the eleventh embodiment), The signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4).

Also, once the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is turned on for "50" ms or more (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4) (t3 in the figure). Therefore, even if the setting key switch is turned off immediately after it is turned on (for example, after “10” ms has elapsed), the external signal 4 is turned on (external signal) until at least “50” ms has elapsed. It is possible to output a signal indicating ON as the signal 4).
Then, when the setting key switch is turned off, "50" ms or more has elapsed from the time when the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output). The external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4). If "50" ms or more has elapsed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is on can be output), the external signal 4 is turned off when the setting key switch is detected to be off. (It is possible to output a signal indicating OFF as the external signal 4) (t2 in the figure).

Therefore, after detecting the ON of the setting key switch and turning ON the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), turn OFF the setting key switch before “50” ms has elapsed. When it is detected, the external signal 4 is turned off after a minimum of “50” ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is off can be output).
On the other hand, after detecting the ON of the setting key switch and turning ON the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), the setting key switch is turned OFF after “50” ms or more has elapsed. When detected, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(B) shows the relationship between the detection/non-detection of an error and the output of the external signal 4. The "error detection" here corresponds to that any one bit is "1" in the error detection flag of the address "F294(H)", and the "error non-detection" is the error. This corresponds to the detection flag being "0".
When "1" is stored in the error detection flag, it is possible to turn on the external signal 4 immediately (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). After "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 can be output) is "0" ms.
When "1" is once stored in the error detection flag, the external signal is turned on for at least "50" ms (it is possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) (time t3). When the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 can be turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2). As described above, the error detection flag is cleared when the error is removed or when the error is not removed but the error number is stored.

Therefore, after detecting that the error detection flag has become “1” and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), before “50” ms has elapsed. When it is detected that the error detection flag has become “0”, the external signal 4 is turned off after at least “50” ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is off). Can be output).
On the other hand, after detecting that the error detection flag has become “1” and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), after “50” ms or more has elapsed, When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", the external signal 4 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(C) shows the relationship between the display/non-display of an error and the output of the external signal 4. The “error display” here means that the error number of the address “F051(H)” is a value other than “0” (in the example of FIG. 88, any of “100(D)” to “107(D)”. Is stored, and “non-display of error” corresponds to the value of the error number being “0”. Although a storage area for storing a flag indicating the display/non-display of an error may be provided, as in this embodiment, it is based on the data stored in the storage area for displaying the error number. By determining whether to display or not display the error, it is possible to reduce the storage area used.

When a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is output after the value other than the error number "0" is stored is "0" ms.
When a value other than “0” is temporarily stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least “50” ms (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4) (time is output). t3). In addition, after the value other than “0” is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least “50” ms or more (the signal indicating the on-state can be output as the external signal 4), and then the error number When is cleared, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, when the error number is stored and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the signal is on can be output as the external signal 4) and the error number is cleared before “50” ms has elapsed, After at least "50" ms has passed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating the off state can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, when the error number is stored and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the signal is on can be output as the external signal 4), the error number is cleared after “50” ms or more has elapsed, The external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(D) shows the relationship between the power on/off and the output of the external signal 4. Here, various detection methods can be used to determine whether or not the power is turned on (whether or not the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1). In this example, “power on” means the address “F013”. (H)” corresponds to the time when the initial value “136 (D)” of the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power interruption recovery is stored.
When the power-on is detected (when the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is restored), it is possible to immediately turn on the external signal 4 (indicating that the external signal 4 is on). It is possible to output a signal). The minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is output after the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time when the power is turned off is "0" ms.
When the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is restored, the external signal 4 is turned on for "300" ms (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4) ( Time t3). Here, “300” ms corresponds to the number of interruptions “136”. Further, when the output time of the external signal 4 upon power-off recovery is “0”, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). (Time t2).

Therefore, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is restored, and after turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), the power switch 11 is turned off. When this is detected (when the D7 bit of the input port 0 level data becomes “1”), the external signal 4 is turned off after “300” ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (external A signal indicating OFF can be output as the signal 4).
On the other hand, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 upon recovery from power failure, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4), the output time of the external signal 4 is “ After 300 ms, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4) even if the power switch 11 remains on.

(E) shows the relationship between the opening/closing of the front door 12 and the output of the external signal 5. Here, "the front door 12 is opened" corresponds to when the ON state of the door switch is detected. Particularly, the eighteenth embodiment corresponds to the case where the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data (or the input port 0 rising data) becomes "1".
When it is detected that the door switch is turned on, the external signal 5 can be turned on immediately (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 5). The minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 5 is output after the ON state of the door switch is detected is "0" ms.
When the ON state of the door switch is detected, the external signal 5 is turned ON for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 5) (time t3). Accordingly, even if the front door 12 is closed immediately after the front door 12 is opened, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least “50” ms (external signal 5 indicates ON). Signal can be output).

Therefore, after detecting the ON state of the door switch and turning ON the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5), the OFF state of the door switch is detected before "50" ms has elapsed. At this time, after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 5, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating that the external signal 5 is off can be output).
On the other hand, after detecting the ON state of the door switch and turning ON the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5), the OFF state of the door switch is detected after "50" ms or more has elapsed. At this time, the external signal 5 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

The output destination of the external signal 4 or the external signal 5 is a hall computer or the like, but the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on for “50” ms or more (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on can be output. By this, the hall computer (data lamp) or the like can reliably receive the external signals 4 and 5. Therefore, even if an illegal act such as turning on the setting key switch for a moment (for example, about "5" to "10" ms) is performed or an illegal act including opening the front door 12 for a moment is performed, The external signal 4 or 5 can be received by a computer or the like.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 90 is a modification of Example 1 shown in FIG. 89.
In FIG. 90,
Time t1 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be turned on until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is turned on can be output),
Time t1 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) becomes "1" to when the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is turned on can be output),
Time t1 from the time when the error number shown in (c) is stored until the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is turned on can be output),
Time t1 from when the door switch shown in (e) is detected to be turned on until the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 5).
Are both set to "0" ms.

Note that, in FIG. 90, the interval of time t1 exceeds “0”, but in reality, for example, in (a), the timing at which the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON and the external signal 4 The output turns from OFF to ON at almost the same timing (the setting key switch turns from OFF to ON, and the output of the external signal 4 turns from OFF to ON within “2”). ..
Further, a time t3 in which the external signal 4 in (a) to (c) in the figure and the external signal 5 shown in (e) in the figure are turned on (signals indicating on can be output as the external signals 4 and 5). Is a minimum of 50 ms. This point is similar to the example of FIG. 89.
Furthermore, the time t3 for turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) in (d) in the figure is "300" ms, as in the example of FIG. 89.

Furthermore,
Time t2 from when the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to be OFF until the external signal 4 is turned OFF (a signal indicating OFF is output as the external signal 4),
Time t2 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) is cleared to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4).
Time t2 from when the error number shown in (c) is cleared to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4 can be output),
Time t2 from when the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power failure recovery shown in (d) becomes “0” to when the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating the off is output as the external signal 4 can be output),
Time t2 from when the door switch shown in (e) is detected to be turned off until the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 5).
Is “50” ms in all cases.

To do this, for example, a timer for managing the output time of the external signal 4 when the setting key switch is detected to be off, the error detection flag is cleared, or the error number is cleared The value "24(D)" is set, the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing, and when the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 4 is turned off (the external signal 4 is turned off. It is possible to output a signal indicating).
Similarly, when it is detected that the door switch is off, a timer value "24(D)" for managing the output time of the external signal 5 is set, and the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing. When the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 5 may be turned off (a signal indicating off may be output as the external signal 5).

Next, the output of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 will be described based on a flowchart. 91 to 94 are flowcharts showing the external signal output processing.
91 and 92 are flowcharts showing Example 1 of the external signal output processing. 92 is a flowchart following FIG. 91. Furthermore, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of the external signal output processing. Further, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the external signal output processing.
The external signal output process (step S3221) is, for example, a process which is entered between step S455 (timer measurement) and step S456 (LED display control) in FIG.

First, Example 1 of the external signal output processing will be described.
In FIG. 91, in step S3231, it is determined whether the setting key switch is on. This processing determines whether or not the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch is on. When it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3237, and when it is determined that the setting key switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3232.

In step S3232, it is determined whether an error has been detected. This process determines whether or not any bit of the error detection flag is "1". When it is determined that any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3237, and when it is determined that neither bit is "1" (no error is detected), the process proceeds to step S3233.
In step S3233, it is determined whether an error is being displayed. In this process, the error number is read and it is determined whether or not it is "0". When the value is "0", it is determined that the error is not being displayed and the processing proceeds to step S3234. When the value is other than "0", it is determined that the error is being displayed and the processing proceeds to step S3237.

In step S3234, it is determined whether "300" ms has elapsed since the power was turned on. As described above, when the recovery from the power failure is detected, the initial value “136(D)” is set to the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of the power failure recovery of the address “F013(H)”, and the interrupt processing is performed for each interrupt processing. It is decremented by "1". Then, in step S3234, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 4 upon power-off recovery is "0", and when it is "0", "300" ms has elapsed since the power was turned on. And proceeds to step S3235. On the other hand, when the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off recovery is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

In step S3235, it is determined whether the output time of the external signal 4 has exceeded a predetermined time. Here, the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3240 described later. Then, in step S3235, it is determined whether or not this external signal 4 management time is "0", and when it is determined to be "0" (when it is determined that the output time of external signal 4 has elapsed). If it is determined that the value is not "0", the process advances to step S3241.
In step S3236, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4). Then, the processing proceeds to step S3242 (in FIG. 92).

On the other hand, if “Yes” is determined in step S3231, S3232, or S3233 and the process proceeds to step S3237, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is turned from off to on in the interrupt process this time. Whether or not the D2 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on in this interrupt processing is, for example, firstly, when the input port 0 rising data is included, the input port 0 rising data is It is determined whether or not the D2 bit of is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is saved, the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt processing is "0", and the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt processing. If the D2 bit of "1" is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch is turned from off to on in this interrupt process. If it is determined that the setting key switch is turned from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and if it is determined that the setting key switch is not from on to on, the process proceeds to step S3238.

In step S3238, it is determined whether the error detection flag has changed from off to on. Here, for example, the error detection flag in the previous interrupt processing is saved, and the error detection flag in the current interrupt processing is compared with the error detection flag in the current interrupt processing to turn the error detection flag from off to on. Judge whether or not. Then, when it is determined that the error detection flag is changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error detection flag is not turned from on to step S3239.

In step S3239, it is determined whether the error number is changed from non-display ("0") to display (other than "0"). Here, for example, the error number in the previous interrupt processing is saved, and the error number in the current interrupt processing is compared with the error number other than “0” by saving the error number in the current interrupt processing. It is determined whether or not When it is determined that the error number has changed from "0" to other than "0", the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error number remains "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

When the process proceeds from step S3237, S3238, or S3239 to step S3240, the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014 (H)" is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms as an initial value. .. Then, the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3241, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4). Then, the processing proceeds to step S3242 (in FIG. 92).
In step S3242, it is determined whether the door switch is on. This process determines whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and when it is "1" it is determined that the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3245, and when it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3243.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is set to "24(D)" in step S3246 described later. Then, in step S3243, it is determined whether or not the external signal 5 management time is “0”. If it is determined to be “0”, the process proceeds to step S3244, and if it is determined not to be “0”, the step is performed. It advances to S3247.
In step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, and the process proceeds to step S3245, it is determined whether or not the door switch is turned on from off in this interrupt processing. Whether or not the D3 bit (door switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on in the interrupt process this time is, for example, firstly, if the input port 0 rising data is included, the input port 0 rising data It is determined whether the D3 bit is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is saved, the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt processing is "0", and the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt processing. When the D3 bit of is "1", it is determined that the door switch has been turned from off to on in this interrupt processing. If it is determined that the door switch is turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3246, and if it is determined that the door switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3246, the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)" is set to "24(D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms as an initial value. Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.
In step S3247, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the second example of the external signal output processing.
In the example of FIG. 92,
(1) As shown in step S3237, when the setting key switch is changed from off to on,
(2) As shown in step S3238, when the error detection flag changes from off to on,
(3) As shown in step S3239, the output time of the external signal 4 is set when the error number is newly stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 93, based on whether or not the setting key switch is on, whether or not the error detection flag is on, and whether or not the error number is stored in this interrupt processing. Then, the output of the external signal 4 is controlled.

In FIG. 93, the same steps as those in FIGS. 91 and 92 are designated by the same step numbers. In the example of FIG. 93, steps different from those in FIGS. 91 and 92 are not provided.
In the example of FIG. 93,
(1) When it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on (when the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data of the address “F00A(H)” is “1”),
(2) In step S3234, when "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on (the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power off recovery of address "F013(H)" is not "0"),
(3) When it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed (when the error number stored in the address “F051(H)” is other than “0”),
(4) In step S3232, when an error is being detected (when any bit of the error detection flag of the address "F294(H)" is "1").
Respectively proceeds to step S3240 and stores the number of interruptions “24 (D)” corresponding to the output time “50” ms of the external signal 4 in the address “F014 (H)”.

Therefore, in the previous interruption process, for example, it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is ON, and in step S3240, the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014(H)" is set to "24(D)". After that, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is turned on also in the interrupt process this time, the process proceeds to step S3240, and the external signal 4 management time "24(D)" is reset. When it is determined in step S3234 that "300" ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on, when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed, and when it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being detected. It is the same. Then, after step S3240, the process proceeds to step S3241.

If it is determined in step S3232 that no error is being detected, the process advances to step S3235. In step S3235, it is determined whether the output time “50” ms of the external signal 4 has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 4 management time of the address “F014(H)” is “0”, it is determined that the output time “50” ms of the external signal 4 has elapsed. If the output time of the external signal 4 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3236, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4 can be output), and the output time of the external signal 4 has elapsed. If not, the process advances to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4).

Next, proceeding to step S3242, it is determined whether the door switch is on. If it is determined that the door switch is on, then the flow proceeds to step S3246, and if it is determined not to be on, then the flow proceeds to step S3243.
In step S3246, "24 (D)" is set to the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015 (H)". Also in this case, similarly to the above, after the door switch is determined to be on in the previous interrupt processing, "24(D)" is set as the external signal 5 management time in step S3246, and then the step is also performed in this interrupt processing. If it is determined at S3242 that the door switch is on, then at step S3246 the external signal 5 management time "24 (D)" is reset. Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3243, it is determined whether the output time “50” ms of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 5 management time of the address “F015(H)” is “0”, it is determined that the output time “50” ms of the external signal 5 has elapsed. When it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating OFF is output as the external signal 5), and the output time of the external signal 5 is increased. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

As described above, in the example 1 of FIG. 91, whether the setting key switch is turned on from off, whether the error detection flag is turned on from off, and the error number is other than “0” to “0”. In each determination of whether or not the external signal 4 management time is set by the interrupt processing determined to be “Yes”, after that, the external signal 4 management time is subtracted by “1” for each interrupt processing to obtain “0”. , The external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 93, when the setting key switch is turned on, the error detection flag is “1”, and an error number other than “0” is stored, the external signal 4 Is continuously turned on (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4). When the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, when the external signal 4 management time becomes "0", The signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4).

In other words, the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is “0”, and the external signal 4 is turned on until “50” ms has elapsed since “0” was stored as the error number. (A signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4). Therefore, for example, when an error is detected or only when the setting key switch is turned on for a moment (for example, only a “3” interrupt), the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is off is turned off). Even when the condition (enabling output) is satisfied, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating ON can be output as the external signal 4) for at least “50” ms.

Further, in the external signal output processing (interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 93, when the next interrupt processing is executed after the timer value “24 (D)” is set for the external signal 4 in step S3240, The timer value is subtracted from "24(D)" to "23(D)". Then, in the external signal output process of the next interrupt process, when the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 to be output) is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3240, and again. The timer value "24(D)" is set.

Even after that, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process, but if the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4 to be output) is not satisfied, the process of step S3240 is performed. Since it does not pass through, the timer value will eventually be "0(D)". When the timer value becomes “0 (D)”, it is determined as “Yes” in step S3235, and thus the process proceeds to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (output a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). Possible).

By doing so, the external signal 4 is turned on (when the external signal 4 is turned on) after the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling a signal indicating the on state as the external signal 4 to be output) is satisfied. It is possible to output the signal shown). Then, while the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (enabling output of a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) is satisfied, turning on the external signal 4 (outputting a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) Possible). Next, when the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt processing. "1(D)" is subtracted by one. Until the timer value becomes “0(D)”, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 4).

The above also applies to the external signal 5.
In the external signal output processing (interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 93, when the timer value “24 (D)” related to the external signal 5 is set in step S3246 and the next interrupt processing is executed, the timer value is changed. "23(D)" is subtracted from "24(D)". After that, in the external signal output process of the next interrupt process, when the door switch is on (when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 can be output) is satisfied) The process proceeds to step S3246, and the timer value "24(D)" is set again.

Even after that, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt processing, but the condition that the door switch is turned off (the external signal 5 is turned on (the signal indicating that the external signal 5 is turned on can be output) is no longer satisfied. In this case, since the processing of step S3246 is not performed, the timer value finally becomes “0(D)”. When the timer value becomes “0(D)”, it is determined as “Yes” in step S3243, and therefore the process proceeds to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (output a signal indicating off as the external signal 5). Possible).

By doing so, the external signal 5 is turned on after the door switch is turned on (the condition that the external signal 5 is turned on (the signal indicating that the external signal 5 is turned on can be output) is satisfied). (A signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 5). Then, while the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (enabling a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5 to be output) is satisfied, turning on the external signal 5 (outputting a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) Possible). Next, when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating turning on as the external signal 5) is not satisfied, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt processing. It is decremented by "1". Until the timer value becomes “0(D)”, the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 5). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off is output as the external signal 5).
In Example 2 of FIG. 93 described above, since it is not necessary to generate the rising edge data and to confirm the level data and the like at the time of the previous interrupt processing, the hall computer is external while simplifying the external signal output processing. It is possible to secure the time when the signal indicating that the signal 4 or 5 is turned on can be received.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the external signal output processing. In FIG. 94, steps performing the same processes as in FIG. 93 are given the same numbers, and steps performing different processes are underlined in the step numbers.
In Example 3 of FIG. 94, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 4, first, in step S3251, whether or not the external signal 4 management time of the address “F014(H)” is “0” is determined. To judge. If it is not "0", the flow advances to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (enable to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4). On the other hand, when the external signal 4 management time is “0”, when the output conditions of the external signal 4 are satisfied in the determinations of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, the process proceeds to step S3240, and the address “F014(H )” of the external signal 4 is set to “24(D)” corresponding to the output time “50” ms, and the process proceeds to step S3241. On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the output conditions of the external signal 4 is satisfied in the determinations of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, the process proceeds to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (as the external signal 4). A signal indicating off can be output).

As for the external signal 5, similarly to the above, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 5, first, in step S3252, the external signal 5 management time of the address “F015(H)” is “0”. Determine if there is. If it is not "0", the flow advances to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 5). On the other hand, when the external signal 5 management time is "0", when it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3246, and the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015(H)". Is set to "24(D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3247. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is not turned on, then the flow advances to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

Thus, in the example 3 of FIG. 94, when the set timer value (external signal 4 management time or external signal 5 management time) is “0”, the timer is set when the output condition of the external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied. Set the value. Even if the set timer value becomes "0", if the output condition of the external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied, the timer value is set again.
Even in the method of Example 3 of FIG. 94, as in Example 2 of FIG. 93, rising data is not generated and the level data and the like at the time of the previous interrupt processing need not be confirmed. While simplifying, it is possible to secure the time when the hall computer can receive the signal indicating that the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on.

Although the eighteenth embodiment has been described above, the eighteenth embodiment is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) When the setting key switch is turned on, when an error is detected, or when any of the displayed errors is satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each individual external signal (for example, external signal 4, 6, 7) is turned on (a signal indicating ON as external signal 4, 6, 7 can be output). May be. Further, when either one or both of the setting key switch is ON and the door switch is ON, a specific external signal (for example, the external signal 5 or 6) may be turned on ( A signal indicating ON may be output as the external signal 5 or 6).

(2) The various timer values of the addresses “F013(H)” to “F015(H)” are subtracted by “1” for each interrupt processing, but the invention is not limited to this, and “N (N≧2)” is not limited to this. "N" may be subtracted every "" interrupts, or "1" may be subtracted every "N" interrupts. For example, "12(D)" may be set as the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time, and then "1" may be subtracted every two interrupts.
(3) The various modifications and numerical values described in the eighteenth embodiment are examples, and can be appropriately designed. For example, in FIG. 89, the times t1 and t2 are the minimum "0" ms, so various settings such as "5" ms and "10" ms can be made.

Further, in FIG. 89, the time t3 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in the figure) is the minimum "50" ms, and therefore, for example, "75" ms or "100" ms. It is possible to make various settings such as
Particularly, at time t3 in FIGS. 89 and 90 ((a), (b), (c), and (e) in FIGS. 89 and 90), the hall computer or the like reliably receives the external signals 4 and 5. As long as it is possible, it may be less than “50” ms depending on the performance of the hall computer or the like.
Furthermore, the time t2 in FIG. 90 is not limited to "50" ms, and can be set variously according to the specifications and the like.

(4) When the setting key switch is turned from off to on, or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating the on state can be output as the external signal 4) The external signal 4 may be turned on when the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is turned on can be output).
Here, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the setting key switch is turned from off to on or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on as the external signal 4 is turned on). When the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON while the reel 31 is rotating, the external signal 4 is turned ON (the signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4). Possible).
On the other hand, when the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating that the external signal 4 is turned on can be output). Even if the setting key switch is turned from OFF to ON during the rotation of 31, the external signal 4 is turned OFF based on the situation of the setting key switch (a signal indicating OFF can be output as the external signal 4). To). However, there may be a case where the external signal 4 is turned on based on an error (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4).

(5) In the eighteenth embodiment, when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, when an error is being displayed, or when “300” ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on, 1 When the two conditions are satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating ON is output as the external signal 4). However, it is not necessary to provide all of these conditions, and the external signal 4 is turned on only when one or some of the conditions, for example, the setting key switch is turned on (a signal indicating the on can be output as the external signal 4). It may be configured. In other words, the configuration is such that the external signal 4 is not turned on (a signal indicating ON is not output as the external signal 4) even under other conditions, for example, when “300” ms has not elapsed since the power was turned on. May be
(6) All of the embodiments and various modifications described in this specification including the eighteenth embodiment are not limited to be implemented alone, but may be implemented in an appropriate combination.

<19th Embodiment>
The nineteenth embodiment relates to a setting change end sound.
Hereinafter, regarding the setting change end sound, a case where the gaming machine is a slot machine (19th embodiment (A)) and a case where the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (19th embodiment (B)) are respectively described. To do.
In the following description, “setting change state (also referred to as “setting change mode” or “setting change process in progress”) is a state in which setting values can be changed, and a game is started (progressed). ) It is a game state that cannot be played. In the setting change state, it is possible to end without changing the setting value.
The “setting confirmation state (also referred to as “setting confirmation mode” or “setting confirmation processing”)” is a state in which the current setting value can be confirmed although the setting value cannot be changed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be started (progressed) like the setting change state.
On the other hand, “normal state (also referred to as “normal mode”)” refers to a state other than the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In the normal state, the game can be started (progressed) except for special circumstances such as an error.

<19th Embodiment (A): When the gaming machine is a slot machine>
FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the nineteenth embodiment (A), and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.
In FIG. 95, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion port 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided as components not shown in FIG. Although the above configuration is not shown in FIG. 1, it does not mean that the above configuration is not provided in the first embodiment.
The setting key insertion port 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 do not necessarily have to be provided on the main control board 50 and may be provided as separate devices.

The door switch 17 is attached to either the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 in FIG.
Then, as shown in FIG. 22, the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 are normally closed, but the front door 12 is opened when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The door switch 17 is a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 is opened and detects the opening of the front door 12. When the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the door switch 17, a door open error is notified.
The setting key insertion port 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are mounted on the main control board 50.
The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is turned on by inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion port 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise. This is the switch used.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing the set value in the setting change state. Further, the reset switch is a switch operated when recovering the state before the error occurs after removing the error that has occurred.
In the following description, there are cases where it is referred to as “setting change (reset) switch 153”, where it is referred to as “setting change switch 153”, and where it is referred to as “reset switch 153”.
Although the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are integrally provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

When shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 151 with the power turned on, and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, for example. As a result, the setting key switch 152 is turned on. When the door switch 17 is turned on while the power is on and the setting key switch 151 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is entered. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (although the setting value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), the current setting value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

When the power is off, a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion port 151, the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, and the setting key switch 152 is turned on to turn on the power switch 11. It becomes possible to shift to the setting change state (setting change processing of FIG. 39).

When the slot machine 10 is powered on as described above, as shown in FIG. 38, the checksum is executed (step S204), the designated switch is turned on (step S208), and the power-off recovery is abnormal ( When it is possible to change the setting (step S209) or the setting (step S210), it becomes possible to shift to the setting change process (setting change state).

In the nineteenth embodiment, the “designated switch” in step S208 is the two switches, the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.
Alternatively, in addition to the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152, a setting door switch (a switch that is turned on when a cover provided to cover the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 is opened) If provided, there are three switches, including a setting door switch.
In the following description, it is assumed that the setting door switch is not provided and the designation switch is the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.

Then, in FIG. 38, in step S208, only when the door switch 17 is on and the setting key switch 152 is on, it is determined to be "Yes" in step S208, and it is possible to shift to the setting change state. On the other hand, when only one of the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 is on, or when both switches are off, it is determined as “No” in step S208, and the setting is changed. Does not move.
As a result, when the front door 12 is not opened or when the setting key is not inserted and there is a high possibility of a goto action, the setting change state is not entered.

In addition, in FIG. 38, “start of the setting change state” is firstly defined when “Yes” is determined in step S209 or when “No” is determined in step S210. .. In this case, the “setting change state” includes the processing of steps S221 to S233 in FIG. 39 as well.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, when the output request at the time of starting the setting change is set in step S234 and the control command set 1 is executed in step S235 (a command for starting the setting change is issued to the sub-control board 80). Is transmitted) is defined as “start of setting change state”.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and immediately before step S221 in FIG. 39 may be defined as “start of setting change state”. Further, immediately after step S231 (at the end of initialization), it may be determined as "start of setting change state". Furthermore, when the interrupt is activated in step S233 or immediately after step S233 (immediately before step S234), the "start of the setting change state" may be defined.

Furthermore, in FIG. 39, "end of the setting change state" may be defined when the setting key switch 152 is turned off in step S243.
Alternatively, secondly, when the output request at the end of the setting change is set in step S246 in FIG. 39 and the control command set 1 is executed in step S247 (a command to the sub-control board 80 to end the setting change). Is transmitted) is defined as "end of setting change state".
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when “Yes” is determined in step S242 (when the start switch 41 is operated and the set value is confirmed), the “end of the setting change state” may be defined.

Further, as will be described later, the setting change state may be terminated on the condition that the front door 12 is closed, in other words, on the condition that the door switch 17 is switched from ON to OFF. In this case, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state does not end when the front door 12 is opened (when the door switch 17 is on).
Another example is that the setting change state is not ended when the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is off) when the setting key switch 152 is turned off. This is because of measures against Goto.
In the following description, in the nineteenth embodiment (A), when it is determined “Yes” in step S243 in FIG. 39, that is, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, “when the setting change state ends ".

In steps S246 and S247 of FIG. 39, when the command indicating that the setting change is completed is transmitted to the sub control board 80, the sub control board 80 receives the command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 executes an output (output by the effect lamp 21) visually displaying the setting change end sound and the end of the setting change.
Here, in the present embodiment, the setting change end sound is equivalent to outputting the sound “setting change is completed” from the speaker 22.

Here, there are various ideas about the speed at which words (Japanese) are spoken, but if you follow the idea that a speed of about 300 characters per minute is appropriate, you will say, "The setting change will be completed.""T01" for the time from the start of audio output to the end of output may be set to about "2000" ms.
FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound and the lamp effect, and one game time described later in the nineteenth embodiment.
When the sub control board 80 receives the command indicating that the setting change is completed, it immediately outputs the setting change end sound. Here, in FIG. 39, if “Yes” is determined in step S243, in the first interrupt process (FIG. 53) after the determination of “Yes” in step S243, the setting change is completed in step S464. Command is sent.

Then, in the sub control board 80, the interrupt processing is independently executed on the side of the sub control board 80, and it is determined for each interrupt processing whether or not a control command (a command indicating that the setting change has been completed) is received. ing. Then, when it is determined that the command indicating the end of the setting change is received, the output of the setting change end sound is started.
Since the above process has been performed, at least one interrupt (referred to as an interrupt by the main control board 50. One interrupt time is "2.235" ms) from when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. After that, the output processing of the setting change end sound by the sub-control board 80 or the output of the setting change end sound is started. In other words, in FIG. 39, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed after the determination of “Yes” in step S243.

Note that in FIG. 96, the timing at which the setting change state changes from on to off is when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, as described above. However, after the setting key switch 152 is turned off, a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 until the sub control board 80 receives the command and starts outputting the setting change end sound. Since the time is extremely short, in FIG. 96, the end timing of the setting change state and the output start timing of the setting change end sound are matched.

In addition to the above setting change end sound, a predetermined lighting mode of the effect lamp 21 (“lighting” is a concept including blinking. As a performance indicating that the setting change has been completed. Is a concept that includes a lighting color).
Here, when the lighting by the effect lamp 21 is executed, at least the same lighting mode as when the lighting by the effect lamp 21 is executed when the special role (feature) is elected is not performed. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A of the effect lamps 21 is to be turned on in the lighting mode a as the effect indicating that the special role has been won, the effect lamp 21 is set as the effect indicating that the setting change is completed. In the case of lighting, it is possible to illuminate a lamp other than the lamp A. In this case, as long as a lamp different from the lamp A is turned on, the lighting mode may be the same as the lighting mode at the time of indicating that the special combination is won.

Further, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A may be turned on. However, the lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode at the time of indicating that the special combination has been won.
As described above, when the lighting of the effect lamp 21 is performed as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the special combination has been won (that the special combination has been won in the game, or It should not be the same as the lighting mode of the effect lamp 21 in the effect of notifying that the winning has been carried over. As a result, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is finished, even if the production lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the player wins the special role. It is possible to prevent it from being confused.

Further, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is different from the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the special combination is elected so that they are not confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects, and when the lighting pattern is viewed, the effect means that the setting change has ended. It is preferable to be able to understand.
Further, regarding the effect lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change is completed is the same as the lighting pattern indicating that the special winning combination is elected, and the setting change is performed for the lamps other than the effect lamp 21. The lighting pattern indicating the end may be different from the lighting pattern indicating that the special combination is elected.
Specifically, for example, when it is indicated that the setting change has been completed, all of the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps are turned on, and when notifying that the special role is won, the effect lamp 21 is turned on. It is possible to turn on the lamps but not turn on the other lamps. By doing this, the manager can grasp which state the player is in by checking the lighting patterns of the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps (lamps of the gaming machine in general).

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, as a general rule, the setting change end sound is output at the same time. However, not limited to this, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before the setting change end sound is output. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is started and before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Further, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is ended.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 96, in the following embodiment, at the same time when the output of the setting change end sound is started, the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is turned on.
Further, when the lighting time of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is “T02”,
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, in the present embodiment, “T01<T02” is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 96. For example, when the time T01 is set to about "2000" ms as described above, the time T02 is set to, for example, about "2500" ms to about "4000" ms.

Next, consider a case where the setting change state is ended, the state is shifted to a normal state (a state in which the game can be started), and the game is immediately started.
In the following, as shown in FIG. 96, the time required for starting the game (until the start condition of the game is satisfied) from the moment the setting change state is ended (preparation time until starting the game) is referred to as “T11”. To do. Further, the time (1 game time) from the start of the game (after satisfying the start condition of the game) to the end of the game is defined as "T12".
In the setting change state, as shown in FIG. 39, the data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared. Therefore, for example, even if the player has bet data or credit data before starting the setting change, these data are also cleared. .. Therefore, immediately after the end of the setting change state, the bet amount is “0” and the credit amount is also “0”. Therefore, after the end of the setting change state, as shown in FIG. 2, it is necessary to insert the medals M from the medal insertion slot 47 and bet the specified number before starting the game.

Here, in the normal game (when the accessory is not operated), the bet number “3” is a commonly used prescribed number, but in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the minimum bet number “1” is the prescribed number. It is assumed that the game can be started with the bet number “1”. When the prescribed number is "1", the game can be started earlier than when the prescribed number is "2" or "3".
In FIG. 2, when the medal M is at the position M1 and the medal M is released into the medal selector, the medal M passes through the passage in the medal selector to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b as described in the first embodiment. Detected. When it is determined by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b that the medal has normally passed, a "1" bet is placed.

In FIG. 2, the time until the medals M are inserted from the position M1, detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and the specified number of bets are bet corresponds to the preparation time "T11" for starting the game (note that The preparation time "T11" in this case does not consider the operation time for closing the front door 12 or canceling the door open error.)
Here, when the prescribed number is "1", one medal insertion is required, when the prescribed number is "2", two medal insertion is required, and when the prescribed number is "3", You need to insert 3 medals. In FIG. 2, the time from the state of the medal M1 to the insertion of one medal and bet “1” is defined as “T11a”, and the time from the insertion of two medals to the bet “2”. If "T11b" is set and the time until three medals are thrown and a "3" bet is placed is "T11c",
T11a<T11b<T11c
Becomes
However, since two or three medals can be continuously inserted, T11b (when the specified number is "2") is shorter than twice the time of T11a (when the specified number is "1"). It is believed that there is. Similarly, T11c (when the specified number is “3”) is considered to be shorter than three times the time of T11a (when the specified number is “1”).

Since the game can be started by operating the start switch 41 when a specified number of bets are placed, it is assumed in the present embodiment that the start switch 41 is operated at the moment when the "1" bet is placed. Therefore, the time from the bet of the specified number to the operation of the start switch 41 is set to "0".
In FIG. 41, when the start switch 41 is operated (“Yes” in step S278), rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286.
Here, the motor 32 accelerates the reel 31 to reach a speed of 80 rotations per minute. When the speed reaches 80 rotations per minute, the speed is set to a constant speed. Operation of the stop switch 42 is prohibited until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, and after reaching the constant speed state, the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted.
The time from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the rotation of the reel 31 is started) until when the operation of the stop switch 42 is ready to be received is referred to as “T12a”.

Next, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted until the first operation of the stop switch 42 is set to “0”.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, as shown in FIG. 13, a reel stop control time (time until the reel 31 stops) and a four-phase excitation state time are required (the four-phase excitation state is Before the end, the operation of the next stop switch 42 may be accepted. This example will be described later). Let these total time be "T12b".
When the four-phase excitation state ends, the next (second) stop switch 42 can be operated. Here, it is assumed that the second stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first stops and the operation of the next stop switch 42 becomes available. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is set to “0”.

When the second stop switch 42 is operated, the operation of the third stop switch 42 can be accepted after the reel stop control time and the time "T12b", which is the time of the four-phase excitation state, have passed, as described above. Becomes Here, it is assumed that the third stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 ends and the next stop switch 42 can be operated. In other words, the time from the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops second to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is set to "0".
When the third stop switch 42 is operated, the reel stop control time and the time "T12b", which is the time of the four-phase excitation state, are required as in the above case.

Although the moment when the last reel 31 stops may be defined as the end of one game, in the nineteenth embodiment (A), when the time of the four-phase excitation state for the last reel 31 ends, 1 It is defined that the game is finished (when there is no payout).
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any combination in the game is stopped, when the payout process is completed, specifically, at the end of the process of FIG. 49, it is determined that the game is completed.
In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 42, the automatic bet process is executed at the start of the next game. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the game end is not the end of the automatic bet process but the end of the four-phase excitation state for the third reel 31.

For example, first, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the credit addition processing is executed, the end of the credit addition processing is defined as the end of the game.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the actual medal payout process is executed, the last medal payout (driving of the hopper 36) is ended, and “Yes” in step S401 in FIG. 49. The time (when it is determined that the payout amount data is “0”) is defined as the end of the game. However, even if it is assumed that the number of credits is “0” immediately after the end of the setting change, the game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, and the small winning combination having the maximum payout number “15” is won. All paid out medals are credited. Therefore, in one game immediately after the end of the setting change, the medals are not actually paid out.
The symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed, and the time from when the 4-phase excitation state of the motor 32 for the third reel 31 is finished to when the payout of the medal (addition to the credit) is finished is "T12c". And
However, when the winning combination is not won (when no medals are paid out), “T12c=0”.

In addition, when an effect (notification effect of winning combination, etc.) is output when all reels 31 are stopped, the effect time is not included in one game time. For example, even when an effect is output for a few seconds after all the reels 31 are stopped, at the end of the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 when the last reel 31 is stopped (at that point, all the reels 31 are stopped. It is assumed that one game ends (even when the production that has started the output sometimes continues). That is, the end of one game is based on the control by the main control board 50.

As described above, when the operation for starting the game is performed immediately after the end of the setting change state and the game is started, the preparation time "T11" until the game is started is required.
Furthermore, one game time "T12" is as described above.
(1) Time "T12a" from when the start switch 41 is operated (after the rotation of the reel 31 is started) until when the operation of the stop switch 42 becomes possible.
(2) Time "T12b" from the time when the first stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the four-phase excitation state
(3) Time from when the second stop switch 42 is operated to when the reel 31 is stopped and time for four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(4) Time from when the third stop switch 42 is operated to when the reel 31 is stopped and time for four-phase excitation state "T12b"
(5) Time "T12c" until payment of medals (addition to credits) is completed when a small prize is won
Requires.
Therefore,
T12=T12a+3×T12b+T12c
Becomes
It is assumed that the three “T12b” times are the same.

Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery of a winning combination is performed (step S282 in FIG. 41), and when a special winning combination (feature) is won in this lottery, a freeze (also referred to as “freezing effect”) is performed. .) may be selected.
The "freeze" in this case refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, lottery of the winning combination is executed, it is determined that the special winning combination is won and the freeze is executed as an effect corresponding to the winning of the special winning combination, the rotation of the reel 31 is started. do not do. Then, after the freeze ends, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. It should be noted that while the progress of the game is stopped due to the freeze, the sub-control unit 80 outputs an effect using the image display device 23 or the like.
If the freeze time in this case is “T12d”, one game time “T12” when the freeze is executed is “T12a+T12b×3+T12c+T12d”.

Next, consider the shortest time of one game time "T12". Since one game time is the shortest time, the freeze is not executed and the winning combination is not won.
Therefore, the shortest time of one game time “T12” is “T12a+3×T12b”.
First, the prescribed number is set to "1", and the time from when the medal M is inserted (dropped) in the medal selector from the position of M1 in FIG. 2 to bet (time required to start the game) It is assumed that "T11" is about "800" ms at the shortest.
Further, it is assumed that the time "T12a" from the operation of the start switch 41 to the constant speed of the reel 31 and the permission of the operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is about "1200" ms.

Furthermore, the time "T12b" from when the stop switch 42 is operated to when the reel 31 is stop-controlled and the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (the next operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted) is As illustrated in FIG. 13, the shortest time is about "140" ms (reel stop control time is the shortest time is "40" ms, and the four-phase excitation state time is the shortest time is "100" ms). Suppose
In this case, “T11+T12”, which is the time required to start one game and one game time (shortest time), is “800 (T11)+1200(T12a)+140×3(T12b×3)”=“2420” ms It becomes a degree.
The one game time "T12" when the payout of medals is performed after all the reels 31 are stopped or when the freeze is executed when the start switch 41 is operated is longer than the above time.

On the other hand, as described above, when the setting change state is ended, the setting change end sound is output for the time “T01” (about “2000” ms) and the effect lamp 21 that notifies the end of the setting change is output. Lighting is output for a time “T02” (for example, about “2500” to “4000” ms).
Therefore, when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is ended, the setting change end sound "T01" which is output immediately after the setting change state is ended, and the preparation time "T11" for starting the game and one game The relationship with the time "T12 (shortest time)" is
T01<T11+T12
Becomes
Thereby, even if the operation (preparation) for starting the game is performed from the moment when the setting change state is ended, and the game is started at the moment when the preparation for starting the game is completed, the game is ended. It means that the output of the setting change end sound is finished before.
FIG. 96 shows the relationship among the above times “T01”, “T11”, and “T12”.

Here, the above example is an example in which the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted after the stop switch 42 has been operated and the four-phase excitation state has ended. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the next stop switch 42 may be accepted after the stop switch 42 is operated and before the four-phase excitation state ends. By controlling in this way, the game can be digested faster. For example, after the stop switch 42 is operated (the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted), the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted at the time of the next interrupt processing.
In this case, since the time in the four-phase excitation state can be considered to be almost "0" among the time "T12b" described above, "T12b (shortest time)=40 (ms)".
Therefore, in this case, "T11+T12" which is the time required to start one game and one game time (shortest time) is "800(T11)+1200(T12a)+40x3(T12bx3)"="2120. It will be about ms.
Therefore, even in the case of such control, "T01<T11+T12" is satisfied.

Further, as the effect timing of the slot machine 10, when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reel 31 starts rotating), when the first stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 is stopped), when the second stop switch 42 is operated (the first There are two reels 31 stopped) and the operation of the third stop switch 42 (when all reels 31 are stopped), but an effect (the most important effect in the game) that finally announces the winning combination of the game is output. The timing of doing is often when all reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, in the case of outputting the effect that announces the winning combination of the game when all reels 31 are stopped, the effect is output after the output of the setting change end sound is finished. The effect and the setting change end sound do not overlap (do not cover). Therefore, even when the game is immediately started when the setting change state is finished, it is possible to accurately understand the effect when all reels 31 are stopped.

However, when there is an effect output when the start switch 41 is operated or when the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the output timing of the effect and the output timing of the setting change end sound may overlap.
Here, the speaker 22 of the present embodiment has a plurality of channels. The channel for outputting the setting change end sound is set to be different from the channel for outputting the announcement effect of the winning combination. As a result, even if the notification effect of the winning combination is output from the speaker 22 after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the setting change end sound is not erased on the way. However, the setting change end sound and the winning effect notification sound may overlap.

Further, the lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is
T02<T11+T12
T02=T11+T12
T02>T11+T12
Both cases are possible. However, as described above, if the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating the end of the setting change is not confused with the lighting of the effect lamp 21 as the notification effect of the winning combination, no problem occurs.

In addition, the preparation time “T11” before starting the game eliminates the time to close the front door 12 and the door open error (error indicating that the front door 12 is open) after ending the setting change state. It does not consider the time to do.
At the end of the setting change state, at least the front door 12 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state is ended, the slot machine 10 detects the door open error and notifies the error. When the door open error occurs, the game cannot proceed (start). When the door open error occurs, the blocker 45 is controlled to be off (the state of returning medals), so that no bet is made even if a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47. Even if the player is betting, the game is not started even if the start switch 41 is operated.

To cancel the door open error, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. Although it is possible to configure so that the door open error is eliminated at the moment when the door switch 17 is turned off, in general, a key is inserted in the key insertion opening for opening the front door 12 provided in the front door 12. By inserting the key and rotating the key counterclockwise (for example, counterclockwise) when opening the front door 12, the door open error is eliminated (error notification ends). Therefore, after the end of the setting change state, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game includes the operation time for closing the front door 12 and inserting the key to release the door open error. This is because the game cannot be started with the door open error still occurring.

When the setting change state is ended on condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state can be ended even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, in this case, the output of the setting change end sound is started in the state where the front door 12 is opened, and the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is ended is also started.

On the other hand, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which the setting change state is not ended unless the front door 12 is closed. In this case, simply turning off the setting key switch 152 does not end the setting change state, and closing the front door 12 (turning off the door switch 17) is set as one of the ending conditions of the setting change state. The setting change state may be ended only by closing the front door 12. In this case, when the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is turned off), the output of the setting change end sound is started. Alternatively, the setting change state may be ended when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is released. In this case, when the door open error is released, the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Even in the case of the specification that the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is released, as described above, the time "T11+T12" from the end of the setting change to the end of one game. Since the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is shorter than the setting change end sound, the output of the setting change end sound is completed before ending one game immediately after the end of the setting change.
Further, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, when the setting change state is ended even if the front door 12 is opened, the setting change end sound is output while the front door 12 is open. Therefore, even after the front door 12 is closed, the door open error is released, and one game is ended after the time "T11+T12", the output of the setting change end sound is ended before the end of the game. ..
In addition, when the (operation) time from the end of the setting change state to the closing of the front door 12 and the release of the door open error is “T10”, one game is started after the end of the setting change state. The preparation time is “T10+T11”. Therefore, it goes without saying that "T01<T10+T11+T12".

The above is the case where the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the time “T11+T12” from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game, while not limited to this. The relationship between the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound and the time “T11+T12” from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game can be variously set as follows.
(1) The output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the average time “T11+T12” when the hand lottery result is non-win.
(2) The output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the average time “T11+T12” when the special combination is won in the combination lottery result. When the special lottery result is won, the above-mentioned freeze may or may not be performed, so the average time is “T12”. For example, when the special part is won, the freeze is executed with a probability of "p"% and the freeze is not executed with a probability of "100-p"%, the average value of one game time "T12" is
"Average one game time without freeze T12 x (100-p)/100" + "Average one game time with freeze T12 x p/100"
Becomes

<The nineteenth embodiment (B): when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine>
Next, the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound, and one game time in the pachinko gaming machine will be described.
First, an outline of a pachinko game machine will be described.
FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 as viewed from the front side (player side). Further, FIG. 98 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 seen from the back side. Note that in FIG. 98, the unit including the image display device 543 and the game board 504 is omitted, and the glass door 505 is illustrated so that it can be seen from the back surface side. Further, in FIG. 98, the illustration of the board cases other than the main board case 550 is appropriately omitted.
Furthermore, FIG. 99 is a block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine 500.

In the hall, the pachinko game machine 500 is generally installed on an island. The pachinko gaming machine 500 firstly includes an outer frame 501 and a front frame 502. The outer frame 501 is a frame body formed so as to surround the outer circumference of the pachinko gaming machine 500. The front frame 502 is attached to the front side (player side) of the outer frame 501 in FIG. 97. The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 provided at an upper left end portion of the outer frame 501 in FIG. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed on the island, the outer frame 501 is fixed to the island, but the front frame 502 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 501, and on the back surface side of the front frame 502. It becomes accessible.

The front frame 502 is provided with a game board 504. Although not shown, the game board 504 is provided with an image display device 543, nails, accessories, a windmill, various winning openings (including a starting opening 532 described later), and the like. In addition, a portion other than the game board 504 of the front frame 502 is provided with an effect lamp 541, a speaker 542, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, and the like.

In FIG. 97 of the front frame 502, a key insertion opening 521 is formed on the right side edge portion.
When the front frame 502 is closed with respect to the outer frame 501 (the state shown in FIG. 97), a key is inserted through the key insertion opening 521 and the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502 are unlocked. The front frame 502 can be opened forward (toward the player) with respect to the outer frame 501 with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis. When the front frame 502 is opened with respect to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, the glass door 505, the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, the upper plate 506, the lower plate 507, and the firing handle attached to the front frame 502 side. The whole including 508 moves forward with respect to the outer frame 501.
When the front frame 502 is opened, a frame opening switch 523 described later is turned on. When the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, a frame opening error is notified.

The glass door 505 is openably and closably attached so as to cover the game area on the front surface of the game board 504. This is because, for example, when a game ball is clogged in the game area, it is solved. By inserting a key into the key insertion opening 521 and unlocking the glass door 505, the locking of the glass door 505 and the game board 504 is released, and the glass door 505 can be opened. When the glass door 505 is opened, a door opening switch 522 described later is turned on. When the door opening switch 522 is turned on, a door opening error is notified.

In the block diagram of FIG. 99, in the pachinko game machine 500, a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 and a sub control board 80 of the slot machine 10 are provided. And a control board (production control board, production board) 540.
The main control board 530, the payout control board 520, and the sub control board 540 each include a CPU, RWM, ROM, and the like, like the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 99, the illustration of the CPU, RWM, ROM, etc. is omitted.

When the power switch 511 is turned on, the power board 510 controls power supply.
A power supply board 510 and a payout control board (also referred to as “prize ball control board”) 520 are connected to a harness (one or more lead wires (also referred to as “signal wires”)). .. It is assumed that the respective boards shown in FIG. 99 are all harness-connected. Further, although the relay board is not shown in FIG. 99, in reality, each of the boards shown in FIG. 99 is directly connected or is connected through the relay board. There is.
A launch board 512 is connected to the power supply board 510. The launch board 512 is a board for driving and controlling the launch apparatus 513. The launching device 513 is a device for launching a game ball onto the game board 504 (game area). When the firing handle 508 is operated, the operation is detected, and the firing device 513 is drive-controlled to launch the game ball into the game area.

A payout control board 520 is connected to the power supply board 510. A payout device 524 is connected to the payout control board 520. The payout device 524 is a device for renting out the game balls corresponding to the requested number when the CR unit requests the ball lending, and for paying out the prize balls corresponding to the winning when the game balls are won. is there. The payout control board 520 and the CR unit are connected via an external terminal board 525.

A door opening switch 522 and a frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520. The door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 may be connected to the main control board 530.
As described above, when the glass door 505 is opened, the door opening switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door opening switch 522 is turned on, the sub control board 540 executes, for example, notification of a door opening error.
Further, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal thereof is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the sub control board 540 executes, for example, notification of a frame opening error.

The main control board 530 is connected to a starting opening switch 533 for detecting a winning at a starting opening 532 which is one of the winning openings provided in the game area of the game board 504. When the game ball wins the starting opening 532 and the main control board 530 detects that the starting opening switch 533 is turned on, a random number value is acquired and a winning/deciding determination is executed as described later (lottery processing). Then, based on the result of the judgment, the variation time and the stop symbol of the special symbol of the special symbol display device 531 are determined, and the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the special symbol display device 531 are controlled so as to correspond to the determination result.

In addition, on the game board 504, as the winning openings other than the starting opening 532, there are a general winning opening and a big winning opening (a big winning opening that is opened during a special game). Is omitted in the nineteenth embodiment (B).
Further, the special symbol display device 531 is provided on the game board 504, and is a device that displays the result of winning/decision determination based on that the starting opening switch 533 is turned on, as a special symbol. In other words, the "special symbol" is a symbol that displays whether the result of the winning/disapproval determination is a win or a non-win by the stopped symbol after the change. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
The flow from the start to the change of the special symbol will be described later.

The main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion opening 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536. The setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key switch 535, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 do not necessarily have to be provided on the main control board 530, and they may be provided as separate devices.
The setting key switch 535 is a switch which is turned on when a predetermined setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion opening 534 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, for example.

The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing a set value in the setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated when the error that has occurred is removed and then the state before the error occurs is restored. In the following description, there are cases where it is referred to as a “setting change (reset) switch 536”, a case where it is referred to as a “setting change switch 536”, and a case where it is referred to as a “reset switch 536”.
In the present embodiment, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 are integrally provided, but not limited to this, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 may be provided separately.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 534, the setting key is rotated to turn on the setting key switch 535, and the reset switch 536 is turned on. By turning on the power switch 511, it becomes possible to shift to the setting change state.

When shifting to the setting change state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. The set value display LED 537 is equivalent to the set value display LED 73 in the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
Then, when changing the set value, the setting change switch 536 is operated. Each time the setting change switch 536 is operated (pressed), the set value is incremented by "+1". For example, when the setting value is in 6 steps, each time the setting change switch 536 is pushed, "1"→"2"→... -The set value cyclically changes as → "5" → "6" → "1" →.... Then, when the setting key is turned counterclockwise, for example, and the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is confirmed and the setting change state is ended. When the setting change state ends, the set value displayed on the set value display LED 537 is also turned off.

Further, when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated, and the power switch 511 is turned on while the reset switch 536 is off. Become. In the setting confirmation state, the set value cannot be changed, but the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 537. Then, when the setting key is rotated to turn off the setting key switch 535, the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state ends, the set value displayed on the set value display LED 537 is also turned off.
In the pachinko gaming machine 500, unlike the slot machine 10, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state is not entered and the setting value is not displayed.

The management information display LED 538 corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the slot machine 10. In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, it is referred to as a performance display monitor as described above. The management information display LED 538, like the management information display LED 74, is composed of four 7-segments.

The sub-control board 540 is a board that is connected to the main control board 530, determines the effect contents based on the command transmitted from the main control board 530, and controls to output the decided effect. Although FIG. 99 shows one sub-control board 540, in practice, for example, the sub-control board 540 is a sub-main board (a board for controlling the overall effect) and a sub-sub-board (for example, an image display). Substrate for controlling the image display of the device 23).

Similar to the slot machine 10, the peripheral device for effect production includes an effect lamp 541, a speaker 542, and an image (liquid crystal) display device 543, and the outputs of these are controlled by the sub-control board 540.
As shown in FIG. 97, at least a part of the effect lamp 541 is attached so as to cover the outer peripheral edge of the front frame 502. The speaker 542 is attached to the upper side of the front frame 502. Furthermore, the image display device 543 is attached so that an image is displayed at a substantially central portion in the game area of the game board 504.

Next, the control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 500 will be described.
FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of activation of the pachinko gaming machine 500 after the power is turned on.
When the power switch 511 is turned on and the power is turned on, in step S701, the main control board (specifically, corresponds to the main CPU) 530 determines whether or not the transition condition to the setting change state is satisfied. To judge. In the present embodiment, the frame opening switch 523 is set to ON, the setting change key switch 535 is set to ON, and the reset switch 536 is set to be ON as the transition condition of the setting change state. When it is determined that all of these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S702, and when it is determined that all three switches are not turned on, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S702, the process proceeds to the setting change process (setting change state). When the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to step S709.

In step S703, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the transition condition to the setting confirmation state is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state is that the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off. If it is determined that these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S704, and if it is determined that these conditions are not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S706.

In step S704, the setting confirmation state is entered, and the main control board 530 reads the setting value data stored in the RWM and displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 537. Next, in step S705, it is determined whether the setting key switch 535 is turned off. When it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the ending condition of the setting confirmation state is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is not off, the process returns to step S704 and the setting confirmation state (display of the set value) is continued.

When “No” is determined in step S703 and the process proceeds to step S706, the main control board 530 determines whether the reset switch 536 is on. When it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on, the process proceeds to step S709, and when it is determined that the reset switch 536 is not on, the process proceeds to step S707.
In step S707, it is determined whether the RWM of the main control board 530 is normal. When the power is turned off, the RWM of the main control board 530 stores the information when the power is turned off. When the power is turned on next time, it is determined whether the information when the power is turned on matches the information when the power is turned off. To do. When they match, it is determined that the RWM is normal, and when they do not match, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal. When it is determined that the RWM is normal, the process proceeds to step S708, and when it is determined that the RWM is not normal, the process proceeds to step S709.
In step S708, state restoration processing is executed. This process is a process for returning the state of the solenoid, the state of the special symbol display device 531 and the like to the state when the power is cut off. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

When the setting change process (setting change state) in step S702 is completed, when it is determined in step S706 that the reset switch 536 is on, or when it is determined in step S707 that the RWM is not normal, the process proceeds to step S709. Then, the RWM clearing process is executed. This process is a process of clearing the data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM (processing of initializing the predetermined storage area). The data to be cleared does not include the set value data. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, the timer interrupt is permitted. This process is a process for enabling the interrupt process. Therefore, when the interrupt processing timing comes after the interrupt processing is permitted in step S710, the interrupt processing is executed.
In the next step S711, a random number update process (random number counter increment process) is executed. This random number is used for various lottery (selection of stop symbol, selection of effect, etc.).

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing in step S702 of FIG. In the present embodiment, the start of the process of step S721 is the start of the setting change process (setting change state).
In step S721, the main control board (main CPU) 530 reads the set value written in the RWM and determines whether the set value is within the normal range. In the present embodiment, the values stored in the RWM corresponding to the set values “1” to “6” are “0” to “5”.

For example, if the value stored in the RWM is "0", the set value will be "1". Therefore, in step S722, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the RWM is within the range of "0" to "5". When it is determined that the value is within the range, the process proceeds to step S724. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in the RWM is not within the range of “0” to “5”, “0” is stored in the RWM. When the value of RWM is "0", the set value is "1". The setting value "1" is a basic setting value as described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S724.

In step S724, the main control board 530 displays the set value corresponding to the value stored in the RWM on the set value display LED 537. For example, when the value of RWM is "0", "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 537.
Next, proceeding to step S725, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting change switch 536 has been operated. When it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S726, and when it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S729. In step S726, "1" is added to the set value. For example, when "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 537 until then, the display is updated from "1" to "2" by the process of step S726 and the set value data stored in the RWM is set to "0". Is updated from "" to "1". In the example of FIG. 101, when the setting value “6” is displayed in step S724, if it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 is operated, the process of step S726 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S727. Let's assume.

In step S727, it is determined whether the set value exceeds the upper limit. For example, when the setting value "6" is displayed in step S724 and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 535 has been operated, it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit value has been exceeded. On the other hand, when the setting values “1” to “5” are displayed in step S724 and it is determined in step S725 that the setting change switch 536 is operated, it is determined that the upper limit of the setting value is exceeded in step S727. Is not judged.
When it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value is exceeded, the process proceeds to step S728, and when it is determined that the upper limit of the set value is not exceeded, the process proceeds to step S729.

In step S728, the basic setting value is set. That is, “0” is stored as the set value data of RWM, and “1” is displayed on the set value display LED 537. Then, the process proceeds to step S729.
In step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not a condition for ending the setting change process (setting change state) is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the condition for ending the setting change process is satisfied. Therefore, in step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on, and when determining that the setting key switch 535 is on, returns to step S724 and determines that the setting key switch 535 is off. If so, the process proceeds to step S730.

In step S730, the setting value display of the setting value display LED 537 is hidden.
Next, proceeding to step S731, the main control board 530 transmits a setting change end command to the sub control board 540. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, it outputs a setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and also executes the lighting process of the effect lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change has ended.

In addition, the end timing of the setting change state in Pachinko gaming machine 500,
(1) When it is determined to be “Yes” in step S729 (when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off).
(2) When the display of the set value by the set value display LED 537 is hidden in step S730.
(3) When the setting change end command is transmitted in step S731.
However, the end timing of the setting change state in the nineteenth embodiment (B) is “when the setting key switch 535 is turned off” in the above (1). Stipulate.
However, not limited to this, the above (2) and (3) may be set as the end timing of the setting change state.

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the flow of one game in the pachinko gaming machine 500.
In the Pachinko game 500, the start timing of one game may be one of the following.
(1) When the game ball is shot by the launching device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504. In this case, one game will start even if the game ball has not reached the game area.
(2) When the game ball is launched toward the game area of the game board 504 by the launching device 513 and the game ball enters the game area. Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 97, a rail for guiding the game ball launched by the launching device 513 into the game area is provided in the range from the lower side to the left side of the game area to the upper left. ing. Then, the moment when the game ball comes off the rail (the moment when the game ball enters the game area) is defined as the start of one game.

(3) When the game ball wins the starting opening 532 provided in the game area. Or, when the game ball wins the starting opening 532 provided in the game area and the starting opening switch 533 is turned on.
As described above, as the start time of one game in the pachinko game machine 500, various points can be cited as to which time point is the start time, but in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned (3) "gaming ball is the starting port 532". "When you enter" is the start timing of one game.
Further, the timing of the end of one game is when the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531 is finished and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In step S741, the main control board (main CPU) 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has been won in the starting opening 532. That is, the starting opening switch 533 is turned on. If it is determined that the starting opening switch 533 is turned on, then the flow proceeds to step S742.
In step S742, various lottery processing is executed at the timing when the starting opening switch 533 is turned on. A random number value is extracted at the timing when the start opening switch 533 is turned on, and based on the extracted random number value, jackpot lottery (whether it is jackpot or out), special symbol lottery (stop symbol of special symbol) Which lot is used as a symbol), and a variation pattern lottery (a lottery for the variation time of the special symbol) is executed.

In the next step S743, prize ball processing (prize ball payout processing) based on winning in the starting opening 532 is executed. Here, the payout control board 520 drives and controls the payout device 524 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
Of the various lottery processes executed in step S742, at least part of the lottery results including the variable time is transmitted to the sub-control board 540. When the sub-control board 540 receives the lottery result of this game, it controls the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Next, proceeding to step S744, the main control board 530 starts changing the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery result in step S742. In addition, the change of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 is a condition that the change of the previous special symbol is finished at that time, and when the change of the special symbol is in progress, of the next special symbol. The fluctuation is suspended, and after the fluctuation of the special symbol that is currently fluctuating ends, the fluctuation of the next special symbol is started.

In step S745, the sub-control board 540 causes the image display device 543 to change the decorative pattern. The change in the decorative pattern corresponds to a part of the effect in the game this time.
Here, the device which directly shows the result of the big hit lottery in step S742 is the special symbol display device 531 and the stop symbol after the change by the special symbol display device 531 has a special symbol corresponding to the big jackpot (for example, "7. )) and a special symbol (for example, "-") corresponding to the deviation are provided.

Further, the decorative design is varied by the image display device 543 so as to be linked (synchronized) with the variation of the special design. When the special design corresponding to the big hit is stopped, the decorative design is also stopped at the decorative design corresponding to the big hit such as "777". On the other hand, when stopping at the special symbol corresponding to the loss (non-winning), the decorative symbol is also stopped at the decorative symbol corresponding to the defect (a symbol other than the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot). The special symbol display device 531 is composed of a small 7-segment display, but the image display area of the image display device 543 for displaying the decorative symbol is larger than the image display area of the special symbol display device 531 (for example, a game. It is formed so as to occupy more than half of the area). Thereby, the player can confirm whether or not the game is a big hit this time by seeing the stop mode of the decorative symbol.

The variation of the decorative symbol in step S745 is controlled to be within the variation time determined by the lottery in step S742. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbol ends, the process proceeds to step S746, the main control board 530 varies the special symbol for the variation time determined by the lottery, and then the variation of the special symbol becomes the stop symbol determined by the lottery. finish.
Next, proceeding to step S747, post-stop processing of the special symbol is executed. As the post-stop processing, for example, when the game is a big hit this time, processing for shifting to a special game can be cited.

Also in the nineteenth embodiment (B) of the pachinko gaming machine, as in the nineteenth embodiment (A) of the slot machine, the setting change end sound is emitted after the setting change state ends, and the lamp indicating the end of the setting change is turned on. Execute. Further, when it is assumed that the game is started at the same time as the end of the setting change state, the output of the setting change end sound is ended before the end of the game.
As described above, if it is assumed that the setting change state is ended when “Yes” is determined in step S729 in FIG. 101, then the setting change end command is transmitted to the sub control board 540 in step S731, Upon receiving the command, the control board 540 starts outputting the setting change end sound from the speaker 542.

The time from the determination of “Yes” in step S729 to the start of the output of the setting change end sound (and the predetermined lighting by the effect lamp 541) is longer than “0” ms, for example, in step S729. The timing is about when one interrupt time (for example, “4” ms in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500) has elapsed from the time when it was determined to be “Yes”. In other words, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed after the determination of “Yes” in step S729.
Then, the setting change end sound is to output the voice "Setting change is completed.", as in the nineteenth embodiment (A). Further, if the time from the output start to the output end of the sound "the setting change is completed" is "T01" as in the nineteenth embodiment (A), the time "T01" is the nineteenth embodiment (A). In the same manner as the above), it is possible to set about 2000 ms.

Further, as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, in addition to the setting change end sound, an effect of turning on the effect lamp 541 in a predetermined lighting mode is executed.
Here, when the lighting by the effect lamp 541 is executed, at least the same lighting mode as when the lighting by the effect lamp 541 is executed at the time of a big hit is not performed. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A of the effect lamps 541 is turned on in the lighting mode a as an effect indicating that the jackpot has been hit, the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed. In this case, it is possible to turn on a lamp other than the lamp A. In this case, as long as a lamp different from the lamp A is turned on, the lighting mode may be the same as the lighting mode when the big hit is shown.

When the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the lamp A is turned on. The lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when the jackpot is shown.
As described above, when the lighting of the effect lamp 541 is executed as the effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 when the jackpot is hit is not the same. Thereby, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is finished, even if the production lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is finished, the player misunderstands that the jackpot is a big hit. It is possible to prevent that.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed and the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 when the jackpot is different are made different from each other. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 that indicates that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects (or is extremely infrequently used), and if the lighting pattern is viewed, the setting is changed. It is preferable to make it understandable as a production that means the end of.
Furthermore, for the effect lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change is completed may be the same as the lighting pattern when the jackpot is achieved, but the setting change is performed for the lamps other than the effect lamp 541. The lighting pattern indicating the end may be different from the lighting pattern when the jackpot is hit.
Specifically, for example, when it is indicated that the setting change has been completed, all the effect lamps 541 and the other lamps are turned on, and when a big hit occurs, the effect lamps 541 are turned on, but the other lamps are turned on. It is possible not to turn on. By doing so, the administrator can grasp which state the player is in by checking the lighting patterns of the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps (lamps of the gaming machine in general).

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, as a general rule, it is possible to output the setting change end sound at the same time. However, not limited to this, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before the setting change end sound is output. Alternatively, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is started and before the output of the setting change end sound is ended. Further, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is ended.
Note that, in the nineteenth embodiment (B), at the same time when the output of the setting change end sound is started, the effect lamp 541 that indicates that the setting change has ended is turned on.

Further, if the lighting time of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is “T02” as in the nineteenth embodiment (A),
T01>T02
T01=T02
T01<T02
However, in the present embodiment, “T01<T02” is satisfied. For example, when the time “T01” is set to about “2000” ms as described above, the time “T02” is set to, for example, about “2500” ms to about “4000” ms.

Next, a case where the game is started as soon as possible after ending the setting change state will be described.
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the launch device 513 is operated so that the game ball cannot be launched into the game area during the setting change state. Therefore, at least unless the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the setting is being changed, the launching device 513 may be operated to launch the game ball into the game area itself. In this case, it is possible to control so as not to pay out the prize balls even when the game balls are won in any of the winning openings during the setting change state. Further, even if the game ball wins the starting opening 532, the jackpot lottery is not executed, and the special symbol display device 531 is not changed or the decorative symbol is not changed by the image display device 543. To be

In the setting change state, at least the front frame 502 is opened as described above, but first, a case will be described in which it is assumed that a game is possible even when the front frame 502 is opened.
And, the timing of starting the game is, as described above, when the game ball wins the starting opening 532.
First, assuming that the preparation time before starting the game is "T21", the game ball is guided to the launchable position in the launcher 513, the game ball is launched from the launchable position, and the winning opening 532 is won. The total of the above times is the time “T21”.
In this case, the time "T21" is considered to be about "2000" ms.
In the above assumption, it is assumed that the first game ball of the game ball launched from the launching device 513 wins the starting opening 532.

When the game ball wins the starting opening 532, in FIG. 102, it is determined to be “Yes” in step S741, and then the special symbol starts changing (step S744), after the special symbol changes for the determined change time. , Stop changing the special symbol (step S746). Here, in FIG. 102, the time from the determination of “Yes” in step S741 to the end of the process of step S746 is one game time, and this one game time is set to “T22”.
First, when a game ball is won in the starting opening 532 in a state where there is no holding ball, one game time "T22" is determined from a range of, for example, about "10000" to "30000" ms. And Therefore, the shortest time of one game time "T22" is "10000" ms.

Note that, for example, when the number of holding balls becomes a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, a shortening function that improves time efficiency by shortening the variation time of the special symbol is known, but in the present embodiment, it is set. Since it is the state after the end of the changed state, there is no holding ball. Therefore, in one game time "T22", the function of shortening the variation time of the special symbol is not considered.

As described above, the time required to start the game immediately after the setting change state is finished is “T21+T22”.
The shortest time of "T21+T22" is about "12000" ms.
Therefore,
T01 (time when the setting change end sound is output) <T21+T22 (preparation time for starting a game + shortest time for a game)
Becomes

Furthermore, even when the lighting indicating that the setting change has been completed by the effect lamp 541 is executed immediately after the end of the setting change state (when the setting change end sound is output), the lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 541 and “T21+T22”. The relationship with
T02 (about "2500" to "4000" ms) <T21+T22
Becomes
As a result, even when the game is started immediately when the setting change state is ended, the output of the setting change end sound is ended and the effect lamp indicating the end of the setting change is ended before the end of one game. This means that the lighting of 541 has ended.
FIG. 96 shows the time relationship at this time.

Further, the above 1 game does not consider the time for closing the front frame 502 after the setting change state or the operation time for eliminating the frame open error after closing the front frame 502.
Similar to the slot machine 10, when the setting change state is finished, at least the front frame 502 should be in the open state. Therefore, even if the setting change state is ended, the pachinko gaming machine 500 detects the frame opening error and notifies the error. The game cannot be started when the frame opening error is reported. When the frame opening error occurs, firstly, the firing device 513 is not operated. Secondly, although the launching device 513 is in an operable state, even if a game ball is won in the starting opening 532 (even if the starting opening switch 533 detects the gaming ball), the game is not started (lottery processing). Is not executed, fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531 is not started, and prize balls are not paid out).

To cancel the frame opening error, the front frame 502 is closed and the frame opening switch 523 is turned off. Further, by inserting a key into the key insertion opening 521 and performing a predetermined operation, the frame opening error is eliminated (error notification is ended). Therefore, the preparation time "T21" until the game starts after the end of the setting change state includes the operation time for closing the front frame 502 and inserting the key to cancel the frame opening error. After the end of the setting change state, by closing the front frame 502 and turning off the frame opening switch 523, the time until the frame opening error is eliminated is set to “T20”,
T01 (output time of setting change end sound)<T20+T21+T22
T02 (lighting time of effect lamp 541)<T20+T21+T22
Becomes

In the above example, the example in which the setting change state is ended when the setting key switch 535 is turned off is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front frame 502 is closed (the frame opening switch 523 is turned off), It is also possible to end the setting change state on condition that the operation for canceling the frame opening error (the operation of inserting the key into the key insertion opening 521 and rotating it in a predetermined direction) is performed. In this case, the front frame 502 is closed, and at the end of the frame opening error cancellation operation, the setting change state ends, and the setting change end sound is output. Note that the setting change state may be terminated by closing the front frame 502 on condition that the frame opening switch 523 is turned off (without performing a frame opening error cancellation operation). In this case, when the frame opening switch 523 is turned off, the setting change state is ended and a setting change end sound is output.

Therefore, even in the case of the specification that the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame opening error is released, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game " Since the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is shorter than “T21+T22”, the output of the setting change end sound is completed before the end of one game immediately after the end of the setting change.

The above is the case where one game time "T22" is finished in the shortest time.
On the other hand, not limited to this, the relationship between the output time “T01” of the setting change end sound and the time “T21+T22” from the end of the setting change to the end of one game can be variously set as follows. ..
(1) The setting change end sound output time "T01" is shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" when the big hit lottery is shifted (non-winning) and the preparation time "T21". Set.
For example, the variation time of the special symbol display device 531 when it is out of range is in the range of "T22 (min1)" to "T22 (max1)", and its average time is "T22 (avg1)",
T01<T21+T22 (avg1)
It can be set to.

(2) The output time “T01” of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the total time of the average one game time “T22” when the jackpot is a big hit and the preparation time “T21”.
For example, the variation time of the special symbol display device 531 when it is a big hit is in the range of "T22 (min2)" to "T22 (max2)", and its average time is "T22 (avg2)",
T01<T21+T22 (avg2)
It can be set to.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
The twentieth embodiment relates to a board case of a control board.
As a substrate case for housing the control substrate, a double door type and a slide type are known, but the twentieth embodiment is a slide type substrate case.
In the slide system, the exposed area of the control board is smaller than that in the double door system, so that the number of points for unauthorized access can be reduced accordingly.
Further, the twentieth embodiment has a structure in which the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are slid while the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560. Therefore, the surface of the main control board 530 exposed during the sliding movement is the solder surface.
The surface of the control board on which the CPU, the connector, and other electronic components are mounted is referred to as the "component surface", and the surface on which the legs of the electronic component are soldered is referred to as the "solder surface".

In the twentieth embodiment, the board case 550 for housing the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500 is taken as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, and is a payout control board 520, a sub control board 540, or another control board on which a CPU is mounted. Therefore, it can be applied to a case that accommodates a control board that requires security.

Furthermore, the board case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the control board of the pachinko gaming machine 500, but is a control board on which the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, the sub control board 80, and other CPUs are mounted, and security is ensured. The present invention can be applied to a case that accommodates a control board that requires
Specifically, the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape as the main control board 530 of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 of the twentieth embodiment. ) Can be accommodated in.
The board case 56 shown in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10) can be applied to the main control board 530 and other control boards of the pachinko gaming machine 500. Furthermore, the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment may be carried out independently, but it is also possible to carry out the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment at the same time.

FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as seen from the front side. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the board case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) and the main control board 530 as seen from the rear side.
Furthermore, FIG. 105 is an external perspective view of the main control board 530 accommodated in the board case 550 as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 106 is a front view of the main control board 530 accommodated in the board case 550 as seen from the front side. In addition, FIG. 107 is a front view of the state where the main control board 530 is housed in the board case 550 viewed from the rear (back) side.

Here, the “front side” refers to the component surface side of the main control board 530, and the “rear (back) side” refers to the solder surface of the main control board 530.
The “upper” in the “upper case 560” refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and may be referred to as the “front side case (or cover)” or the “component side case (or cover)”. ..
Furthermore, the “lower” in the “lower case 570” refers to the solder surface side of the main control board 530, and includes the “rear (back) side case (or cover)” and the “solder surface side case (or cover)”. May be called.
Further, FIGS. 103 and 106 show a state in which the cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560, and FIG. 105 shows the upper case 560 excluding the cover 561.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 530 includes the above-described setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534. Furthermore, connectors 539a to 539h for connecting a harness to another board, electronic component, or electronic device are provided. Various parts shown in the twentieth embodiment such as FIG. 103 are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these.
Further, holes 530 a are formed at the four corners of the main control board 530 for screwing the main control board 530 to the upper case 560 (fixing).

On the other hand, in the upper case 560, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530, the setting change (reset) switch 536, and the setting key insertion port 534 have appropriate gaps. The openings 563a to 563i are formed so that they can pass through (pass through).
A cover 561 is openably and closably attached to a portion of the upper case 560 where the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 are exposed when the main control board 530 is attached. In the present embodiment, the opening/closing of the cover 561 is not detected by a sensor or the like, but the opening/closing of the cover 561 can be detected by a sensor. Then, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that the sensor is on (the cover 561 is in the open state), or set on the condition that the sensor is on (the cover 561 is in the open state). The changed state may be allowed to end.

Caulked portions 562 and 572 are provided on one end sides of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, specifically, on the left edge when viewed from the front side in FIG. 103, respectively. The caulking portions 562 and 572 are used for sealing (caulking) both the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 in a fitted state. After the sealing (caulking), the fitting between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 cannot be released unless the caulking portion 562 on the upper case 560 side is broken.
Furthermore, in FIG. 103, side walls 565 and 571 are provided at the ends opposite to the one end side (the side where the caulking portions 562 and 572 are provided, respectively) of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 when viewed from the front side. Has been. The side walls 565 and 571 come into contact with each other when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted to each other.

In FIG. 104, bosses 564 (four pieces) are provided on the back side of the upper case 560. In FIG. 104, two bosses 564 are visible. The arrangement interval of the four bosses 564 is the same as the arrangement interval of the four holes 530a of the main control board 530. Further, the boss 564 is formed with a screw hole.
When the main control board 530 is applied to the back side of the upper case 560 in the state shown in FIG. 104, the four holes 530a of the main control board 530 and the screw holes of the four bosses 564 of the upper case 560 overlap.

Further, in this state, the connector 539a of the main control board 530 penetrates the opening 563a of the upper case 560 and its connector surface is exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.
Similarly, the connectors 539b and 539c of the main control board 530 pass through the opening 563b of the upper case 560 and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 550.
Further, the connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f of the main control board 530 pass through the openings 563c, 563d, and 563e of the upper case 560, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.

Furthermore, the connectors 539g and 539h of the main control board 530 penetrate the openings 563f and 563g of the upper case 560, respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.
In this way, all the connectors provided on the main control board 530 are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560 through the openings formed in the upper case 560. 105 and 106 show the state at this time.
In addition, in this case, the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g are set to be appropriate gaps, and the connectors 539a to 539h are arranged to open the openings 563a to 563a. 563g can be penetrated without resistance, and after the penetration, there should be no more clearance than necessary between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g (for example, the clearance between the connector and the opening). Is designed to be about "0.5" mm). As a result, it is difficult to carry out the goto action by utilizing the gap between the connector and the opening.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 of the main control board 530 penetrate through the openings 563h and 563i formed in the upper case 560, respectively, and contact (access) from the front side of the upper case 560. ) Is possible (see FIG. 105), however, since the cover 561 is attached on the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion opening 534 as shown in FIGS. Not exposed to. However, the substrate case 550 (the upper case 560 and the lower case 570) including the cover 561 is formed of transparent resin, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover 561. Has become.
In the above state, if screws are inserted from the solder surface side of the main control board 530 into the holes 530a (4 places) and screwed onto the bosses 564 of the upper case 560, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560. To be done.

As a result, when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together, the main control board 530 moves together with the upper case 560.
As described above, since the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 before the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together, when the upper case and the lower case 570 are fitted together, There is no relative movement between the case 560 and the main control board 530. Therefore, on the upper case 560 side, the openings 563a to 563g each slightly larger than the outer shapes of the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530 are formed, and the connectors 539a to 539h penetrate the openings 563a to 563g. With such a structure, it is possible to obtain a structure in which an unnecessary gap is not formed between each connector 539a to 539h and each opening 563a to 563g. For example, even after the upper case 560 and the lower case 5670 are fitted to each other and the positional relationship between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 is shifted by a goto action, the upper case 560 and the main control board 530 are not connected to each other. Cannot be relatively displaced, so that it is not possible to increase the gap between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g, for example. As a result, it is possible to suppress goto actions.

Next, a method of fitting the upper case 560 to which the main control board 530 is attached and the lower case 570 will be described.
FIG. 108 is a side sectional view showing a fitted state of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, (a) showing a temporary fitting state (before sliding movement), and (b) showing a final fitting state ( (After slide movement).
In FIG. 108, the cross-sectional area is not hatched in consideration of the visibility of the drawing. Further, in the figure, the upper case 560 is shown by a solid line and the lower case 570 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
As shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the upper case 560 is provided with a side wall 565, and the lower case 570 is provided with a side wall 571.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the lower end edge (on the lower case 570 side) in the longitudinal direction of the upper case 560 is referred to as a lower edge 560a. The longitudinal edge of the lower case 570 is referred to as an outer edge 570a.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped with each other, the shapes of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are formed so as to overlap each other in the positional relationship shown in FIG. When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped with each other, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are formed in contact with each other. This position is called a "temporary fitting state". In the temporary fitting state, the gap L between the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 is formed to be about several tens mm (for example, about “10” to “30” mm). ing.
Further, in the temporarily fitted state, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 can be separated at any time. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 108A, the upper case 560 can be moved in the direction away from the lower case 570 with respect to the lower case 570 without interference of parts or the like.

109 is a plan view of the vicinity of the side wall 565 and the side wall 571 from the lower case 570 side in the temporary fitting state.
In the temporarily fitted state, as shown in FIG. 109, since the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 have a gap L, one end of the solder surface of the main control board 530 can be seen from this gap L. There is. Here, in the connector of the main control board 530, if the leg of the connector 539g is a connector leg 539g′ and the leg of the connector 539h is a connector leg 539h′, these connector legs 539g′ and 539h′ are respectively arranged in the longitudinal direction. It has two rows of legs (see Figure 104).
Then, in the temporary fitting state, as shown in FIG. 109, the connector legs 539g′ and 539h′ are formed so that only one row on the outside is exposed. In other words, even in the temporary fitting state, the connector legs 539g' and 539h' are not exposed, but only a part thereof is exposed.

The lower case 570 can be slid with respect to the upper case 560 from the temporarily fitted state of FIG. 108(a). The sliding movement direction is the longitudinal direction of the substrate case 550, and is the left direction in FIG. 108(a).
When the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the upper case 560, the main control board 530, and the lower case 570 can be moved to the end point of the sliding movement without interfering with each other. Then, as shown in FIG. 108B, the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 can be slid to a position where they come into contact with each other. The state of FIG. 108(b) is the final fitting state. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state where the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 are in contact with each other (final fitting state).

When the main fitting state is achieved, the engaging members (not shown) formed on the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are engaged with each other. This makes it impossible to move the upper case 560 relative to the lower case 570 in a direction away from the lower case 570. However, in this state, the lower case 570 can be slid with respect to the upper case 560 in the opposite manner to the above, and the sliding movement in the opposite direction always returns the main fitting state to the temporary fitting state. be able to.

In the temporary fitting state shown in FIG. 108(a), the caulking portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the caulking portion 572 of the lower case 570 are displaced in the vertical direction, but the book shown in FIG. In the fitted state, the caulking portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the caulking portion 572 of the lower case 570 overlap each other, and the caulking is possible using both of them. When the caulking portion 562 and the caulking portion 572 are caulked at this position, the main case 560 and the lower case 570 are separated or the upper case 560 is separated unless the caulking portion 562 of the upper case 560 is cut (destroyed) thereafter. On the other hand, the lower case 570 cannot be slid and returned to the temporary fitting state shown in FIG. 108(a).

However, it is conceivable that the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 by some method to return it to the temporary fitting state and the soldering surface of the main control board 530 is exposed.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109, if all the connector legs are not exposed and only a part of the connector legs are exposed, the goto action can be made difficult.
In addition, not all connector legs are exposed even in the temporary mating state, and in the example of the twentieth embodiment, the exposed connector legs are the connector legs 539g′ and 539h′, and the other connector legs. The feet of 539a, 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539g are not exposed.

When the slide method is adopted for the substrate case 550, the sliding direction is usually the longitudinal direction of the substrate case. In this case, the amount of slide movement is related to the number of exposed legs of the connector.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the connector is arranged near the outer peripheral edge of the main control board 530. For example, if the connector is provided at the center of the main control board 530, the opening of the upper case 560 corresponding to the connector is inevitably in the shape of a square "B" surrounded by side walls on four sides. However, if the connector is arranged inside the substantially square shape surrounded by side walls on four sides, it becomes difficult to insert and remove the connector. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the connectors 539a to 539h are arranged near the outer peripheral edge of the main control board 530.

Specifically, in FIG. 103, the connector 539a is arranged near the left edge of the main control board 530, the connectors 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539f are arranged near the upper edge, and the connectors 539g, 539h are arranged near the right edge. Was placed.
Each of the connector openings 563 of the upper case 560 has a structure having no wall at least on the outer side. For example, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563a through which the connector 539a penetrates has a substantially concave shape having no sidewall on the left side (outside) in the figure.
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563b through which the connectors 539b and 539c are penetrated has a substantially concave shape having no side wall on the upper side (outer side) in the figure.

Furthermore, the peripheries of the openings 563c, 563d, and 563e that penetrate the connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f, respectively, are substantially L-shaped with no side walls on the upper side and the right side (outer side) in FIG. ..
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the peripheries of the openings 563f and 563g which penetrate the connectors 539g and 539h respectively have a side wall only on the left side (inner side) in the figure. This makes the connector easy to insert and remove.

Furthermore, when the connectors are arranged on the main control board 530 as described above, when the lower case 570 is slid and moved as in the present embodiment, the first exposed legs of the connectors are the ones of the connectors 539g and 539h. Feet (539g' and 539h').
Furthermore, when the slide movement amount is larger than that in the present embodiment, the foot of the connector 539f is exposed next.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regarding the connectors 530a to 539f among the connectors of the main control board 530, even if the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 506, the legs of the connectors are not exposed. Note that, for example, in FIG. 105, if the connector group of the connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f is arranged so as to be closer to the left side in the figure (closer to the connectors 539b and 539c), the sliding movement amount becomes larger than that in the present embodiment. Even if provided, the legs of the connector 539f can be configured not to be exposed.

When the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 as in this embodiment, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h arranged near the right edge of the main control board 530 in FIG. 105 are easily exposed. .. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the legs of the connectors 539g and 539h (connector legs 539g′ and 539h′) are exposed, but It is structured so that the goto act becomes even more difficult by exposing only a part of the leg, not exposing everything.

It is preferable that the number of connectors in which at least a part of the feet is exposed by the sliding movement is as small as possible.
When the number of rows of legs of one connector is “N (N is an integer of 2 or more)”, the number of exposed legs is “N−1” or less (that is, not all are exposed). It is preferable. Furthermore, when the number of rows of the legs of the connector is "1", it is preferable that the legs of the connector are not exposed.
Alternatively, when the number of pins of the connector is “N”, that is, when the number of legs of the connector is “N”, the “n”th (“n”≦“N−1”) of the “N” pins. It is possible to expose up to the “)-th pin, but not expose the “n+1”-th and subsequent pins (that is, configure not to expose all pins).
Further, among the pins of the connector, one reference pin may be at least not exposed. By not exposing at least one pin, it is possible to make the goto more difficult than when all the pins are exposed.

Further, when the main control board is the main control board 530 in the pachinko gaming machine 500, as shown in FIG. 99, the main control board 530 is a payout control board 520, a special symbol display device 531, a starting opening switch 533, a sub Since it is electrically connected to the control board 540 and the like, it is connected to these boards and electronic parts. The connection is made using leads. In addition, a plurality of lead wires are combined into one to form a harness, a connector terminal is attached to the end of the harness, and this connector terminal and the connector on the main control board 530 are connected.
Here, of the lead wires connected to the main control board 530, the lead wire for which security is to be particularly ensured is the lead wire to which the signal of the starting opening switch 533 (signal related to lottery) is input. Therefore, regarding the connector to which the signal of the starting port switch 533 is input, the connector foot is not exposed even if it is slid (at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). Is preferred.

Further, regarding the connector connected to the payout control board 520, the connector foot is not exposed even if the connector is slid and moved (at least one foot row is not exposed, or at least one pin is It is preferable that it is not exposed).
Further, a lead wire for supplying electric power to the main control board 530 (a lead wire connected to the power supply board 510 when the power supply board 510 and the main control board 530 are directly connected), and a sub control board 540. Regarding each connector to which the connected lead wire and the lead wire connected to the board for outputting an external signal are respectively connected, at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed. It is preferable to configure.

On the other hand, when the main control board is the main control board 50 in the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 is a medal selector, various operation switches, a power switch 11, a medal number display device, and a symbol. The display device and the medal payout device are electrically connected.
Among the lead wires connected to the main control board 50, the lead wire for which security is to be particularly ensured is the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 (the signal related to the lottery) is input. Therefore, with respect to the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 is input is connected, the connector foot is not exposed even if the connector is slid (at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). It is preferable to configure as follows.

Furthermore, the lead wire to which the signal of the closing sensor 44 is input also needs security from the viewpoint of preventing credit got. Therefore, regarding the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the closing sensor 44 is input is connected, the connector foot is not exposed even if the connector is slid (at least one foot row is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed). It is preferable that it is not exposed).

Further, each lead wire connected to the medal payout device, specifically, a lead wire for outputting a drive signal of the hopper motor 36 and a lead wire to which a signal from the payout sensor 37 is input are connected. Also, from the viewpoint of preventing the dispensing goto, it is preferable that the connector foot is not exposed even if it is slid (at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed). ..
In addition, as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, a connector having a lead wire relating to a power source, a connector having a lead wire connected to the sub control board 80, and a lead connected to a board for transmitting an external signal. Also for each connector to which the wires are respectively connected, it is preferable that at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
The twenty-first embodiment relates to the thickness (diameter) of the lead wire (also referred to as “signal wire”).
In the twenty-first embodiment, the lead wire for starting is made thinnest, and at least one or more other lead wires having the same thickness as the lead wire for starting are provided in one connector terminal having the lead wire for starting. Also, by providing at least one lead wire that is thicker than the lead wire for starting, it is difficult to identify the lead wire for starting, and it is possible to suppress goto actions (improper starting or starting at intentional timing). To do.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, the lead wire related to the start corresponds to the lead wire that connects the start opening switch 533 and the main control board 530.
Further, in the slot machine 10, the lead wire for starting corresponds to the lead wire for connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 50.
The "lead wire for starting" is actually composed of two wires, one of which serves as a starting signal wire and the other of which serves as a GND wire. Further, in the present embodiment, the start signal line is referred to as a "lead wire related to start" and does not include the GND line. However, the GND wire may be included in lead wires other than the lead wire for starting.

FIG. 110 is a plan view showing a state where the harnesses B to H are connected to the connectors 539b to 539h of the main control board 530, respectively.
In addition, in FIG. 110, the illustration of the substrate case 550 is omitted. Further, although the main control board 530 is illustrated in FIG. 110, the present invention is not limited to the main control board 530 and can be applied to the main control board 50. In other words, the twenty-first embodiment can be applied to both the slot machine 10 and the pachinko gaming machine 500.
Moreover, the connector terminals respectively attached to the tips of the harnesses B to H are referred to as “harness B connector terminals” to “harness H connector terminals”, respectively.

The connector 539a is usually a connector to which a cable or the like is not connected. The connector 539a is a connector that is connected to the collation device when the gaming machine enforcement authority confirms the data stored in the CPU, ROM, and RWM using the collation device.
Further, the connectors 539b to 539h are concave connectors mounted on the main control board 530, and these are connected to the harness B connector terminal to the harness H connector terminal (convex connector), respectively.
FIG. 111 is a front view showing in detail each harness B to H and the harness B to H connector terminals.
Each of the harnesses B to H is composed of a plurality of lead wires, and each lead wire is numbered in FIG. 111. For example, the harness B is composed of nine lead wires 1 to 9 in the first row (upper row in the drawing) and nine lead wires 10 to 18 in the second row (lower row in the drawing) in the drawing. It is a harness.

Each connector terminal of the harnesses B, C, D, G, and H is composed of two rows. On the other hand, each connector terminal of the harnesses E and F is composed of one row.
The harnesses and connector terminals shown in FIG. 111 are merely examples, and the connector terminals may be composed of, for example, three rows or more. The number of lead wires in one row is determined according to the application (the number of signal wires), and is not limited to that shown in FIG. 111, and may be one or 10 or more. ..
Even if it is composed of one lead wire, it will be referred to as a "harness".
Furthermore, in addition to a harness in which each lead wire is separated (whether or not it is bundled), specifically a discrete wire cable, for example, a flat cable or a ribbon cable, Includes all lead wires integrally connected (whether separable or not).

Also, in FIG. 111, two types of thickness are illustrated as the lead wire. In the figure, the lead wire indicated by a single circle indicates a thin lead wire, and the lead wire indicated by a double circle indicates a thick lead wire. Here, the "lead wire thickness" refers to the diameter of the lead wire. Therefore, if the thickness of the lead wire indicated by a single circle is the diameter D1 and the thickness of the lead wire indicated by the double circle is the diameter D2, then "D1<D2".
In the example of FIG. 111, two types of lead wire thickness are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a harness may be formed from lead wires of three or more types of thickness.

In FIG. 111, a lead wire for starting (in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500, a lead wire that connects the starting opening switch 533 and the main control board 530. In the case of the slot machine 10, the start switch 41 and the main control board 50. It is assumed that the lead wire for connecting to and is the seventh lead wire of the harness D. The lead wire for starting uses a thin lead wire of two types of thickness. This is because the lead wire for starting is made as inconspicuous as possible by using a thin lead wire. Also, by using a thin lead wire, it is easy to break the wire when a fraudulent act (modification, etc.) is performed, so that the abnormality can be easily found. In other words, a thick lead wire is less likely to be broken during fraudulent acts than a thin lead wire, and in the case of a bundled thick lead wire, even if a part is broken, it is discovered. This is because it is difficult.
However, not limited to this, the lead wire for starting may be a thick lead wire. Alternatively, when using lead wires of three different thicknesses, a lead wire of intermediate thickness may be used as the lead wire for starting.
Note that only two wires, the lead wire for starting and the GND wire, may be connected to one connector terminal.
On the other hand, the harness D shown in FIG. 111 has a plurality of other lead wires in addition to the lead wire (No. 7) for starting.

Further, in the harness D including the lead wire (No. 7) for starting, at least one lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire (No. 7) for starting is provided. Even if it is known that the lead wire related to the start is included in the connector D, it is difficult to specify which lead wire (it is difficult to perform the goto action). In this example, the second, fourth, and eighth lead wires have the same thickness as the seventh lead wire (lead wire for starting).

Furthermore, the 8th lead wire having the same thickness is arranged adjacent to the 7th lead wire of the harness D. This is because it is difficult to identify the lead wire for starting by disposing the lead wire having the same thickness adjacent to the lead wire for starting. In the example of FIG. 111, in the harness D, the 8th lead wire located on the right side of the 7th lead wire has the same thickness as the 7th lead wire. The thickness of the wire may be the same as the thickness of the 7th lead wire. Alternatively, the thickness of the No. 3 lead wire may be the thickness of the No. 7 lead wire. In the harness D, the lead wires “adjacent” to the lead wire No. 7 correspond to the lead wires No. 3, 6, and 8 in the example of FIG. At least one of these lead wires is set to have the same thickness as the No. 7 lead wire.

Further, the harness D is provided with one or more lead wires having a different thickness from the lead wire (No. 7) for starting. In the example of FIG. 111, the lead wires of Nos. 1, 3, 5, and 6 have different thicknesses from the lead wire (No. 7) for starting. By including in the one connector terminal (harness D connector terminal) a lead wire having a thickness different from that of the lead wire for starting, the lead wire for starting can be more difficult to identify.

Also, in addition to the lead wire for starting, important signal wires, specifically, lead wire for loading game media, lead wire for payout, lead wire for transmitting external signals, etc. are also prevented From the viewpoint of, in the same manner as the lead wire for starting, one or more other signal lines having the same thickness and one or more other signal lines having other thicknesses are provided in one connector terminal. It is preferable.
Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the lead wire for starting and the lead wire for the power supply so as not to be adjacent to each other. This is because the lead wire for starting is less likely to be affected by noise.
Here, "not adjacent" means, for example, when the 7th lead wire of the harness D is a lead wire for starting, the 3rd, 6th and 8th wires of the harness D are not set as the lead wires for power supply. It can be mentioned.

If the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are linearly arranged on the main control board 530 and the distance between the two connector terminals is short, as in the present embodiment, the harness G number 5 is used. When setting the lead wire of No. 1 as the lead wire for starting, it is preferable not to set the No. 1 lead wire of the harness H as the lead wire for the power supply.
On the other hand, even if the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are arranged in a straight line on the main control board 530, if there is a certain distance between both connector terminals, the fifth lead of the harness G is provided. It does not matter if the wire is set as the lead wire for starting and the first lead wire of the harness H is set as the power lead wire.

Furthermore, when the connector terminal of the harness including the lead wire for starting is adjacent to the connector terminal of the other harness, the harness including the lead wire for starting is arranged below the other harness to It is preferable to wire so that the lead wire relating to this is hidden from the outside as much as possible.
FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding the lead wire for starting. In FIG. 112, for simplification of the drawing, both the harness D and the harness E are made up of one row of lead wires, the harness D is made up of three lead wires, and the harness E is made up of five lead wires. Illustrated. Then, in the harness D, the lead wire closest to the harness E is set as the lead wire for starting.
In this case, the direction in which the harness D extends is the side of the harness E, and the wiring is so arranged that the harness E passes above the harness D. As a result, the lead wire for starting the harness D can be hidden from the outside as much as possible, and the security can be improved.

<Twenty-second Embodiment>
The twenty-second embodiment relates to the setting change state. The description of the twenty-second embodiment partially overlaps with that of the nineteenth embodiment, but will be described again.
First, in the case of the slot machine 10, before shifting to the setting change state, whether the door switch 17 is ON, whether the setting key switch 152 is ON, and whether the reset switch 153 is ON. Then, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that all of these switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on, or if all of the switches are off, the setting change state is not entered. As a result, even if the setting key switch 152 is accessed by illegally making a hole in the front door 12 with a drill or the like, the setting change state is not entered unless the door switch 17 is turned on.

Further, even if all of the door switch 17, the setting key switch 152, and the reset switch 153 are turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered. When the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state can be entered. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value can be confirmed, but the setting value cannot be changed. In addition, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the door switch 17 may be turned on. Furthermore, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the reset switch 153 may be turned off.

Further, the termination condition of the setting change state is set that the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the door switch 17 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the state where the door switch 17 is turned off, that is, the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is not opened (state in which there is a high possibility of goto action).
Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and to end the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on.
However, the invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that the door switch 17 is on, and do not judge the on/off state of the door switch 17 at the end of the setting change state. May be.

Secondly, the door switch 17 is not judged to be ON/OFF at the time of shifting to the setting change state, but is judged to be ON/OFF at the end of the setting change state, and if the door switch 17 is not ON. The setting change state may not be terminated.
Furthermore, thirdly, whether or not the door switch 17 is turned on or off is not judged when shifting to the setting change state, but if the door switch 17 is not on, the setting value will not be changed even if the setting change switch 153 is operated. It may be set to.
Further, fourthly, the setting value can be changed by not judging whether the door switch 17 is turned on or off when shifting to the setting change state and operating the setting change switch 153 during the setting change state. When the door switch 17 is not turned on when the start switch 41, which is an operation for fixing the value, is operated, the setting value may not be fixed (a new setting value is not stored in the RWM 53). ..

Further, in order to shift to the setting change state in the slot machine 10, since the power is turned on while the reset switch 153 is turned on, before shifting to the setting change state (setting change processing) or the setting change state. The current set value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared before the set value can be changed after shifting to (setting change processing). In this case, the set value data is “0”. Therefore, the set value at the start of the setting change state is "1".

When the reset switch 153 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 (role ratio monitor) in the storage area of the RWM 53 is changed. Such data is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 is a game number counter, a payout number counter (including a ring buffer), each ratio data, and the like.

In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is turned on, whether the frame opening switch 523 is on, whether the setting key switch 535 is on, and whether the reset switch 536 is on. Is determined, and it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that these three switches are on. If only some of the three switches are on or all of the switches are off, the setting change state is not entered. As a result, in the illegal state in which the front frame 502 is not open, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state is not entered.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 98, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 is not in a closed state (see FIG. 22) like the slot machine 10 but is in an open state.
Therefore, depending on the situation of the island installed in the hall, it may be possible that the main control board 530 may be accessed without opening the front frame 502 by going around the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 500. However, if the frame opening switch 523 is not on, it is determined that the frame is not in the normal state, and the state is not shifted to the setting change state (setting value cannot be changed).

Even if the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered. Furthermore, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 after the power is turned on and the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state is not entered and the setting confirmation state is also entered. do not do.
In the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, as described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting key switch 535 turned on (the reset switch 536 is off). , It is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state.

In the case where the opening of the front frame 502 and the opening of the glass door 505 can be individually detected as in the present embodiment, when both the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are open at the same time (that is, the door is open). When the opening switch 522 is on and the frame opening switch 523 is on, the specification may be such that the transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is permitted.
By setting in this way, it becomes possible to inspect the function of the set value in the manufacturing process of the pachinko game machine 500 without performing an extra procedure. Further, after the pachinko gaming machine 500 is installed in the hall, even if the glass door 505 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 500 during the board surface maintenance work in the hall, the setting change and the setting confirmation can be performed in parallel with the board surface maintenance. Therefore, convenience can be improved.

Further, the door opening switch 522 (switch that is turned on when the glass door 505 is opened) is not detected when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Therefore, when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the glass door 505 may be either open or closed. However, it is determined that the glass door 505 is closed when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and it is determined that the door opening switch 522 is on/off when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state and is off. On the condition of, the condition may be changed to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are covered with a cover 561. Then, in order to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion opening 534, it is necessary to open the cover 561.
Therefore, a sensor that detects opening/closing of the cover 561 (hereinafter referred to as “cover sensor”) may be provided so that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state can be set on condition that the cover sensor is on.

In the pachinko gaming machine 500, in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed each time the setting change switch 536 is operated, which is common to the slot machine 10.
Further, in the slot machine 10, the operation of the start switch 41 is an operation of fixing the set value, but in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500, turning off the setting key switch 535 makes the set value fixed, and , This is an operation for ending the setting change state.
Further, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the setting change state can be terminated on condition that the setting key switch 535 is turned on and the frame opening switch 523 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the frame opening switch 523 is turned off, that is, the setting change state ends in a state in which the front frame 502 is not opened (state in which there is a high possibility of goto action).

In the present embodiment, the setting change state can be entered on condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on, and the setting change state can be ended on condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on, and do not judge the on/off state of the frame opening switch 523 when the setting changing state ends. You may

Secondly, when the setting change state is entered, on/off of the frame opening switch 523 is not judged, but when the setting change state is finished, it is judged whether the frame opening switch 523 is on/off and the frame opening switch 523 is turned on. Otherwise, the setting change state may not be terminated.
Furthermore, thirdly, when the frame open switch 523 is not turned on when the setting change state is entered, if the frame open switch 523 is not on, the setting value is changed even if the setting change switch 536 is operated. It may be set not to be performed.

Further, fourthly, the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 536 without judging whether the frame opening switch 523 is turned on or off when shifting to the setting change state. If the frame opening switch 523 is not on when the setting key switch 535, which is an operation for confirming the set value, is turned off, the set value is not confirmed (a new set value is not stored in the RWM). You may set it.

Further, in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500, even if the power is turned on while the reset switch 536 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the management information display LED (performance) in the storage area of the RWM is displayed. The data related to the information displayed on the display monitor) 538 is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 538 is a base value.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are provided on the rear surface side of the front frame 502 near the hinge mechanism 503. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 from being easily accessed only by slightly opening the front frame 502.
For example, in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are arranged inside the cover 561, but when the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting are reset. The change (reset) switch 536 is arranged on the right side in the area of the main control board 530. Accordingly, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 can be arranged near the hinge mechanism 503. In FIG. 98, the left side is the open side in the figure, so if formed as in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are located at a position far from the open side (left side in the figure). Can be placed.

In the slot machine 10 as well, similarly to the above, the setting key insertion opening 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 on the main control board 50 are rotated when the front door 12 is opened. It is preferable to arrange them so that they are closer to each other. For example, when the main control board 50 is arranged as shown in FIG. 22 and the front door 12 is viewed from the front side (player) side, the left side is the rotation axis side of the front door 12 and the right side is the open side, When the door 12 is opened and the main control board 50 is viewed, it looks as shown in FIG. Therefore, in FIG. 10A, if the setting key insertion opening 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are arranged on the left side, the setting key insertion opening 151 and the setting change (reset) are located far from the opening side of the front door 12. The switch 153 can be arranged.

Furthermore, as a measure for making it difficult to shift to the setting change state due to goto, for example, in the Pachinko gaming machine 500, after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion opening 534, rotating the setting key counterclockwise. Then, the setting key switch 535 may be turned on. In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable in the clockwise direction and the setting key is not moved to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated in the clockwise direction, it is difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state. be able to.
In particular, when the front frame 502 is opened by inserting a key into the key insertion opening 521, the front frame 502 can be opened by rotating the key clockwise. The rotation direction of the key and the rotation direction of the setting key are opposite to each other, which makes it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

The same applies to the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 152 may be turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion port 151 and then rotating the setting key counterclockwise. In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable in the clockwise direction and the setting key is not moved to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated in the clockwise direction, it is difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state. be able to.
In particular, when the front door 12 is opened by rotating the key clockwise when the front door 12 is opened, the rotation direction of the key when the front door 12 is opened and the rotation direction of the setting key are set. Since and are opposite directions, the transition to the setting change state can be made difficult to understand.

FIG. 113 is a side sectional view showing the positional relationship among the upper case 560 of the substrate case 550, the cover 561, the setting key insertion opening 534, and the setting change (reset) switch 536. Note that, in FIG. 113, as in FIG. 108, the cross-section is not hatched from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawing.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 113, of the surfaces of the upper case 560, the highest surface is the surface S1, and the opening surfaces of the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are the surfaces S2. In this case, the surface S2 is formed lower than the surface S1. By forming in this way, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion opening 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536 by inserting a wire-like object from the outside, for example, the surface S1 is accessed rather than the surface S1. It is more difficult to access S2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the set goto action.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 113, when the cover 561 is attached to the upper surfaces of the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536, the surface S3 (FIG. 113) which is the upper surface of the cover 561 is , And is arranged at a position lower than the surface S1 of the upper cover 560.
With this structure, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion opening 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536, a wire-like object is inserted between the upper cover 560 and the cover 561 or the cover is inserted. Even if an attempt is made to open 561, it is possible to make those actions difficult, and thus it is possible to suppress the setting goto action.

The 19th to 22nd embodiments have been described above, but these embodiments are not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
A. Nineteenth Embodiment (1) In the nineteenth embodiment, a setting confirmation end sound when the setting confirmation state is ended may be output. For example, it may be possible to output the voice "The setting confirmation is completed."
Furthermore, if the game starts at the same time as the setting confirmation state ends,
a) The output of the setting confirmation end sound is finished before the end of the game when the game is finished in the shortest time.
b) The output of the setting confirmation end sound is ended before the end of the game when the game is ended in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game is finished in the average time of one game in the special winning game (in the case of slot machine 10) or the jackpot (in the case of Pachinko gaming machine 500) , Output the setting confirmation end sound.
It can be cited as follows.

(2) Further, at the same time as the end of the setting confirmation state, the effect lamp 21 (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the effect lamp 541 (in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500) outputs an effect indicating that the setting confirmation state is ended. May be. Also in this case, as in the nineteenth embodiment, the effect time by the lamp is
a) The lamp effect is finished before the end of the game when the game is finished in the shortest time.
b) The lamp effect is ended before the end of the game when the game is ended in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game is finished in the average time of one game in the special winning game (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the jackpot (in the case of the Pachinko gaming machine 500) , Lamp production ends.
There are such things.

(3) When the setting change state is ended (or when the setting confirmation state is ended as in the above example), the setting change (or confirmation) end sound and the lamp effect are output. The (or confirmation) end sound and lamp effect are controlled by the sub-control board 80 or 540.
However, not limited to this, when ending the setting change (or confirmation) state, an output indicating that the setting change (or confirmation) state is ended is executed by the output device controlled by the main control board 50 or 530. You may.

(4) In the slot machine 10, the setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152) and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is separate from the main control board 50. Alternatively, a setting change board may be provided, and the setting key insertion opening 151 (setting key switch 152), the setting change (reset) switch 153, and the set value display LED 73 may be provided on the setting change board.
The same applies to the pachinko gaming machine 500. A setting change board is provided separately from the main control board 530, and a setting key insertion opening 534 (setting key switch 535), a setting change (reset) switch 536, and a set value display LED 537 are provided on the setting change board. Good.

(5) As an example of outputting the sound "End setting change" as the setting change end sound, it is not necessarily limited to this wording. For example, "Update setting value" etc. It may be.
(6) In the nineteenth embodiment, an example is shown in which the game is started immediately after the end of the setting change state, but it is assumed that the game is started immediately after the end of the setting change state during actual hall business. I haven't. For example, it is assumed that the hall manager tries to digest one game after changing the settings. In such a case, while confirming that the setting change state has been correctly ended by the setting change end sound and the output of the effect lamp, do not confuse the notification by the setting change end sound and the effect lamp with the effect output in the game. One of the goals is to

B. Twentieth Embodiment (1) In the twentieth embodiment, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are brought into contact with each other to be slidable. However, there are various methods of engaging the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 before the sliding movement, and the engaging method is not limited to that shown in FIG. 108. Further, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may have a shape that allows them to overlap with each other with a certain degree of freedom when they are overlapped. Alternatively, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may have a shape that overlaps only at a specific position.

(2) How to arrange the connectors 539a to 539h on the main control board 530, and which connector foot is set to be exposed when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are provisionally fitted to each other. , And various methods.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide as in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the first exposed legs of the connector are the connector legs 539g′ and 539h′. Therefore, in the case of the connector 539a provided on the main control board 530 at a position symmetrical with the connectors 539g and 539h, the connector foot is not exposed even if the slide movement amount increases.

Therefore, for example, on the main control board 530, from the connector 539a side (left side in the figure) in FIG. 103, a connector important in terms of security (a connector having a signal line for starting, a signal for receiving and paying out the game medium) A connector having a wire, a connector having a signal wire relating to the output of an external signal, and a connector having a signal wire relating to performance) are sequentially arranged, and the connector of the signal wire which is not so important in terms of security is adopted as the connectors 539g and 539h. It can be mentioned.

(3) Although the substrate case 550 has the caulking portions 562 and 572 as an example, the present embodiment can be applied to the substrate case 550 having no caulking portion. For example, the board case that houses the sub-control board 540 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 may not have the caulking portion, but the 20th embodiment can be applied to such a board case.

C. Twenty-first Embodiment (1) The types and numbers of connectors and the types and numbers of harnesses (connector terminals) shown in the above-described embodiments are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these.
For example, in FIG. 111, the harnesses B and C may all be composed of thick lead wires, or all of them may be composed of thin lead wires.
Further, although the harness E shows an example in which only the thin lead wires are arranged in one row, it may be a harness and a connector terminal in which the thin lead wires are arranged in two or more rows.
Furthermore, the harness and the connector terminals may be in any number of rows, and the number of lead wires (terminals) in one row may be any number.
Furthermore, in a harness in which a thick lead wire and a thin lead wire are mixed in one row, the number of thick lead wires in the row may be one or more, and the number of thin lead wires may be one or more.

(2) In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, a set of lead wires connected to one connector of the main control board 530 is defined as “one harness”.
For example, the harness G connected to the connector 539g is one harness, and the harness H connected to the connector 539h is one harness. When the harness G and the harness H are bundled into one at the end, it is referred to as a "harness group" and not as "one harness".

(3) When the main control board 530 and another board are connected by a harness, a specific connector is mounted on the main control board 530, and a harness of N lead wires is attached to the specific connector. Assume that the connector terminals are connected.
On the other hand, on the other end side of the harness, N lead wires are divided into Nx lead wires (Nx≧1) and Ny lead wires (Ny≧1), and the connector terminals X are attached to the tips of the Nx lead wires, The connector terminal X is connected to another board, and a connector terminal Y (≠connector terminal X) is attached to the tip of the Ny lead wires, and the connector terminal Y is connected to another board (Nx leads). It is assumed that the wire is connected to the same board as the board to which the wire is connected or a different board).
In this case, “one harness” in the present embodiment refers to a set of N lead wires connected to the main control board 530 side.

D. Twenty-second Embodiment (1) In the Pachinko gaming machine 500, it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on. However, like the slot machine 10, the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on. It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation state with. Also in this case, it is possible to judge whether or not the frame opening switch 523 is on and shift to the setting confirmation state on condition that it is on.

(2) As described above, it is conceivable that a setting change board is provided separately from the main control board 50 or 530. In this case, in the case of the slot machine 10, the setting is changed to the open axis side (close to the open axis) of the front door 12 inside the housing, in other words, to the side away from the open end as seen from the player side. It is preferable to arrange the substrate. Similarly, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, it is set on the hinge mechanism 503 side (close to the hinge mechanism 503) on the back side of the front frame 502, in other words, on the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. It is preferable to place a modified substrate. With this arrangement, the setting key insertion ports 151 and 534 and the setting change (reset) switches 153 and 536 can be arranged at positions far from the open end. Even in this case, it is preferable that the main control board 50 or 530 is arranged at a position far from the open end.

Particularly, the management information display LEDs 74 or 538 are mounted on the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, but it is preferable that the information displayed by the management information display LEDs 74 or 538 is not easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable that the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 is arranged at a position away from the open side, and the main control board 50 or 530 is also arranged at a position away from the open end.
However, the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 is not easily visible only by disposing the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, at a position away from the open side. Is also possible. Similarly, even when the management information display LEDs 74 or 538 are mounted at the substantially central position of the main control board 50 or 530, respectively, the management information can be obtained by simply disposing the main control board 50 or 530 at a position away from the open end. It is also possible that the information displayed by the display LEDs 74 or 538 is not easily visible.

E. All of the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification including the nineteenth to twenty-second embodiments are not limited to be implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
The twenty-third embodiment relates to an effect lamp (decorative lamp section) 541.
Here, “substantially the same” is a concept that includes, although they are substantially the same, they are not completely the same due to manufacturing errors or the like, and those that are not the same but look the same in appearance. Further, “substantially the same” is a concept including “the same”.
The description of the 23rd embodiment partially overlaps with that of the 19th embodiment (B), but will be described again.
114 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 500, and FIG. 115 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 500 as viewed from the front side (player side).

FIG. 116 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed, and FIG. 117 is the upper side of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the right base member 650 with parts removed, as viewed from the right side, and FIG. 118 is a rear view of the right base member 650 with upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. Is.

FIG. 119 is a front upper enlarged view of the right base member 650 in a state where the upper portions of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 are removed, and FIG. 120 is a diagram showing the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622. FIG. 121 is an enlarged perspective view of an upper part of the right base member 650 with the upper part of FIG. 121 removed, and FIG. 121 is a right base member with the upper parts of the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the right frame lamp cover 622 removed. It is a left side upper part enlarged view of 650.

FIG. 122 is an enlarged top bottom view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed, and FIG. 123 is an enlarged sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 119.
FIG. 124 is a front view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613, the upper portions of the right frame lamp cover 622 and the right frame lamp substrate 621 removed, and corresponds to FIG. 116.
FIG. 125 is an enlarged rear view of the right base member 650 with the upper frame lamp cover 613 removed and the right frame lamp cover 622 attached.
FIG. 126 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the pachinko gaming machine 500 includes a rectangular frame-shaped outer frame 501 fixed to an island (not shown), and a front frame 502 attached to the front side of the outer frame 501. Equipped with.
Further, in the center of the front frame 502, a game board 504 is attached with a game area (not shown) facing the front side, and on the front side of the front frame 502, the front side of the front frame 502. A glass door (glass frame) 505 is attached so as to cover the game area of the game board 504.

Furthermore, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508 and the like are attached to the front side of the front frame 502 and below the glass door 505.
Further, a hinge mechanism 503 is provided on the left side of the outer frame 501.
The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 by the hinge mechanism 503 so as to be openable and closable, and the glass door 505 is attachable to the front frame 502 by the hinge mechanism 503.

A lock device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the front frame 502, and a key insertion opening 521 into which a key for operating the lock device is inserted is provided on the right side of the glass door 505. ..
Then, when the front frame 502 is closed with respect to the outer frame 501, a key is inserted from the key insertion opening 521 and the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502 are unlocked. The hinge mechanism 503 can be opened (moved) forward (on the player's side) with respect to the outer frame 501 with the central axis.

Further, when the front frame 502 is opened with respect to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, the glass door 505, the upper plate 506, the lower plate 507, the firing handle 508, and the like attached to the front frame 502 move forward. With the frame 502, the hinge mechanism 503 is used as a central axis to move forward with respect to the outer frame 501.
Note that when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, whereby the opening of the front frame 502 is detected.

Further, when the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502 and a key is inserted through the key insertion opening 521 and the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are unlocked, the glass door 505 The hinge mechanism 503 can be opened forward with respect to the front frame 502 about the central axis.
It should be noted that when the glass door 505 is opened, the door opening switch 522 (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)) is turned on, whereby the opening of the glass door 505 is detected.

In the game area of the game board 504, a starting opening 532, a special symbol display device 531 and an image display device 543 are provided (see FIG. 99 of the nineteenth embodiment (B)).
Furthermore, in the center of the glass door 505, two transparent glass plates (not shown) are arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, and the upper part of the front side of the glass door 505, the right side part, and An effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 is attached to the left side portion so as to surround the periphery of the glass plate.
Further, when the glass door 505 is closed with respect to the front frame 502, the glass plate is located in front of the game area of the game board 504. As a result, the gaming area of the gaming board 504 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 500 through the glass plate.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 includes an upper frame lamp portion 610 disposed along the front upper edge of the glass door 505 and a front right edge of the glass door 505. The right frame lamp portion 620 arranged along the left side of the glass door 505 and the left frame lamp portion 630 arranged along the left edge of the front surface of the glass door 505.

That is, the upper frame lamp portion 610 is a decorative lamp portion that is horizontally long and extends from the vicinity of the right end to the vicinity of the left end of the upper portion of the front surface of the glass door 505.
The right frame lamp part 620 is a vertically long decorative lamp part that extends from near the upper end to near the lower end of the right side of the front surface of the glass door 505.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp part 630 is a vertically long decorative lamp part extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the front surface of the glass door 505.

Further, the right end of the upper frame ramp 610 and the upper end of the right frame ramp 620 are continuous, and the left end of the upper frame ramp 610 and the upper end of the left frame ramp 630 are continuous.
As a result, the glass plate arranged in the center of the glass door 505 has its upper edge, right edge, and left edge surrounded by the upper frame lamp section 610, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630. ..

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the upper frame lamp portion 610 includes an upper frame right side lamp substrate 611, an upper frame left side lamp substrate 612, and an upper frame lamp cover 613.
The upper frame right lamp board 611 is a connector 642a to which a light emitting element (also referred to as a “light emitting means”) for causing the right side of the upper frame lamp section 610 to emit light and a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are connected. Are mounted on the right side of the upper front part of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the light emitting element facing the front side (player side).

The upper frame left lamp board 612 is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for emitting light on the left side of the upper frame lamp section 610 and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the left side of the upper front surface of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface of the element facing the front surface side.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 116, 119 and 120, four LEDs 641a to d are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper frame right lamp board 611. Although not shown, the upper frame left side lamp board 612 is also mounted with four LEDs as light emitting elements similarly to the upper frame right side lamp board 611. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.

The full-color LED has three LEDs, one that emits red light, one that emits green light, and one that emits blue light. By adjusting the output of these three LEDs, full-color LEDs can be expressed. It is a thing.
That is, a light emitting element that emits red light, a light emitting element that emits green light, and a light emitting element that emits blue light are provided. By adjusting the output of these three light emitting elements, it is possible to express full color. The means is a full color LED.

Further, the light emitting element mounting surfaces of the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are formed in white.
Specifically, a white coating film is formed on the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612. The white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or silk screen printing (also referred to as silk printing or screen printing).

The upper frame lamp cover 613 is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left side lamp substrate 612, and as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the front surface of the glass door 505. It is attached to the top.
The upper frame lamp cover 613 has a horizontally long shape extending from the vicinity of the right end to the vicinity of the left end of the front upper portion of the glass door 505, and is formed of a colorless and translucent resin.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 613 faces the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame right lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left lamp substrate 612. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 is applied to the upper frame lamp cover 613. Accordingly, when the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 emit light, the upper frame lamp cover 613 looks shiny.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is formed of a colorless and translucent resin. Therefore, through the upper frame lamp cover 613, the mounting surfaces of the light emitting elements on the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 and the upper frame left side lamp substrate 612 can be seen through. Therefore, when the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 is formed of, for example, green or black, the appearance of the upper frame lamp section 610 becomes poor when the light emitting element is turned off. When the light emitting element emits light, it may emit light in a color different from the set color and appear.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 is made white. Thus, even if the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 can be seen through the upper frame lamp cover 613, the appearance of the upper frame lamp section 610 should not be deteriorated. You can
Also, by forming the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame right side lamp board 611 and the upper frame left side lamp board 612 in white, the light emitted from the light emitting element is covered by the upper frame lamp cover on the mounting surface of the light emitting element. Efficiently reflects toward the 613 side. As a result, the upper frame lamp cover 613 can be made to shine brighter. Furthermore, by forming the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element in white, the color development of the light emitting element can be seen clearly. In particular, when the light emitting element emits light, it can be made to appear to emit light in the set color.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the right frame lamp section 620 includes a right frame lamp board 621 and a right frame lamp cover 622.
The right frame lamp board 621 is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the right frame lamp section 620 to emit light and a connector 642c to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element is connected are mounted. It is arranged on the right side of the front surface of the glass door 505 with the mounting surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the right side portion of the front surface of the glass door 505.
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, seven LEDs 641e to k are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper portion of the right frame lamp board 621. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs as light emitting elements are also mounted on the lower portion of the right frame lamp board 621. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in white. Forming a white coating film by coating or silk-screen printing a white resist on the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621 is the same as the upper frame right lamp board 611.

The right frame lamp cover 622 is a lamp cover that covers the front surface side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 621, and is attached to the front right portion of the glass door 505, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115.
The right frame lamp cover 622 has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the right side of the front surface of the glass door 505, and is made of a colorless and translucent resin.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 622 faces the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 621. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 is applied to the right frame lamp cover 622. Accordingly, when the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 emits light, the right frame lamp cover 622 looks shiny.

By forming the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp substrate 621 in white, the right frame lamp section 620 is prevented from being unattractive and the light emitted from the light emitting element is emitted from the right frame lamp. The efficient reflection of light toward the cover 622 side to make the right frame lamp cover 622 look brighter and the color of the light-emitting element to be seen clearly is described above. Is the same as.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the left frame lamp portion 630 includes a left frame lamp substrate 631 and a left frame lamp cover 632.
The left frame lamp board 631 is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left frame lamp section 630 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are connected are mounted. The glass door 505 is arranged on the left side of the front side with its surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the left frame lamp substrate 631 is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from near the upper end to near the lower end on the left side of the front surface of the glass door 505.
Further, although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the left frame lamp substrate 631. All of these LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 631 is formed in white. Forming a white coating film by coating or silk-screen printing a white resist on the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 631 is the same as the upper frame right lamp substrate 611.

The left frame lamp cover 632 is a lamp cover that covers the front surface side (player side) of the left frame lamp substrate 631 and is attached to the front left side portion of the glass door 505, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115.
The left frame lamp cover 632 has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end on the left side of the front surface of the glass door 505, and is made of a colorless and translucent resin.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 632 faces the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 631. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 is applied to the left frame lamp cover 632. Thus, when the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 emits light, the left frame lamp cover 632 looks shiny.

By forming the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 631 in white, the appearance of the left frame lamp portion 630 is not deteriorated, and the light emitted from the light emitting element is emitted from the left frame lamp. The efficient reflection of light toward the cover 632 side to make the left frame lamp cover 632 look brighter and the color of the light emitting element to be seen more clearly are described above in the upper frame lamp section 610. Is the same as.

The glass door (glass frame) 505 includes a right base member 650 (see FIGS. 116 to 121) and a left base member (not shown).
The right base member 650 is a member serving as a skeleton of the right side portion of the glass door 505, and the left base member is a member serving as a skeleton of the left side portion of the glass door 505. Further, the left base member is formed in a shape that is substantially symmetrical with the right base member 650. The right base member 650 and the left base member form the skeleton of the glass door 505.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, the upper frame right board mounting portion 651 to which the upper frame right lamp board 611 is mounted and the right side portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 are mounted on the upper front surface of the right base member 650. The upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 is provided.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, on the right side of the front surface of the right base member 650, a right frame substrate mounting portion 653 to which the right frame lamp substrate 621 is attached and a right frame to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached. A cover mounting portion 654 is provided.

Further, although not shown, an upper frame left board mounting portion to which the upper frame left lamp board 612 is mounted and an upper frame left cover mounting portion to which the left side portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is mounted are provided on the upper front surface of the left base member. Is provided.
Further, although not shown, a left frame substrate mounting portion to which the left frame lamp substrate 631 is mounted and a left frame cover mounting portion to which the left frame lamp cover 632 is mounted are provided on the left front surface of the left base member. ..

Then, the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the upper frame lamp cover 613, the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, the upper frame left board mounting portion (not shown), the upper frame right cover mounting portion 652, An upper frame lamp section 610 is composed of the upper frame left side cover mounting section (not shown).
As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached so as to straddle the upper front surface of the right base member 650 and the upper front surface of the left base member 650.
Further, the right frame lamp board 621, the right frame lamp cover 622, the right frame board mounting portion 653, and the right frame cover mounting portion 654 form a right frame lamp portion 620.
Further, the left frame lamp board 631, the left frame lamp cover 632, the left frame board mounting portion (not shown), and the left frame cover mounting portion (not shown) constitute a left frame lamp portion 630.

The upper frame right board mounting portion 651 is a portion to which the upper frame right lamp board 611 is mounted, and is provided on the upper front surface of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS. 120 to 122.
As shown in FIGS. 120 to 122, the upper frame right board mounting portion 651 is provided with a board supporting rib 661a having a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp board 611. The board supporting rib 661a is for supporting the upper frame right lamp board 611. When the upper frame right lamp board 611 is arranged at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, the outer peripheral edge of the upper frame right lamp board 611 is placed on the board supporting rib 661a.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 116, 117, 119 and 120, the upper frame right side substrate mounting portion 651 is provided with three positioning bosses 682a to 682c. These positioning bosses 682a to 682c are used when positioning the upper frame right lamp board 611 at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, and are formed in a columnar shape.
Further, as shown in FIG. 123, the upper frame right board mounting portion 651 is provided with a screw boss 681. The screwing boss 681 is used when fixing the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. A screw hole 684 is provided at the center of the screw stop boss 681.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, a positioning hole 685a is provided in a position corresponding to the positioning boss 682a on the upper frame right lamp board 611. The positioning hole 685a is a hole into which the positioning boss 682a is inserted when the upper frame right lamp board 611 is positioned at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, and is located on one side of the upper frame right lamp board 611. It penetrates from the surface to the surface on the other side.
Further, as shown in FIG. 123, a fixing hole 686a is provided at a position corresponding to the screwed boss 681 on the upper frame right lamp board 611. The fixing hole 686a is a hole used when fixing the upper frame right lamp board 611 to the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, and from the one surface to the other surface of the upper frame right lamp board 611. Penetrates.

When the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a from the side opposite to the LED 641a mounting surface of the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame right lamp board 611 is positioned at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651. At this time, the position of the screw hole 684 provided at the center of the screw boss 681 and the position of the fixing hole 686a match. Then, a screw 683a is inserted into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611, and this screw 683a is screwed into the screw hole 684, so that the upper frame right lamp board 611 is attached to the upper frame right board. It is fixed to the portion 651.

As shown in FIG. 123, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a are provided close to each other.
In this embodiment, the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a is set to be larger than the diameter of the positioning boss 682a. The fixing hole 686a is formed in a circular shape, and the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the screw shaft 688 of the screw 683a.

Furthermore, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an elliptical shape, the minor diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the positioning boss 682a, and the major diameter of the positioning hole 685a is the same as that of the screw 683a. The diameter is set larger than the diameter of the screw shaft 688.
Further, the opening area of the positioning hole 685a and the opening area of the fixing hole 686a are set to be different. In this embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set to be larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.

As described above, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a have different shapes and different opening areas. Accordingly, when the upper frame right side lamp board 611 is fixed to the upper frame right side board mounting portion 651, it is possible to prevent the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a from being mistaken, and the assembling work proceeds smoothly. I am allowed to do so.
Further, since the minor diameter of the positioning hole 685a is set smaller than the diameter of the screw shaft 688, the screw shaft 688 cannot be inserted into the positioning hole 685a, which also fixes the positioning hole 685a. The holes 686a are not mistaken.

Further, when the positioning boss 682a is inserted into the positioning hole 685a and the upper frame right lamp board 611 is positioned at a predetermined position of the upper frame right board mounting portion 651, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the positioning boss 682a Of the LED projects on the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611. The tip of the positioning boss 682a protruding toward the mounting surface side of the LED 641a is referred to as a protruding portion 687. The protruding portion 687 is formed in a convex curved surface shape (dome shape). As a result, the light emitted from the LED 641a is reflected by the protruding portion 687 formed in the convex curved surface shape, so that the upper frame lamp portion 610 can be seen to shine neatly.

Further, a screw 683a is inserted into the fixing hole 686a from the mounting surface side of the LED 641a in the upper frame right lamp board 611, and the screw 683a is screwed into the screw hole 684, so that the upper frame right lamp board 611 is changed to the upper frame right board. When fixed to the mounting portion 651, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is exposed on the mounting surface side of the LED 641a on the upper frame right lamp board 611.
Then, as shown in FIG. 123, the height T1 of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set to be larger than the height T2 of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a.

That is, when the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is “T1” and the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is “T2”, “T1>T2” is set to be satisfied. ..
That is, the screw head 689 is set to have a larger height from the LED 641a mounting surface than the LED 641a.

Further, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is subjected to a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 641a. Specifically, as a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LED 641a, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is plated with silver. Examples of silver plating include silver plating, chrome plating, nickel plating, tin plating, tin cobalt plating, and zinc plating.

In this way, the height of the screw head 689 from the mounting surface of the LED 641a is set to be larger than the height of the LED 641a from the mounting surface of the LED 641a, and the screw head 689 is subjected to a surface treatment for reflecting light to emit light from the LED 641a. The emitted light is reflected by the screw head 689 of the screw 683a, so that the upper frame lamp portion 610 can be seen to shine neatly.

The upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 is a part to which the right side portion of the upper frame lamp cover 613 is mounted, and is provided on the upper front surface of the right base member 650 as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120.
Further, the upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662a. The cover fitting groove 662a is a groove into which the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 fits, and is formed along the upper edge of the right base member 650. Then, by fitting the upper edge of the upper frame lamp cover 613 into the cover fitting groove 662a and screwing the upper frame lamp cover 613 from the back surface side of the right base member 650, the upper frame lamp cover 613 is attached to the upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652. Fixed to.

The right frame board mounting portion 653 is a portion to which the right frame lamp board 621 is mounted, and is provided on the right front surface of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 124.
Further, as shown in FIG. 124, the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 is provided with substrate supporting ribs 661b to 661e having a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp substrate 621. The board supporting ribs 661b to 661e support the right frame lamp board 621. When the right frame lamp board 621 is placed at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653, the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621 is placed on the board supporting ribs 661b to 661e.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 116, 117, 119, and 120, the right frame lamp board 621 is provided with a positioning hole 685b and a fixing hole 686b in close proximity to each other.
The positioning hole 685b is a hole into which a positioning boss is inserted when positioning the right frame lamp board 621 at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion 653, and is located from one surface of the right frame lamp board 621 to the other side. It penetrates to the surface.
The fixing hole 686b is a hole used when fixing the right frame lamp board 621 to the right frame board mounting portion 653, and penetrates from one surface of the right frame lamp board 621 to the other surface thereof. ..

Although not shown, a positioning boss is provided at a position corresponding to the positioning hole 685b in the right frame substrate mounting portion 653, and a screwing boss is provided at a position corresponding to the fixing hole 686b. ing. Then, when the positioning boss provided on the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 is inserted into the positioning hole 685b, the right frame lamp substrate 621 is positioned at the predetermined position of the right frame substrate mounting portion 653. Then, a screw is inserted into the fixing hole 686b from the mounting surface side of the LEDs 641e to k on the right frame lamp board 621, and this screw is screwed to the screwing boss provided on the right frame board mounting portion 653. The board 621 is fixed to the right frame board mounting portion 653.
Note that, in FIGS. 116, 117, 119, and 120, the positioning boss and the screw are not shown in order to make the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b easy to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, in the present embodiment, both the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are formed in a circular shape. Furthermore, the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686b is set larger than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 685b. Therefore, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b is different from the opening area of the positioning hole 685b. Specifically, the opening area of the fixing hole 686b is set larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685b.
Accordingly, when the right frame lamp board 621 is fixed to the right frame board mounting portion 653, the positioning hole 685b and the fixing hole 686b are not mistaken so that the assembling work can be smoothly performed. ..

The right frame cover attachment portion 654 is a portion to which the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached, and is provided on the front right side portion of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. 119, 120, and 124.
Further, the right frame cover mounting portion 654 is provided with a cover fitting groove 662b. The cover fitting groove 662b is a groove into which the right end edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 fits, and is formed along the right end edge of the right base member 650.

Then, when the right edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 is fitted into the cover fitting groove 662b and the right frame lamp cover 622 is screwed from the back surface side of the right base member 650, as shown in FIGS. The cover 622 is fixed to the right frame cover mounting portion 654.
As shown in FIGS. 118 and 125, the left edge (edge on the game board 504 side) of the right frame lamp cover 622 covers the outside of the left edge (edge on the game board 504 side) of the right base member 650. Is formed.

Further, as described above, the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape (see FIG. 116), and the right frame board mounting portion 653 has a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621. (See FIG. 124). The width W1 in the lateral direction of the right frame lamp board 621 (FIG. 116) is substantially the same as the width W2 in the lateral direction of the right frame board mounting portion 653 (FIG. 124).
That is, when the width of the right frame lamp board 621 in the lateral direction is “W1” and the width of the right frame board mounting portion 653 in the lateral direction is “W2”, the setting is made so that “W1≈W2” is satisfied. Has been done. As a result, the right frame lamp board 621 covers the right frame board mounting portion 653.

The entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in white. By covering the right frame board mounting portion 653 with such a right frame lamp board 621, light emission on the right frame lamp board 621 is achieved. The entire mounting surface of the element can be made to function as a reflection plate, whereby the color development of the light emitting element can be seen clearly.
The "substantially rectangular shape" means "approximately rectangular shape". Therefore, as long as it has an approximately rectangular shape, for example, irregularities may be present in the middle of the long side or the short side, and all or part of the long side or the short side may be curved or inclined. Further, the corners may not be right angles, and the corners may be rounded. Further, “substantially rectangular” is a concept including “rectangle”.

Further, the right frame substrate mounting portion 653 is formed in a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp substrate 621, and the right frame cover mounting portion 654 further extends along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame substrate mounting portion 653. Has been formed. An edge of the right frame lamp cover 622 on the right frame cover mounting portion 654 side is formed in a shape along the outer peripheral edge of the right frame lamp board 621.
Therefore, when the right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the right frame board attachment portion 653 and the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached to the right frame cover attachment portion 654, the entire surface inside the right frame lamp cover 622 is the right frame lamp. It appears to be covered by the substrate 621. Therefore, even if the molding color of the right base member 650 is not white (for example, black), the entire inner surface of the right frame lamp cover 622 looks white, and the light emitting element appears to emit light neatly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a lens portion 670 is provided in the right frame lamp cover 622 at a position facing the right frame lamp substrate 621. Then, as shown in FIGS. 126A and 126B, the lens portion 670 is configured by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness.
FIG. 126(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622, and FIG. 126(b) is another partial cross-sectional view of the lens portion 670 of the right frame lamp cover 622. Showing.

As shown in FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b), the lens portion 670 has the same wall thickness at every location, but has different curvature depending on the location.
As described above, by forming the lens portion 670 into a shape in which curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same wall thickness are joined together, the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 622 is reduced, The light emitted from the light emitting element can be seen clearly.
Note that the upper frame lamp cover 613 and the left frame lamp cover 632 also have a lens portion at a position facing the lamp substrate, and curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same wall thickness are joined together. The shape is similar to that of the right frame lamp cover 622.

Further, as described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the pachinko gaming machine 500 has a main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10, and the slot machine 10. A sub control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 corresponding to the sub control board 80 and a payout control board (prize ball control board) 520 are provided.
The main control board 530 controls the progress of the game, the sub control board 540 controls the output of the effect, and the payout control board 520 controls the operation of the payout device 524. All of these control boards are harness-connected.

Further, the sub-control board 540, the upper frame right side lamp board 611, the upper frame left side lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are connected by harness.
Then, the sub control board 540 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on these lamp boards.
Note that connectors mounted on these lamp boards are used for harness connection between the sub control board 540 and these lamp boards.

Specifically, the sub control board 540 is connected to the main control board 530, determines the effect contents based on the command transmitted from the main control board 530, and controls to output the decided effect. At this time, the sub control board 540 controls the light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631.
The sub-control board 540 includes a sub-main board that controls the overall effect and a sub-sub board that controls the image display of the image display device 23.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), on the main control board 530, a start opening switch 533 for detecting that a game ball has won a start opening 532 provided in the game area of the game board 504. Are connected (see FIG. 99). When the game ball wins the starting opening 532 and detects that the starting opening switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value and executes various lottery based on the acquired random number value, and a special symbol display device. The variable display of the special symbol in 531 is started. Then, the main control board 530, based on the results of the various lottery, determines the variation time and the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 and the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 to correspond to the determination. Control the display.

Specifically, the main control board 530 continues to determine whether or not a game ball has been won into the starting opening 532 (the starting opening switch 533 has been turned on) (step S741 in FIG. 102). Then, when it is determined that the start opening switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random number value, and based on the acquired random number value, a jackpot lottery (lottery whether it is a jackpot or a lottery), a special symbol. The lottery (lottery of which symbol the stop symbol of the special symbol is made to be) is performed, and the variation pattern lottery (lottery of the time during which the special symbol is variably displayed) is executed (step S742 of FIG. 102).
In addition, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating at least a part of the lottery results to the sub control board 540 when the above-mentioned various lottery is executed. When the sub-control board 540 receives the command indicating the lottery result, the sub-control board 540 controls the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Specifically, the main control board 530, when the big hit in the big hit lottery, sends a command (big hit command) indicating that the big hit has been made to the sub control board 540.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the jackpot command, the sub-control board 540 hits the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 with a big hit. The light emission pattern corresponds to.
Further, as the light emission pattern corresponding to the big hit, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of “0” to “255”. As a result, the light emitting element can be made to emit light in a so-called rainbow color, and the player can be informed that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery.

Further, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 is formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element in the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, when the light emitting element emits a rainbow color at the time of a big hit, the color of the light emitting element can be seen clearly.
When the jackpot is hit, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 may be made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the jackpot, and light emission mounted on all the lamp boards. The elements may be made to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to a big hit.

When a big hit occurs, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the big hit, and the right frame lamp board 621, and The light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 631 may be made to emit white light.
By setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520 (see FIG. 99).
When the glass door 505 is opened, the door opening switch 522 is turned on, and its signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When detecting that the door opening switch 522 is turned on, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating that the door opening switch 522 is turned on (door opening command) to the sub control board 540.
Upon receiving the door opening command, the sub control board 540 causes the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to turn white. Control to emit light.

Further, when the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal thereof is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on (frame opening command) to the sub control board 540.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the frame opening command, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 are turned white. Control to emit light.

As described above, by setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is caused to emit white light, so that the glass door 505 or the front frame is opened. The clerk in the hall can be notified that 502 is open.

Further, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 is formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element in the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, when the light emitting element is made to emit white light, it is conspicuous, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened.

Note that when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, the light-emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may emit white light. Good.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the opening of the glass door 505 or the front frame 502.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the game ball wins the starting opening 532 and it is detected that the starting opening switch 533 is turned on, the main control board 530 acquires a random value and based on the acquired random value. , Jackpot lottery (lottery or lottery lottery), special symbol lottery (lottery of which symbol to stop the special symbol), variable pattern lottery (lottery of the time to display the special symbol variable) Together with this, the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 531 is started.

Further, the main control board 530, based on the results of the above-mentioned various lottery, determines the variation time and the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 531 and special in the special symbol display device 531 to correspond to the determination. Controls the display of symbols.
Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the game ball wins the starting opening 532, and when it is detected that the starting opening switch 533 is turned on, one game starts, and the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 531 ends. One game can be finished when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating at least a part of the lottery results to the sub control board 540 when the above-mentioned various lottery is executed. When the sub-control board 540 receives the command indicating the lottery result, the sub-control board 540 controls the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.
Specifically, the main control board 530 transmits to the sub-control board 540 a command indicating that there is a deviation (missing command) when there is a deviation in the jackpot lottery.

Further, when the sub-control board 540 receives the detachment command, the sub-control substrate 540 executes an effect pattern lottery for the detachment (lottery of selecting one of the effect pattern 1 and the effect pattern 2).
Then, the sub-control board 540 is mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 in a mode according to the result of the effect pattern lottery. The light emitting element is caused to emit light, and the red LED mounted on the decorative board on the game board 504 is controlled to emit light.

127 (a) and (b) show an effect pattern when there is a deviation in the jackpot lottery, (a) is a time chart showing an effect pattern 1 at the time of deviation, and (b) shows Is a time chart showing an effect pattern 2 at the time of departure.
127A and 127B, "LED1" indicates LEDs 641e to 641k (all are full-color LEDs) mounted on the right frame lamp board 621, and "LED2" is on the upper frame right lamp board 611. The LEDs 641a to 641d (all are full color LEDs) are shown.

Further, in FIGS. 127A and 127B, “LED3” indicates one red LED mounted on a board included in the decoration on the game board 504, and “LED4” indicates decoration on the game board 504. 2 shows another red LED mounted on a substrate included in the. The mounting surface of the red LED on the board included in the decoration on the game board 504 is configured in green.

In this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol is set to 10 seconds both when the effect pattern 1 is determined and when the effect pattern 2 is determined.
As shown in FIG. 127(a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 1 (LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) is turned on (turned on) at the same time when the special symbol starts changing. , Turns off (off) before the end of fluctuation of special symbols. Further, in the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 2 (LEDs 641a to 641d mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611) is turned on after the start of the variation of the special symbol. Before the end of the variation of the special symbol, the LED 1 is turned off at the same time that the LED 1 is turned off. Further, in the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 2 is set to 1 second.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 3 (one red LED mounted on the board provided in the decoration on the game board 504) changes in the special symbol. It lights up after the start and goes out before the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, in the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 3 is set to 2 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127(a), when the effect pattern 1 is determined, the LED 4 (the other red LED mounted on the board provided in the decoration on the game board 504) starts changing the special symbol. After that, the LED3 is turned on at the same time as the lighting, and before the end of the variation of the special symbol, the LED2 is turned off at the same time as the lighting. Moreover, in the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 127(b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 1 is turned on at the same time as the change of the special symbol is started and the change of the special symbol is ended, as in the case where the effect pattern 1 is determined. Turn off before. Further, also in the effect pattern 2, as in the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 1 is set to 6 seconds.
Further, as shown in FIG. 127(b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 2 does not light up, unlike when the effect pattern 1 is determined. Therefore, in the effect pattern 2, the lighting time of the LED 2 is 0 second.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127(b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 3 is turned on after the start of the change of the special symbol and before the end of the change of the special symbol, and the LED 1 is turned off. At the same time, it goes out. Further, in the effect pattern 2, the lighting time of the LED 3 is set to 4 seconds.
Further, as shown in FIG. 127(b), when the effect pattern 2 is determined, the LED 4 is lighted at the same time as the lighting of the LED 3 after the start of variation of the special symbol, and from the end of variation of the special symbol. It is turned off before the LED 3 is turned off. Also in the effect pattern 2, as in the effect pattern 1, the lighting time of the LED 4 is set to 3 seconds.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the jackpot lottery is misaligned, either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined by the effect pattern lottery, and the LEDs 1 to 4 are caused to emit light according to the determined effect pattern. Control.
The LED 1 is turned on (emits light) for 6 seconds regardless of whether the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined.
Therefore, the average value of the time when the LED 1 is turned on (emits light) in the game which is out of alignment in the jackpot lottery is 6 seconds.

The LED 2 is turned on for 1 second when the effect pattern 1 is determined, and is not turned on when the effect pattern 2 is determined.
For this reason, the average value of the time for which the LED 3 is turned on in the game that has been misaligned in the jackpot lottery is 1 second or less.
Furthermore, the LED 3 is turned on for 2 seconds when the effect pattern 1 is determined, and is turned on for 4 seconds when the effect pattern 2 is determined.
For this reason, the average value of the time for which the LED 4 is turned on in the game that has been misaligned in the jackpot lottery is 2 seconds or more and 4 seconds or less.

Further, the LED 4 is turned on (emits light) for 3 seconds regardless of whether the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is determined.
For this reason, the average value of the time for which the LED 4 is turned on in the game which has been misaligned in the jackpot lottery is 3 seconds.
As described above, the average value of the time for which the LED 1 is turned on in the game which is deviated in the jackpot lottery is set longer than the average value of the time for which the LEDs 2 to LED 4 are turned on in the game which is deviated in the jackpot lottery.

As described above, the entire mounting surface of the LEDs 641e to 641k on the right frame lamp board 621 is formed in white, and the right frame lamp cover 622 is formed of a colorless and translucent resin. For this reason, the light emission of the LED1 (LEDs 641e to 641k mounted on the right frame lamp board 621) can be seen clearly, and even in a game that is missed in the jackpot lottery, a beautiful effect using the LED1 can be shown. it can.

The twenty-third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the twenty-third embodiment, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 are made of a colorless and translucent resin, but the present invention is not limited to this.
The lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may have a colorless or white translucent portion.

Therefore, the entire lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be colorless and translucent, or may be entirely white and translucent.
In addition, in the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613, for example, only a portion corresponding to the front of the light emitting element is colorless and translucent, and the other portions are colored in red or blue. It may or may not have a light-transmitting property.
Further, in the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613, for example, only a portion corresponding to the front of the light emitting element is white and has a light-transmitting property, and the other portions are colored and transparent such as red and blue. It may have a light-transmitting property or may not have a light-transmitting property.

Further, all or a part of the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be configured to be visible in a color substantially the same as or similar to one emission color of the full-color LED as the light emitting means.
Specifically, for example, the LEDs 641e to 641k of the right frame lamp board 621 are set to have a blue (red (R) output value "0", a green (G) output value "0", and a blue (B) output value ". 255"), and the entire right frame lamp cover 622 is made of a blue resin that looks substantially the same color as when the LEDs 641e to 641k emit the above blue color, or a blue color that looks similar to the above blue color. It can be made of resin.

Due to a manufacturing error, the color of the right frame lamp cover 622 may be, for example, an output value “0” of red (R), an output value “0” of green (G), and an output value “250” of blue (B). The emission color may be the same as the emission color at the time, or the emission color at the output value "5" for red (R), the output value "5" for green (G), and the output value "255" for blue (B). It may be the same color as.
In consideration of such a point, "substantially the same color" is described.
Note that “substantially the same color” is a concept including “same color”. Further, “substantially the same color” is a concept that includes colors that are not completely the same color but that appear to be the same color in appearance.
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining about the same color using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE (International Commission on Illumination) standard color system (XYZ color system).
In FIG. 128, the range of “substantially the same color” as blue is shown by taking blue as an example.
In FIG. 128, black circles indicate blue (red (R) output value “0”, green (G) output value “0”, blue (B) output value “255”), and circles around the black circles. Shows an example of the range of "substantially the same color" as blue.

The “similar color” is a concept that does not include a target color but includes a color near the target color.
FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating similar colors using a chromaticity diagram based on the CIE standard color system.
In FIG. 129, the range of “similar color” of blue is shown by taking blue as an example.
In FIG. 129, white circles indicate blue (red (R) output value “0”, green (G) output value “0”, blue (B) output value “255”), and hatching around the white circles. The circle with is shown as an example of the range of blue “similar color”.

In addition, the range of blue “similar color” is not limited to the range of the circle in which hatching in FIG. 129 is displayed, and if it is a range that a general player recognizes as blue, blue “ The range can be "similar color".
For example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. 129, when the x-axis is in the range of 0 to 0.2 and the y-axis is in the range of 0 to 0.3, a general player is blue. Since it is a range to be recognized as, it can be set to a range of blue “similar color”.

The same applies to the range of "similar colors" other than blue.
For example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. 129, the general player is green within the range of 0 to 0.3 on the x axis and 0.6 or more on the y axis. Since it is a range to be recognized as, it can be set as a range of green “similar color”.
Further, for example, in the chromaticity diagram according to the CIE standard color system shown in FIG. 129, if the x-axis is 0.5 or more and the y-axis is in the range of 0.2 to 0.4, a general player Is a range that is recognized as red, and thus can be a range of red “similar color”.

Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element (light emitting means) on the lamp board such as the upper frame right lamp board 611 is white, but at least a part is substantially white. It should have been done.
For example, of the mounting surfaces of the LEDs 641a to 641d on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the peripheral portions of the LEDs 641a to 641d may be substantially white, and the outer peripheral edge portion of the upper frame right lamp board 611 may be black.
In addition, "substantially white" is a concept including "white". In addition, “substantially white” is a concept including a color that looks white when it is not completely white.

Even when at least a part of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in a color substantially the same as or similar to the color of light emitted by the light emitting means, at least a part of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate is substantially white. With this configuration, the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate can be seen through the lamp cover so that the appearance does not deteriorate, and the color of the light emitting means can be seen clearly. When the means emits light, it can be made to appear to emit light in a color as set.

(2) In the twenty-third embodiment, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a is set to be larger than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, but it is not limited to this.
For example, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a may be set smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a.
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a modified example of the AA line cross section of FIG. 119, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 123. As shown in FIG. 130, the diameter of the positioning boss 682a may be set larger than the inner diameter of the fixing hole 686a. In this case, the opening area of the fixing hole 686a becomes smaller than the opening area of the positioning hole 685a, and the positioning boss 682a cannot be inserted into the fixing hole 686a. Even in this case, the positioning hole 685a and the fixing hole 686a can be prevented from being mistaken.

(3) In the twenty-third embodiment, the positioning hole 685a is formed in an elliptical shape, but not limited to this, it may be formed in a circular shape, for example.
(4) In the twenty-third embodiment, the screw head 689 of the screw 683a is plated with silver as the surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 64d, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 641a to 64d, for example, white coating may be applied to the screw head 689 of the screw 683a.

(5) In the twenty-third embodiment, the upper frame lamp section 610 includes two sheets, the upper frame right side lamp board 611 and the upper frame left side lamp board 612, as the lamp boards, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, one sheet is provided. The lamp substrate may be provided alone, or three or more lamp substrates may be provided.
Further, the upper frame lamp cover 613 may be one member integrally formed, and, for example, the first member (upper frame right member) located in the right side portion and the second member located in the central portion. You may comprise from three members, a member (upper frame center member) and the 3rd member (upper frame left member) located in a left part.

(6) In the twenty-third embodiment, the right frame lamp section 620 includes only one right frame lamp board 621 as a lamp board, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include two or more lamp boards. ..
Further, the right frame lamp cover 622 may be one member integrally formed, and, for example, the first member (right frame upper member) located in the upper portion and the first member located in the lower portion may be provided. You may comprise from two members of 2 members (right frame lower member).

(7) In the twenty-third embodiment, the left frame lamp section 630 includes only one left frame lamp board 631 as a lamp board, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include two or more lamp boards. ..
That is, as described in the twenty-third embodiment and modifications (5) to (7), each of the upper frame lamp section 610, the right frame lamp section 620, and the left frame lamp section 630 has only one lamp board. It may be provided, or a plurality of lamp substrates may be provided.
Further, the left frame lamp cover 632 may be one member integrally formed, and, for example, the first member (left frame upper member) located in the upper portion and the first member located in the lower portion may be provided. You may comprise from two members of 2 members (left frame lower member).

In addition, for example, the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612 are attached to the upper front part of the glass door 505, and the upper frame lamp is covered so as to cover the upper frame right lamp board 611 and the upper frame left lamp board 612. The cover 613 may be attached to configure the upper frame ramp section 610.
Similarly, the right frame lamp board 621 is attached to the front right side of the glass door 505, and the right frame lamp cover 622 is attached so as to cover the right frame lamp board 621 to form the right frame lamp section 620. The left frame lamp board 631 may be attached to the left side of the front surface of the glass door 505, and the left frame lamp cover 632 may be attached to cover the left frame lamp board 631 to form the left frame lamp section 630.

That is, the effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 such as the right frame lamp portion 620 may be unitized, but a lamp board such as the right frame lamp board 621 is directly attached to a predetermined position of the glass door 505, and the lamp is The effect lamp 541 may be configured by directly attaching a lamp cover such as the right frame lamp cover 622 so as to cover the substrate.

(8) In the twenty-third embodiment, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like is caused to emit white light, and the glass door 505. Also, the opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the clerk in the hall.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like is caused to emit white light, and the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled. You can also let the clerk in the hall know that you are.

Here, although the description partially overlaps with that of the nineteenth embodiment (B), the setting change state and the setting confirmation state will be described.
As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 530 is provided with the setting key switch 535 having the setting key insertion opening 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 (see FIG. 99). ..

The setting key switch 535 is a switch which is turned on when a predetermined setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion opening 534 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, for example.
The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that serves both as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch operated when changing a set value in the setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated when the error that has occurred is removed and then the state before the error occurs is restored.

In the Pachinko gaming machine 500, the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 are turned on with the power switch 511 turned off (the power is off), and when the power switch 511 is turned on in this state, the setting is changed. Transition.
Specifically, when the power switch 511 is turned on, the main control board 530 determines whether the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on. Is determined (step S701 in FIG. 100).
When it is determined that the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is on (“Yes” in step S701 in FIG. 100), the setting change state is entered. (Step S702 of FIG. 100).

When the state is changed to the setting change state, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED.
In the setting change state, the set value is incremented by “+1” every time the setting change switch 536 is operated once. In the present embodiment, the set value has six stages from setting 1 to setting 6. In the setting change state, the setting value is changed from “1” to “2” each time the setting change switch 536 is operated once. → → → "5" → "6" → "1" → ... cyclically changes.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is confirmed and the setting change state ends.

When the power switch 511 is turned off, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the reset switch 536 is turned off, and the power switch 511 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is entered.
Specifically, when the main control board 530 determines that the transition condition to the setting change state is not satisfied when the power switch 511 is turned on (“No” in step S701 of FIG. 100), the next First, it is determined whether the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off (step S703 in FIG. 100).

When it is determined that the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off (“Yes” in step S703 of FIG. 100), the setting confirmation state is entered. (Step S704 of FIG. 100).
In the setting confirmation state, the set value cannot be changed, but the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED. This makes it possible to confirm the current set value.
Then, when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

In addition, when shifting to the setting change state, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting change start command) indicating the shift to the setting change state to the sub control board 540.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change start command, the sub-control board 540 causes the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to be mounted. , Control to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting change state (setting change end command) to the sub control board 540.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, the sub-control board 540 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting change state (step S702 in FIG. 100) continues, and when the setting change state ends, the white light emission of the light emitting element ends.

Further, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 530 transmits a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating that the setting control state has been shifted to the sub control board 540.
Upon receiving the setting confirmation start command, the sub control board 540 causes the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to turn white. Control to emit light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 530 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation end command) to the sub control board 540.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the setting confirmation end command, the sub-control board 540 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting confirmation state (step S704 in FIG. 100) continues, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the white light emission of the light emitting element ends.

As described above, by setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, by making the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board such as the upper frame right side lamp board 611 emit white light, it is possible to control that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled. You can inform the staff.

Further, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 is formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element in the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, when the light emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

When the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may emit white light. Good.

Further, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the light emitting element is made to blink when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened and when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened. The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different between when the light emitting element is turned on and when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, the condition for shifting to the setting change state is not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 and the reset switch 536 with the power switch 511 turned off, and turning on the power switch 511 in this state.
For example, the setting key switch 535 may be turned on while the power switch 511 is off, and the power switch 511 may be turned on in this state as a condition for shifting to the setting change state. In other words, the fact that the reset switch 536 is on does not have to be a condition for shifting to the setting change state.

Furthermore, the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state is not limited to turning on the setting key switch 535 with the power switch 511 turned off, turning on the power switch 511 with the reset switch 536 turned off.
For example, turning on the setting key switch 535 while the power switch 511 is on may be a condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state.

(9) In the twenty-third embodiment, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like is caused to emit white light, and the glass door 505 is displayed. Also, the opening of the front frame 502 is notified to the clerk in the hall.
Further, in the above modification (8), in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like is caused to emit white light to control the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. I tried to let the clerk in the hall know that.
However, the present invention is not limited to these, and for example, when returning from a power failure, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like is caused to emit white light to indicate that the clerk at the hall is in the process of returning from a power failure. You can also let us know.

As described in the nineteenth embodiment (B), in the pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when the power is restored from the power failure), the processing according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 100 is executed. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when returning from power failure.
When the power switch 511 is turned off (when the power is off), the main control board 530 stores the information when the power is off in the RWM.
In addition, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when returning from power failure), the main control board 530 determines whether the information at the time of recovery from the power failure matches the information at the time of power failure. (Step S707 of FIG. 100).

Then, when the information at the time of recovery from the power failure matches the information at the time of the power failure, it is determined that the RWM is normal (“Yes” in step S707 of FIG. 100), and the status recovery process is executed. (Step S708 of FIG. 100).
On the other hand, when the information at the time of recovery from the power failure does not match the information at the time of the power failure, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal (“No” in step S707 of FIG. 100) and the RWM clear processing is executed ( Step S709 of FIG. 100).

Further, the state restoration process (step S708 of FIG. 100) is a process of returning the solenoid state, the state of the special symbol display device 531 and the like to the state at the time of power off.
Furthermore, the RWM clear process (step S709 of FIG. 100) is a process of clearing the data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM (processing of initializing the predetermined storage area). If the setting change process (step S702 in FIG. 100) is executed or if it is determined that the RWM is abnormal (“No” in step S707 in FIG. 100), then the RWM clear process is executed.

Further, when the setting confirmation state ends, the state return process (step S708 of FIG. 100) is executed, or the RWM clear process (step S709 of FIG. 100) is executed, the process of permitting the timer interrupt (FIG. Step S710 of 100 is executed.
Then, when the process of permitting the timer interrupt is executed, the series of processes executed at the time of returning from the power failure is ended.

Further, when the power switch 511 is turned on (when returning from power failure), the main control board 530 transmits a command (power recovery start command) indicating that recovery from power failure to the sub control board 540. ..
When the sub-control board 540 receives the power restoration start command, the sub-control board 540 causes the light-emitting elements mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611, the upper frame left lamp board 612, the right frame lamp board 621, and the left frame lamp board 631 to be mounted. , Control to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the process of permitting the timer interrupt is executed, the main control board 530 sends to the sub control board 540 a command (power supply return end command) indicating that a series of processing to be executed at the time of returning from power-off is completed. Send.
Then, when the sub-control board 540 receives the power recovery end command, the sub-control board 540 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light during execution of a series of processing when returning from power failure, and when the series of processing executed when returning from power failure ends, the light emitting element emits white light. Ends.

As described above, by setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
Further, at the time of returning from the power failure, the light emitting element mounted on the lamp board such as the upper frame right side lamp board 611 emits white light to notify the clerk of the hall that the power is being recovered. it can.

Further, the lamp cover such as the upper frame lamp cover 613 is formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element in the lamp substrate such as the upper frame right side lamp substrate 611 is white. Therefore, when the light emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, and it is possible for the clerk in the hall to easily notice that the recovery from the power failure is in progress.
It should be noted that during the recovery from power-off, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 621 and the left frame lamp board 631 may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may emit white light. Good.

Further, during the recovery from the power failure, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the recovery from the power failure.
Furthermore, when the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element is blinked during the recovery from the power cut, the glass door is used. The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be different when the 505 or the front frame 502 is opened, when the setting is changed or checked, and when the power is turned off.

(10) In the twenty-third embodiment and modifications (8) to (9), when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, or When the power is turned off, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame right lamp board 611 or the like is caused to emit white light, and the glass door 505 and the front frame 502 are opened, and the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are set. The clerk in the hall is notified that it is under control or is recovering from a power failure.

However, the emission color of the light emitting element is not limited to white. For example, when it is detected that the door opening switch 522 or the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled, or when the power is turned off, the upper frame right lamp board 611 is mounted. The light emitting element that is emitting light may be emitted in a color that does not emit light during a normal game.

In addition, a specific red color, for example, can be given as a color that does not emit light during a normal game. Further, as a specific red color, for example, when the output value of red (R) is set to “255” and each output value of green (G) and blue (B) is set to “0”, the light emitting element is The red color emitted can be mentioned. Such a red color is a red color that does not emit light during a normal game, and when the light emitting element emits light with such a red color, it is conspicuous. Therefore, the glass door 505 or the front frame 502 is open, the setting change state or The clerk in the hall can easily notice that the control is being performed in the setting confirmation state or the power supply is being restored.

(11) In the twenty-third embodiment, the effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 541 in which the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white is described by taking the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500 as an example. The twenty-third embodiment can be applied to the case where the gaming machine is the slot machine 10.
FIG. 131 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10 according to the modified example of the twenty-third embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).
The following description partially overlaps with the seventh embodiment (FIG. 22), but will be described again.

As shown in FIG. 131, the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 having an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached to the front side of the cabinet 13 such that the opening can be opened and closed.
A door sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the front door 12 is provided at a predetermined position of the cabinet 13. When the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, whereby the opening of the front door 12 is detected.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22 of the seventh embodiment, a symbol display device 14 in which three reels 31 are arranged side by side is arranged inside the cabinet 13, and a symbol display inside the cabinet 13 is performed. A main control board 50 housed in a main board case 56 is arranged at a position above the device 14.
The main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, a RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, a door sensor, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a sub-control board 80, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51 or an output port 52. ing.

A transparent display window (not shown) is provided at the center of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. As a result, the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 can be respectively viewed from the front side of the slot machine 10 through the display window.
On the front side (player side) of the front door 12 and below the display window, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal slot 47, etc. are arranged. ..

Furthermore, the image display device 23 is arranged on the upper part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, and the effect lamp (decorative lamp part) is arranged on the upper part, the right side part and the left side part of the front door 12. ) 21 is attached.
Further, a sub control board 80 housed in a sub board case 87 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23 on the upper side of the back surface of the front door 12.

The sub-control board 80 controls the effect, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, a RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like. Further, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, and the like are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Then, the sub-control board 80 determines, based on the command received from the main control board 50, what kind of effect should be output at what timing, and according to the decision, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image. The output of the display device 23 is controlled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the effect lamp (decorative lamp portion) 21 has an upper frame lamp portion 26 arranged along the front upper edge of the front door 12 and a front right edge of the front door 12. The right frame ramp portion 27 is arranged and the left frame ramp portion 28 is arranged along the front left edge of the front door 12.
That is, the upper frame lamp portion 26 is a decorative lamp portion that is horizontally long and extends from the vicinity of the right end to the vicinity of the left end of the upper portion of the front surface of the front door 12.
The right frame lamp portion 27 is a vertically long decorative lamp portion that extends from near the upper end to near the lower end of the right side of the front surface of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp portion 28 is a vertically long decorative lamp portion extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the left side portion of the front surface of the front door 12.

As shown in FIG. 131, the upper frame lamp section 26 includes an upper frame lamp board 26a and an upper frame lamp cover 26b.
The upper frame lamp board 26a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the upper frame lamp section 26 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are connected are mounted. The front side of the front door 12 is arranged on the upper front side with the surface facing the front side (player side).
Further, the upper frame lamp board 26a is formed in a horizontally long shape from the vicinity of the right end of the front upper portion of the front door 12 to the vicinity of the left end.

Further, although not shown, eight LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the upper frame lamp board 26a. All of these eight LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame lamp board 26a is formed in white. Specifically, like the example of the pachinko gaming machine 500 of the twenty-third embodiment, a white coating film is formed on the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the upper frame lamp board 26a. The white coating film is formed by applying a white resist or silk screen printing.

The upper frame lamp cover 26b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the upper frame lamp board 26a, and is attached to the upper front part of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the upper frame lamp cover 26b has an oblong shape extending from the vicinity of the right end to the vicinity of the left end of the front upper portion of the front door 12, and is made of a colorless and translucent resin.
Further, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a is applied to the upper frame lamp cover 26b.

As shown in FIG. 131, the right frame lamp section 27 includes a right frame lamp board 27a and a right frame lamp cover 27b.
The right frame lamp board 27a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the right frame lamp section 27 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are connected are mounted. The front side of the front door 12 is arranged on the right side of the front door 12 with its surface facing the front side (player side).

Further, the right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end on the right side of the front surface of the front door 12.
Further, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the right frame lamp board 27a. All of these 16 LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is formed in white, like the upper frame lamp board 26a.

The right frame lamp cover 27b is a lamp cover that covers the front side (player side) of the right frame lamp board 27a, and is attached to the front right part of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the right frame lamp cover 27b has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end of the right side portion of the front surface of the front door 12, and is formed of a colorless and translucent resin.
Further, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a is applied to the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As shown in FIG. 131, the left frame lamp section 28 includes a left frame lamp board 28a and a left frame lamp cover 28b.
The left frame lamp board 28a is a lamp board on which a light emitting element for causing the left frame lamp section 28 to emit light and a connector to which a harness for transmitting a control signal to the light emitting element are connected are mounted. The front side of the front door 12 is arranged on the left side of the front side with the surface facing the front side (player side).

The left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending from near the upper end of the left side of the front surface of the front door 12 to near the lower end thereof.
Further, although not shown, 16 LEDs are mounted as light emitting elements on the left frame lamp board 28a. All of these 16 LEDs are full-color LEDs.
Further, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp board 28a is formed in white, like the upper frame lamp board 26a and the right frame lamp board 27a.

The left frame lamp cover 28b is a lamp cover that covers the front surface side (player side) of the left frame lamp board 28a, and is attached to the front left side portion of the front door 12.
Furthermore, the left frame lamp cover 28b has a vertically long shape extending from the vicinity of the upper end to the vicinity of the lower end on the left side of the front surface of the front door 12, and is formed of a colorless and translucent resin.
Further, the light emitted from the light emitting element mounted on the left frame lamp board 28a is applied to the left frame lamp cover 28b.

Then, as in the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, the upper frame lamp cover 26b, the right frame lamp cover 27b, and the left frame lamp cover 28b are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the upper frame lamp is By forming the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a in white, the top frame lamp section 26, the right frame lamp section 27, and the left frame lamp section 28 look good. The color of the light emitting element is made to look beautiful while preventing the deterioration.

Further, although not shown, a right frame substrate mounting portion to which the right frame lamp substrate 27a is mounted and a right frame cover mounting portion to which the right frame lamp cover 27b is mounted are provided on the front right side portion of the front door 12. ..
Further, the right frame lamp board 27a is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the right frame lamp board 27a in the lateral direction is substantially the same as the width of the right frame board mounting portion in the lateral direction. Has been done. Thus, the right frame lamp board 27a covers the right frame board mounting portion.

The entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is formed in white. By covering the right frame board mounting portion with such a right frame lamp board 27a, the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a is formed. The entire mounting surface of can be made to function as a reflection plate, and thus the color development of the light emitting element can be seen clearly.

Similarly, a left frame substrate mounting portion to which the left frame lamp substrate 28a is mounted and a left frame cover mounting portion to which the left frame lamp cover 28b is mounted are provided on the left side of the front surface of the front door 12.
Further, the left frame lamp board 28a is formed in a vertically long substantially rectangular shape, and the width of the left frame lamp board 28a in the lateral direction is substantially the same as the width of the left frame board mounting portion in the lateral direction. Has been done. Thus, the left frame lamp board 28a covers the left frame board mounting portion. The entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the left frame lamp substrate 28a is made to function as a reflector so that the color of the light emitting element can be seen clearly.

Further, similarly to the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, a positioning boss is inserted into the right frame lamp board 27a when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion. The fixing hole and a fixing hole used when fixing (screwing) the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting portion are provided close to each other. The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different. As a result, the positioning hole and the fixing hole are not mistaken so that the assembling work can proceed smoothly.

Further, the positioning boss has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the mounting surface side of the light emitting element when the right frame lamp board 27a is positioned at a predetermined position of the right frame board mounting portion.
That is, the positioning boss is inserted into the positioning hole from the side opposite to the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a, and the tip of the positioning boss projects to the light emitting element mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a. The tip of this positioning boss is called a protrusion. This protrusion is formed in a convex curved surface shape (dome shape). As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the protruding portion formed in the convex curved surface so that the right frame lamp portion 27 can be seen to shine neatly.

Further, as in the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, when fixing the right frame lamp board 27a to the right frame board mounting section, the right frame board mounting section is mounted from the light emitting element mounting surface side of the right frame lamp board 27a. Secure with screws. At this time, the screw head is exposed on the mounting surface side of the light emitting element on the right frame lamp board 27a. The height of the screw head from the light emitting element mounting surface is set higher than the height of the light emitting element from the light emitting element mounting surface.

Further, as in the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, the screw head is subjected to a surface treatment for reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting element.
As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the screw head, so that the right frame lamp section 27 can be seen to shine neatly.

Further, as in the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, a lens portion is provided in the right frame lamp cover 27b at a position facing the right frame lamp board 27a. The lens portion is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness. This reduces the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the right frame lamp cover 27b and allows the light emission of the light emitting element to be seen clearly.
It should be noted that the upper frame lamp cover 26b and the left frame lamp cover 28b also have lens portions at positions facing the lamp substrate, and the lens portions are formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same wall thickness. The shape is similar to that of the right frame lamp cover 27b.

As described above, the slot machine 10 includes the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.
In addition, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are connected in a harness, and the information (command) necessary for the output of the effect can be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 in one direction. There is.

Further, the sub-control board 80, the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a are connected by a harness.
Then, the sub control board 80 determines the effect contents based on the command transmitted from the main control board 50, and controls to output the decided effect. At this time, the sub control board 80 controls light emission of the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a.

Further, when the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Then, when this signal is input to the main control board 50, the role lottery means 61 obtains a random number value, performs the lottery of the winning number based on the obtained random number value, and the reel control means 65, All the motors 32 are drive-controlled to control all the reels 31 to rotate.

After that, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When this signal is input to the main control board 50, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 so as to correspond to the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61. The rotation of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is stopped.
Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the symbol combination when all reels 31 are stopped. At this time, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the activated line, the winning of the winning combination is achieved, and the medals corresponding to the winning combinations are paid out.

When the lottery means 61 performs the lottery, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the lottery result to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command corresponding to the lottery result, the sub-control board 80 is mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a so as to correspond to the lottery result. Control the light emission of the device.

Specifically, when the winning number corresponding to the special combination is won by the combination lottery means 61, the main control board 50 transmits a command (special combination command) indicating that to the sub-control board 80.
When the special control command is received, the sub control board 80 causes the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the special role. Make it glow.
In addition, as the light emission pattern corresponding to the special role, each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element is changed in a predetermined pattern within the range of “0” to “255”. .. As a result, the light emitting element can be caused to emit light in a so-called rainbow color, and the player can be informed that the special role has been won.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is white. Therefore, when the special role is won, the color of the light emitting element can be seen clearly by causing the light emitting element to emit rainbow color.
When the special role is won, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may be caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a may be made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to a special role, and the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may be made to emit a pattern corresponding to a special role. You may make it light-emit.

When the special role is won, the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a are caused to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the special role and mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a. The light emitting element that emits light may emit white light.
By setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.

Further, as described above, the door sensor is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door sensor is turned on, and the signal is input to the main control board 50. .. Then, when the main control board 50 detects that the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a command (door opening command) to that effect to the sub control board 80.
Upon receiving the door opening command, the sub control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. As a result, the clerk in the hall can be notified that the front door 12 is open.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is white. Therefore, when the light emitting element is made to emit white light, it is conspicuous, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the front door 12 is opened.
Note that when the front door 12 is open, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may emit white light. Good.
Further, when the front door 12 is opened, the light emitting elements may be blinked in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the opening of the front door 12.

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the start switch 41 is operated while a prescribed number of medals are bet, one game is started, all reels 31 are stopped, and medals are paid out. At times, one game may end.
Furthermore, when the winning combination lottery means 61 results in non-winning, the main control board 50 transmits a command (non-winning command) to that effect to the sub-control board 80.

Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the non-winning command, the sub-control board 80 executes the effect pattern lottery at the time of non-winning (lottery of either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2).
Then, the sub-control board 80 causes the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit light in a mode according to the result of the effect pattern lottery, and displays The red LED mounted on the substrate included in the decoration around the window is controlled to emit light.

FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b) show the effect pattern when the hand lottery means 61 is non-winning, and FIG. 132(a) is a time chart showing the effect pattern 1 at the time of non-winning, (B) is a time chart showing the effect pattern 2 at the time of non-winning.
In FIGS. 132A and 132B, “LED1” indicates an LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a, and “LED2” indicates an LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a.
In FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b), "LED3" indicates one red LED mounted on the substrate included in the decoration around the display window, and "LED4" is included in the decoration around the display window. Figure 4 shows another red LED mounted on a board. The mounting surface of the red LED on the substrate included in the decoration around the display window is formed in green.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 132(a) and 132(b), "reel rotation start" indicates when the reel 31 starts rotation. “First stop operation” indicates when the first stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped first is operated (turned on)). The “second stop operation” indicates when the second stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped second is operated (turned on)). The “third stop operation” indicates when the third stop operation is performed (when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped last is operated (turned on)). “Payout” indicates a time of processing such as payout of medals.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), in the game that is not won by the role lottery means 61, when the effect pattern 1 is determined in the effect pattern lottery, the LED 1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a) is selected. ) Is turned on (turned on) at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and is turned off (turned off) at the second stop operation.
Further, in the effect pattern 1, the LED 2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) lights up after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and turns off during the second stop operation. To do. Further, LED1 and LED2 are turned off at the same time.

Furthermore, in the effect pattern 1, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reel 31 but before the first stop operation, and turns off during the first stop operation. ..
Further, in the effect pattern 1, the LED 4 (the other red LED around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. It goes out before the second stop operation. Moreover, LED3 and LED4 light simultaneously. Furthermore, the LED 4 is turned off at the same time that the LED 2 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 132(b), in the game that is not won by the role lottery means 61, when the effect pattern 2 is determined in the effect pattern lottery, the LED 1 (the LED mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a is used. ) Is turned on (turned on) at the start of rotation of the reel 31 and turned off (turned off) at the second stop operation, as in the case where the effect pattern 1 is determined.
Further, in the effect pattern 2, the LED 2 (the LED mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a) does not light up, unlike when the effect pattern 1 is determined.

Furthermore, in the effect pattern 2, the LED 3 (one red LED around the display window) lights up after the start of rotation of the reel 31 but before the first stop operation, and turns off during the second stop operation. .. Further, the LED1 and the LED3 are turned off at the same time.
Further, in the effect pattern 2, the LED 4 (the other red LED around the display window) is after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, as in the case where the effect pattern 1 is determined. Lights up after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation. Moreover, LED3 and LED4 light simultaneously.

In this way, in the game which is not won by the role lottery means 61, either the effect pattern 1 or the effect pattern 2 is decided by the effect pattern lottery, and the light emission of the LEDs 1 to 4 is controlled according to the decided effect pattern. ..
The LED 1 is turned on at the start of rotation of the reel 31 and turned off at the second stop operation in both the effect pattern 1 and the effect pattern 2.
Further, the LED 2 lights up in the effect pattern 1 after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation, and turns off during the second stop operation, but does not light in the effect pattern 2.

Furthermore, the LED 3 lights up in the effect pattern 1 after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and turns off in the first stop operation, and in the effect pattern 2, the LED 3 lights up. It lights up after the start of rotation and before the first stop operation, and goes out during the second stop operation.
Further, in both the effect pattern 1 and the effect pattern 2, the LED 4 lights up after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the first stop operation, and after the first stop operation. The light is turned off before the second stop operation.

From the above, the average value of the time when the LED1 is turned on in the game which is not won by the role lottery means 61 is set longer than the average value of the time when the LEDs 2 to LED4 are turned on in the game which is not won by the role lottery means 61. Has been done.
Since the entire LED mounting surface of the right frame lamp board 27a is formed in white and the right frame lamp cover 27b is made of colorless and translucent resin, the LED 1 (right frame lamp board) is formed. Since the light emission of the LED mounted on 27a can be seen clearly, it is possible to show a beautiful effect using the LED 1 even in a game in which the winning combination lottery means 61 has not been won.

Further, even when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, as in the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a or the like in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. By emitting white light, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.
In the slot machine 10, when the setting key switch is turned on in the power-off state (power-off state) and the power is turned on in this state, the setting change state is entered (step S212 in FIG. 38).

When shifting to the setting change state, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73.
In the setting change state, the setting value is updated (“+1”) each time the setting change switch is operated (step S240 to step S241 in FIG. 38).
When the start switch 41 is operated in the setting change state (“Yes” in step S242 in FIG. 38), the set value is confirmed and the setting key switch is turned off (“Yes” in step S243 in FIG. 38). The setting change status ends.

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the setting key switch is turned on while the power is on, the setting confirmation state is entered.
Further, while the setting value cannot be changed in the setting confirmation state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. This makes it possible to confirm the current set value.
Then, when the setting key switch is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when shifting to the setting change state, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting change start command) indicating that the setting change state has been shifted to the sub control board 80.
Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the setting change start command, it controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. To do.

Furthermore, when the setting change state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting change state (setting change end command) to the sub control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the setting change end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting change state continues (during the setting change process of FIG. 39), and when the setting change state ends, the white light emission of the light emitting element ends.

Further, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 transmits a command (setting confirmation start command) indicating the shift to the setting confirmation state to the sub control board 80.
Upon receiving the setting confirmation start command, the sub control board 80 controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light.

Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the end of the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation end command) to the sub control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the setting confirmation end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the setting confirmation state continues, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the white light emission of the light emitting element ends.

As described above, by setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, by making the light-emitting element mounted on the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a emit white light, it is possible to confirm that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled in the hall. You can inform the clerk.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is white. Therefore, when the light emitting element emits white light, it is conspicuous, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

When the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 28a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may emit white light. Good.

Further, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is opened, and when the light emitting element is made to blink when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, when the front door 12 is open, The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be different from that in the case of being controlled to the state or the setting confirmation state.

Even when the gaming machine is the slot machine 10, as in the case where the gaming machine is the Pachinko gaming machine 500, when the power is restored, the light emitting element mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a or the like is white. It is possible to inform the clerk in the hall that the power is being restored after the power is turned off.
Here, in the slot machine 10, when the power is turned off (when the power is off), the main control board 50 executes the power off process shown in FIG. 54.

Further, when the power is turned on (when the power is restored from the power failure), the main control board 50 executes the power restoration processing shown in FIG.
Furthermore, when starting the power recovery process, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating that (power recovery start command) to the sub control board 80.
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the power recovery start command, it controls the light emitting elements mounted on the upper frame lamp board 26a, the right frame lamp board 27a, and the left frame lamp board 28a to emit white light. To do.

Further, when ending the power restoration process, the main control board 50 sends a command (power restoration end command) to that effect to the sub control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the power recovery end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the control for causing the light emitting element to emit white light.
As a result, the light emitting element continues to emit white light while the power recovery process of FIG. 40 is being executed, and when the power recovery process of FIG. 40 is finished, the white light emission of the light emitting element is completed.

As described above, by setting the output values of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) of the light emitting element to "255", the light emitting element can emit white light.
In addition, by letting the light-emitting elements mounted on the lamp board such as the upper frame lamp board 26a emit white light during the execution of the power recovery process, the hall clerk can be informed that the power recovery process is being executed. it can.

Further, the lamp covers such as the upper frame lamp cover 26b are formed of a colorless and translucent resin, and the entire mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate such as the upper frame lamp substrate 26a is white. Therefore, when the light emitting element is made to emit white light, it is conspicuous, so that the clerk in the hall can easily notice that the power restoration process is being executed.
It should be noted that during the execution of the power recovery process, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards may emit white light. Therefore, only the light emitting elements mounted on the right frame lamp board 27a and the left frame lamp board 27a may emit white light, or the light emitting elements mounted on all the lamp boards may emit white light. Good.

Further, during the execution of the power restoration process, the light emitting element may blink in a predetermined pattern corresponding to the execution of the power restoration process.
Furthermore, the front door 12 is opened when the front door 12 is open, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, and when the light emitting element is blinked during execution of the power recovery process. The blinking pattern of the light emitting element can be made different depending on whether it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state and during the power restoration process.

(12) In the twenty-third embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 500 is given as an example of the gaming machine, and in the modified example (11), the slot machine 10 is given as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine is not limited to these.
For example, in a parrot as a game machine, an enclosed game machine (medalless game machine), and a casino machine, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate included in the decorative lamp section is configured to be white, and the decorative lamp section is provided. By forming the lamp cover with a colorless or white resin having a light-transmitting property, the light emission of the light emitting element can be seen clearly.
The “parrot” is a slot machine that uses game balls as a game medium.

(13) The first to twenty-third embodiments, and the various modifications shown in the first to twenty-third embodiments are not limited to be performed alone, but may be appropriately combined and performed.

<Appendix>
The inventions (original inventions) described in the initial description of the present application can include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 26, and in order to solve the problems to be solved by the original invention and the problems related to the original invention, respectively. The means and effects of the initial invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification does not mean that the inventions 1 to 26 are initially limited.

1. Original invention 1
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine in which a process related to a game medium is not executed after a power failure occurs.
In the conventional gaming machine, by turning off the blocker before executing the backup process as the power-off process, even if a medal is inserted during the execution of the backup process, the medal is returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, a technique is known in which the addition process of the medal is not performed (for example, JP-A-2005-173832).
However, for example, if the power is cut off at the moment when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power-off process is executed, and the medal will be counted. There was a possibility. It should be noted that it is not preferable in terms of control to execute the medal addition process (medal bet process or medal credit process) after the power is cut off.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the addition processing of the game medium from being executed even when the power is cut off at approximately the same time as when the game medium is inserted from the game medium insertion slot. ..

(B) Means for solving the problem of invention 1 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (first embodiment (A)) is
A game medium slot (medal slot 47),
It is provided in the passage (medal passage) of the game medium (medal) inserted from the game medium insertion port, and the state of permitting the passage of the game medium (ON state) or the state of disallowing the passage of the game medium (OFF state) ) Controllable blocker (45),
Detecting means A (insertion sensor 44a) and B (insertion sensor 44b) (detection means B provided downstream of the detection means A provided in the passage of the game medium input from the game medium input port and capable of detecting the game medium) Located at) and
From the time when the power supply is cut off in the situation where the blocker is controlled to permit the passage of the game medium, the power supply is cut off to detect the game medium. Let T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3) be the time until the blocker is controlled in a state in which passage is not permitted,
When the game medium is released from the game medium inlet toward the inside of the game machine while the blocker is controlled to allow passage of the game medium, the game medium is not visible from the front of the game machine. From when it becomes possible (the position of M2 in FIG. 2) until the detection means B detects the game medium and the detection means B stops detecting the game medium (the position of M4 in FIG. 2). When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3),
T1<T2
It is characterized in that

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, the power supply is cut off when the game medium is ejected from the game medium inlet toward the inside of the game machine and the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine. In that case, the blocker is controlled to a state in which the passage of the game medium is prohibited by detecting the event that the power supply is cut off by the time the detection unit B stops detecting the game medium. At least, it is not detected by the detecting means B.
Therefore, since the game medium is not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the game medium addition process (bet process or credit process) is not executed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine, that is, even if the power is cut off immediately after the game medium is released inside the game machine, the game is stopped. You can choose not to accept the medium. As a result, it is possible to prevent the addition processing of the game medium from being executed after the power is cut off.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 2 The initial invention relates to a gate mark of a board case in a gaming machine provided with a board case in which a control board is housed.
In a conventional game machine, a board case in which a main control board is housed is known. Here, since the substrate case is generally formed by molding, a gate mark remains on the substrate case. A technique in which this gate mark is used as a mark has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-042270).
However, since the gate mark on the substrate case has a resin cut portion, it is unclear from the outside. Therefore, there is a problem that the gate trace may be opened and the inside of the main control board may be accessed.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to suppress the goto action using the gate mark of the substrate case.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (second embodiment) is
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) having an arithmetic function,
A control board (main control board 50) having the predetermined IC mounted on one surface (a surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57);
A board case (a board case 56 including an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) having a plurality of surfaces (upper surface, side surface, etc.) and housing the control board;
The substrate case is formed so that the inside can be visually confirmed,
A gate trace (57b) at the time of molding of the substrate case is arranged on the surface outside the substrate case and facing the one surface of the control substrate (outer upper surface of the upper cover 57),
It is characterized in that the predetermined IC of the control substrate is not located in the direction perpendicular to the facing surface from the gate trace.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the initial invention, since the predetermined IC of the control board is not positioned in the vertical direction of the gate mark on the substrate case, the gate mark is illegally opened to access the predetermined IC. Can be prevented.
Further, since the gate mark of the substrate case does not exist in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control board, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being blocked by the gate mark. As a result, it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not a given IC has been tampered with.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 The initial invention relates to processing when communication is restored from a disconnection in communication between the main control board and the sub-control board.
In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine is known in which a command is transmitted from a main control board to a sub control board, and the sub control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received command.
Here, a technique is known in which the sub-control board compares the command received last time with the command received this time, and judges that the command reception is abnormal based on the consistency of the received commands (for example, Open 2014-226503).
However, when a command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board, disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when the communication is restored, the sub control board may not be able to output a normal effect.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to make an appropriate effect when communication is restored after a disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub control board.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Original Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment) is
A main control board (50),
A sub control board (80) for controlling the effect based on the information received from the main control board,
The sub control board can receive information on the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board,
In a predetermined game state (AT), the sub-control board is capable of outputting an effect corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on receiving information of the operated stop switch,
The sub control board,
In the case where a predetermined stop switch is operated in the "N" game in the predetermined game state, when the information on the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received, a predetermined operation corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. Output the effect (effect when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch is stopped), and then, before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated, the information from the main control board cannot be received. , Then, in the "N+a" game, information from the main control board can be received, and then in the "N+a" game, information is received that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch is operated. At this time, an effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and related to the predetermined effect (an effect following the predetermined effect, in which the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch is stopped) is output. Then, after that, when the predetermined information is received in the "N+a+1" game, the effect of the "N+a+1" game is output based on the predetermined information.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, when communication is restored in the middle of the “N+a” game, an effect related to the predetermined effect of the “N” game that has been output until then is output. Therefore, in the "N+a" game, the effect following the "N" game can be output. Then, since the normal effect is restored when the game shifts to the "N+a+1" game, it is possible to prevent the effect from being suddenly changed due to the return of communication in the middle of the "N+a" game. As a result, before and after the occurrence of the disconnection, it is possible to output an effect without a feeling of strangeness.

4. Original invention 4
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 4 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of operating a stop switch at high speed.
In the conventional gaming machine, when the stop switch is operated, the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to the lottery result. In addition, after stopping the reel at a predetermined position, the motor is energized for a predetermined time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the ON state or when the motor is in the excitation state, the operation of the next stop switch is not accepted.
Here, a technique is known in which, even after the second stop switch is operated, the stop operation is not accepted after the first stop switch is operated until the reel status changes to the stopped state ( See, for example, JP-A-2017-093576).
However, in the above-described conventional technique, if the time until the next operation of the stop switch becomes acceptable after the stop switch is operated, there is a problem that the game cannot be digested at high speed.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to operate the stop switch at high speed.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Original Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fourth embodiment) is
Reel (31),
A motor (32) for rotating the reel,
Reel control means (65) for driving and controlling the motor to stop the rotation of the reel based on the detection of the operation of the stop button (stop button 42a);
With internal drawing means (role drawing means 61),
A sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest part (the position shown in FIG. 12C), and the stop button is released when the stop button is released. The button is configured to be movable to an initial position (the position shown in FIG. 12A) by the biasing force, and the sensor is turned off before the stop button is moved to the initial position.
In the game in which the internal drawing means determines a predetermined result, the stop button is operated on a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under a situation where all reels are rotated by the reel control means, and the predetermined After detecting the ON state of the sensor of the stop button for the reel, the excited state (four-phase excited state) for stopping the predetermined reel is set, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) elapses from the excited state. When it is done, it is configured to end the excitation state,
When the time from the moment the push of the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released to the time when the sensor is turned off is T1 (T11 in FIG. 13) and the predetermined time is T2,
T1<T2
It is characterized in that

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is assumed that the start of the motor excitation state when the reel is stopped and the moment when the push of the stop button pushed to the deepest portion is released at the same time. Sometimes the excitation state ends after the sensor is turned off. Therefore, the next operation of the stop button can be accepted at the timing when the motor excitation state ends.

5. Original invention 5
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 The initial invention relates to control of the medal payout device.
It is known that, in a conventional gaming machine, it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-214434).
Here, a DC motor (direct current motor) is used as a hopper motor for rotating the hopper disk, and the DC motor gradually accelerates from a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped when a constant current is applied. After that, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates from the start of driving the hopper motor to the ejection of the first medal. The required time becomes longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor is rotating at a constant speed, which may give the player a feeling that the ejection of the first medal has been delayed.
The problem initially solved by the invention is to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the first medal has been delayed.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 5 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (sixth embodiment) is
A hopper (35) for storing medals,
A hopper disc (101) provided in the hopper,
A hopper motor (36) for rotating the hopper disc,
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the drive of the hopper motor,
The hopper disc is provided with a plurality of holding parts (102) capable of holding the medals stored in the hopper along the outer periphery of the hopper disc (eight).
When the hopper motor is driven to rotate the hopper disc, the medals held by the holding portion are sequentially discharged from the discharging portion (103),
The position of the holding unit that was holding the last ejected medal at the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process was ejected from the ejecting unit is the first position,
At the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejecting unit, the position of the holding unit that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is a second position,
When the control means finishes the one payout process, a state in which the holding unit holding the first discharged medal in the next payout process is positioned between the first position and the second position. Then, the drive of the hopper motor is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, when the holding unit that holds the first ejected medal stops between the first position and the second position, it reaches the first position. The distance is shorter than when stopped in the second position. As a result, the time required to reach the first position is shorter than when the vehicle stops at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor is gradually accelerated, the ejection of the first medal is delayed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling.

6. Original invention 6
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board mounted inside the cabinet and the sub-control board mounted on the back surface of the front door.
It is known that a conventional gaming machine is provided with an electrolytic capacitor for storing electricity on a sub-control board for controlling an effect (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-131656).
Here, although the electrolytic capacitor for storage of electricity is filled with the electrolytic solution, if the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a malfunction and the filled electrolytic solution is scattered and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, The main CPU may malfunction. In addition, the main CPU may be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor bursts.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if the electrolytic capacitor is ruptured due to a malfunction and the electrolytic solution is scattered. Further, even if the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a malfunction, the main CPU is not damaged by the impact at that time.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 6 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (seventh embodiment) is
A cabinet (13),
A front door (12) that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet;
A main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game,
And a sub-control board (80) for controlling production,
The main control board is mounted inside the cabinet,
The sub-control board is attached to the back surface of the front door,
The main control board and the sub-control board are arranged so as to face each other when the front door is closed,
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board,
The electrolytic capacitor (86) is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub control board.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the initial invention, the electrolytic capacitor is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub-control board. Even if is scattered, it is possible to prevent the scattered electrolytic solution from adhering to the main CPU, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
Further, even if the electrolytic capacitor ruptures, it is possible to prevent the main CPU from being directly affected by the impact, and thus it is possible to prevent the main CPU from being damaged.

7. Original invention 7
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to reel stop control on the main control board side and production output control on the sub control board side.
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effect contents, and each effect content when the special part is won (inside) and when the special part is not won (not inside) Are known with different selection probabilities (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-146608).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the effect contents are selected regardless of whether the drawing result of the internal drawing is selected, inside or outside.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the drawing result of the internal drawing.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 7 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The initial invention (the ninth embodiment) is
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols,
A plurality of stop switches (42) operated by the player when stopping each of the reels;
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game,
And a sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the effect,
The main control means,
An internal lottery that performs a lottery so as to have a case where the first lottery result (for example, “BB” alone wins in non-internal) or a second lottery result (for example, “non-win” in BB inside) occurs Means (role lottery means 61),
A plurality of stop position determination tables defining stop positions of the reels corresponding to positions of the reels at the moment when the stop switch is operated,
Reel control means (65) for determining the stop position of the reel using any one of the stop position determination tables and stopping the reel at the determined stop position,
The reel control means determines the stop position of the reel by using the same stop position determination table for the game that has the first drawing result and the game that has the second drawing result,
The sub control means,
A plurality of effect determination tables that determine the effect to be output,
And a production output control means (91) for determining the production to be output using one of the production determination tables and outputting the determined production.
The effect output control means determines an effect to be output by using different effect determination tables for a game having a first drawing result and a game having a second drawing result.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the initial invention, the reel control means stops at the same main control means side in the game in which the first drawing result is obtained in the internal drawing means and the game in which the second drawing result is obtained. Although the reel stop position is determined using the position determination table, the effect output control means on the side of the sub-control means determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table.
Thereby, even if the reel stop control is the same on the main control means side, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and the effects can be diversified.

8. Original invention 8
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 8 The initial invention relates to a gap between the cabinet and the front door.
In the conventional gaming machine, the edge of the front opening of the cabinet is provided with a projecting side projecting outward, and the projecting side is configured to be housed inside the front door when the front door is closed. As a result, it is known that the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign matter to enter (for example, JP-A-2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable that the front door is opened a little and the protruding side is disengaged from the front door to allow foreign matter to enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent a fraudulent act (goto act) of opening a front door a little and intruding a foreign substance through a gap between the cabinet and the front door.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Original Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (eighth embodiment) is
A cabinet (13),
A front door (12) that is openably and closably attached to the cabinet;
A door sensor for detecting opening of the front door,
A lower portion of the cabinet is provided with a first closing portion (13c) protruding toward the front door when the front door is closed,
A second closing portion (12a) protruding toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position below the first closing portion in the lower portion of the front door,
A lower part of the front door is provided at a position above the first closing part with a third closing part (12b) projecting toward the cabinet when the front door is closed,
In a state in which the front door is closed, the first closing portion is formed between the second closing portion and the third closing portion,
The detection start position is the position of the front door when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door,
Even when the front door is at the detection start position, the first closing part is formed between the second closing part and the third closing part.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closing portion and the third closing portion are separated. The first closed portion comes out from the space. Further, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it is possible to inform that the front door is open.
For this reason, before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open, the notification that the first door is open does not come out between the second closing part and the third closing part, and the front door is open. Even at a position where it is possible, the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a bent shape, so that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act (got action) of intruding a foreign substance through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Original invention 9
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine including an advantageous zone display.
Conventionally, a gaming machine including an advantageous zone display is known (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in the conventional gaming machine provided with the advantageous zone indicator, the lighting control of the advantageous zone indicator at the time of recovery from power failure has not been sufficiently studied.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately control the advantageous zone display at the time of recovery from power failure.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42),
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed,
An advantageous zone indicator (advantageous zone display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous zone,
After the power supply is cut off while the advantageous zone indicator is lit, when the power supply is resumed with the setting change switch in the off state, the advantageous zone indicator is displayed after the interrupt process is started. Enables processing for lighting,
Processing for turning off the advantageous zone indicator when the supply of power is resumed with the setting change switch turned on after the supply of power is cut off under the condition that the advantageous zone indicator is lit It is possible to shift to the setting change process after executing.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, the advantageous zone indicator can be appropriately controlled depending on the situation when the power is restored from the power failure.

10. Original invention 10
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine having four reels and a stop button.
A conventional game machine generally has three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
It has been proposed that the number of reels and stop buttons in the conventional game machine be set to four. However, if the number of stop buttons is set to 4, there is a problem that an operation error of the stop button is likely to occur during AT.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to make it difficult for an operation error of the stop button to occur when the number of stop buttons is four.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Original Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (thirteenth embodiment) is
4 reels (31A-31D),
With four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels,
Arrange a predetermined operation button (24) above the four stop buttons,
At least a part of the left end stop button (stop switch 42A) is positioned vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button,
At least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is positioned vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, even when the number of stop buttons is four, the stop buttons at the left and right ends can be operated with the left and right ends of the operation button as marks. , It is possible to prevent the operation mistake of the stop button from occurring.

11. Original invention 11
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of instructing a prescribed number.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of playing a game with a prescribed number out of a plurality of prescribed numbers (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in the conventional gaming machine, there are cases where an appropriate prescribed number and an inappropriate prescribed number occur even if the game can be played with any one prescribed number out of a plurality of prescribed numbers.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to make it possible to play a game in an appropriate prescribed number.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (twelfth embodiment) is
Equipped with a notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42),
When notifying the operation mode in the notification game state, information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (acquired number display LED 78),
In the notification game state, the game can be started when the game value of at least one of a plurality of specified numbers (“2” or “3”) is input.
In the notification game state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit,
In the information game state, when information corresponding to a prescribed number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, a predetermined timing from when all the reels have stopped until the start switch is detected (in FIG. 42). , In step S322),
When the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the predetermined display unit, it is displayed in a display mode that can be distinguished from the information corresponding to the operation mode (when the specified number is “2”, “0A” is displayed). Characterize.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the initial invention, since information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on, an appropriate timing for the player can be displayed. Thus, it is possible to notify an appropriate specified number in the game.
It is also possible for the player not to confuse the information corresponding to the operation mode with the information corresponding to the specified number.

12. Original invention 12
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 12 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter that counts the number of differences in the notification game state.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having a counter for counting the difference in AT is known (for example, see JP-A-2018-000797).
In the conventional gaming machine, it is required to initialize the information on the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. However, after the AT ends, the next AT may be elected early, and in some cases, it may be desired to take over the difference in the number of the previous AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it possible to take over the difference in the previous notification game state (AT) while initializing the information on the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42),
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed,
In the first control means (main control board 50), the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the bet number of the game value and the payout number (including addition to credits; the same applies hereinafter), and the minimum value is "0". A first difference number counter (difference number counter) for storing the value
In the second control means (sub-control board 80), a second difference number counter (sub-difference number counter) for storing the cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the bet number of the game value and the payout number,
At the end of the advantageous period, the first difference number counter may be cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52) and the second difference number counter may not be cleared.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section, so that the rule of initializing the information on the advantageous section can be observed. Further, the second difference number counter may not be cleared, and in that case, when the next notification game state is started, it is possible to take over the difference number in the previous notification game state.

13. Original invention 13
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 13 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine including a counter that counts the number of differences in the notification game state.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine having a counter for counting the difference in AT is known (for example, see JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in the conventional gaming machine, how to count (update) the number of differences during replay winning has not been sufficiently examined.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the difference number updating process at the time of replay winning.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42),
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed,
A difference number counter that stores a value that is a cumulative value of the difference number indicating the difference between the bet number of the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits. The same applies hereinafter), with the minimum value being “0”.
With an advantageous zone counter (advantageous zone clear counter) that counts the number of games in the advantageous zone,
1. At least in the game in which the small winning combination has been won, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is judged whether or not the value of the advantageous zone counter is a value satisfying the condition for ending the advantageous zone ( 51 or 52, step S424),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval counter is a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is determined without determining the value of the difference number counter (without executing the process of step S434). Enable processing for ending (step S435),
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous zone counter does not satisfy the condition for ending the advantageous zone (when “No” in step S424), the difference number counter is updated (steps S428 and W429). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (step S434), and when it is determined that the value satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (“Yes” in step S434). In the case of “)”, the processing for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed,
2. In the game that wins the replay, after all reels have stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous zone counter is a value that satisfies the termination condition of the advantageous zone (FIG. 51). Alternatively, in FIG. 52, step S424),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous zone counter is a value that satisfies the termination condition of the advantageous zone (when “Yes” in step S424), the value of the difference counter is not determined (step S434). A process (step S435) for ending the advantageous interval is made executable without executing the process,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous zone counter does not satisfy the condition for ending the advantageous zone (“No” in step S424), the difference number counter is updated without executing the difference number counter. Is determined to be a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, if step S426 is “Yes”, the process proceeds to step S434), and the value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. When it is determined that the value is “0” (when “Yes” in step S434), the process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, in the game won in the replay, the difference number counter is updated regardless of whether the value of the advantageous section counter is a value satisfying the condition for ending the advantageous section. Since it is not executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the update processing of the difference number in the game that is won in the replay. Further, it is possible to speed up the program processing.

14. Original invention 14
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a process related to an instruction function in a predetermined prescribed number.
Conventionally, a game machine having an instruction function has been known (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
However, in the conventional gaming machine, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently studied.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately execute the processing relating to the instruction function and the processing relating to the advantageous section in accordance with the specified number.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Original Invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of executing an instruction function for notifying the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42),
An advantageous section that can execute the information game state,
An advantageous zone counter (advantageous zone clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable relating to the advantageous zone,
An information game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number counter) for counting a specific variable related to the information game state (for example, the number of games or a difference number),
At least a first specified number (specified number “3”) or a second specified number (specified number “2”) of game value can be input,
In the game in the advantageous section (AT), in the game started on the basis of the first specified number being input, it is possible to execute the process related to the instruction function (for example, the notification of the correct push order) (in FIG. 48). , "Yes" at step S382), and the process started based on the second specified number being input, the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed ("No" at step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the information game state, in the game started on the basis of the first specified number being input, the update of the advantageous zone counter can be executed (step S422 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the information game. The counter can be updated (step S333 in FIG. 43),
In the information game state, in the game started on the basis of the second specified number being input, the update of the advantageous zone counter can be executed (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the information game counter Update cannot be executed (“No” in step S332 in FIG. 43)
It is characterized by

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section counter can be updated with either the first prescribed number of games or the second prescribed number of games, so that the advantageous section can be optimized. ..
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter in the second specified number of games in which the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed, the execution of the processing related to the instruction function and the update of the notification game counter can be consistent. it can.

15. Original invention 15
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 15 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine having a signal line for starting.
It has been conventionally known to use a harness composed of a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) when electrically connecting control boards of a gaming machine. Then, as one of the signal lines, there is a signal line related to starting.
In the prior art, since the signal related to the start is used for the lottery, it is necessary to suppress the goto action on the signal line related to the start.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to make it difficult to identify the signal line related to the start and suppress the goto action.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 15 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (21st embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) including a control board (main control boards 50, 530),
A plurality of signal lines (lead lines) electrically connected to the control board,
As the plurality of signal lines, at least a first signal line, a second signal line, and a third signal line,
The first signal line is a signal line for starting a game (for example, the lead wire of harness D in FIG. 111),
Both the second signal line (for example, the 8th lead wire of the harness D in FIG. 111) and the third signal line (for example, the 3rd lead wire of the harness D in FIG. 111), It is a signal line different from the signal line regarding the start of the game,
The first signal line and the second signal line have substantially the same diameter,
The first signal line and the third signal line have different diameters.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 15 According to the initial invention, it is possible to make it difficult to specify which signal line is related to the start. As a result, it is possible to suppress the goto action on the signal line related to the start.

16. Original invention 16
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 16 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of outputting a setting change end sound.
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values is known.
In the prior art, for example, the setting change process ends when the setting key is turned off, and it is not possible to easily grasp the timing when the setting change process ends from the outside.
Therefore, when the setting change processing is completed, it is possible to give a notification to that effect.
However, when the game is started immediately after the setting change process is finished, if the notification that the setting change process is finished is made, the notification that the setting change process is finished is the same as the notification that is output in the game. There is a possibility that they will be output (overlapping) at the same time, and it may be difficult to understand the important notifications that are output in the game.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to appropriately output an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

The original invention (19th embodiment) is
A gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) capable of changing the degree of advantage for a player,
Specific operation detection means for detecting that a specific operation has been performed in order to control either the setting change state in which the advantage can be changed or the normal state in which the advantage cannot be changed and a game can be started (Setting key switches 152, 535),
With speakers (22, 542)
In the setting change state, when the condition for shifting to the normal state is satisfied, the speaker can output an end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended during time T1 (“T01” in FIG. 96). And
A game start condition (in the case of the slot machine 10, a specified number of bets have been bet and the start switch 41 has been operated. In the case of the Pachinko game machine 500, a game ball has entered the starting opening 532). In one satisfied game, it is possible to end the game at time T2 (“T12” or “T22” in FIG. 96),
In the setting change state, at least time T3 (“T11” or “T12” in FIG. 96) is required until the start condition of the game is satisfied after shifting to the normal state,
When one game is started immediately after shifting from the setting change state to the normal state, the following formula is established: T1<T2+T3 (T1>0, T2>0, T3>0 )
It is characterized by

(C) Effect of Original Invention 16 According to the original invention, even when the game is started at the same time when the setting change state is finished, an end sound indicating that the setting change state is finished is given before the game is finished. Since the output ends, the effect output at the end of the game does not overlap with the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect output at the end of the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

17. Original invention 17
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 17 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine in which the light emission of the light emitting means mounted on the lamp board can be seen clearly.
It is known that a conventional gaming machine includes a lamp board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and a lamp cover that covers the lamp board, and the lamp cover is formed using a translucent milky white resin material. (For example, JP-A-2015-196069).
Here, the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate is generally formed in green or black.
However, when the lamp cover is formed using a translucent milky white resin material, when the LED is turned off, the color of the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate may be transparent and visible, and when the LED emits light, There is a possibility that it may appear as a color different from the set color.
Further, even when the lamp cover is made of a colorless and translucent resin material, the color of the LED mounting surface of the lamp substrate can be seen through when the LED is turned off, and is set when the LED emits light. There is a possibility that it may appear as a different color from the color and appear.
Initially, the problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent the appearance of the LED from being deteriorated even when the mounting surface of the LED on the lamp substrate can be seen through the lamp cover, and to make the color development when the LED emits light visible. is there.

(B) Means for solving the problem of invention 17 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) provided with an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
There is a lamp cover (for example, upper frame lamp cover 613) that covers the lamp substrate (for example, upper frame right side lamp substrate 611) on which the light emitting means (LEDs 641a to 64d) are mounted,
At least a part of the lamp cover is configured to be visible in substantially the same color or a similar color when the light emitting means emits light in one color,
At least a part of a mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate is configured to be substantially white.

(C) Effect of Original Invention 17 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate is formed substantially white, the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate is passed through the lamp cover when the light emitting means is turned off. Even if you can see through, you can make it look nice.
Further, when the light emitting means emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting means can be made to appear brighter and the light emitting means can be mounted. Since the surface is configured to be substantially white, it is possible to allow the light emitting means to emit light in the color set and to be viewed.

18. Original invention 18
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 18 Same as the problem of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 18 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp portion (for example, right frame lamp portion 620) on an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp board (for example, a right frame lamp board 621) on which the light emitting elements (LEDs 641e to k) are mounted,
A lamp cover (for example, a right frame lamp cover 622) which is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element,
A board mounting portion (for example, a right frame board mounting portion 653) to which the lamp board is mounted,
A cover mounting portion (for example, a right frame cover mounting portion 654) to which the lamp cover is mounted,
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is white.
The lamp substrate has a substantially rectangular shape,
The width in the lateral direction of the lamp board (“W1” in FIG. 116) is substantially the same as the width in the lateral direction of the board mounting portion (“W2” in FIG. 124). And

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 18 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is passed through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the decorative lamp section from becoming unattractive.
Further, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to shine brighter and the light emitting element can be mounted. Since the surface is composed of white, the light emitting element can be made to emit light in the color set and can be seen.
Further, since the width of the lamp board in the lateral direction and the width of the board mounting portion in the lateral direction are substantially the same, the board mounting portion can be covered with the lamp substrate, and the light emitting element mounting on the lamp substrate is possible. Since the surface can function as a reflector, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be seen clearly.

19. Original invention 19
(A) Problem to be solved by Initial Invention 19 Same as the problem of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 19 at the beginning (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) having an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505) and a decorative lamp portion (for example, upper frame lamp portion 610),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 64d) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element,
A board mounting portion (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651) to which the lamp board is mounted;
A cover mounting portion to which the lamp cover is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652),
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is white.
A fixture (for example, a screw 683a) used when fixing the lamp substrate to the substrate mounting portion has an exposed portion (screw head 689) exposed to the mounting surface side,
The height of the exposed portion from the mounting surface (“T1” in FIG. 123) is greater than the height of the light emitting element from the mounting surface (“T2” in FIG. 123),
The exposed portion is subjected to a surface treatment (for example, silver plating) that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting element.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 19 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the decorative lamp section from becoming unattractive.
Further, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to shine brighter and the light emitting element can be mounted. Since the surface is composed of white, the light emitting element can be made to emit light in the color set and can be seen.
Furthermore, the height of the exposed portion from the light emitting element mounting surface is set to be larger than the height of the light emitting element from the light emitting element mounting surface, and by subjecting the exposed portion to a surface treatment that reflects light emitted from the light emitting element, Since the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the exposed portion, the light emitted from the light emitting element can be seen clearly.

20. Original invention 20
(A) Problem to be solved by Initial Invention 20 Same as the problem of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 20 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) having an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505) and a decorative lamp portion (for example, upper frame lamp portion 610),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to 64d) are mounted;
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element,
A board mounting portion (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651) to which the lamp board is mounted;
A cover mounting portion to which the lamp cover is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652),
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is white.
The lamp board has a positioning hole (positioning hole 685a) into which a positioning member (positioning boss 682a) is inserted when the lamp board is positioned at a predetermined position of the board mounting portion. A fixing hole (fixing hole 686a) used when fixing to the mounting portion is provided in close proximity,
The opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are set to be different,
The positioning member has a protrusion (a protrusion 687) that protrudes toward the mounting surface when the lamp substrate is positioned at the predetermined position of the substrate mounting portion,
The protrusion is formed in a convex curved shape.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 20 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is passed through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the decorative lamp section from becoming unattractive.
Further, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to shine brighter and the light emitting element can be mounted. Since the surface is composed of white, the light emitting element can be made to emit light in the color set and can be seen.
Furthermore, since the opening area of the positioning hole and the opening area of the fixing hole are made different, it is necessary not to mistake the positioning hole and the fixing hole when fixing the lamp board to the board mounting portion. Therefore, the assembling work can be smoothly performed.
Furthermore, since the protruding portion of the positioning member is formed in a convex curved surface shape, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the convex curved surface protruding portion, so that the light emitted from the light emitting element can be seen clearly. ..

21. Original invention 21
(A) Problem to be solved by Initial Invention 21 Same as the problem of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 21 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) having a decorative lamp portion (for example, right frame lamp portion 620) on an openable/closable front door (for example, glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp board (for example, a right frame lamp board 621) on which the light emitting elements (LEDs 641e to k) are mounted,
A lamp cover (for example, a right frame lamp cover 622) which is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element,
A board mounting portion (for example, a right frame board mounting portion 653) to which the lamp board is mounted,
A cover mounting portion (for example, a right frame cover mounting portion 654) to which the lamp cover is mounted,
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is white.
The lamp cover has a lens portion (lens portion 670) formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 21 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is passed through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the decorative lamp section from becoming unattractive.
Further, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to shine brighter and the light emitting element can be mounted. Since the surface is composed of white, the light emitting element can be made to emit light in the color set and can be seen.
Further, the shape of the lens portion is formed by connecting curved surfaces having different curvatures but the same thickness, so that the light emitted from the light emitting element is reduced while reducing the manufacturing cost of the mold for molding the lamp cover. Can be made to look better by the lens part.

22. Original invention 22
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 22 Same as the problem of the first invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 22 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) having an openable/closable front door (for example, a glass door 505) and a decorative lamp section (for example, an upper frame lamp section 610 and a right frame lamp section 620),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and a right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to k) are mounted,
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653);
A cover mounting portion to which the lamp cover is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654),
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is white.
The decorative lamp section,
An upper lamp portion (upper frame lamp portion 610) arranged on the upper portion of the front door,
And a side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) arranged on a side portion of the front door,
The upper lamp portion and the side lamp portion each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby providing a plurality of the lamp substrates,
When a specific lottery result (big hit in the big hit lottery) is reached, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the lamp boards among the plurality of lamp boards are arranged in a pattern corresponding to the particular lottery result. It is characterized by controlling to emit light (change each output value of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) in a predetermined pattern within a range of “0” to “255”).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 22 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is passed through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the decorative lamp section from becoming unattractive.
Further, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to shine brighter and the light emitting element can be mounted. Since the surface is composed of white, the light emitting element can be made to emit light in the color set and can be seen.
Further, by causing the light emitting element to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the specific lottery result, it is possible to notify the player of the specific lottery result by using clear light.

23. Original invention 23
(A) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 23 Same as the problem of Original Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 23 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) including a decorative lamp section (for example, an upper frame lamp section 610 and a right frame lamp section 620) on an openable/closable front door (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and a right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to k) are mounted,
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653);
A cover mounting portion to which the lamp cover is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654),
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is white.
The decorative lamp section,
An upper lamp portion (upper frame lamp portion 610) arranged on the upper portion of the front door,
And a side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) arranged on a side portion of the front door,
The upper lamp portion and the side lamp portion each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby providing a plurality of the lamp substrates,
When the opening of the front door is detected or when a specific lottery result (big hit in the big hit lottery) is reached, the light emitting element mounted on one or more of the lamp boards among the plurality of lamp boards, It is characterized in that it is controlled to emit at least white light.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 23 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is passed through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the decorative lamp section from becoming unattractive.
Further, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to shine brighter and the light emitting element can be mounted. Since the surface is composed of white, the light emitting element can be made to emit light in the color set and can be seen.
Further, when the opening of the front door is detected or when a specific lottery result is obtained, the light-emitting element is caused to emit white light, and the fact that the front door is opened or the specific lottery result is achieved is displayed with a clean light. You can notify the clerk or player in the hall.

24. Original invention 24
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 24 Same as the problem of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 24 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) having an openable/closable front door (for example, a glass door 505) and a decorative lamp section (for example, an upper frame lamp section 610 and a right frame lamp section 620),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and a right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to k) are mounted,
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653);
A cover mounting portion to which the lamp cover is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654),
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is white.
The decorative lamp section,
An upper lamp part (upper frame lamp part 610) arranged on the upper part of the front door,
A side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) arranged on a side portion of the front door,
The upper lamp portion and the side lamp portion each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby providing a plurality of the lamp substrates.
When the setting change state in which the degree of advantage for the player can be changed or the state in which the degree of advantage cannot be changed but can be confirmed is confirmed, it is mounted on one or more of the lamp boards. The light emitting element is controlled to emit at least white light.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 24 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is passed through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the decorative lamp section from becoming unattractive.
Further, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to shine brighter and the light emitting element can be mounted. Since the surface is composed of white, the light emitting element can be made to emit light in the color set and can be seen.
Further, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, the light is emitted from the light emitting element in white, and the fact that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled can be displayed to the clerk in the hall with a clean light. I can inform you.

25. Original invention 25
(A) Problem to be solved by Initial Invention 25 Same as the problem of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 25 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) including a decorative lamp section (for example, an upper frame lamp section 610 and a right frame lamp section 620) on an openable/closable front door (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and a right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to k) are mounted,
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653);
A cover mounting portion to which the lamp cover is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654),
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is white.
The decorative lamp section,
An upper lamp portion (upper frame lamp portion 610) arranged on the upper portion of the front door,
And a side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) arranged on a side portion of the front door,
The upper lamp portion and the side lamp portion each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby providing a plurality of the lamp substrates,
When returning from power-off, the light emitting elements mounted on one or more of the plurality of lamp boards are controlled to emit at least white light.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 25 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is passed through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the decorative lamp section from becoming unattractive.
Further, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to shine brighter and the light emitting element can be mounted. Since the surface is composed of white, the light emitting element can be made to emit light in the color set and can be seen.
Further, when the power is turned off, the light emitting element is caused to emit white light so that the clerk in the hall can be informed by the clean light that the power is being returned.

26. Original invention 26
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 26 Same as the problem of Initial Invention 17.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the first invention 26 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 500) including a decorative lamp section (for example, an upper frame lamp section 610 and a right frame lamp section 620) on an openable/closable front door (for example, a glass door 505),
The decorative lamp section,
A lamp board (for example, an upper frame right lamp board 611 and a right frame lamp board 621) on which light emitting elements (LEDs 641a to k) are mounted,
A lamp cover (for example, an upper frame lamp cover 613 and a right frame lamp cover 622) that is irradiated with light emitted from the light emitting element;
A board mounting portion to which the lamp board is mounted (for example, an upper frame right board mounting portion 651 and a right frame board mounting portion 653);
A cover mounting portion to which the lamp cover is mounted (for example, an upper frame right side cover mounting portion 652 and a right frame cover mounting portion 654),
The lamp cover has a colorless or white transparent portion,
The mounting surface of the light-emitting element on the lamp substrate is white.
The decorative lamp section,
An upper lamp portion (upper frame lamp portion 610) arranged on the upper portion of the front door,
And a side lamp portion (right frame lamp portion 620) arranged on a side portion of the front door,
The upper lamp portion and the side lamp portion each include the lamp substrate (upper frame right lamp substrate 611, right frame lamp substrate 621), thereby providing a plurality of the lamp substrates,
It is mounted on at least one of the lamp boards (right frame lamp board 621) of the plurality of lamp boards during a predetermined game which is not won by the lottery means (during a game which is misaligned in the jackpot drawing). The light emitting elements (LEDs 641e to k) are controlled to emit light,
The average value of the time for which the light-emitting element emits light during the predetermined game is the average of the time for which other lamps (red LED mounted on the board included in the decoration on the game board 504) are turned on during the predetermined game. It is characterized by being set longer than the value.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 26 According to the initial invention, since the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate is white, the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate passes through the lamp cover when the light emitting element is turned off. Even if it can be seen through, it is possible to prevent the decorative lamp section from becoming unattractive.
Further, when the light emitting element emits light, the light emitted from the light emitting element is reflected by the mounting surface of the light emitting element on the lamp substrate, so that the light emitting element can be made to shine brighter and the light emitting element can be mounted. Since the surface is composed of white, the light emitting element can be made to emit light in the color set and can be seen.
Further, even in a predetermined game that is not won by the lottery means, it is possible to show the player a beautiful effect using the light emitting element.

10 slot machines (game machines)
11 Power Switch 12 Front Door 12a Second Block 12b Third Block 12c Control Panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom Plate 13b Back Plate 13c First Block 14 Pattern Display 14a Reel Frame 15 Medal Dispenser 16 Medal Outlet 17 Door Switch 21 Production lamp (decorative lamp section)
22 speaker 23 image display device 24 operation button 25 operation instruction lamp 26 upper frame lamp section 26a upper frame lamp board 26b upper frame lamp cover 27 right frame lamp section 27a right frame lamp board 27b right frame lamp cover 28 left frame lamp section 28a left Frame lamp board 28b Left frame lamp cover 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Discharge sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Adjustment switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal insertion slot 47a Medal guard part 47b Medal rest part 48 Shoot passage 49 Shoot sensor 50 Main control board ( Main control means)
50a Screw hole 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 board case (main board case)
57 Upper cover 57a Caulking part 57b Gate mark 57c Recessed part 57d Protrusion 57e Projection part 58 Lower cover 58a Caulking part 58b Gate mark 58c Boss 61 Hand lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Pushing order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 reel control means 66 winning determination means 67 payout means 71 control command transmission means 73 set value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 display board 76 credit number display LED
77 Advantageous zone display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1-bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3-bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Input LED
79f Replay display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
86 Electrolytic Capacitor 87 Sub Substrate Case 91 Production Output Control Unit 101 Hopper Disk 102 Holding Unit 103 Ejection Unit 110 Reel Base 120 Reel Control Board 121 Reel Substrate Case 130 Passage Forming Member 131 Upper Medal Inlet 132 Return Medal Passage 133 Lower Medal Inlet Inlet 134 Payout medal passage 151 Setting key insertion port 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 500 Pachinko game machine 501 Outer frame 502 Front frame 503 Hinge mechanism 504 Game board 505 Glass door (glass frame)
506 Upper plate 507 Lower plate 508 Firing handle 510 Power supply board 511 Power switch 512 Firing board 513 Firing device 520 Discharge control board 521 Key insertion port 522 Door opening switch 523 Frame opening switch 524 Dispensing device 525 External terminal board 530 Main control board 530a hole 531 Special symbol display device 532 Starting port 533 Starting port switch 534 Setting key insertion port 535 Setting key switch 536 Setting change (reset) switch 537 Setting value display LED
538 Management information display LED (performance display monitor)
539a to 539h connector 539b' to 539h' connector leg 540 sub control board 541 effect lamp (decorative lamp section)
542 speaker 543 image display device 550 substrate case 560 upper case 560a lower edge 561 cover 562 caulking part 563a to 563g opening 564 boss 565 side wall 570 lower case 570a outer edge 571 side wall 572 caulking part B to H harness 610 upper frame lamp part Right frame lamp board 612 Upper frame left lamp board 613 Upper frame lamp cover 620 Right frame lamp section 621 Right frame lamp board 622 Right frame lamp cover 630 Left frame lamp section 631 Left frame lamp board 632 Left frame lamp cover 641a to k LED ( Full color LED)
642a-c connector 650 right base member 651 upper frame right board mounting portion 652 upper frame right cover mounting portion 653 right frame substrate mounting portion 654 right frame cover mounting portion 661a-e substrate supporting rib 662a-b cover fitting groove 670 lens portion 681 Screwing boss 682a-c Positioning boss 683a-c Screw 684 Screw hole 685a-b Positioning hole 686a-b Fixing hole 687 Projection portion 688 Screw shaft 689 Screw head

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine with a front door that can be opened and closed,
At a predetermined position of the front door, there is a predetermined lamp board on which a predetermined light emitting means is mounted,
The mounting surface of the predetermined light emitting means on the predetermined lamp substrate is configured so that at least a part thereof is substantially white,
The predetermined lamp board is positioned at the predetermined position by a positioning boss provided at the predetermined position and a positioning hole provided at the predetermined lamp board, and at the predetermined position by a predetermined fixing member. Fixed,
The positioning boss has a positioning boss protrusion that protrudes from the mounting surface of the predetermined lamp board when the predetermined lamp board is positioned at the predetermined position,
The predetermined fixing member is a fixing member that projects from the mounting surface of the predetermined lamp substrate when the predetermined lamp substrate is positioned at the predetermined position and is fixed at the predetermined position by the predetermined fixing member. Has a member protrusion,
The positioning boss protrusion has a convex dome shape at the tip,
The fixing member protruding portion has a curved surface shape, and is further plated with a substantially silver color ,
The height of the fixing member protrusion is higher than the height of the predetermined light emitting means on the mounting surface of the predetermined lamp substrate .